SPI ConfigureUsersGuide

I-Configure
User's Guide
Version 2012 R1
February 2012/May 2012
DISO-PE-200007C-UPDATED
Copyright
Copyright 1991-2012 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement;
contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade
secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from
Intergraph Corporation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of
the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
P.O. Box 240000
Huntsville, AL 35813
Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless
the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed
license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use
of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives
licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement
and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for
resale or redistribution.
Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software
or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this
document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes
the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the
terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools,
ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, SupportModeler, COADE, CAESAR II, CADWorx, PV Elite,
CODECALC, and TANK are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United
States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other brands
and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 11
What's New In I-Configure ........................................................................................................................ 13
I-Configure.................................................................................................................................................. 15
Exploring the I-Configure Interface ......................................................................................................... 17
Toolbar .................................................................................................................................................. 19
Project View Panel ................................................................................................................................ 20
Properties Panel.................................................................................................................................... 21
Search by property ......................................................................................................................... 22
Search by option switch.................................................................................................................. 22
Search by file section ..................................................................................................................... 23
Find Dialog Box .............................................................................................................................. 24
Overview Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 25
Detail Panel ........................................................................................................................................... 26
Status Bar ............................................................................................................................................. 27
Getting Started ........................................................................................................................................... 29
Tutorial Project ...................................................................................................................................... 30
Configuration Files ................................................................................................................................ 30
CreateTutorial_<Application Name>.xml........................................................................................ 31
IsoDirList.xml .................................................................................................................................. 31
Project_Data.xml ............................................................................................................................ 31
ProjectConfig_<Application Name>.xml ......................................................................................... 31
ProjectList.xml ................................................................................................................................ 34
ProjectPipeline.xml ......................................................................................................................... 34
<Style Name>.xml .......................................................................................................................... 34
Sample Files ......................................................................................................................................... 35
Options .................................................................................................................................................. 36
I-Configure Setup Tools and Wizards ..................................................................................................... 37
Drawing Setup Tool .............................................................................................................................. 37
Specify the backing sheet .............................................................................................................. 42
Define drawing margins and report layout...................................................................................... 42
Customize report settings ............................................................................................................... 44
Define drawing frame attributes ..................................................................................................... 48
Update the style .............................................................................................................................. 49
View the results .............................................................................................................................. 49
Basic Setup Page (Drawing Setup Tool) .............................................................................................. 51
Drawing Areas Page (Drawing Setup Tool) .......................................................................................... 53
Material List Page (Drawing Setup Tool) .............................................................................................. 57
Weld List Page (Drawing Setup Tool) ................................................................................................... 61
Cut List Page (Drawing Setup Tool) ..................................................................................................... 64
Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Tool) .................................................................................................. 67
Add/Remove Attributes Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 68
Welding Wizard ..................................................................................................................................... 69
I-Configure User's Guide
Contents
Change settings for a single weld type........................................................................................... 69
Show Welds and Weld Numbering Page (Welding Wizard) .......................................................... 71
Select Weld Types Page (Welding Wizard) ................................................................................... 71
Weld Type Settings Page (Welding Wizard) .................................................................................. 71
Finish Page (Welding Wizard) ........................................................................................................ 72
Dimensioning Wizard ............................................................................................................................ 73
Dimension Format Page (Dimensioning Wizard) ........................................................................... 73
Dimensioning Style Page (Dimensioning Wizard) .......................................................................... 76
Overall Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard) ...................................................................... 76
Gasket Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard) ...................................................................... 78
Elevations/Vertical Dimensions Page (Dimensioning Wizard) ....................................................... 79
Coordinates Page (Dimensioning Wizard) ..................................................................................... 80
Units Formatting Page (Dimensioning Wizard) .............................................................................. 81
Finish Page (Dimensioning Wizard) ............................................................................................... 81
Reports Wizard ..................................................................................................................................... 82
Add a report to a style .................................................................................................................... 82
Remove a report from a style ......................................................................................................... 83
Add a Report Page (Reports Wizard) ............................................................................................. 83
Report Definition Page (Reports Wizard) ....................................................................................... 83
Finish Page (Reports Wizard) ........................................................................................................ 84
Detail Sketch Manager .......................................................................................................................... 85
Configure a Detail Sketch ............................................................................................................... 91
Project Defaults and Attributes ................................................................................................................ 95
Add a new attribute ............................................................................................................................... 96
Edit an attribute ..................................................................................................................................... 97
Delete an attribute ................................................................................................................................. 98
Import PipeHeader attributes ................................................................................................................ 98
Create an attribute expression .............................................................................................................. 98
Project Defaults Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 102
Project Defaults Tab (Project Defaults Dialog Box) ..................................................................... 102
Attributes Tab (Project Defaults Dialog Box) ................................................................................ 102
Attribute Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 108
Build Expression Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 109
New Attribute Dialog Box .................................................................................................................... 109
Isometric Directories ............................................................................................................................... 113
Create a new isometric directory ........................................................................................................ 113
Connect to an isometric directory ....................................................................................................... 114
Delete an isometric directory .............................................................................................................. 114
Copy and paste an isometric directory ............................................................................................... 114
Disconnect from an isometric directory ............................................................................................... 115
Isometric Directory Object Properties ................................................................................................. 115
Isometric Projects ................................................................................................................................... 117
Isometric Project Common Tasks ....................................................................................................... 118
Create a new isometric project ..................................................................................................... 118
Define project access rights ......................................................................................................... 119
Enable an isometric project .......................................................................................................... 120
Delete an isometric project ........................................................................................................... 121
Copy and paste an isometric project ............................................................................................ 121
Contents
New Project Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 121
Enable Project Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 122
Project Access Rights Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 122
Backup Isometric Projects .................................................................................................................. 122
Create a backup of an isometric project ....................................................................................... 122
Backup Project Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 123
Import Isometric Projects .................................................................................................................... 124
Import a PipMan project ............................................................................................................... 125
Import a Spoolgen 4 project ......................................................................................................... 125
Import an I-Configure-based project............................................................................................. 125
Import an isometric project from backup ...................................................................................... 126
Import Project Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 127
Import Project from Backup Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 127
Isometric Project Object Properties .................................................................................................... 128
Name ............................................................................................................................................ 129
Path .............................................................................................................................................. 129
Source .......................................................................................................................................... 129
AppList .......................................................................................................................................... 129
AppCount ...................................................................................................................................... 130
WeldGaps ..................................................................................................................................... 130
ElbowConversion .......................................................................................................................... 131
ChangeStyleList ........................................................................................................................... 132
AccessRights ................................................................................................................................ 132
SystemXML .................................................................................................................................. 132
ProjectXML ................................................................................................................................... 132
LockedBy ...................................................................................................................................... 133
IsoDirectoryName ......................................................................................................................... 133
SystemMaterialManagerXML ....................................................................................................... 133
ProjectMaterialManagerXML ........................................................................................................ 133
SystemMaterialDataXML .............................................................................................................. 133
ProjectMaterialDataXML............................................................................................................... 133
Isometric Drawing Styles ........................................................................................................................ 135
Isometric Drawing Style Common Tasks ............................................................................................ 136
Create a new isometric drawing style ........................................................................................... 136
Select an isometric drawing style ................................................................................................. 137
View ISOGEN controls ................................................................................................................. 137
Copy and paste an isometric drawing style .................................................................................. 139
Delete an isometric drawing style ................................................................................................. 141
Save an isometric drawing style ................................................................................................... 141
Preview the drawing ..................................................................................................................... 141
New Style Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 142
Drawing Preview Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 143
Backup Isometric Style Settings ......................................................................................................... 144
Create a backup of an isometric drawing style ............................................................................ 144
Backup Style Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 144
Import and Export Style Settings ........................................................................................................ 145
Import isometric drawing style settings from file .......................................................................... 146
Import isometric drawing style settings from backup ................................................................... 146
Import an isometric drawing style fragment.................................................................................. 147
Export isometric drawing style settings ........................................................................................ 147
Export an isometric drawing style fragment ................................................................................. 147
Import Style Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 147
Contents
Import Style from Backup Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 148
Isometric Drawing Style Object Properties ......................................................................................... 149
Name ............................................................................................................................................ 150
Path .............................................................................................................................................. 150
ExportBehaviour ........................................................................................................................... 150
StyleState ..................................................................................................................................... 150
StyleType ...................................................................................................................................... 150
ProjectName ................................................................................................................................. 150
Options ......................................................................................................................................... 151
CanWrite ....................................................................................................................................... 151
CanExport ..................................................................................................................................... 151
Techniques ............................................................................................................................................... 153
Fonts in Isometric Drawings ................................................................................................................ 153
Select a font for isometric drawing output .................................................................................... 154
Define a dynamic font for isometric drawing generation .............................................................. 154
Output a bar code on the isometric drawing ....................................................................................... 157
Add the barcode font to an AutoCAD backing sheet .......................................................................... 158
Bends .................................................................................................................................................. 159
Elbows ................................................................................................................................................. 159
Weld Lists............................................................................................................................................ 159
Weld Logic .......................................................................................................................................... 160
Weld Constructions ............................................................................................................................. 162
Appendix: Isometric Drawing Style Objects ......................................................................................... 167
Collections ........................................................................................................................................... 170
Add an item to a collection ........................................................................................................... 171
Remove an item from a collection ................................................................................................ 172
Row Manipulation ......................................................................................................................... 172
Comment ...................................................................................................................................... 173
Alternative Text Object ........................................................................................................................ 174
Count ............................................................................................................................................ 174
AlternativeTexts ATexts Collection ............................................................................................... 174
Drawing Object.................................................................................................................................... 175
Visible ........................................................................................................................................... 175
Drawing.Content Object ............................................................................................................... 175
Drawing.Controls Object............................................................................................................... 185
Drawing.Definitions Object ........................................................................................................... 200
Drawing.Dimensions Object ......................................................................................................... 204
Drawing.Format Object................................................................................................................. 242
Drawing.Layers Object ................................................................................................................. 289
Drawing.DynamicFonts Object ..................................................................................................... 290
Drawing.EndConnections Object ................................................................................................. 291
Drawing.Revisions Object ............................................................................................................ 297
Drawing.Welds Object .................................................................................................................. 299
DrawingFrame Object ......................................................................................................................... 327
BottomMargin ............................................................................................................................... 327
TopMargin .................................................................................................................................... 328
LeftMargin ..................................................................................................................................... 328
RightMargin .................................................................................................................................. 328
CustomHeight ............................................................................................................................... 329
CustomWidth ................................................................................................................................ 329
Contents
DXFUnits ...................................................................................................................................... 329
ReservedAreaDrawing ................................................................................................................. 329
ReservedAreaDrawingTop ........................................................................................................... 330
ReservedAreaMatList ................................................................................................................... 330
TemplateFile ................................................................................................................................. 330
TemplateFormat ........................................................................................................................... 330
Visible ........................................................................................................................................... 331
DrawingFrame.Attributes Object .................................................................................................. 331
DrawingFrame.TableAttributes Object ......................................................................................... 338
DrawingFrame.SymbolTable Object ............................................................................................ 341
MaterialList Object .............................................................................................................................. 346
ActiveList ...................................................................................................................................... 347
BoltAccumulation .......................................................................................................................... 347
BoltDiameterUnits ......................................................................................................................... 347
BoltLengthUnits ............................................................................................................................ 348
CentrelineLengths ........................................................................................................................ 348
ComponentsWithNoItemCodesInPCF .......................................................................................... 348
Drg1of1OnSingleIsos ................................................................................................................... 348
ErectAccumulation........................................................................................................................ 349
FabAccumulation .......................................................................................................................... 349
FixedPipeAccumulation ................................................................................................................ 349
GasketAccumulation ..................................................................................................................... 349
ItemCodeLength ........................................................................................................................... 350
LinearQuantityStyle ...................................................................................................................... 350
MaterialsBySpool .......................................................................................................................... 350
MaterialListOverflow ..................................................................................................................... 350
MaterialListSplitting ...................................................................................................................... 351
OffshoreAccumulation .................................................................................................................. 351
OverflowDrawingID ....................................................................................................................... 351
SheetNumberFormat .................................................................................................................... 352
SmallxLargeNS ............................................................................................................................. 352
SpoolsMatchFull ........................................................................................................................... 352
SupportsWithMatchingNamesAccumulation ................................................................................ 352
TextFont ....................................................................................................................................... 353
Visible ........................................................................................................................................... 353
WastageArea1 .............................................................................................................................. 353
WastageArea2 .............................................................................................................................. 353
WastageArea3 .............................................................................................................................. 354
WastageArea4 .............................................................................................................................. 354
WastageArea5 .............................................................................................................................. 355
WastageArea6 .............................................................................................................................. 355
WastageArea7 .............................................................................................................................. 356
WastageArea8 .............................................................................................................................. 356
WastageArea9 .............................................................................................................................. 357
WeightsStyle ................................................................................................................................. 357
WeldAccumulation ........................................................................................................................ 357
MaterialList.FixedLayout Object ................................................................................................... 358
MaterialList.UserDefined Object ................................................................................................... 361
MaterialList.VariableLayout Object ............................................................................................... 380
MaterialList.SummaryFile Object ................................................................................................. 384
MaterialList.Transfers Object ....................................................................................................... 388
WeldList Object ................................................................................................................................... 390
ActiveList ...................................................................................................................................... 390
Contents
ExtraRPadWelds .......................................................................................................................... 390
SlipOnFlangeWelds ...................................................................................................................... 391
Visible ........................................................................................................................................... 391
YTypeWelds ................................................................................................................................. 391
TackWeldNumbers ....................................................................................................................... 392
ClampWelds ................................................................................................................................. 392
WeldList.FixedLayout Object ........................................................................................................ 392
WeldList.VariableLayout Object ................................................................................................... 393
WeldList.UserDefined Object ....................................................................................................... 394
WeldList.SummaryFile Object ...................................................................................................... 399
CutList Object...................................................................................................................................... 403
ActiveList ...................................................................................................................................... 403
IncludeAdditionalMaterial ............................................................................................................. 403
CutPieceID ................................................................................................................................... 404
CutPieceSequence ....................................................................................................................... 404
DecimalInchOutput ....................................................................................................................... 404
LengthToCL .................................................................................................................................. 404
LengthToBranchPoint ................................................................................................................... 405
OffshoreAllowance ....................................................................................................................... 405
OnShoreAllowance ....................................................................................................................... 405
ShopWeldAllowance..................................................................................................................... 405
UseWeldGapData ......................................................................................................................... 406
UseTangentData .......................................................................................................................... 406
Visible ........................................................................................................................................... 406
CutList.FixedLayout Object .......................................................................................................... 407
CutList.UserDefined Object .......................................................................................................... 407
CutList.SummaryFile Object ......................................................................................................... 412
Supplementary Object .................................................................................................................. 415
Supplementary.AdditionalData Object ......................................................................................... 416
Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms Object.................................................................................... 417
Supplementary.BendingReport Object ......................................................................................... 419
Supplementary.CentreOfGravity Object ....................................................................................... 420
Supplementary.DataFiles Object .................................................................................................. 422
Supplementary.DetailSketches Object ......................................................................................... 445
Supplementary.DwgInfoFile Object .............................................................................................. 453
Supplementary.EquipmentTrim Object ........................................................................................ 455
Supplementary.Fonts Object ........................................................................................................ 457
Supplementary.HeatTreatment Object ......................................................................................... 458
Supplementary.InstrumentSKEYS Object .................................................................................... 460
Supplementary.NeutralFile Object ............................................................................................... 461
Supplementary.PipeLineAtts Object............................................................................................. 467
Supplementary.ReferencePlanes Object ..................................................................................... 470
Supplementary.RepeatFile Object ............................................................................................... 473
Supplementary.ReportFiles Object .............................................................................................. 475
Supplementary.SiteWeldFile Object............................................................................................. 477
Supplementary.SpoolAttributes Object ........................................................................................ 480
Supplementary.SpoolInformation Object...................................................................................... 481
Supplementary.TableAttributes Object......................................................................................... 484
Supplementary.TitleTexts Object ................................................................................................. 487
Supplementary.Traceability Object .............................................................................................. 488
Supplementary.PrintedMaterialList Object ................................................................................... 492
Contents
Appendix: Alternative Text ..................................................................................................................... 495
Using Alternative Text ......................................................................................................................... 495
Examples ...................................................................................................................................... 497
Grouping of AText Listings .................................................................................................................. 498
Isometric Drawing Area ................................................................................................................ 498
Plotted Material and Cut Pipe List Heading Texts ........................................................................ 507
Specification Change Indication ................................................................................................... 513
Title Block/Drawing Frame ........................................................................................................... 513
Line Summary Area ...................................................................................................................... 515
Printed Material List ...................................................................................................................... 516
Weld Box Summary ...................................................................................................................... 516
Flat Spools and Flange Rotation .................................................................................................. 518
COMPIPE Material Control Links ................................................................................................. 519
SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display ........................................................................................ 519
Reference Plane System .............................................................................................................. 523
Specify Alternative Texts .................................................................................................................... 523
Appendix: Automated Selection of Detail Sketches Based on Component Rotation ...................... 525
Conventions used in the calculation of rotation angle ........................................................................ 525
Conventions to be used in preparation of detail sketches .................................................................. 528
Applying the conventions .................................................................................................................... 528
Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 531
Preface
This document is a user's guide for I-Configure and provides conceptual information and
procedural instructions for creating and managing the isometric directories, projects and styles
that are used by other 2D piping solutions and 3D plant design software products to generate
isometric drawings and reports using ISOGEN . The content is identical to the online Help that
is delivered as part of the I-Configure software.
Intergraph gives you permission to print as many copies of this document as you need for
non-commercial use at your company. You cannot reprint this document for resale or
redistribution outside your company.
We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at:
PPMdoc@intergraph.com.
Documentation updates for supported software versions are available from eCustomer
https://crmweb.intergraph.com.
11
Preface
12
What's New In I-Configure

The following changes have been made to I-Configure:
Version 2012 R1
In previous versions of the software, the Preview Drawing command and the Drawing
Setup wizard required that Volo View Express be installed on any workstation that was
running I-Configure. That dependency has been removed from the software.
The Drawing Setup wizard user interface has been enhanced to provide more efficient
ease of use. The wizard has also been renamed to Drawing Setup Tool. For more
information, see Drawing Setup Tool (on page 37).
Previously, the -700 records were documented as a flat list with minimal explanation. They
are now grouped by category with more detailed descriptions. For more information, see
AttributeName (on page 332) in the DrawingFrame.Attributes DFAttributes Collection. (P2
AL:10694)
The software supports backing up and restoring isometric projects and isometric style
settings. This functionality allows you to easily transfer projects and styles between sites.
(P2 AL:10228)
For more information about backing up and restoring a Project, see Backup Isometric
Projects (on page 122) and Import Isometric Projects (on page 123), respectively.
For information about backing up and restoring a Style, see Backup Isometric Style
Settings (on page 143) and Import and Export Style Settings (on page 144),
respectively.
Guidelines for creating user-specified dynamic fonts have been added to this document. For
more information, see Fonts in Isometric Drawings (on page 153).
Version 2012
The WeldDiameterCalculationMethod (on page 323) property has been added to the
Drawing.Welds object to support using cost factors to calculate weld diameter totals.
The software supports the ability to centre-justify text on the isometric drawing frame. For
more information, see Justification (on page 336). (P3 AL:9225)
The Detail Sketch Manager allows you to add parameters to detail sketches when the
drawing is generated. Each parameter has a method for calculating the value, based on the
input. For more information about supported methods, see Grid Area in Detail Sketch
Manager (on page 84). (P2 AL:10600)
Records -774, -775, -776, and -777 have been added to support the calculation and output
of welding information to be split out between piping welds and support welds on the
isometric drawing frame. For more information, see AttributeName (on page 332). (P2
AL:8940)
Added information to the Drawing.Revisions object description to clarify how it is enabled
during isometric drawing generation. For more information, see Drawing.Revisions Object
(on page 297). (P3 AL:105110)
Descriptions of the template style files delivered with the software have been added to the
documentation. For more information, see Sample Files (on page 34).
13
What's New In I-Configure
14
SECTION 1
I-Configure
I-Configure allows you to create and manage the isometric directories, projects and styles that
are used by 2D piping solutions and 3D plant design products to generate isometric drawings
and reports using ISOGEN .

ISOGEN is the industry-standard software for the automatic production of piping isometric
drawings. It is integral to most of the major 2D piping solutions products and 3D plant design
systems on the market and is used in the vast majority of process plant projects involving the
design of pipe work.
A significant factor in the success of ISOGEN is its broad range of configuration options.
Virtually everything about the piping isometric drawing from the style of dimensioning and
format of weld and part numbers to the location and layout of the material take-off is
configurable. This allows you to produce isometric drawings to your own specifications.
I-Configure has been specifically designed to simplify the customization of piping isometrics
produced by ISOGEN. It allows ISOGEN's substantial array of control switches and files to be
easily managed. Easy to learn and simple to use, I-Configure makes ISOGEN features available
to more users and allows them to configure projects quickly and efficiently.
I-Configure includes the following features:
Support for projects and styles created in Project Manager (PipMan).
Connections to network projects.
Object-based user interface for the configuration of ISOGEN control files.
Explorer type windows to navigate the available projects and styles.
Wizards to quickly set-up and configure styles.
XML files for storage of project and style information.
Built-in drawing previewer to graphically examine on-the-fly the impact of modifications
made to styles.
Password protection to avoid unauthorized alterations to projects and styles.
15
I-Configure
16
SECTION 2
Exploring the I-Configure Interface

I-Configure brings all of ISOGEN's controls together in a single application. The Main window,
which is shown in the example below, provides a unified interface to all of the ISOGEN settings.
These settings are represented as a series of style objects that have properties, which can be
defined according to your specific project requirements.
The I-Configure Main window is made up of several panels, each of which you can use to
perform specific key tasks.
1 - Menu Bar
Click the name of a menu to display the menu commands. Many menu commands have
equivalent keystrokes, such as CTRL+C for the Copy command, that you can use to quickly
perform an action.
2 - Toolbar
Toolbars are groups of icons that provide rapid access to commonly used commands. They are
an alternative to using menu items or keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see Toolbar (on
page 18).
17

3 - Project View Panel
The Project View panel displays all of the available isometric directories, isometric projects and
isometric drawing styles in a tree structure format. For more information, see Project View Panel
(on page 20).
4 - Style Objects Window

The Style Objects window is divided into two panels.
The Overview panel displays an overview of the most commonly used objects for both the
drawing and report output. For more information, see Overview Panel (on page 24).
The Detail panel displays all of the objects of the selected style in a tree view format. For
more information, see Detail Panel (on page 26).
6 - Properties Panel
The Properties panel displays the defined values for each property or the definitions for a
collection. Selecting a property and pressing F1 opens the online Help and displays detailed
information about the property. For more information, see Properties Panel (on page 20).
7 - Status Bar
The status bar contains summary information about the current project. For more information,
see Status Bar (on page 26).
18
Toolbar
The I-Configure toolbar allows quick and easy access to some of the most frequently used
commands.
New Isometric Directory - Creates a new isometric directory. For more information, see
Isometric Directories (on page 113).
New Project - Creates a new project. For more information, see Isometric Projects (on
page 117).
New Style - Creates a new style. For more information, see Isometric Drawing Styles (on
page 135).
Connect to Isometric Directory - Connects to an existing isometric directory. For more
information, see Connect to an isometric directory (on page 113).
Disconnect from Isometric Directory - Disconnects from an existing isometric
directory. For more information, see Disconnect from an isometric directory (on page
115).
Enable Project - Enables the project for application. For more information, see Enable
an isometric project (on page 120).
Save - Saves any changes that you have made to the current style XML file. For more
information, see Save an isometric drawing style (on page 141).
Copy - Copies the selected item and places it in the Copy buffer so that it can be pasted
elsewhere. You can copy isometric directories, projects, and styles.
Paste - Pastes the contents of the Copy buffer.
Delete - Deletes the selected item.
Project Defaults - Opens the Project Defaults dialog box in which you can view and
modify project defaults and attribute data. For more information, see Project Defaults and
Attributes (on page 95).
Preview Drawing - Creates an isometric drawing so that you can view the effect of the
current style settings on the isometric drawing output. For more information, see Preview
the drawing (on page 141).
Export Style - Exports the current style settings. For more information, see Export
isometric drawing style settings (on page 147).
Add to Collection - Adds definitions to the selected collection. For more information,
see Collections.
Remove from Collection - Removes definitions from the selected collection. For more
information, see Collections.
Help - Opens the online Help file. You can also press F1 to open the online Help file.
See Also
Exploring the I-Configure Interface (on page 17)
19
Project View Panel

Displays all of the available isometric directories, isometric projects, and isometric drawing
styles in a tree view format. Collectively, these items make up the project hierarchy.
Clicking the + and - boxes next to the isometric directory or project expands or collapses the tree
structure, allowing you to view the available styles and make modifications. You can use the
Project View panel to create, edit, and manage isometric directories, projects, and styles.
As you select any style in the tree view, its properties are displayed in the Properties panel.
Changing the value of each property ultimately determines the appearance of the isometric
drawings and report file content produced when using the style in other products.
I-Configure displays existing PipMan projects and styles in magenta. PipMan projects and
styles (as read directly from the drive) cannot be modified in the software, but they can be
imported.
You can also import projects and styles from other products. For more information, see
Import Isometric Projects (on page 123).
When you right-click an object in the Project View panel, the software displays a shortcut
menu that provides quick access to the Copy, Paste, and Delete commands.
See Also
Isometric Projects (on page 117)
Properties Panel (on page 20)
Detail Panel (on page 26)
Overview Panel (on page 24)
Toolbar (on page 18)
20
Properties Panel
Displays the values that are defined for each object property or the definitions of a collection. An
object contains a set of related properties. When you change the object properties that belong to
a Style, it alters the content and appearance of the isometric drawing and report file outputs that
are produced when the style is used in those products that use I-Configure.
You can display and access style objects using the Detail panel. However, you can only modify
object property values in the Properties panel. The values that object properties or collection
definitions possess, are determined by their purpose. For example, a value can be a character
or number, a filename and/or file path, an ISOGEN attribute, or some or other keyword used in
an ISOGEN input control or output report file.
Alphanumeric - Click once in the Value box, and type the alphanumeric value.
Path - Double-click in the Value box to open the Browse to File dialog box. Navigate to the
required file or folder, and click OK.
List - Double-click in the Value box, and select the required option from those available in
the list.
Pop-up list - Double-click in the Value box, and select the required option from those
available in the list.
Because of the hundreds of properties available, locating a specific property can be a daunting
task. The Find command provides a dialog box that lets you search for specific property based
on user-specified criteria. You can search for and locate properties based on a text string, option
switch, or file section. .
Some properties are read only and are set automatically by the software when other
properties are defined.
You can display a shortcut menu when you right-click an object in the Properties panel. The
shortcut menu provides quick access to the Copy, Paste, and Clear commands.
You can clear the value of a property using the Clear command on the shortcut menu.
Find Dialog Box (on page 24)

What do you want to do?
Search by property (on page 21)

Search by option switch (on page 22)
Search by file section (on page 23)
21
Search by property
1. Click Tools > Find.
The Find dialog box appears.
2. Select Property, type a text string in the Property box, and press Enter.
The software lists all the properties containing the specified text string in the Search results
list.
When you double-click a property in the Search results list, the software displays that
property in the Properties panel.
Search by option switch

2. Select Option Switch.
3. In the Option switch box, type the option switch number,
22

4. Type the position of the option switch in the Position box.
The software lists all the properties that meet the specified criteria in the Search results list.
Search by file section

2. Select File section to base the search on a specific section of an input file.
3. Select the file in the list:
When you double-click a property in the Search results list, the software displays that
property in the Properties panel.
See Also
23
Find Dialog Box

Sets options for locating properties based on user-defined criteria. You can select only one
search option.
Property - Locates the properties that match the specified text string. For example, if you type
weight, the software locates all of the property names that match the text string. Type a text
string.
Option switch and Position - Searches the option switches using a combination of number and
position. This option is useful if are familiar with the option switch structure. Type the option
switch number and position.
File section - Finds a specific section within the ISOGEN configuration files. Select MLD
(material controls), WDF (welding controls), or DDF (miscellaneous controls).
Search results - Displays a list of properties that meet the specified criteria. When you
double-click a property in the Search results list, the software displays the style property in the
Properties panel.
24
Overview Panel
The Overview panel displays a simplified overview of the key properties of a style, for both the
drawing and report output.
When you select any property from those shown, the Properties panel updates to show the
location of the property and the object to which it belongs. Correspondingly, when you select the
property in the Overview panel and click the Detail tab, the software automatically navigates to
the object that the property belongs to and displays it in the Detail panel.
Wizards Toolbar
The Wizards toolbar provides quick access to the I-Configure wizards. The toolbar also
provides quick access to the Detail Sketch Manager, which you can also access by clicking
Wizards > Detail Sketch Manager.
Drawing Setup Tool - Allows you to customize the various parts of the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Drawing Setup Tool (on page 37).
Welding Wizard - Allows you to manage the numbering, types and appearance of welds on the
isometric drawing. For more information, see Welding Wizard (on page 68).
Dimensioning Wizard - Allows you to customize the style of dimensioning used on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Dimensioning Wizard (on page 73).
Reports Wizard - Allows you to customize the various report file outputs available in I-Configure.
The reports selected apply only to the current style. For more information, see Reports Wizard (on
page 82).
Detail Sketch Manager - Allows you to place parameters on the selected detail sketch so that
correct relevant values, such as weld numbers, part number, and angles, are displayed on the
isometric drawing. For more information, see Detail Sketch Manager (on page 84).
See Also
Project View Panel (on page 20)
25
Detail Panel
The Detail panel displays all of the style objects. When you select a style in the Project View
panel, the Detail panel displays the style objects in a tree view format. The example below
shows the style objects that make up the Final-Basic Style. For more information about style
objects and their related properties, see Appendix: Isometric Drawing Style Objects (on page
167).
As in Windows Explorer, you can click

and
to expand and collapse the nodes of
the tree in order to navigate the various style objects.
When you right-click an object in the Detail panel, the software displays a shortcut menu that
provides quick access to the Copy and Paste.
See Also
26
Status Bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the I-Configure Main window and displays the
following details:
1 - Current Isometric Directory
This field updates when another Isometric directory is selected in the Project View panel.
2 - Current Project
This field updates when another project is selected in the Project View panel.
3 - Current Style
This field only shows a valid style name when a style is selected in the Project View panel.
4 - Contents of copy buffer
If the copy buffer is empty, as in after a Paste action, the field displays Empty.
See Also
Detail Panel (on page 26)
27
28
SECTION 3
Getting Started
I-Configure assembles all of ISOGEN's controls together into a single application. These are
represented in the interface as a series of objects that have properties. These properties are
what define isometric directories, projects, and styles. For example, the DrawingFrame style
object contains a set of properties that define the isometric drawing frame. Some style objects
contain other objects, called sub-objects, which serve to further break down related properties.
The WeldList style object, for example, contains four style sub-objects: FixedLayout,
VariableLayout, UserDefined, and SummaryFile. Each of these sub-objects contains related
options specific to that type of weld list.
A style object can also contain a collection of other objects known as definitions, which are a set
of identical objects. For example, the WeldList.SummaryFile style object contains a collection
of definitions called TextColumns. Each definition in the TextColumns collection defines a
single column in the Summary File output. For more information about collections, see
Collections (on page 170).
Convenient Style Wizards

You can choose from hundreds of properties to set, some of which must be set in combination
with other properties. To assist you in doing this, I-Configure features a number of wizards that
guide you step-by-step through setting particular sets of related properties.
The drawing wizard helps you configure the drawing template. This is usually a
company-standard backing sheet on which ISOGEN plots the drawing and related data such as
the material take-off, welding report, and project-related data. The drawing wizard has a
graphical interface, overlaying the location of key items onto the backing sheet.
The dimensioning wizard helps you set up the dimensioning styles used by ISOGEN. Other
wizards assist with the setup of welding controls, such as weld numbering styles and numbering
sequences, and in the creation of report files. For more information about these wizards, see
I-Configure Setup Tools and Wizards (on page 37).
Preview Mode
I-Configure allows you to quickly preview the isometric drawing output based on the current style
settings using a built-in test file. ISOGEN can be run to check the output without ever leaving the
I-Configure environment. For more information, see Preview the drawing (on page 141).
See Also
Tutorial Project (on page 30)
Configuration Files (on page 30)
Sample Files (on page 34)
Options (on page 36)
29
Getting Started
Tutorial Project
Any product that uses I-Configure, supports the installation of a sample tutorial project that you
can use to help you get started with the software. The Create Tutorial Project utility can be
used to create a sample isometric directory (SampleIsoDir) that contains a sample project. By
default, the sample project contains a complete set of sample isometric styles that are used to
determine the content and appearance of an ISOGEN drawing, as well as sample material data
and sample piping specifications.
If you alter the tutorial project in anyway, you can use the Create Tutorial Project utility
to restore its out-of-the-box default settings.
Do not use the tutorial project as a basis for production work. Subsequent
installations of the same application overwrite the tutorial project. As such, If you make changes
to the tutorial project that you need to keep, rename the SampleIsoDir folder or the project
before re-installing any software that installs and runs CreateTutorial.exe as part of its
installation, or before running Create Tutorial Project from the Start menu.
See Also
CreateTutorial_<Application Name>.xml (on page 31)
Configuration Files
I-Configure stores configuration information in a variety of XML files.
CreateTutorial_<Application Name>.xml (on page 31)
IsoDirList.xml (on page 31)
Project_Data.xml (on page 31)
ProjectConfig_<Application Name>.xml (on page 31)
ProjectList.xml (on page 34)
ProjectPipeline.xml (on page 34)
<Style Name>.xml (on page 34)
Although you can view configuration files using Internet Explorer; you must not
modify their contents.
30
Getting Started
CreateTutorial_<Application Name>.xml
Controls the creation of the tutorial project. Each product installs its own version of this file.
The CreateTutorial configuration file uses the same syntax as the ProjectConfig_<application
name>n.xml file--CopyFile and CreateFolder--but also supports the setting of project defaults to
specific values.
See Also
ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml (on page 31)
IsoDirList.xml
Contains the list of isometric directories set-up on the current machine. I-Configure creates this
configuration file %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Application Data\Alias.
Windows 2000, XP, 7 - ALLUSERSPROFILE = Documents and Settings\All Users
Windows NT - ALLUSERSPROFILE = WINNT\Profiles\All Users
See Also
Project_Data.xml
Each project folder contains a Project_Data file, which is used to store application-specific
project defaults and other project level data. For example, in the file name P1000_Data.xml,
P1000 is the name of the project.
See Also
Project Defaults and Attributes (on page 95)
ProjectConfig_<Application Name>.xml
The structure of I-Configure projects is controlled by the ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml
file configuration file. This configuration files is application-specific. That is, there is a file called
ProjectConfig_Spoolgen.xml that defines SmartPlant Spoolgen projects and another called
ProjectConfig_SPIsometrics.xml for SmartPlant Isometrics projects. In a default set, the
ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file is delivered to <Installation Folder>:\Program
Files\Common Files\Intergraph\I-Configure\Application Data folder.
Although projects are application-specific, they can be enabled for multiple applications from the
same source, if necessary. The project configuration file defines:
Any data files that must be copied to the project (or style).
Any folders that must be created.
Any mandatory styles that must be created. For example, SmartPlant Spoolgen must have a
style called SGImport and one called Spool.
Any application-specific project defaults.
31
Getting Started
When you create a new I-Configure project, you must use the Application list to specify
the associated application. The software displays a list of supported applications in the
Application list on the New Project dialog box, depending on what products are installed.
Using a User-Defined ProjectConfig_App.xml File

If a file with the name UserProjectConfig_<application name>.xml is found in the same folder as
the supplied ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file, it is used in preference to define the
project structure, style content, and so on. This allows you to create a user-specific project
configuration that is not overwritten by the next installation of I-Configure. For example, if both
UserProjectConfig_SPIsometrics.xml and ProjectConfig_SPIsometrics.xml are found in the
same folder, the software uses the former XML configuration file when you set-up a new project
for SmartPlant Isometrics.
Initial Settings
New syntax in ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file allows you to specify an initial setting
(in the form of an XML file) for any property using the following syntax:
<SetProjectProperties PROPERTY='FILENAME' />
Consider the following example:
<SetProjectProperties
WeldGaps='$APPCONFIG$\Application Data\WeldGaps_Template.xml'
ElbowConversion='$APPCONFIG$\Application
Data\ElbowConversion_Template.xml'/>
I-Configure then loads the specified property with the contents of the specified file.
See Also
Create a New Isometric Project (on page 118)
Enable an Isometric Project (on page 120)
Project Defaults Tab (Project Defaults Dialog Box) (on page 102)
32
Getting Started
Create a user template

1. Create a new isometric drawing style (on page 136) using your company-standard backing
sheet and settings.
2. Save the style XML file, and copy it to a folder designated to hold your user-defined
templates. For example, you can create a folder called CompanyTemplates or
UserTemplates.
File paths in the project/style hierarchy are automatically converted to use
$PROJECT$ or $STYLE$ instead of the actual file path. This means that the style XML files
can readily be copied between styles and do not need modification.
3. Make a copy of the ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file and save it as
UserProjectConfig_<application name>.xml.
Never modify the ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file directly
4. Using the steps below, modify the UserProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file to
reference your new template.
5. Immediately after the <AppSpecificProjectConfiguration> tag, create additional
CreateFolder and/or CopyFile commands to create and populate new folders in the project
folder.
<AppSpecificProjectConfiguration Source="Alias">

<CopyFile From="$APPCONFIG$\Application Data\ProjectPipeline.xml"
To="$PROJECT$\"/>

<CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Inputs"/>
<CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Pipes"/>
<CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Data"/>
<CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Data\Materials"/>
<CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Data\Sketches"/>
6. Between the <Optional-Styles> and </Optional-Styles> tags, delete existing <Style>
blocks to reduce the number of styles that are available when a project is created, and add
new entries, pointing to your company-specific template.
<Style Name="CoSpecific"
Template="\\server\CompanyTemplates\CoSpecific.xml" >
<CopyFile From="\\server\CompanyTemplates\CoSpecific.dwg"
To="$STYLE$\" />

<CreateFolder Name="$STYLE$\Drawings"/>
<CreateFolder Name="$STYLE$\Reports"/>
<CreateFolder Name="$STYLE$\Messages"/>
</Style>
7. Save your changes.
The ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file is updated when a new version of
I-Configure is installed (CreateTutorial.exe overwrites all tutorial project files). Creating the
UserProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file prevents any changes you make from being lost.
33
Getting Started
ProjectList.xml
Each isometric folder contains a ProjectList.xml file, which contains a list of projects and styles.
See Also
ProjectPipeline.xml
The ProjectPipeline.xml file is an application-specific configuration file that can be present in the
project folder. The ProjectPipeline.xml file contains the user-specified extensions to pipeline,
component, weld and bolt attributes that have been defined for the project.
See Also
Pipeline Attributes (on page 104)
Component Attributes (on page 106)
Weld Attributes (on page 106)
Bolt Attributes (on page 106)
<Style Name>.xml
Each style folder contains a <Style Name>.xml file, such as Final-Basic.xml or Check.xml, which
is used to store style configuration data for that isometric drawing style. To help you get started
with I-Configure, a set of template styles is delivered with the software. However, before a style
can be used by an application, the style must first be exported.
If you have not already exported the style, the application can perform this step for itself.
For list of the template styles delivered with the software, see Sample Files (on page 34).
See Also
Export Isometric Drawing Style Settings (on page 147)
Isometric Drawing Styles (on page 135)
View Isogen Controls (on page 137)
34
Getting Started
Sample Files
To help you get started, I-Configure provides sample files that you can use to help you get
started using the software.
Backing sheets - During a default installation of the software, a set of backing sheets,
commonly referred to as drawing frames, is delivered to the [Installation Drive]:\Program
Files\Common Files\Intergraph\I-Configure\Backing Sheets folder
Template files - During a default installation, a set of template styles is delivered to the
<Installation Folder>:\Program Files\Common Files\Intergraph\I-Configure\Templates folder.
The template styles are listed below,
Style Name
Style Template File
Style Description
Check
Check.xml
Designed for checking the routing of the

pipeline against the 3D model or 2D
drawing. Contains an overall dimensioning
style with minimum detailing. There is no
integral BOM material list and no external
reporting. The isometric is configured for
internal use and is not for issue.
Final-Basic
Final-Basic.xml
Designed for production release. Contains

a fully detailed representation of the
pipeline complete with Fabrication and
Erection BOM materials listing. The
Material Control File report is generated.
Final-Cut-List
Final-Cut-List.xml

pipeline, complete with Fabrication and
Erection BOM materials listing. Pipeline cut
piece references are output along with an
integral cutting list table.
Final-Erection
Final-Erection.xml

pipeline, complete with an Erection BOM
materials listing.
Final-Fab
Final-Fab.xml

pipeline, complete with a Fabrication BOM
materials listing.
Final-Weld-Box
Final-Weld-Box.xml
Designed production release. Contains a

fully detailed representation of the pipeline,
complete with a Fabrication and Erection
BOM materials listing. Pipeline welding
numbering references are output along
with an integral welding list table.
35
Getting Started
Style Name
Style Template File
Style Description
Spool
Spool.xml
Designed for release to the Fabricator.

Contains a fully detailed representation of
the separate spool sections of the pipeline,
complete with a Fabrication BOM materials
listing. Pipeline welding numbering and cut
piece references are output along with the
welding and cut list tables. The Material
Control File, Cut List, Weld Summary, and
Spool Information file reports are
generated.
Flat-Spool
Flat-Spool.xml
Designed for release to the Fabricator.

Contains a fully detailed representation of
the spool sections of the pipeline, complete
with a Fabrication BOM materials listing.
The spools are laid out in a flat orientation
to maximize the number of legs flat with
the fabrication work surface. Pipeline
welding numbering and cut piece
references are output along with the
welding and cut list tables. The Material
Control File and Weld Summary file reports
are also generated.
See Also
TemplateFile
Options
In the Options dialog box, you can specify whether the drawing units used for the project are
Metric or Imperial. Drawing units impact the text positioning of attributes and dimensional
properties, such as CharHeight, CharWidth, that are used by several I-Configure style objects.
The value that you enter for a property should be a real number. For example, if you set drawing
units to millimetres, enter 3 or 3.0 for 3mm. If you set the drawing units to inches, enter 0.125 for
1/8 inch.
Using the Options dialog box, you can also control how paths are displayed in the Project View
panel for network projects. To use UNC paths, select the Use UNC path when creating
network isometrics directories checkbox. Alternatively, particularly when you set up an
isometric project on a network server (on page 119) with long path names that can exceed the
current ISOGEN path length limitation, clear the checkbox to display the path using a mapped
drive.
To access the Options dialog box, click Tools > Options.
36
SECTION 4
I-Configure Setup Tools and Wizards

To customize and define isometric drawing output, you can set hundreds of properties, some of
which must be set in combination with other properties. To assist you, I-Configure features a
number of tools and wizards that guide you step-by-step through setting particular sets of
related properties.
The Drawing Setup Tool (on page 37) helps you configure the drawing template. This is usually
a company standard backing sheet on which ISOGEN plots the drawing and related data such
as the material take-off, welding report, and project-related data. The drawing setup wizard has
a graphical interface, overlaying the location of key items onto the backing sheet.
The Dimensioning wizard (on page 73) helps you set up the dimensioning styles used by
ISOGEN. Other wizards include the Welding wizard (on page 68), which assists with the setup
of welding controls such as weld numbering styles and numbering sequences, and the Reports
wizard (on page 82), which assists in the creation of reports.
Another useful tool is the Detail Sketch Manager (on page 84), which configures detail sketches
for isometric drawing output.
You can access these tools and wizards using the Wizards menu or the Wizards toolbar on the
Overview panel.
Drawing Setup Tool

Customizes the content and format of the isometric drawing for the selected isometric
drawing style. If the default settings for a specific drawing style are not sufficient for the drawings
you want to generate, you can use the Drawing Setup Tool to modify those settings. For
example, you can specify a company-standard backing sheet rather than using one of the
templates delivered with the software. You can graphically define the position of the drawing
area on the backing sheet and specify which user-defined reports, if any, you want ISOGEN to
output on the drawing. You can also use the tool to define the attributes that display on the
drawing frame. The options that you define in the tool can then be saved to the current isometric
drawing style so that they can be applied to the generated drawings.
The Drawing Setup Tool consists of a series of tabbed pages, each of which contains a set of
options and properties that are specific to a particular aspect of the drawing setup. The pages
listed below appear by default for each isometric drawing style.
Basic Setup
Drawing Areas
Attributes
37

If a user-defined Material List, Weld List, or Cut List report is currently associated with the
selected isometric drawing style, or if you choose to add one of those reports during the
Drawing Setup Tool process, a tabbed page specific to that report type is automatically
displayed so that you can define those settings as well. The example below shows the complete
set of tabbed pages that can display in the tool.
The above example also shows the vertical and horizontal toolbars that display in the tool. The
commands on these toolbars provide options for navigating through the tool and for
manipulating the view of the backing sheet. For example, you can adjust the view to display the
entire backing sheet, or you can focus on a specific area, such as the drawing frame. You can
also increase and decrease the viewing area. Decreasing causes everything within the window
to appear larger, while increasing causes everything within the window to appear smaller.
Toolbar commands are also available that allow you to control the content and layout of the
user-defined reports and the attributes that are plotted in the title block. The table below lists the
toolbar commands and provides a description for each.
Zoom In/Out - Increases or decreases the display size of the drawing template. You can
zoom in to get a closer view of an area or zoom out to view more of the drawing template at
a reduced size. Click the left mouse button and drag the pointer upward in the window to
increase the view of an object as though you were moving closer to it. Drag the pointer
downward in the window to reduce the view as though you are moving further away from
the object.
Zoom Window- Increases the view magnification of an area in the drawing template that
you define by creating a fence.
Zoom to Fit - Displays the entire contents of the drawing template in the window.
Pan - Repositions the drawing template in the display window so that you can view another
section of the template without changing the view magnification.
Add / Remove Attributes - Opens the Add/Remove Attributes dialog box (on page 68).
This dialog box allows you to specify the attributes that are available in the Attribute list in
the Attributes Grid window. The command is available only when the Attributes page is
active.
Add Column - Inserts a column to the selected report so that an additional attribute can be
plotted in the report. This command is available only when the Material List, Weld List, or
Cut List page is active.
Delete Column - Removes the selected column of component attribute data from the
plotted report. This command is available only when you select a Column category label on
the Material List, Weld List, or Cut List page.
38

Zoom to List Attributes - Zooms in on the selected attribute. Each time you click Zoom to
List Attributes
, the view zooms to the selected attribute in the title block of the drawing
frame or on the reports.
Previous Page - Returns to the previous page of the tool.
Next Page - Proceeds to the next page of the tool.
Help - Opens the on-line documentation delivered with the software and displays
information about the tool.
Exit - Closes the tool. If you have not saved your changes, the software prompts you to do
so.
Save - Writes the options and parameters that you have defined to the current style.
Cancel - Undoes the options and parameters that you have defined.
The four graphic control commands on the vertical toolbar (Zoom In/Out
, Zoom
Window
, Zoom to Fit , and Pan
) can be used any time while running the tool. The
availability of the remaining vertical toolbar commands is determined by the active page.
You can navigate back and forth sequentially through the pages using Previous Page
and Next Page
on the horizontal toolbar. Alternatively, click the tab to go directly to a
specific page.
Moving and Resizing Windows

The Drawing Areas, Material List, Cut List, Weld List, and Attributes Grid windows in the
Drawing Setup Tool work slightly differently than windows in other applications. These
windows can be displayed, hidden, docked, maximized, tabbed, or made to float.
The following tips will help you manage windows effectively. As you are moving windows,
remember that it is the placement of the cursor, not the window, that indicates where you are
placing the window you are dragging. Look for the blue shadow indicator box that shows you
where the window will be placed when you release the mouse button.
To automatically hide a window
1. Click
in the top right corner of a docked window. The window is placed vertically on the
application border on the side to which it was docked.
2. Move your cursor over the window name on the border to display the window, temporarily,
where it was previously displayed. As you move your cursor away, the window automatically
hides again.
The following illustration shows a normal view of the Drawing Areas window and a view with
the window placed on the application border.
39

To turn off Auto-Hide mode
1. Place your cursor on the window name to show the hidden window.
2. When the window appears, click the
button to place it where it was previously docked.
To undock a window
Double-click the title bar of a docked window to undock it and display it as a floating window.
To maximize a window
Double-click a floating, undocked window to dock it against the top border of the software
window. This action maximizes the window as much as possible considering the placement
of other tool and list view windows.
If windows are already docked along the top border of the software and there is no
open space along the border, then you cannot maximize another window. As long as some
portion of the top border does not have a window docked against it, you can minimize a new
window, and the software will place it in that open space.
To dock a floating window
Click and drag the title bar of the floating window to dock it. As you begin to drag a docking
window, it displays as shown in the example below.
40

Drag the window over one of the
icons. Each icon docks the window in a different
location - top, bottom, left or right. As the cursor passes over an icon, a blue box displays,
showing you how the docked window will appear. The example below illustrates the
relationship between the icon and docking location. The shaded blue box provides a preview
of how the docked window will appear.
Specify the backing sheet (on page 41)

Define drawing margins and report layout (on page 42)
Customize report settings (on page 44)
Define drawing frame attributes (on page 48)
Update the style (on page 49)
View the results (on page 49)
41
Specify the backing sheet

1. Select an isometric drawing style in the Project View panel.
2. Click Drawing Setup Tool
on the Wizards toolbar. Alternatively, click Wizards >
Drawing Setup Tool.
The Drawing Setup Tool appears.
3. On the Basic Setup page, click Browse
want to use.
, and navigate to the backing sheet that you
A large selection of pre-formatted backing sheets is delivered with the software to the
[Installation Drive]:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Intergraph\I-Configure\Backing
Sheets folder.
4. Select the required drawing output format. The default setting is Smart DWG (DWG).
5. Set the required drawing size. If you select Custom, you must enter values for Width and
Height.
6. Under Reports, specify the reports that you want ISOGEN to plot on the isometric drawing.
If a user-defined material list is to be plotted, you must specify the required number of
sections. By default, two sections are output on the material list.
7. Click Save
Define drawing margins and report layout

You can customize the left, right, top, and bottom margins of the drawing area, either
interactively with the mouse or by typing new values in the Drawing Areas window. Likewise,
you can use either method to set the start positions of where ISOGEN plots the the material,
weld, and cut lists on the isometric drawing.
Set Drawing Margins Graphically

1. On the Drawing Areas page, place the cursor on the grab handle for the margin you want
to change.
The cursor updates from a pointer to a two-headed arrow cross, indicating the direction in
which you can drag the boundary.
Alternatively, place the cursor on one of the boundaries. The cursor updates from a
pointer to a cross-hair, indicating that the margin is ready to be resized.
42

2. Drag the boundary to the new position, and then release the mouse.
As you drag the boundary, the corresponding margin value in the Drawing Areas window
dynamically updates.
To accurately fit the drawing area, zoom in to each corner of the area being defined.
Using the corner grab handles, you can move two margins simultaneously while the other
two margins remain unchanged.
Grab handle 1: Resizes the left and top margins.
Grab handle 2: Resizes the right and top margins.
Grab handle 3: Resizes the right and bottom margins
Grab handle 4: Resizes the left and bottom margins.
Set Drawing Margins Using the Grid

1. Expand Drawing Area Margins in the Drawing Areas window, and click the margin you
want to resize.
2. Type the new value.
The drawing boundary box in the View window updates accordingly.
43

Set Report Start Position Graphically
1. On the Drawing Areas page, place the cursor on the appropriate report anchor.
The cursor updates from a pointer to a cross-hair, indicating that the anchor is ready to be
moved.
In the above example, the numbers underneath the cross-hairs indicate the X and Y
coordinate values.
2. Move the anchor to the required location, and then release the mouse.
As you drag the anchor, the corresponding X and Y values that display with the anchor and
in the Drawing Areas window dynamically update.
Set Report Data Start Position Using the Grid

1. Expand the appropriate list category in the Drawing Areas window, click X, and type the
new value.
2. Click Y, and type the new value.
The drawing boundary box in the View window updates accordingly.
Customize report settings

You can use the grid to define formatting properties such as text font, height, and the direction in
which the report data is plotted. Additionally, some of the properties that control the layout of the
report data can be customized graphically using the mouse.
Set Up the Report Using the Grid

1. In the Drawing Setup Tool, select the tab that corresponds to the report you want to
customize.
Use the Reports section on the Basic Setup page to add and remove the reports to
be plotted on the isometric drawing.
2. If necessary, click Zoom to List Attributes
report section of the backing frame.
44
on the vertical toolbar to zoom in on the

3. Expand the report category node to expose those properties. In the example below, the
Weld List category node is expanded.
4. Use List Down to specify the direction in which ISOGEN is to plot the report data.
5. Click Maximum Entries, and set the maximum number of entries allowed in the report
before an overflow sheet is generated.
6. Type the appropriate X and Y values to set the horizontal and vertical start positions of the
first line of the report.
Alternatively, you can define these X and Y settings graphically. For more
information, see Define X,Y, and Offset Settings Graphically below.
7. Select the font to be used to display the report data in the Text Font list.
8. If needed, modify the values for Text Height and Vertical Spacing.
9. Expand the column nodes to display those properties. In the example below, the Column 3
node has been expanded.
45

10. Modify the component attribute settings as needed.
Use the Name list to specify which component attribute is to be plotted.
Use the Offset and X boxes to set the plot start position for the component attribute
data. These settings can also be defined graphically. For more information, see Define
X,Y, and Offset Settings Graphically below.
Define X,Y, and Offset Settings Graphically

Modifying the report layout graphically involves using the mouse to position report data. Using
the mouse, you can define the horizontal and vertical position of the first line of data that is
plotted on the report. You can also define an offset from the start position that the other columns
of data use.
Define the report origin graphically
1. Place the mouse on the red rectangle in the first column of the report block.
2. When the mouse changes to a cross-hairs, as shown in the example below, drag the box in
the appropriate left, right, up, or down direction.
The X and Y values dynamically update as you drag the rectangle.

3. Release the mouse when the rectangle has been re-positioned as needed.
46

Define an offset from the report origin graphically
1. Place the mouse on the green rectangle in the column of data that you want to reposition.
2. When the mouse changes to a two-side arrow, as shown in the example below, drag the
box in the appropriate left or right direction.
The Offset and X values dynamically updates as you drag the rectangle.
3. Release the mouse when the rectangle has been re-positioned as needed.
47

Add and Remove Report Columns
1. Click Add Column
on the vertical toolbar.
The software adds a node to the tree view, and adds a column of empty rectangles to the
appropriate report location in the View window.
Each empty rectangle represents an attribute value. To view the empty rectangles,
set Maximum Entries and Vertical Spacing to a value greater than zero (0).
2. Define settings for Name, Offset, Maximum Characters, and X as needed.
3. To remove a column from the report, select the column in the tree view, and then click
Delete Column
The software removes the column heading from the tree view and the column of rectangles
from the report location.
Define drawing frame attributes

Add or Remove a Drawing Frame Attribute
1. Click the Attributes tab in the Drawing Setup Tool.
The Attributes page appears.
2. Click Add/Remove Attributes
The Add/Remove Attributes dialog box (on page 68) appears.
3. In the Available list, select the attribute to be added.
Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple attributes.
4. Click
to add the attribute In Use list.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.
The software inserts the attribute at the bottom of the Attributes Grid window, and places
an empty rectangle on the drawing frame in the vicinity of the last attribute placed on the
grid.
6. Position the rectangle as required, by graphically selecting and moving it, and then adjust its
position by editing it in the Attributes Grid window.
When you select a rectangle in the drawing frame, its outline color changes to red and
the corresponding row in the Attributes Grid window is highlighted. The cursor changes to a
cross-hair, indicating that it can be moved. Finally, the software displays a tooltip showing the
display name as defined in the Project defaults.
48

Remove a Drawing Frame Attribute
1. Click the Attributes tab in the Drawing Setup Tool.
The Attributes page appears.
2. Click Add/Remove Attributes
The Add/Remove Attributes dialog box (on page 68) appears.
3. In the In Use list, select the attribute to be removed.
4. Click
to remove the attribute from In Use list.
6. The software removes the row containing the attribute data from the Attributes Grid
window, removes the corresponding rectangle from the drawing frame.
Graphically Move a Drawing Frame Attribute

1. Click once on the attribute you want to move.
The software highlights the attribute in red on the drawing frame, and the pointer changes to
a cross.
2. Drag the attribute to its a new position, and release the mouse.
3.
As you drag the attribute, the corresponding X and Y settings in the Attributes Grid
window dynamically update.
Modify a Drawing Frame Attribute

1. Click an attribute rectangle in the drawing frame.
The software highlights the attribute in the Attributes Grid window.
2. Modify the attribute values as needed in the Attributes Grid window.
Update the style

In order for the changes that you make in the Drawing Setup Tool to be effective, you must
click Save on the horizontal toolbar to save the changes to the isometric drawing style's XML
file.
View the results

When you have completed using the Drawing Setup Tool, it is recommended that you review
how your changes affect the isometric drawing output. In that way, if anything appears incorrect,
you can re-open the tool and correct the problems.
1. Select the isometric drawing style in the Project View panel, and click Preview Drawing
on the toolbar. Alternatively, click Tools > Preview Drawing.
49

ISOGEN processes the data. When processing completes, I-Configure opens the Isogen
Preview dialog box.
2. Select the file you want to view in the Files generated list, and click View.
If you select DRAWING in the File Type list, the software opens up the drawing in the View
window on the Basic Setup page. An example is shown below.
If you select MESSAGE or MATERIAL, the software opens the file using the default text
editor.
3. Click Close to return to I-Configure window.
50
The default drawing output is DWG.

To view any errors reported by ISOGEN, open the message file.
Basic Setup Page (Drawing Setup Tool)

Controls the drawing format, size, and the template file used as the backing sheet. You can also
specify which user-defined reports are to be plotted on the isometric drawing when it is
generated.
Template - Displays the file to be used for the drawing backing sheet. Click Browse
, and
navigate to the required template file.
Drawing Output Format - Controls the 2-D CAD file format that ISOGEN creates during
isometric drawing generation. Select one of the following: AutoCAD DXF (DXF), MicroStation
(DGN), Smart DWG (DWG), Smart DGN (DGN), Smart DGN v8 (DG8), SmartSketch (IGR), or
Shape2d (SHA). The default format is Smart DWG.
The current version the Drawing Setup Tool does not support the display of Smart
DGN v8 files (.dg8). To display a .dg8 backing sheet within the tool, save the backing sheet as a
Version 7 DGN file (.dgn), and rename a copy of the Version 7 file using a .dg8 extension. The
software will use the .dgn version of the file when displaying the backing sheet within the
Drawing Setup Tool but will use the .dg8 version of the file during isometric drawing
generation.
Allow ISOGEN to generate standard drawing frame - Ignores the user-specified template
backing sheet. When this option is selected, ISOGEN generates drawings using its own built-in
drawing frame.
Drawing Size - Displays the standard paper size for the isometric drawing. Select A0, A1, A2,
A3, A4, ANSI "A", ANSI "B", ANSI "C", ANSI "D", ANSI "E", or Custom. The drawing size
that you select is shown superimposed in green on the backing sheet, as shown in the example
below.
Width - Sets the width of the drawing. This option is available only if you set Drawing Size to
Custom.
Height - Sets the height of the drawing area. This option is available only if you set Drawing
Size to Custom.
51

Backing Sheet Units - Indicates the drawing units to be used. Typically, backing sheet units are
used only for DXF and DWG formats. Select inches or mm.
When using formats other than DXF and DWG, setting this option to mm gives the best
results within the Drawing Setup Tool.
User Defined Material List - Indicates whether a Material List report is output on the isometric
drawing. To include this report on the isometric drawing, select its check box. If you select this
option, you must also specify the Number of sections. Clear the check box to suppress the
report output.
User Defined Weld List - Indicates whether a Weld List report is output on the isometric
drawing. To include this report on the isometric drawing, select its check box. Clear the check
box to suppress the report output.
User Defined Cut List - Indicates whether a Cut List report is output on the isometric drawing.
To include this report on the isometric drawing, select its check box. Clear the check box to
suppress the report output.
Number of sections - Specifies the number of sections included for the user-defined Material
List report that is output on the isometric drawing. Select One, Two, or Three. This option is
available only if User Defined Material List is selected.
52
Drawing Areas Page (Drawing Setup Tool)

Defines the drawing area, which includes the drawing sheet and the areas of the drawing frame
where ISOGEN plots the user-defined reports. The Drawing Areas page of the tool is divided
into two sections.
View window - Displays the selected style's default backing sheet with the drawing area
superimposed upon it
Drawing Areas window - Displays a grid view of drawing and report layout properties. In the
View window, a green box with grab handles identifies the drawing boundary. In the report
area, a colored anchor indicates the start position of the report data.
In the View window, you can graphically customize the left, right, top, and bottom margins of the
drawing and define the layout and appearance of the report data that is plotted on the isometric
drawing. You can also type new values in the Drawing Areas window. For more information,
see Define drawing margins and report layout (on page 42).
53

Drawing Areas Window
Any of the categories and related properties listed below can appear on the Drawing Areas
window, depending on the settings that have been defined on the Basic Setup page.
The Drawing Areas window can be displayed, hidden, docked, maximized, tabbed, or
made to float. For more information, see Moving and Resizing Windows in Drawing Setup Tool
(on page 37).
Categorized - Groups drawing properties in the Drawing Areas window by category. At a
minimum, the panel displays the Drawing Area Margins category, which contains margin
settings for the drawing area. Additional categories, such as Material List, Cut List, and Weld
List, display only if the corresponding report option is selected on the Basic Setup page. These
categories contain format and layout properties specific to the data that is plotted on a report.
Another set of categories can also display on the window: Section One, Section Two, and
Section Three. These categories, which contain properties that are specific to the different
sections of the material list, are controlled by the Number of sections setting on the Basic
Setup page. The example below illustrates the relationship between the reports options
selected on the Basic Setup page (A) and the categories that appear on the Drawing Areas
window (B).
Alphabetical - Groups drawing properties in the Drawing Areas window as a flat,

alphabetical list.
Drawing Area Margins - Groups the properties that define the drawing margins. Margins are
measured relative to the drawing sheet. For more information, see Define drawing margins and
report layout (on page 42).
Bottom - Sets the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line
of the drawing frame at the bottom of the drawing. Type a value (real number) in mm or
inches, depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Left - Sets the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of
the drawing frame on the left side of the drawing. Type a value (real number) in mm or
54
Right - Sets the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of
the drawing frame on the right side of the drawing. Type a value (real number) in mm or
Top - Sets the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of
the drawing frame at the top of the drawing. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches,
depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Material List - Groups layout and format properties for material list report data on the isometric
drawing. This collection of properties appears only if User Defined Material List is selected on
the Basic Setup page.
Text Font - Specifies the font used to display material list report data. Select the required
font in the Text Font list.
Text Height - Specifies the height of the text that appears in the material list report. This
setting applies to all sections of the material list. Type a value (real number) in mm or
X - Sets the bottom left X, or horizontal, position of the first line of the material list plotted on
the isometric drawing. Type a value (integer).
Y - Sets the bottom left Y, or vertical, position of the first line of the material list plotted on
Weld List - Groups layout and format properties for weld list report data on the isometric
drawing. This collection of properties is shown only if User Defined Weld List is selected on the
Basic Setup page.
Text Font - Specifies the font used to display weld list report data. Select the required font
in the Text Font list.
Text Height - Specifies the height of the text that appears in the weld list report. Type a
value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the
Basic Setup page.
X - Sets the bottom left X, or horizontal, position of the first line of the weld list plotted on the
isometric drawing. Type a value (integer).
Y - Sets the bottom left Y, or vertical, position of the first line of the weld list plotted on the
Cut List - Groups layout and format properties for cut list report data on the isometric drawing.
This collection of properties appears only if User Defined Cut List is selected on the Basic
Setup page.
Text Font - Specifies the font used to display cut list report data. Select the required font in
the list.
Text Height - Specifies the height of the text that appears in the cut list report. Type a value
(real number) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic
Setup page.
X - Sets the bottom left X, or horizontal, position of the first line of the cut list plotted on the
Y - Sets the bottom left Y, or vertical, position of the first line of the weld list plotted on the
Section One - Groups layout and format properties for the report data contained in Section 1 of
the material list. This category appears only if User Defined Material List is selected on the
Basic Setup page.
Content - Indicates the category of data plotted in Section 1 of the material list. Select
Fabrication, Erection, Offshore, or Erection/Offshore. The default setting is Fabrication.
55

Section Two - Groups layout and format properties for the report data contained in Section 2 of
the material list. This category appears only if Number of sections on the Basic Setup page is
set to Two or Three.
Fabrication, Erection, Offshore, or Erection/Offshore. The category that you select must
not be the same as the Content setting for Section 1. The default setting is Erection.
Y - Sets the Y, or vertical, offset for Section 2 of the material list with reference to the X and
Y positions of the material list. Type a value (integer) in mm or inches, depending on the
Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Section Three- Groups layout and format properties for the report data contained in Section 3
of the material list. This category appears only if Number of sections on the Basic Setup page
is set to Three.
not be the same as the Content setting for Section 1 or Section 2. The default setting is
Offshore.
Y - Sets the Y, or vertical, offset for Section 3 of the material list with reference to the X and
Y positions of the material list. Type a value (integer) in mm or inches, depending on the
Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
56
Material List Page (Drawing Setup Tool)

Defines the layout and appearance of the report data in the material list that is plotted on the
isometric drawing. When ISOGEN processes the style to generate an isometric drawing, the
material list is automatically populated to report the materials in the pipeline (or spool). The
Drawing Setup Tool displays this page only when User Defined Material List is selected on
the Basic Setup page. The Material List page is divided into two sections.
View window - Displays a copy of the selected style's default backing sheet with the location
of the materials report data superimposed upon it.
Material List window - Displays properties that control the materials report set up, contents,
and location (also shown graphically). These properties can be customized to meet your
specific isometric drawing requirements. For more information, see Customize report
settings (on page 44).
Material List Window

The categories and related properties listed below can appear on the Material List window,
depending on the reports options that are selected on the Basic Setup page. The data in the
example below defines a two section material list. The first section (Section 1), starting at
396mm x 397mm, contains a list of up to 25 Fabrication materials plotted downwards (Down).
The second section (Section Two) contains a similar number of Erection materials also plotted
downwards. It is plotted 182mm below the first section.
57
Many of the properties listed below can also be defined or modified on the Basic Setup
page of the tool.
The Material List window can be displayed, hidden, docked, maximized, tabbed, or made to
float. For more information, see Moving and Resizing Windows in Drawing Setup Tool (on
page 37).
Categorized - Groups material list properties in the Material List window by category. The
Number of sections setting, which is defined on the Basic Setup page, determines whether
the categories Section Two or Section Three are displayed. The Section categories contain
properties that are specific to a particular section of the material list.
Alphabetical - Groups material list properties in the Material List window as a flat,
alphabetical list.
Material List - Groups layout and format properties for material list report data, including the
report origin and the text size and font
X - Sets the bottom left X, or horizontal, position of the first line of the material list that is
plotted on the isometric drawing. Type a value (integer).
Y - Sets the bottom left Y, or vertical, position of the first line of the material list that is plotted
on the isometric drawing. Type a value (integer).
Text Font - Specifies the font used to display material list report data. Select the required
font in the Text Font list.
Text Height - Specifies the height of the text that appears in the material list report. This
setting applies to all sections of the material list. Type a value (real number) in mm or
Vertical Spacing - Specifies the vertical spacing between the lines of data. The vertical
spacing applies to all sections in the material list. Type a value (real number) in mm or
Section One - Groups layout and format properties for the report data contained in Section 1 of
the material list.
Content - Displays the category of data plotted in Section 1 of the material list. Select
Fabrication, Erection, Offshore, or Erection/Offshore. The default setting is Fabrication.
List Down - Controls the direction in which the material list is printed with reference to the X
and Y settings under the Material List category. If you select Down, ISOGEN plots the
material list from top to bottom. If you select Up, the material list is plotted from bottom going
up.
Maximum Entries - Sets the maximum number of entries in the material list before an
overflow sheet is generated. Type the required value (positive integer).
Section Two - Groups layout and format properties for the report data contained in Section 2 of
the material list. This category appears on the panel only if Number of sections on the Basic
Setup page is set to Two or Three.
not be the same as the category defined for Section 1. The default setting is Erection.
up.
58
Y - Specifies the Y (or vertical) offset for Section 2 of the material list with reference to the
report origin defined by the X and Y settings under the Material List category. Type a value
(integer) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic
Setup page.
Section Three - Groups layout and format properties for the report data contained in Section 3
of the material list. This category appears on the panel only if Number of sections on the Basic
Setup page is set to Three.
not be the same as the categories defined for Section 1 and Section 2. The default setting is
Offshore.
up.
For a three section material list, all sections must be plotted in the same
direction.
Y - Specifies the Y (or vertical) offset for Section 3 of the material list with reference to the
report origin defined by the X and Y settings under the Material List category. Type a value
(integer) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic
Setup page.
Column Settings - Controls what component attributes are to be plotted in the report, along
with basic layout properties. In the example below, the material list is set up to plot five columns
of attribute data. The first component attribute (PT-NO) is to be plotted with a zero (0) offset
from the origin (X).
Name - Specifies the name of the component attribute being defined in the report. Select
the required attribute in the list.
Offset - Specifies the offset from the X setting (or report origin) defined under the Material
List category. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing
59

Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page. The value that you enter has a direct impact
on the column X setting. For example, if the horizontal position of the origin for the first line
of report data is set to 250, and you set a 150mm offset from that origin under Column 6,
the horizontal start position (or X setting) for that component attribute data is 400.
60
Maximum Characters - Sets the width of the column. The value that you enter must be
zero or greater.
X - Specifies the horizontal) start position for the column data with reference to the X setting
of the material list origin. The value that you enter causes the Offset setting to update
automatically. Type a value (integer) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet
Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
You can also define Offset and X, Y settings graphically using the mouse. For more
information, see Define X,Y, and Offset Settings Graphically in Customize report settings (on
page 44).
Use Add Column
and Delete Column
to control which component attributes are
plotted in the material list report. For more information, see Add and Remove Report
Columns in Customize report settings (on page 44).
Weld List Page (Drawing Setup Tool)

Defines the layout and appearance of the report data in the weld list that ISOGEN plots on the
isometric drawing. The Drawing Setup Tool displays this page only when User Defined Weld
List is selected on the Basic Setup page. The Weld List page is divided into two sections.
of the report data superimposed upon it.
Weld List window - Displays properties that control the report set up and report contents in
a tree view format. These properties can be customized to meet your specific isometric
drawing requirements. For more information, see Customize report settings (on page 44).
Weld List Window
page of the tool.
The Weld List window can be displayed, hidden, docked, maximized, tabbed, or made to
page 37).
Categorized - Groups weld list properties in the Weld List window by category.
Alphabetical - Groups weld list properties in the Weld List window as a flat, alphabetical
list.
Weld List - Groups layout and format properties for weld list report data, including the report
origin and the text size and font
List Down - Controls the direction in which the weld list is printed with reference to the X
and Y settings under the Weld List category. If you select Down, ISOGEN plots the weld list
from top to bottom. If you select Up, the weld list is plotted from bottom going up.
Maximum Entries - Sets the maximum number of entries in the weld list before an overflow
sheet is generated. Type the required value (positive integer).
X - Sets the bottom left X, or horizontal, position of the first line of the weld list that is plotted
Y - Sets the bottom left Y, or vertical, position of the first line of the weld list that is plotted on
Text Font - Specifies the font used to display weld list report data. Select the required font
in the Text Font list.
Text Height - Specifies the height of the text that appears in the weld list report. This setting
applies to all sections of the weld list. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches,
depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Vertical Spacing - Specifies the vertical spacing between the lines of data. The vertical
spacing applies to all sections in the weld list. Type a value (real number) in mm or
61

Column Settings - Controls which component attributes are plotted in the weld list report, along
with basic layout properties. In the example below, the plotted weld list is set up to contain four
columns of attribute data. The fourth component attribute (WELD-LOCATION) is to be plotted
with a 43mm offset from the origin (X).
62
Offset - Specifies the offset from the X setting (or report origin) defined under the Weld List
category. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet
Units setting on the Basic Setup page. The value that you enter has a direct impact on the
column X setting. For example, if the horizontal position of the origin for the first line of report
data is set to 245, and you set a 15mm offset from that origin under Column 2, the
horizontal start position (or X setting) for that component attribute data is 265.
Maximum Characters - Sets the number of entries that the column can accommodate. The
value that you enter must be zero or greater.
X - Specifies the horizontal start position for the column data with reference to the X setting
of the weld list origin. The value that you enter causes the Offset setting to update
automatically. Type a value (integer) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet
page 44).
Use Add Column
and Delete Column
plotted on the weld list report. For more information, see Add and Remove Report Columns
in Customize report settings (on page 44).
63
Cut List Page (Drawing Setup Tool)

Defines the layout and appearance of the report data in the cut list that is plotted on the
isometric drawing. The Drawing Setup Tool displays this page only when User Defined Cut
List is selected on the Basic Setup page. The Cut List page is divided into two sections.
of the report data superimposed upon it.
Cut List window - Displays properties that control the report set up, report contents, and
report location (shown graphically). These properties can be customized to meet your
specific isometric drawing requirements. For more information, see Customize report
settings (on page 44).
Cut List Window
page of the tool.
The Cut List window can be displayed, hidden, docked, maximized, tabbed, or made to
page 37).
Categorized - Groups cut list properties in the Cut List window by category.
Alphabetical - Groups cut list properties in the Cut List window as a flat, alphabetical list.
Cut List - Groups layout and format properties for the cut list report data, including the report
origin and the text size and font.
Allow Overflow - Controls whether the cut list causes an overflow drawing.
List Down - Controls the direction in which the cut list is printed with reference to the X and
Y settings under the Cut List category. If you select Down, ISOGEN plots the cut list from
top to bottom. If you select Up, the cut list is plotted from bottom going up.
Maximum Entries - Sets the maximum number of entries in the cut list before an overflow
sheet is generated. Type the required value (positive integer).
X - Sets the bottom left X, or horizontal, position of the first line of the cut list that is plotted
Y - Sets the bottom left Y, or vertical, position of the first line of the cut list that is plotted on
Text Font - Specifies the font used to display cut list report data. Select the required font in
the Text Font list.
Text Height - Specifies the height of the text that appears in the cut list report. This setting
applies to all sections of the cut list. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending
on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Vertical Spacing - Specifies the vertical spacing between the lines of data. The vertical spacing
applies to all sections in the cut list. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on
the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
64

Column Settings - Controls which component attributes are plotted in the cut list report, along
with basic layout properties. In the example below, the plotted cut list is set up to display five
columns of attribute data. The first component attribute (CUT-PIECE-NO) is to be plotted with a
zero offset from the origin (X).
65
Offset - Specifies the offset from the X and Y settings defined under the Cut List category.
Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting
on the Basic Setup page. The value that you enter has a direct impact on the column X
setting. For example, if the horizontal position of the origin for the first line of report data is
set to 315.3, and you set an 18mm offset from that origin under Column 2, the horizontal
start position (or X setting) for that component attribute data is 333.3.
Maximum Characters - Sets the number of entries that the column can accommodate. The
value that you enter must be zero or greater.
X - Specifies the horizontal start position for the column data with reference to the X setting
of the cut list origin. The value that you enter causes the Offset setting to update
automatically. Type a value (integer) in mm or inches,depending on the Backing Sheet
66
page 44).
Use Add Column
and Delete Column
plotted on the cut list report. For more information, see Add and Remove Report Columns in
Customize report settings (on page 44).
Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Tool)

Defines the pipeline attributes that are plotted on the drawing frame. The Attributes page is
divided into two sections.
View window - Displays a copy of the selected style's default backing sheet.
Attributes window - Displays the component attributes. Each attribute has a position, and
you can define its text size, font, and layer independently. These properties can be
customized to meet your specific isometric drawing requirements. For more information, see
Define drawing frame attributes (on page 48).
Attributes Window
The Attributes window can be displayed, hidden, docked, maximized, tabbed, or made
to float. For more information, see Moving and Resizing Windows in Drawing Setup Tool (on
page 37).
Attribute - Specifies the name of the attribute being defined.
X - Defines the X, or horizontal, position for the text. Type a value in mm or inches, depending
on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Y - Defines the Y, or vertical, position for the text. Type a value in mm or inches, depending on
the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Text Height - Sets the character height for the text. Type the required size in mm or Inches (as
a real number), depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Font - Specifies the font used when plotting the attribute in the drawing frame. Select the
required font in the list.
Barcode - Sets the barcode standard used by ISOGEN. The value you enter creates the start
and finish characters for the barcode reader. Type the number that corresponds to the required
standard: 1 (Barcode 30), 2 (Barcode 25), 3 (Barcode 25 Interleave), or 4 (Barcode 128).
Although several barcode standards exist worldwide to suit different industries, ISOGEN has
only standardized on four.
Justification - Sets the justification for the text. Select Left, Right, or Centre.
Layer - Specifies a number that corresponds to the layer. This number is an integer that
identifies the required layer, or level, to which the component type is to be assigned. Select the
required value in the list.
Colour - Specify the index number that represents a specific colour as defined in the output
drawing software. This option is required only for MicroStation or AutoCAD output. AutoCAD
uses a fixed 256 colour pallet starting at 1 (red) to 256. In MicroStation, in addition to a default
colour pallet, each design file can have a unique custom colour table. For example, colour index
number 3 may be red in one design file, but it may be green in another. The table below shows
a colour comparison between a sampling of AutoCAD and MicroStation colour index numbers.
AutoCAD Colour Index
Number
MicroStation Colour
Index Number
Colour Output on Isometric

Drawing
67

Number
MicroStation Colour
Index Number
14

Drawing
For specific information about AutoCAD, MicroStation, and other 3rd party drawing
software colour tables, refer to the product documentation delivered with your software.
Char Width - Sets the character width for the text. Type the required size in mm or Inches (as a
real number), depending on the Backing Sheet Units setting on the Basic Setup page.
Weight - Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. This option is only
used for MicroStation.
Rotation - Defines the angle of rotation in clockwise degrees.
Truncation Length - Defines the number of output characters.
Use Add / Remove Attributes
on the vertical toolbar to control which drawing
frame attributes are plotted on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Define drawing
frame attributes (on page 48).
Add/Remove Attributes Dialog Box

Lists the attributes that are plotted in the drawing frame, as well as the attributes that are
available to be plotted. The software opens this dialog box when you click Add / Remove
Attributes
on the vertical toolbar in the Drawing Setup wizard.
Available - Lists the attributes that you can select to plot on the isometric drawing.
In Use - Lists the attributes that are currently selected for plotting on the isometric drawing.
Add - Moves the selected attribute to the In Use list.
Remove - Removes the selected attribute from the In Use list.
OK - Closes the dialog box, and returns you to the Attributes page. The attributes that you
selected are displayed in the Attributes window grid area.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box without making any changes to the grid in the Attributes
window.
The Available and In Use lists are standard multi-select lists, allowing you to select one
or more attributes. To select consecutive attributes, select the first attribute, press and hold
down the SHIFT key, and then select the last attribute. To select nonconsecutive attributes,
press and hold down the CTRL key, and then select each attribute.
68
Welding Wizard
Manages the numbering, types and appearance of welds on the isometric drawing.
Welding Wizard Toolbar

The following table lists the commands that are available on the Welding Wizard toolbar.
Help - Opens the online user documentation delivered with the software and displays
information about the wizard.
Cancel - Exits the wizard without saving any of the options/parameters that you defined.
Go back to previous step - Returns to the previous page of the wizard.
Go forward to next step - Proceeds to the next page of the wizard.
Finish - Saves the parameters/options that you have defined.
Change settings for a single weld type (on page 69)

Change settings for all weld types (on page 70)
Remove weld types (on page 70)
Change settings for a single weld type

1. Select the appropriate Style in the Project View panel
2. Click Wizards > Welding Wizard. Alternatively, click Welding Wizard
toolbar.
on the Wizards
The Wizards toolbar is located on the Overview panel.

3. Select Show weld numbers, and click Go forward to the next step
.
The Select Weld Types page appears.
4. Select a weld type in the These weld types will share settings list, and click > to move the
selected weld type to the These weld types will have different settings list.
5. Click Go forward to the next step
.
The Weld Type Settings page appears.
6. Define weld type settings as needed, and then click Go forward to the next step
move to the Finish page.
7. Click Finish
8. Click Save
to
to update the style and close the wizard.

on the I-Configure Main toolbar to write the changes to the style XML file,
The template settings, such as those used for erection welds, are displayed first on the
next page of the Welding Wizard and apply to all weld types except those chosen to be
different. Subsequent pages in the Welding Wizard allow you to define the settings for the other
weld types individually.
69

Change settings for all weld types
toolbar.
on the Wizards

.
4. Click >> to include all weld types on the These weld types will have different settings list.
.
The Weld Type Settings page appears.
6. Define weld type settings as needed, and then click Go forward to the next step
move to the Finish page.
7. Click Finish
8. Click Save
to

next page of the Welding Wizard. Settings for other weld types display on all subsequent pages
Remove weld types

toolbar.
on the Wizards

.
4. Select a weld type in the These weld types will share settings list, and click < to move it
to the These weld types will share settings list.
Click << and all weld types are included in the These weld types will share
settings list.
6. Click Finish
7. Click Save
to move to the Finish page.

See Also
Select Weld Types Page (Welding Wizard) (on page 71)
Weld Type Settings Page (Welding Wizard) (on page 71)
Show Welds and Weld Numbering Page (Welding Wizard) (on page 70)
Finish Page (Welding Wizard) (on page 72)
Drawing.Welds Object (on page 299)
ShowWelds (on page 300)
WeldTypes (on page 322)
ShowWeldNumbers (on page 300)
WeldNumberSequence (on page 321)
SupportWeldSeq (on page 320)
70
Show Welds and Weld Numbering Page (Welding Wizard)

Sets options that control whether welds and weld numbers are plotted on the isometric drawing.
Plot Welds - Turns on and off the display of welds on the isometric drawing.
Show weld numbers - Turns on and off the display of weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
Generate weld numbers by category - Generates weld numbers based on weld type. This
option displays only when Show weld numbers is selected.
Support welds have separate sequence - Numbers support welds separately. If this option is
not selected, support welds are numbered using the same sequence as standard welds. This
option displays only when Show weld numbers is selected.
Generate Support weld numbers by category - Generates weld numbers based on support
weld type. This option displays only when Show weld numbers is selected.
Weld Numbers - Controls whether the weld numbers continue across drawings or start again
on each new drawing. This option displays only when Show weld numbers is selected.
Support Weld Numbers - Controls whether the support weld numbers continue across
drawings or start again on each new drawing. This option displays only when Show weld
numbers is selected.
If only Plot Welds is selected on this page, the wizard moves directly to the Finish page
when you click Go forward to next step
.
See Also
Welding Wizard (on page 68)
Select Weld Types Page (Welding Wizard)

Specifies which weld types have their appearance changed from the default settings, such as
those used for erection welds. You can change the settings for each weld type by clicking >
(single) or >> (all).
next page of the Welding Wizard and apply to all weld types except those chosen to be
different. Subsequent pages in the Welding Wizard allow you to define the settings for the other
weld types individually.
See Also
Weld Type Settings Page (Welding Wizard)

Defines settings for listed weld types.
Show this type of weld number - Controls whether weld numbers are displayed for the
specified weld type.
Enclosure style - Select the type of enclosure style output on the isometric drawing. When you
select an enclosure style in the list, an example of style is displayed in the preview box.
Show the specified weld prefix - Controls whether the weld prefix is plotted on the isometric
drawing.
Use this prefix if there is none in the input file - Sets the prefix definition used if none is
defined in the input file.
See Also
71
Finish Page (Welding Wizard)

Updates the selected style with the specified changes.
Finish - Updates the style with the parameters/options that you have defined for how
dimensions are output on the isometric drawing.
Updating the style only means results only in the modified values being displayed
in the I-Configure grids. In order for the changes to take effect, you must use the Save
command on the I-Configure Main toolbar to write the changes to the style XML file.
See Also
72
Dimensioning Wizard
Customizes the style of dimensioning displayed on the isometric drawing.
Dimensioning Wizard Toolbar

The following table lists the commands that are available on the Dimensioning Wizard toolbar.
See Also
Dimension Format Page (Dimensioning Wizard) (on page 73)
Dimensioning Style Page (Dimensioning Wizard) (on page 75)
Overall Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard) (on page 76)
Gasket Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard) (on page 78)
Elevations/Vertical Dimensions Page (Dimensioning Wizard) (on page 79)
Coordinates Page (Dimensioning Wizard) (on page 80)
Units Formatting Page (Dimensioning Wizard) (on page 81)
Finish Page (Dimensioning Wizard) (on page 81)
Dimension Format Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

Sets options that specify the format of dimensioning used on the isometric drawing.
Composite- Plot composite dimensions together with support/message dimensions and
reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
73
74
Support - Plot only support/message and reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Reference Only - Plot only reference dimensions on the isometric drawing. Suppress all
other dimensions.
Basic - Plot ordinary string dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference

dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Full String - Plot full string dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference
dimensions on the isometric drawing. All components are dimensioned individually.
Combined Erec/Offsh - Basic - Plot ordinary string dimensions. Do not dimension

separately erection pipe fittings (bends, tees, elbows, and so forth), support/message
dimensions, and reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Combined Erec/Offsh - Composite - Plot composite dimensions. Do no dimension

separately erection pipe fittings (bends, tees, elbows, and so forth), support/message
dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Pipe Only - Plot pipe dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference dimensions
on the isometric drawing. Suppress fitting dimensions.
See Also
Dimensioning Wizard (on page 73)
Drawing.Dimensions Object (on page 204)
Format (on page 210)
75
Dimensioning Style Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

Sets options that define the style of dimensioning.
Broken Line - Insert the dimension into the dimension line.
Overline - Position the dimension on top of the dimension line.
See Also
USAStyle (on page 233)
Overall Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

Sets options that specify whether overall dimensions are plotted, and if they are, which type.
None - Plot no overall dimensions.
76
Across Branches - Plot overall dimensions across branches (tees, olets and crosses).
Stop At Branches - Plot overall dimensions that stop at branches.
Valves / Across Branches - Plot overall dimensions to valve centres and across branches.
Valves / Stop At Branches - Plot overall dimensions to valve centres, stopping at

branches.
Overall dimensions to valve centres are only available to valves that have a spindle.
See Also
Overall (on page 221)
77
Gasket Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

Sets options that specify whether gasket dimensions are shown on the isometric drawing and, if
so, how they are plotted.
None - Suppress gasket dimensions.
Gasket thicknesses are not included. The component dimension is indicated by the
presence of two leader lines.
Included - Include gasket dimensions with the component.
Gasket thicknesses are included. The component dimension is indicated by the

presence of only single leader lines.
The length of the valve has now increased by the thickness of the gaskets (2mm in this
case) either side.
Separate - Dimension gaskets separately.
See Also
Gaskets (on page 215)
78
Elevations/Vertical Dimensions Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

Sets options that specify how elevations and vertical dimensions are shown on the isometric
drawing.
Normal - Display normal vertical pipe dimensions, with elevations at intersection points
when the level changes.
Suppressed - Suppress all vertical pipe dimensions, replaced by elevations in the form of
text messages at all positions where dimensions would normally be output.
79
Elevation - Display vertical dimensions and elevations at all normal dimensioning positions.
See Also
VertOption (on page 240)
Coordinates Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

Sets options that specify how coordinates are shown at elevations and vertical dimensions.
At Branches
None - Output no elevation coordinates.

Elev at changes - Output elevations when changed.
Elev and coords at changes - Output elevations and co-ordinates that have changed.
Full - Output a full set of coordinates.
At Bends and Elbows

Elev and coords at changes - Output elevations and coordinates that have changed.
At Supports
None - Suppress display of coordinates on pipe supports.

Fabrication - Output coordinates at Fabrication pipe supports only.
Erection - Output coordinates at Erection pipe supports only.
Offshore - Output coordinates at Offshore pipe supports only.
All - Output coordinates at all pipe supports.
See Also
CoordOutputBranches (on page 207)
CoordOutputBends (on page 207)
CoordSupports (on page 208)
80
Units Formatting Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

Sets options that define how units used for both dimensions and coordinates are output on the
isometric drawing.
Units - Specify the drawing units to be used. You can select Metric, Imperial, or Both.
Format - Specify the format of Imperial measurements used on the isometric drawing. This
option is not available when Units is set to Metric.
Ft.In for dimensions exceeding in this value - Define a value below which a ft-in dimension
appears in inches. This value must be greater than 12. For example, if you define this value as
19, a 19.9/16" long pipe is dimensioned as 1' 7.9/16".
If you define this value as 20, the same pipe is dimensioned as 19.9/16".
This option is not available when Units is set to Metric.

Metric Dimensions - Specifies whether to plot metric dimensions in M.mm format. This option
is not available when Units is set to Imperial.
Metric Coordinates - Specifies whether to plot coordinates in M.mm format. This option is not
available when Units is set to Imperial.
See Also
ImperialFormat (on page 217)
FtInTolerance (on page 214)
MetresDimensions (on page 219)
MetresCoordinates (on page 219)
Finish Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

81
Reports Wizard
Allows you to create and modify the report files generated by ISOGEN.
The reports selected apply only to the current style.
Reports Wizard Toolbar

The table below lists the commands that are available on the Reports Wizard toolbar.
Add a report to a style (on page 82)

Remove a report from a style (on page 83)
Add a report to a style

1. Select a style in the Project View panel, such as Final-Basic
2. Click Reports Wizard
Wizard.
on the Wizards toolbar. Alternatively, click Wizards > Reports

3. Select the report you want to add to the current style in the Available report files list, and
click >
The report is added to the Reports in current style list.
4. Click Go forward next step
.
The Report Definition page appears.
5. Select the attribute you want included in the report, and click > to add it to the Attribute
Definitions grid.
Use the CTRL key to select multiple attributes simultaneously.
6. Define the properties of the attribute as required.
When adding an attribute, the software uses a default width of 32 characters. You
can edit this value to suit your project requirements. The software automatically adjusts the
start position of the subsequent attribute accordingly.
7. Specify any additional output options, such as output path, if needed, and then click Go
forward next step
.
For each report file you selected in step 3, a separate Report Definition page is
displayed so that you can customize the report options.
8. Click Finish
82

9. Click Save
Remove a report from a style

1. Select the style in the Project View panel.
2. Click Reports Wizard
Wizard.
on the Wizards toolbar Alternatively, click Wizards > Reports

3. Select the report you want to remove in the Reports in the current style list, and click <.
The report is removed from the list.
4. Click Go forward next step
5. Click Finish
6. Click Save
as many times as needed to move to the Finish page.

See Also
CutList.SummaryFile Object (on page 411)
WeldList.SummaryFile Object (on page 399)
Supplementary Object (on page 415)
Add a Report Page (Reports Wizard)

Available Report Files - Lists the report files that are available.
Report Files in Current Style - Displays the names of the report files that are in the current
style.
Report Definition Page (Reports Wizard)

A Reports Definition page displays for each report to be included in the style. For some
reports, the content and layout is fixed. Only the location of the report can be user-defined.
Path - Specify the full path location for the report.
Delimited File - Specify whether the report file is to be delimited.
Generate Header - Specify whether the report file is to contain a header.
Available attributes - Select each attribute to be included in the report.
Attribute definitions - Define attribute properties as needed.
See Also
Reports Wizard (on page 82)
83
Finish Page (Reports Wizard)

See Also
Reports Wizard (on page 82)
84
Detail Sketch Manager

Allows you to place parameters on the selected detail sketch so that correct relevant values,
such as weld numbers, part number, and angles, are displayed on the isometric drawing.
Detail sketches are small, inserted drawings that provide additional details for components. The
sketches are typically used to show more information about branch connections, support lugs,
and special welds. To include detail sketches on your isometric drawing, you must first create
symbols in a graphics package such as SmartSketch or AutoCAD. Then, use the I-Configure
Detail Sketch Manager to view the detail sketch and specify options that control its various
characteristics, such as the text formatting and placement. When you place the detail sketch in
SmartPlant Isometrics or SmartPlant Spoolgen, the software prints a callout, or detail sketch
identifier, next to the component if the user-supplied parameter is in the piping object data
(POD) file. The detail sketch is then output on the isometric drawing. An example detail sketch is
shown below.
85

The Detail Sketch Manager window consists of a toolbar (A), a list of available detail sketches
(B), a viewing area (C), and a grid for data input (D).
A - Detail Sketch Manager Toolbar

Search - Filters the list of available detail sketches based on user-defined criteria. As you type
into the Search box, the feature responds with an implied wild card at the beginning and at the
end of the character string. For example, if you type B, the list of available sketches updates to
display only those sketches with a B in the filename based on the defined criteria, *B*.
Add - Inserts a blank row at the bottom of the grid. You can also insert a row by clicking in
the * row at the bottom of the grid.
Delete - Removes the currently selected row from the grid, as well as the detail sketch
identifier, or box, that the data defined.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the display size of detail sketch objects in the viewing area.
You can zoom in to get a closer view of an object, or zoom out to view more of the detail sketch
at a reduced size. Click the left mouse button and drag the pointer upward in the window to
increase the view of an object as though you were moving closer to it. Drag the pointer
downward in the window to reduce the view as though you were moving further away from the
object.
Zoom Area - Increases the view magnification of an area in the detail sketch that you define
with two points.
86

Zoom All - Displays the entire detail sketch in the viewing area.
Pan - Repositions the detail sketch in the viewing area so that you can view another section
of the sketch without changing the view magnification.
Style - Displays the style selected in the Project View panel in the I-Configure Main window.
This option is read only.
OK - Prompts you to save any unsaved data. Click Yes to save the data in the grid to the
current style and close the Detail Sketch Manager.
Cancel - Discards any unsaved data in the grid, and closes the Detail Sketch Manager.
Apply - Saves the data that has been defined in the grid for the current sketch, but leaves the
Detail Sketch Manager open so that you can define parameters for another sketch.
B - Detail Sketch List

Displays the detail sketches that are available for the style selected in the I-Configure Project
View panel. When you select a detail sketch in the list, a graphical view of the sketch displays in
the detail sketch viewing area, as shown below.
87
When you open the Detail Sketch Manager, the software looks in the folder location defined
by Supplementary.DetailSketches.Path and displays only those files types defined by
Supplementary.DetailSketches.FileFormat. The example below shows the detail sketch
folder path and file format that have been defined in I-Configure for the Final-Basic style.
In the current version of the software, only DWG, IGR, and SYM (SHA) file formats are fully
supported.
You can use the Search box on the Detail Sketch Manager toolbar to narrow down the list
of available sketches.
C - Detail Sketch Viewing Area

Displays a graphical view of the selected detail sketch. As you define parameters in the grid
area, the viewing area updates the detail sketch to display a box at the selected XPos and
YPos location on the sketch.
88

D - Grid Area
Allows you to position parameters directly onto the detail sketch. Parameters are derived from
the component on which the detail sketch is placed. Each line of data in the grid displays a box
at the selected X,Y location on the detail sketch. When you select a row in the grid, the
corresponding detail sketch parameter box is considered active and displays as blue in the
detail sketch viewing area. An inactive detail sketch parameter box displays as red. In the
following example, the ANGLE row is selected in the grid, making the corresponding box active.
Parameter - Specifies the user-supplied detail sketch identifier.
89

Method - Specifies how the required data is to be extracted from the piping object data (POD)
file for isometric drawing output. The following table lists the supported methods, along with any
required input parameters.
Selected Method
Required Input Parameter
Description
Copy
Enter any valid attribute or property of

the component, its parent pipeline, or
its material.
Returns the value of the specified property.

This can include the part number, the weld
number, or any other known property.
SectionAxis
X
Y
Returns the X- or Y-axis label.

The Y-axis label for a section through the
component, based on the component
HeaderOrientation property is as follows:
Vertical returns E (or as modified

by ATEXT -248)
Horizontal returns U (-244)
Sloped/falling returns U (-244)
Non-orthogonal returns blank
The X-axis label for a section through the

component, based on the component
HeaderOrientation property is as follows:
Vertical returns S (-247)

Horizontal returns orthogonal
vector to header and Up, E for N/S
header, S for E/W header,
compound direction otherwise.
Sloped/falling returns same as
Horizontal
Non-orthogonal returns blank
SectionAngleFromClosestA Specify a component property, such as Converts the input angle, which is 0-360, to
xis
BranchAngle, or attribute that contains an angle based on the closest axis.
an angle. For example, you can enter
C.BranchAngle or
Angle = 0 to 45 returns angle

C.COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1.
Angle = 45.1 to 89.9 returns (90

angle)
Angle = 90 to 135 returns (angle

90)
Angle = 135.1 to 179.9 returns

(180 angle)

180)
Angle = 225.1 to 269 returns (270

angle)

270)
Angle = 315.1 to 359.9 returns

(360 angle)
Invalid input (not a number in the

range 0-360) returns zero ( 0 )
90
MainWeldNumber
N/A
Returns the REPEAT-WELD-IDENTIFIER of

the main (header) weld of an olet.
BranchWeldNumber
N/A
Returns the REPEAT-WELD-IDENTIFIER of

the branch weld of an olet, set-on or tee.
SupportWeldNumber
Enter 1-n.
Returns the REPEAT-WELD-IDENTIFER of

the nth support weld.

Selected Method
Required Input Parameter
Description
LugPartNumber
Enter 1-n.
Returns the REPEAT-PART-NUMBER of the

nth lug
AdditionalMaterialPartNum
ber
Enter 1-n.
Returns the REPEAT-PART-NUMBER of the

nth additional material
Input - Defines the parameter required by the selected Method. Select a parameter from the list,
or type the parameter directly into the box. For more information about methods and their
associated input parameters, refer to the above table.
CharHeight - Defines the height of the character on the isometric drawing. It also sets the size
of the box used to place text. The default setting is 3.
XPos - Defines the X-position of the detail sketch identifier relative to the bottom left corner of
the detail sketch.
YPos - Defines the Y-position of the detail sketch identifier relative to the bottom left corner of
the detail sketch.
Font - Specifies the type of font used to display text.
Justification - Defines the justification for the text. You can select Left, Centre, or Right.
Layer - Specifies the layer of the CAD file to use.
Colour - Specifies the index number that represents a specific colour as defined in the output
drawing software.
Rotation - Defines the angle that text is allowed to be rotated in output.
Configure a Detail Sketch

1. Select a style in the Project View panel.
2. Click Detail Sketch Manager
on the Wizards toolbar. Alternatively, click Wizards >
Detail Sketch Manager.
3. In the Detail Sketch Manager window, select a detail sketch in the list.
To populate the list of detail sketches, the software uses the

Supplementary.DetailSketches.FileFormat and
Supplementary.DetailSketches.Path properties defined for the selected style. These
two properties define the location of the detail sketch library and the file type (DWG,
IGR, or SYM), respectively.
If necessary, use the Search feature on the Detail Sketch Manager toolbar to filter the
detail sketches shown in the list.
The software displays a graphical view of the selected detail sketch in the detail sketch
viewing area.
91

4. In the grid area, define detail sketch parameters as needed.
Use the XPos and YPos values to position the box in the detail sketch. Alternately, you
can position the box interactively using the mouse. As you drag the box, the XPos and
YPos values in the grid automatically update.
Each line of data in the grid displays a box at the selected X,Y location on the detail sketch.
In the following example, three parameters have been defined.
5. Click OK on the Detail Sketch Manager toolbar to save the data to the current style and
close the window.
To save the data to the current style and then work with another detail sketch, click Apply.
To add a blank row at the bottom of the grid, click Add
or click the * row at the bottom of
the grid. To remove a row of data from the grid, click Delete .
See Also
Detail Sketch Manager (on page 84)
92
93
SECTION 5
Project Defaults and Attributes

Opens the Project Defaults dialog box. Project defaults allow you to configure
application-specific properties. On the Project Defaults tab, you can view the default properties
that are available for the selected project. Because project defaults are application-specific, the
application, or product, being used determines which properties are displayed and can be
configured.
Attributes, though, are the same regardless of the application. Attributes can be set on a
pipeline, component, weld, bolt, spool, or material basis. The Attributes tab allows you to view
attribute values. When you double-click an attribute in the grid, the software opens the Attribute
dialog box, in which you can edit those values. The Attributes tab also allows you to access the
New Attribute dialog box so that you can create a new attribute.
Attribute Expressions
You can define an attribute as containing an expression that references other attributes in the
same collection and can contain functions. The value of the attribute is then the result of
evaluating the expression.
ATTRIBUTE1 = P-100-ABC
ATTRIBUTE2 = Left($ATTRIBUTE1$,1) & Right($ATTRIBUTE1$,3)
In the previous example, ATTRIBUTE2 contains an expression. Its value (as seen in the
properties dialog box in the software) is reported as PABC (the left-most character plus the
three right-hand characters from the string P-100-ABC).
A good analogy is a spreadsheet, where a cell can reference the contents of another cell
and built-in spreadsheet functions. Cells can contain both values and formulas.
Attribute expressions are built and tested using the Evaluation expression option when
defining an attribute on the Attribute and New Attribute dialog boxes. When creating an
attribute expression, follow the expression building rules listed below.
References can be made only to other attributes in the same collection of attributes. That is,
you cannot reference a pipeline attribute from a component.
References to other attributes are made using the $ATTRIBUTE_NAME$ syntax. The
ATTRIBUTE_NAME must be the underlying unique name for the attribute, not the Display
name setting on the Attributes tab (Project Defaults dialog box), which can be redefined
by the user. The Expression Builder is used to help build correctly-defined expressions.
Expressions are evaluated using the VBScript engine. That is, the syntax of the attribute
expression must be valid VBScript syntax and can contain any function supported by that
language. If an expression cannot be evaluated, regardless of the reason, the value reported
is the original expression.
ATTRIBUTE2 = Left($ATTRIBUTE1$,1) :
ATTRIBUTE2 would display P
ATTRIBUTE2 = Lft($ATTRIBUTE1$,1)
ATTRIBUTE2 would display Lft($ATTRIBUTE1$,1)
[Lft is not a valid VBScript function]
95
If the expression is expecting a string-- for example, the Left function takes a string value for
its first argument--then the double quote () must be used around the attribute reference,
whether or not the referenced attribute is defined as a string is irrelevant.
Valid - Left($ATTRIBUTE1$,1)
Invalid - Left($ATTRIBUTE1$,1)
The attribute containing the expression must be defined as a string. All the piping object
data file (POD) user-specified attributes (ATTRIBUTE1..ATTRIBUTE200,
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1..COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10) are suitable for use as
expressions.
Project Defaults Dialog Box (on page 101)

Attribute Dialog Box (on page 108)
Build Expression Dialog Box (on page 109)
New Attribute Dialog Box (on page 109)
Add a new attribute (on page 96)

Edit an attribute (on page 97)
Delete an attribute (on page 98)
Import PipeHeader attributes (on page 98)
Create an attribute expression (on page 98)
Add a new attribute

1. Click Project Defaults
. Alternatively, click Edit > Project Defaults.
The Project Defaults dialog box appears.
2. Click the Attributes tab.
3. Click New.
The New Attribute dialog box (on page 109) appears.
4. Use the Isogen attribute list to select the attribute you want to add.
96

Isogen attribute is the name used in the PCF.
5. Define the remaining attribute values as required, and then click OK.
The new attribute is displayed in its group on the Attributes tab of the Project Defaults
dialog box.
To specify that the attribute contains an expression, you must select Evaluate
expression. You can type an attribute expression directly into the Default value box, or click
Build to open the Build Expression dialog box (on page 109).
Edit an attribute
. Alternatively, click Edit > Project Defaults.
The Project Defaults dialog box (on page 101) appears.
3. Double-click the attribute you want to edit.
The Attribute dialog box (on page 108) appears.
4. Edit the data as needed, and then click OK.
To specify that the attribute contains an expression, you must select Evaluate
expression. You can type an attribute expression directly into the Default value box, or click
Build to open the Build Expression dialog box (on page 109).
97
Delete an attribute
. Alternatively, click Edit > Projects.
The Project Defaults dialog box (on page 101) appears.
3. Select the attribute you want to delete, and click Remove.
You can only delete user-specified attributes.

Remove is available only when a user-specified attribute is selected.
Import PipeHeader attributes

You can import project attributes from the PIPEHEADER-ATTRIBUTES section of a DDF or
from the Personal ISOGEN PIP file used in Project Manager (PipMan) projects.
and then click the Attributes tab.
2. Click Import on the Attributes tab.
3. In the Browse for Project Data dialog box, select the required input file format from the
Files of type list.
4. Navigate to the required file, select it, and then click Open to import.
If the Pipe Header attributes are imported, use care when using the External Pipeline
attributes file.
Create an attribute expression

1. Do one of the following;
a. Add a new attribute (on page 96), and select Evaluate expression.
b. Edit an attribute (on page 97), and select Evaluate expression.
2. Click Build.
The Build Expression dialog box appears.
98

3. To add an attribute reference, double-click the required attribute in the Attributes list.
The attribute is inserted in the Expression edit box. In the example below, Pipeline
Reference has been added.
4. To add a function reference, double-click the required function in the Functions list.
The function is inserted in the Expression edit box at the cursor position.
99

5. To test the expression, type a value for the referenced expression in the Attributes grid, and
click Test. For example, if Pipeline Reference is your attribute reference, you can type
CS150 in the Value box.
The software evaluates the expression using the values you entered, and displays the
results in the Results box. If the expression cannot be evaluated, an error message
appears in the Result text box, indicating the cause.
In the example above, the Expression Builder is unable to successfully evaluate the
expression because of the errors listed below.
The right parenthesis on the Left function must be placed after the
$PIPELINE-REFERENCE$.
The Left function needs a parameter specifying how many characters to extract from the left
most end of the string.
The $PIPELINE-REFERENCE$ must be enclosed in quotes.
100

When you correct the syntax, as shown in the example below, and re-run Expression Builder the
result is C, the left-most character from the string CS150.
The Attribute Editor control (AttributeEditor.ocx, 1.4 or later) supports the editing of
expressions (using the Expression Builder defined in the previous section). Clicking an
attribute that contains an expression displays the standard edit button:
When you click , the software displays the Expression Builder. The dialog box is populated
with current values of the attributes. Operation of the dialog box is the same as described in
the previous sections.
Editing an expression in SmartPlant Spoolgen only affects the current POD file. In order to
change the expression for all future POD files in the project, the expression must be
changed in I-Configure project defaults as previously described.
See Also
Isometric Projects (on page 117)
Attributes Tab (Project Defaults Dialog Box) (on page 102)
101
Project Defaults Dialog Box

Displays information about attributes and application-specific properties.
Project Defaults Tab (Project Defaults Dialog Box)

You can modify any project default as needed. Some properties are typed entries: click once in
the Value box to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Other properties display a
Browse arrow ( ) when you click in the Value box. In some instances, clicking
opens a
dialog box in which you can navigate to and select the required file. In other instances, clicking
displays a selection list from which you can select the required value.
Application (on page 102)
Project defaults are product-specific.

In the case of the default application, such as I-Run, no project defaults are displayed.
See Also
Application
Specifies the software product to which the project defaults apply.
Attributes Tab (Project Defaults Dialog Box)

Lists the names of and default values for system and user-specified attributes. You can edit
values to be taken by system attributes, such as Pipe Spec, Revision, and so on. To edit
attribute values, double-click the attribute to open the Attribute dialog box.
Context - Organizes the attribute groups listed below.
Pipeline Attributes (on page 104)
Component Attributes (on page 106)
Bolt Attributes (on page 106)
Spool Attributes (on page 107)
Material Attributes (on page 108)
Display Name - Shows the attribute name that is displayed in the application. .
Default Value - Displays the value that is used if the value within the application is not change,
depending on the Set Value setting.
Allowable Values - Displays the allowable values that are available for the attribute. These are
the values that display in the software, as shown in the example below.
102

Isogen Attribute - Specifies which ISOGEN attribute is to be used. This option is available only
for user-specified attributes (ATTRIBUTE1 to ATTRIBUTE199). For system attributes, this
option is read only.
Attributes 1 to 99 map to ISOGEN -601 to -699. For example, ATTRIBUTE95 maps to

ISOGEN -695.
Attributes 100 to 199 map to ISOGEN attribute -900 to -999. For example, ATTRIBUTE101
maps to ISOGEN attribute -901.
Source - Indicates whether the attribute is a System or User attribute.
Set Value -Controls how the value is set.
ISOGEN - No Default Value is defined. The attribute cannot be modified.
ISOGEN then Default - Use the value defined in the ISOGEN input file. If no value is set,
use the Default Value setting.
Default - Sets the value to what is defined by the Default Value setting.
Units - Displays the type of units, such as inches or kilograms, and is only available for
attributes that contain a measurement or weight.
Visible - Controls whether the attribute can be seen in the application.
Editable - Controls whether the attribute can be modified.
Expression - Indicates whether the attribute contains an expression. For more information
about attribute expressions, see Attribute Expressions in Project Defaults and Attributes (on
page 95).
Build - Opens the Build Expression dialog box (on page 109) in which you can use the
Expression Builder to create and test the attribute expression. This option is available only when
Evaluate expression is selected.
You can type an attribute expression directly in the Default value box instead of using
the Expression Builder.
Import - Allows you to import attribute data from an external source.
New - Opens the New Attribute dialog box in which you can create a new user-specified
attribute.
Remove - Deletes the selected attribute. You can only delete user-specified attributes.
See Also
Add a New Attribute (on page 96)
Edit an Attribute (on page 97)
Delete an Attribute (on page 98)
103
Pipeline Attributes
Displays the attributes that are specific to a pipeline. Pipeline attribute values can be output to
the isometric drawing (A) and to report files (B).
104
Pipeline Header Attribute
Description
AREA data
Identifies part of a project.
ATTRIBUTE1 data
to
ATTRIBUTE199 data
Provides up to 199 user-specified pipe header attributes that

can be used for any purpose.
BATCH data
Identifies part of a project.
BEND-RADIUS data
Standard pulled bend radius.
DATE-DMY data
D=Day M=Month Y=Year, such as 21/09/99. Specify in any

order.
HIGHEST-ASSEMBLY-NUMBER data
Highest Assembly Number generated on the previous run of

the pipeline.
HIGHEST-PART-NUMBER data
Highest Material List Part Number generated on the previous

run of the pipeline.
HIGHEST-SPOOL-NUMBER data
Highest Spool Number generated on the previous run of the

pipeline.
HIGHEST-SUPPORT-WELD-NUMBER data
Highest Pipe Support Weld Number generated on the previous

run of the pipeline.
HIGHEST-UNIQUE-PART-IDENTIFIER data
Highest Unique Part Identifier generated on the previous run of

the pipeline.
HIGHEST-WELD-NUMBER data
Highest Weld Number generated on the previous run of the

pipeline.
INSULATION-SPEC data
Insulation Spec reference.
ITEM-ATTRIBUTE0 data
to
ITEM-ATTRIBUTE9 data
Provides up to 10 User defined material Attributes for use

where component material descriptions are broken down into a
series of short elements where data is defined in dynamic
keywords like MATL RATING SPEC THKS etc. This provides
an alternative method to having a single long material
description in a component DESCRIPTION attribute.
MISC-SPEC1 data
User defined Miscellaneous Specification Reference.

Pipeline Header Attribute
Description
MISC-SPEC2 data
MISC-SPEC3 data
MISC-SPEC4 data
MISC-SPEC5 data
NOMINAL-CLASS data
Identifies pipeline design class.
NOMINAL-RATING data
Identifies pipeline design class.
OFFSET-IMPERIAL data
Offset in feet from Datum point.
OFFSET-METRIC data
Offset in metres from Datum point.
OUTPUT-FILE-NAME data
Name to be used for drawing output file.
PAINTING-SPEC data
Painting specification.
PIPELINE-REFERENCE data
Pipeline name.
PIPELINE-TEMP data
Pipeline operating temperature.
PIPELINE-TYPE data
Type of Pipeline construction.
PIPING-SPEC data
Pipeline specification reference.
PROJECT-IDENTIFIER data
Project number or name.
REPLOT
Single isometric re-plot request.
REVISION data
Revision identifier.
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY data
Specific gravity of pipeline contents.
SPOOL-PREFIX data
Prefix to be used on spool identifiers.
START-CO-ORDS data
Indicator to ensure IDF is generated with same start point on

replot.
SUPPORT-WELD-PREFIX-ERECTION data
Prefix to be used for the identification of all erection pipe

support welds.
SUPPORT-WELD-PREFIX-FABRICATION data
Prefix to be used for the identification of all fabrication pipe

support welds.
SUPPORT-WELD-PREFIX-OFFSHORE data
Prefix to be used for the identification of all offshore pipe

support welds.
SYSTEM-ISOMETRIC-REFERENCE data
System isometric name.
TRACING-SPEC data
Tracing specification reference.
WELD-PREFIX-ERECTION data
Prefix to be used for the identification of all erection welds.
WELD-PREFIX-FABRICATION data
Prefix to be used for the identification of all fabrication welds
WELD-PREFIX-GENERAL data
General prefix to be used for the identification of all welds.
WELD-PREFIX-OFFSHORE data
Prefix to be used for the identification of all offshore welds.
See Also
105
Component Attributes
Displays all of the attributes currently allowed for components in I-Configure. Component
attributes are similar to pipeline attributes in terms of configuration but are specific to
components (valves, pipe, flanges, and so forth). The values for component attributes are
typically output to the bill of materials on the isometric drawing and the material report file.
ISOGEN supports a set of attributes that are available for all components, including a set of 10
user-definable ones. In addition, certain components have specific attributes. For example, a
valve has a SPINDLE-DIRECTION attribute not used by other components.
The table below shows the ISOGEN user-specified attributes:
Pipeline Data File Format
Attributes
IDF
190 to -199 records
PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENTATTRIBUTE10
See Also
Weld Attributes
Displays all of the attributes currently allowed for welds in I-Configure.
ISOGEN supports a set of attributes that are available for all welds, including a set of 10
user-definable attributes. Some weld attributes can be output to the isometric drawing in special
weld enclosures.
They can also be output to the weld list on the isometric drawing and the welding report files.
Weld attributes are attached to welds in the 3D design system model, and it is recommended
that you refer to your Design System Administrator for information on how to set them up. They
are then passed to ISOGEN in extracted Piping Data files, either in IDF or PCF format.
The table below lists the ISOGEN user-specified attributes:
Attributes
IDF
180 to -189 records
PCF
WELD-ATTRIBUTE1 to WELD- ATTRIBUTE10
See Also
106
Bolt Attributes
This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for bolts in I-Configure.
ISOGEN supports a set of attributes that are available for all bolts, including a set of 10
user-definable attributes.
The following table lists the ISOGEN user-specified attributes:
Attributes
IDF
190 to -199 records
PCF
ASSEMBLY-ATTRIBUTE1 to ASSEMBLYATTRIBUTE10
In the case of bolts, ASSEMBLY-ATTRIBUTES are not included in the tab, but can be
added clicking
.
See Also
Spool Attributes
This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for Spools in I-Configure.
The following table lists the ISOGEN user-specified attributes:
Attributes
-28
IDF
-91 record
-170 to -179 record
PCF
SPOOL-IDENTIFIER
SPOL-DRAWING-SEQUENCE- NUMBER
SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE1 to SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE10
See Also
107
Material Attributes
This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for materials in I-Configure. The following
table lists ISOGEN user-specified attributes:
Attributes
IDF
-80 to -89 records
PCF
MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE10
See Also
Attribute Dialog Box

Displays the values that are currently defined for the selected attribute. Depending on the
attribute and its current settings, many of the values in this dialog box can be modified to suit
requirements of your project.
Display Name - Shows the attribute name that is displayed in the application. .
Allowable Values - Displays the allowable values that are available for the attribute. These are
the values that display in the software, as shown in the example below.
Default Value - Displays the value that is used if the value within the application is not change,
depending on the Set Value setting.
Make attribute visible - Indicates whether the attribute can be seen in the application.
Allow edits - Indicates whether the attribute can be modified.
Evaluate expression - Indicates whether the attribute contains an expression. For more
information about attribute expressions, see Attribute Expressions in Project Defaults and
Build - Opens the Build Expression dialog box in which you can use the Expression Builder to
create and test the attribute expression. This option is available only when Evaluate
expression is selected.
Units - Displays the type of units, such as inches or kilograms, and is only available for
attributes that contain a measurement or weight. Set Value -Controls how the value is set.
ISOGEN - No Default Value is defined. The attribute cannot be modified.
ISOGEN then Default - Use the value defined in the ISOGEN input file. If no value is set,
use the Default Value setting.
Default - Sets the value to what is defined by the Default Value setting.
108

Isogen Attribute - Specifies which ISOGEN attribute is to be used. This option is available only
for user-specified attributes (ATTRIBUTE1 to ATTRIBUTE199). For system attributes, this
option is read only.

ISOGEN -695.
See Also
Edit an attribute (on page 97)
Build Expression Dialog Box

Sets options for adding a new attribute reference.
Attributes - Lists all available (defined) attributes. To add a new attribute reference, double-click
the row containing the attribute you wish to add.
Functions - Lists the functions that can be executed as part of the expression. To add a
function reference, select a function from the tree view on the right-hand side of the Expression
Builder, and then double-click it.
Expression - Displays the attribute expression.
Test - Evaluates the attribute expression to determine if an errors are present.
Result - Displays the results of the test.
See Also
Create an Attribute Expression (on page 98)
New Attribute Dialog Box

Sets options for new user-specified attributes.
Display name - Enter the name of the attribute as you want it to display in the application.
You can also use this option in external data configuration. For more information, see
Attach External Data.
Allowable values - Specify the values that are available for the attribute in the software. Enter
the values delimited by a semi-colon. For example, if you enter 0;1;2;3;4;5, the values display
as shown in the example below.
Default value - Specify the default value for the attribute. The default value is used if the value
in the application is not changed, depending on the Set Value setting.
Make attribute visible - Specify whether the attribute can be seen in the application.
Allow edits - Specify whether the attribute can be modified.
Evaluate expression - Specify whether the attribute contains an expression. For more
information about attribute expressions, see Attribute Expressions in Project Defaults and
109

Build - Opens the Build Expression dialog box in which you can use the Expression Builder to
create and test an attribute expression. This option is available only when you select
Expression.
Units - Specify the units that are applicable to the attribute, if required
Set Value - Select one of the options below. This option is only available if a value is defined for
Default value.
ISOGEN then Default - Use the value in the ISOGEN input file if one exists. Otherwise, use
the Default Value setting.
Default - Use the Default Value setting for the attribute regardless of whether a value is
defined in the ISOGEN input file.
Isogen attribute - Select the ISOGEN attribute to which the data field is mapped.

ISOGEN -695.
OK - Creates the attribute with the settings you have defined, closes the dialog box and returns
to the Attributes tab. The new attribute is added to the bottom of the list displayed on the
Attributes tab.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box and returns to the Attributes tab without creating the new
attribute.
Apply - Creates the attribute with the settings you have defined. The New Attribute dialog box
remains open so that you can define another new attribute.
See Also
Add a new attribute (on page 96)
110
111
SECTION 6
Isometric Directories
In I-Configure, the isometric directory is folder that has been designated as a container for
projects. An isometric directory can contain multiple projects. The isometric directory can be
located anywhere, including on a network drive.
Isometric Directory Object Properties (on page 115)

Create a new isometric directory (on page 113)

Delete an isometric directory (on page 114)
Copy and paste an isometric directory (on page 114)
Connect to an isometric directory (on page 113)
Disconnect from an isometric directory (on page 115)
Create a new isometric directory

1. Click New Isometric Directory
. Alternatively, click File > New > Isometric Directory.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
2. Double-click the drive or specify the network path in which you want to create the new
isometric directory.
3. Click New Folder.
4. Enter the name of the new isometric directory and the then click OK.
The new isometric directory appears in the Project View panel.
Isometric directory object properties are shown in the Properties panel .

After you create an isometric directory, you must next create a new isometric project (on
page 118) to hold styles.
If you select the No Projects level in the Project View panel, Create New Project
is
unavailable.
In order to create a project, you must first select the isometric directory.
On Windows NT4 systems, New Folder does not appear on the Create Isometric
Directory dialog box. Use Windows Explorer to create a folder with the required isometric
directory name before selecting this as the isometric directory to be used.
113
Connect to an isometric directory

Adds an existing (usually remote) isometric directory, without creating the isometric directory
folder.
1. Click File > Connect to Isometric Directory. Alternatively, click Connect to Isometric
Directory
.
The Connect to Isometric Directory dialog box appears.
2. Navigate to the C:\SampleIsoDir\Project List.xml file, and click Open.
The isometric directory is displayed in the Project View panel.
Whether a mapped drive or full UNC path is shown is dependent on options (on page 36)
set for the project.
Delete an isometric directory

Deleting a remote isometric directory only removes the reference to it from the Project View
panel, the folder is not deleted.
You cannot delete remote project and style folders.
1. In the Project View panel, click the isometric directory you want to delete.
2. Click Delete
. Alternatively, click Edit > Delete, or right-click the isometric directory in
the Project View panel and then click Delete.
Deleting an isometric directory cannot be undone.
Copy and paste an isometric directory

1. In the Project View panel, click the isometric directory you want to copy.
2. Click Copy
. Alternatively, click Edit > Copy, or right-click the isometric directory and
then click Copy.
3. With the isometric directory still selected, click Paste
. Alternatively, click Edit > Paste, or
right-click the isometric directory and then click Paste.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
4. Double-click the drive or specify a network path on which the copied (new) isometric
directory is to be placed.
5. Click New Folder, and specify the name of the pasted (new) isometric directory.
Isometric directories that exist on the same drive cannot have the same name.
6. Click OK.
The Project View panel updates to show the newly pasted isometric directory, including all
the projects and styles that were part of the original isometric directory.
114
Disconnect from an isometric directory

Removes an isometric directory from the Project View panel. Deleting a remote isometric
directory only removes the reference to it from the Project View panel, it does not delete the
folder. You cannot delete remote projects and style folders.
1. In the Project View panel, select the isometric directory you want to remove.
2. Click File > Disconnect Isometric Directory. Alternatively, click Disconnect Isometric
Directory
.
The isometric directory disappears from the Project View panel.
See Also
Isometric Directory Object Properties

The properties for each isometric directory are stored in their own object. When you select an
isometric directory in the Project View panel, the Properties panel updates to show its
corresponding object properties. In the example below, the Properties panel is displaying the
object properties of the SampleIsoDir isometric directory.
Path - Displays the isometric directory folder file path. This information is read-only and cannot
be modified.
Name - Displays the isometric directory folder name. This information is read-only and cannot
be modified.
ChangeIsoDirList - Specifies whether you can add or delete isometric directories to and from
the global list. If set to True, adding and deleting isometric directories is allowed. If there is no
write access to the IsoDirList.xml (on page 31) file, the property value is set to False, and no
add/delete functions can be completed.
See Also
Isometric Project Object Properties (on page 128)
Isometric Drawing Style Object Properties (on page 149)
Create a New Isometric Directory (on page 113)
Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 114)
Delete an Isometric Directory (on page 114)
115
116
SECTION 7
Isometric Projects
An isometric project represents a set of isometric drawing styles and associated data that are
used by ISOGEN to create specific types of isometric drawings. Isometric generation software
logs into the project. When you initially create an isometric project, it is application-specific,
meaning that it is to be used a specific product. This is because different applications require
that different isometric drawing styles to be available, as is determined by the type of isometric
drawings and report deliverables the application is required to produce. For example,
SmartPlant Isometrics provides as-designed or as-built piping isometric drawings, whereas
SmartPlant Spoolgen produces isometric drawings that are suitable for pipe fabrication in the
shop and construction of the spools on-site.
Network Projects
You can set up isometric projects on a network server so that multiple client workstations can
concurrently access and share project configurationsy.
For a description of mapped drives and UNC paths for network projects, see Options (on
page 36).
For more information about connecting to network isometric directory and associated
projects, see Connect to an Isometric Directory (on page 113).
Access Rights
You can control access to any I-Configure project. Access rights can be password protected.
The first person to set the access rights is able to set a password to prevent others from
modifying it. An isometric project can then be set up so that others can see and use it but cannot
save changes to the project or to any of the isometric drawing styles in the project.
New Project Dialog Box (on page 121)

Enable Project Dialog Box (on page 122)
Project Access Rights Dialog Box (on page 122)
Create a new isometric project (on page 118)

Define project access rights (on page 119)
Set up an isometric project on a network server (on page 119)
Connect to a network isometric project (on page 120)
Enable an isometric project (on page 120)
Delete an isometric project (on page 121)
Copy and paste an isometric project (on page 121)
117
Isometric Projects
Isometric Project Common Tasks

The following tasks are frequently used when you create a new isometric project.
Create New Isometric Projects

The isometric drawing styles used by ISOGEN to create specific types of drawings are
contained within projects. You can create a stand-alone isometric project that supports only a
single user or an isometric project that exists in a network configuration that can be accessed by
multiple users simultaneously. For more information, see Create a new isometric project (on
page 118) and Set up an isometric project on a network server (on page 119).
Import Data from External Sources

You can import isometric projects from several external sources. When you import an isometric
project, it is shown immediately in the project view panel. For more information, see Import
Isometric Projects (on page 123).
Backup Isometric Project Data

You can save an isometric project and its associated references to external files in a single
folder. In addition, you can also choose to include any existing output files such as drawings and
reports, in the backup. For more information, see Backup Isometric Projects (on page 122).
Create a new isometric project

1. Do one of the following:
Select an existing isometric directory in the Project View panel.
2. Click Create New Project
. Alternatively, click File > New > Project.
The New Project dialog box (on page 121) appears.
3. Type a name for the new isometric project in the New Project Name box.
4. In the Application list, select the name of the product to which the new isometric project
applies.
5. In the Available Styles list, select the drawing styles required for the new isometric project.
You can include and exclude a drawing style by selecting and clearing its check box.
By default, all drawing styles that are suitable for use with the selected product are shown
as selected. To exclude a style, clear its check box.
6. Click OK.
The software creates the isometric project and its associated drawing styles, and displays it
in the Project View panel.
118
An isometric project must be created for use with a specific product. However, it is possible
to enable a project for use with other products.
The isometric drawing styles that display in the Available Styles list depend on the product
that is selected in the Application list.
When you create an isometric project for SmartPlant Spoolgen, you must also initialize the
project attributes by specifying the value for the Project ID Type.
Isometric Projects
Define project access rights

1. Select a project in the Project View panel, and click Tools > Project Access Rights.
The Project Access Rights dialog box (on page 122) appears.
2. Set the access rights for the selected project.
3. If needed, type a password.
To avoid situations where the isometric project cannot be modified, such as when
the password is forgotten, ensure that you make a note of the password used for each
project. It is the responsibility of each individual or Project Administrator to ensure that any
password protection used to secure projects or styles against unwanted modification are
backed up or made note of in accordance with the data loss prevention and protection policy
of your company.
4. Click OK.
After a password is set, the access rights cannot be changed unless the correct password is
entered.
If the access rights are set to Write, everyone working in the isometric project is allowed to
save changes to the associated drawing styles and export the isometric drawing style
settings. If set to Read Only, everyone working in the project can make changes, but the
changes cannot be saved or exported.
When you set project access rights to Write using a valid password, any existing password
is cleared.
Set up an isometric project on a network server

1. Create a new isometric directory (on page 113).
2. Create a new isometric project (on page 118) and its associated drawing styles.
To avoid file conflict errors, it is also necessary to change the output path for
the message file for each isometric drawing style in the project configuration, so that the file
is written locally, for example to C:\TEMP, when users attempt to use the same style
concurrently. ISOGEN then outputs the message file it creates to this local folder instead of
to the same folder on the network server.
3. Use Windows Explorer to create the Message file path, such as C:\TEMP, if one does not
exist.
4. For each isometric drawing style in the project, add an item to a collection to the
ISOGENFiles collection in the Supplementary.ReportFiles object. This definition sets the
path to C:\Local Folder Name\Message Filename. In the example below, the file path to the
Message file is defined as C:\TEMP\Spool.mes.
You can use the Reports wizard (on page 82) to set the message file path.
Use an appropriate filename for the message file, such as Spool.mes for the Spool
style.
Set the drive on which the isometric directory and isometric project to be connected to
resides to be shared, and set the required permissions for the share.
119
Isometric Projects
Connect to a network isometric project
1. Click Create Isometric Directory
.
2. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, browse to the network path where the isometric
directory to be connected to resides, select the isometric project, and then click OK.
The project appears in the Project View panel.
Enable an isometric project

You can enable existing isometric projects to work with other products installed on the same
workstation. For example, a project initially created for I-Run can also be enabled to work with
SmartPlant Isometrics. For more information, see the Enable Isometirc Project Matrix below.
Default
SmartPlant
Isometrics
SmartPlant
Isometrics I-Tools
SmartPlant
Spoolgen
Default
SmartPlant Isometrics
SmartPlant Isometrics I-Tools
SmartPlant Spoolgen
1. Select the isometric project you want to enable in the Project View panel.
2. Click Enable Project
. Alternatively, click File > Enable Project.
The Enable Project dialog box (on page 122) appears.
3. Select the application that the isometric project is to be enabled for in the Application list.
4. Specify the isometric drawing styles required by the project. You include and exclude
drawing styles by selecting and clearing the check boxes.
120
The isometric project cannot be re-enabled for itself. In other words, the application that the
project was first created for is not shown in the list.
Some isometric drawing styles are considered mandatory and some optional. For example,
SmartPlant Spoolgen requires the SGImport.xml and Spool.xml drawing style files. As such,
these are considered mandatory styles. Mandatory drawing styles cannot be unselected.
Isometric Projects
Delete an isometric project

Deleting a project cannot be undone.
1. In the Project View panel, select the isometric project you want to delete.
2. Click Delete
. Alternatively, click Edit > Delete, or right-click the isometric project in the
Project View panel and then click Delete.
Copy and paste an isometric project

1. In the Project View panel, select the isometric project you want to copy.
2. Click Copy
. Alternatively, click Edit > Copy, or right-click the project and then click
Copy on the shortcut menu.
3. In the Project View panel, select the isometric directory in which you want to paste the
project.
4. Click Paste
.
The isometric project and all of its associated drawing styles are pasted into the selected
isometric directory.
You can repeat steps 1-4 to copy and paste multiple isometric projects.
New Project Dialog Box

Sets options for creating a new isometric project.
Current isometric directory - Displays the name of the current isometric directory. This setting
is read only.
New project name - Type the name of the new isometric project.
Application - Select the name of the application with which the new isometric project is to be
used.
Available styles - Lists the isometric drawing styles that are currently available. By default, all
drawing styles that are suitable for use with the selected product are shown as selected. If a
style is not required, clear its check box so that it is excluded when the isometric project is
created.
Type - Indicates whether the isometric drawing style is Optional or Mandatory. Use the check
boxes to select or clear an isometric drawing style from the isometric project.
Name - Displays the name of the isometric drawing style.
Template - Displays the name of the template XML file on which the drawing style is based.
OK - Creates the isometric project using the settings you have defined.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box with creating the isometric project.
See Also
121
Isometric Projects
Enable Project Dialog Box

Sets options for enabling isometric projects to work with other applications that are installed on
the same workstation.
Application - Select the application for which you want to enable the isometric project.
Type - Indicates whether the isometric drawing style is optional or mandatory. An optional style
can be added to or removed from the project by selecting and clearing its check box. You
cannot remove a mandatory drawing style from the project.
Name - Displays the name of the isometric drawing style.
Template - Displays the name of the template XML file that contains the isometric drawing style
configuration data. Template files are delivered to the $Program Files$\Common
Files\Intergraph\I-Configure folder.
See Also
Project Access Rights Dialog Box

Sets options for defining access to an isometric project.
Project access rights - Specifies the level of access. Select Write or Read-only.
Password - Assigns a password to the isometric project.
See Also
Define Project Access Rights (on page 119)
Backup Isometric Projects

You can save selected isometric projects and their associated references to external files in a
single folder. In addition, you can also choose to include any existing output files such as
drawings and reports, in the backup. After the information is saved, you can restore that version
of the isometric project and its associated data in the event of system failure. The Backup
Project command is also used to permit the sending of isometric project data to another
location.
Backup Project Dialog Box (on page 123)
Create a backup of an isometric project

1. Select an isometric project in the Project View panel, and click Tools > Backup Project.
You can also select an isometric drawing style in the Project View panel that
belongs to the project you want to backup.
The Backup Project dialog box (on page 123) displays.
2. Click the browse button
, navigate to the folder in which the backup is to be saved, and
click OK.
The software displays the full path location and folder name in the Specify folder for
backup box.
3. Modify the settings as needed.
122
Isometric Projects
The Include Project data and Include external data options are selected by default.
If there are any existing drawings or reports within the selected project's drawing styles that
you want included in the backup, select Include existing Style outputs (Drawings and
Reports).
4. Click OK.
When the backup is complete, the software displays an informational message.
5. Click OK to close the message box.
Backup Project Dialog Box

Sets options for backing up the selected isometric project.
Specify folder for backup - Type the full path location to the folder that contains the isometric
project that you want to back up.
Include Project data - Includes all project level files as part of the backup. This includes the
SmartPlant Spoolgen workflow database and any SmartPlant Isometrics POD files. This is the
default setting.
Include external data - Includes any external file that is referenced from the isometric project
as part of the backup. This is the default setting.
Include existing Style outputs (Drawings and Reports) - Includes any drawings and reports
that currently exist within any of the drawing styles associated with the selected isometric project
as part of the backup.
OK - Starts the backup process. This option is available only when a valid location is specified in
the Specify folder for backup box.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box without backing up the isometric project.
See Also
Create a Backup of an Isometric Project (on page 122)
123
Isometric Projects
Import Isometric Projects

You can import an existing PipMan, Spoolgen 4 or I-Configure-based projects into I-Configure.
You can also import an I-Configure XML backup file. When you import an I-Configure project
from backup, you are essentially restoring a previously backed up version of an isometric
project, including any external data referenced in the project and all project level files, such as
the SmartPlant Spoolgen workflow database and any SmartPlant Isometrics POD files. This
feature is useful for situations when you are moving projects and styles from one location to
another.
After the import is complete, the imported project appears in the Project View panel. You can
edit an imported project and modify its properties in the same manner as with an isometric
project that you create using I-Configure.
PipMan and Spoolgen 4 projects must be imported into I-Configure before they can
be used with any other product that uses I-Configure to create and manage projects and styles.
Import of isometric project and isometric drawing style settings is intelligent. If an isometric
project folder is replicated, meaning that there is a common structure apart from the drive, then
the software modifies the path in the needed style (OPT or FLS) so that it points to the
referenced file in its new location. For example, if you copy a project folder from G:\M5000 to
C:\Users\Data\CompanyName\MP4000, the software identifies the common root as MP4000.
Any file referenced from an OPT file in this path will have its path modified. Using the previous
example, the software modifies the G:\MP4000\Data\CPT.fdf file to the
C:\Users\Data\CompanyName\MP4000\Data\CPT.fdf file, presuming that this file exists.
Import Project Dialog Box (on page 126)

Import Project from Backup Dialog Box (on page 127)
124
Import a PipMan project (on page 124)

Import a Spoolgen 4 project (on page 125)
Import an I-Configure-based project (on page 125)
Import an isometric project from backup (on page 126)
Isometric Projects
Import a PipMan project

1. Create a new isometric directory (on page 113) in I-Configure.
2. Click Tools > Import Project > From File.
The Import Project dialog box (on page 126) appears.
, navigate to the *.pip file for the PipMan project to be imported,
and click OK.
The software displays the full path location and file name in the Import settings from box.
4. Type a name for the isometric project in the New project name box.
5. Specify the required import options, and then click OK.
6. Select the application to which the isometric project applies in the Application list.
7. Click OK.
8. If required, click Yes to view the log file; otherwise, click No.
Until they're imported, PipMan projects are always shown in magenta in the Project View
panel.
After import, the original PipMan project remains on the drive as a backup copy.
Import a Spoolgen 4 project

1. Create a new isometric directory (on page 113) in I-Configure.
, navigate to the *.ini file for the Spoolgen 4 project to be
imported, and click OK.
The software displays the full path location and file name in the Import settings from box.
5. Define the required import options, and then click OK.
6. Select the application to which the isometric project belongs in the Application list, and then
click OK.
7. If necessary, click Yes to view the log file; otherwise, click No.
Existing Spoolgen 4 projects are not shown in the Project View panel.
The imported Spoolgen 4 project is only available for use with Spoolgen 5.
After import, the original Spoolgen 4 project remains on the drive as a backup copy.
Import an I-Configure-based project

When you import an I-Configure project, you must select a Project_Data.xml (on page 31) file.
By default, the project settings (project defaults, attributes) and data (all files in the source
project folder) are copied to the new isometric project. Optionally, you can suppress the copying
of data files leaving the new isometric project with the identical structure as the old one but
empty.
125
Isometric Projects
1. Create a new isometric directory (on page 113).
, navigate to the *_Data.xml file for the I-Configure-based
project to be imported, and click OK.
The software displays the full path location and XML file name in the Import settings from
box.
a. Click OK to accept the defaults.
b. Select Import Project settings only if only the project settings are to be imported, and
then click OK.
The isometric project and all associated isometric drawing styles, including any existing
drawing and report files and all files in the source project folder, are copied to the new
isometric project. If you selected Import Project settings only, only the drawing style XML
files are imported. Previously generated drawing and report files are not imported.
Import an isometric project from backup

1. In the Project View panel, select an isometric directory, project, or style.
2. Click Tools > Import Project > From Backup.
The Import Project from Backup dialog box (on page 127) appears.
, navigate to the folder that contains the backup XML file that
you want to restore, and click OK.
The software displays the full path location and file name in the Path to project backup
box. The software also updates the dialog box to display all mandatory and optional drawing
styles that exist within the isometric project to be restored.
4. If the isometric project being restored already exists on the target machine, specify whether
you want the existing project to be replaced or updated.
5. Use the Select Optional Styles to restore check boxes to indicate which optional drawing
styles are to be restored with the isometric project.
6. Click OK.
When the import is complete, the software displays an informational message.
The Project View panel displays the restored isometric project, including all restored
isometric drawing styles.
See Also
AccessRights (on page 132)
LockedBy (on page 133)
126
Isometric Projects
Import Project Dialog Box

Sets options for importing isometric projects into I-Configure.
Import settings from - Specifies the isometric project settings to be imported. In the Files of
type list, select the file type to be imported. Support file types are listed below.
Project Type
File Type
PipMan
*.pip
Spoolgen 4
*.ini
I-Configure
*_Data.xml
The import options listed below only display after you have specified the project settings
to be imported.
New project name - Type a name for the isometric project. This is what displays in the Project
View panel.
Preserve all current style control files and mark as Never Export - This option is available
only when you import a PipMan or Spoolgen 4 project.
Import Project settings only - Imports only the isometric project settings, which includes the
isometric drawing style XML files. However, previously generated drawing and report files are
excluded from the import. This option is available only when you import an I-Configure-based
isometric project.
See Also
Import Isometric Projects (on page 123)
Import Project from Backup Dialog Box

Sets options for restoring an isometric project from a backup.
Path to Project backup - Type the full path location and filename of the backup isometric
project XML file to be restored.
Replace the existing Project - Deletes the contents of the existing isometric project and
replaces with the contents of the backup, resulting in a new isometric project. This option is not
available if an existing project with the same name does not exist on the target machine.
Update the existing Project - Overwrites the existing isometric project with the backup data.
This option maintains the existing folder structure. Project files (or drawing styles) with the same
name are updated. Files that are contained within the existing isometric project, but are not part
of the backup, are untouched.
Keep backup of the current Project data - Restores the isometric project and simultaneously
copies the existing isometric project to a new folder named Project_Backup_n, where Project is
the name of the isometric project and n indicates the revision number of the backup, as in
PipingProj_Backup_1, PipingProj_Backup_2, and so on. This is the default setting.
Mandatory Styles - Lists the mandatory isometric drawing styles that exist in the project to be
restored. This option is read only.
Select Optional Styles to restore - Lists the optional isometric drawing styles that exist in the
project to be restored. To include an optional style, select its check box. To exclude an optional
style, clear its check box.
OK - Restores the isometric project.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box without restoring the isometric project.
127
Isometric Projects
Isometric Project Object Properties

The properties for each isometric project are stored in their own object. These properties are
read-only and cannot be modified. When you select an isometric project in the Project View
panel, the software updates the Properties panel to display the properties specific to the
selected project. In the example below, the Properties panel shows the properties that have
been defined for the Piping_Project1 project.
128
Name (on page 129)

Path (on page 129)
Source (on page 129)
AppList (on page 129)
AppCount (on page 130)
WeldGaps (on page 130)
ElbowConversion (on page 131)
ChangeStyleList (on page 132)
SystemXML (on page 132)
ProjectXML (on page 132)
IsoDirectoryName (on page 133)
SystemMaterialManagerXML (on page 133)
ProjectMaterialManagerXML (on page 133)
SystemMaterialDataXML (on page 133)
ProjectMaterialDataXML (on page 133)
Isometric Projects
Name
Specifies the project folder name.
Path
Displays the path to the project folder. The project folder contains all of the styles that have been
defined for the project.
Source
Displays the vendor-specific string that was defined when the project was created. For example,
a project created by an Intergraph product, such as SmartPlant Isometrics, has the Source set
to Intergraph. The Source string is controlled by the SetSource method as described in the
ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml (on page 31) file.
The Source property allows a vendor to judge whether its software can use the project, and
allows you to identify which projects are created by which vendor software products.
Some products, such as SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen, can share a
project.
This is a read only property and cannot be modified.
See Also
AppList
Displays the names of the enabled products in a semi-colon delimited list, such as
Spoolgen;SP Isometrics.
129
Isometric Projects
AppCount
Displays the number of software products enabled on the project.
See Also
WeldGaps
Displays an XML-formatted text string, which defines the rules for ISOGEN to allow for weld
gaps, weld shrinkage, connection gaps, and connection insertion lengths, when dimensioning
and adjusting cut piece lengths.
Initially the WeldGaps property value is empty. To populate, double-click the property value
box and then click File > Update in the WeldGaps window.
If any data is present in the WeldGaps property, you can set the UseWeldGapData
property on the MaterialList.CutList object to True so that data is written to the ISOGEN
Welding Definition (WDF) file.
When you import a style, if the WDF file contains a WELD-GAPS entry, both the WeldGaps
and MaterialList.CutList.UseWeldGapData properties are set to True.
See Also
CutList Object (on page 402)
Import Isometric Drawing Style Settings from File (on page 146)
UseWeldGapData (on page 405)
130
Isometric Projects
ElbowConversion
Displays an XML-format text string. This property defines the rules for the following:
Conversion of elbows to pulled bends.
Cut length adjustments that ISOGEN makes to the length of cut pieces to allow for extra
lengths of pipe to satisfy the requirements of particular bending machines.
If any data is present in the ElbowConversion property, it is used for converting elbows to
bends. Also, if data is present, then all styles that output cut list information must set the
UseTangentData property on the MaterialList CutList object to True to make sure that the cut
list values are correct.
Initially, the ElbowConversion property value is empty. Double-click the property value box
and then click File > Update in the ElbowConversion window.
When you import a style, if the Data Definition (DDF) file contains a
STANDARD-BEND-LENGTHS entry, the ElbowConversion and
MaterialList.CutList.UseTangentData properties are both set to True. The example below
shows a section of a DDF file with a STANDARD-BEND-LENGTHS entry.
See Also
CutList Object (on page 402)
Import Drawing Style Settings from File (on page 146)
UseTangentData (on page 406)
131
Isometric Projects
ChangeStyleList
Controls whether you can add styles to and delete styles from the project. If set to True, you can
add and delete styles. If there is no write access to the ProjectList.xml file in the isometric
directory on a network project, ChangeListStyle is set to False, which prohibits all add/delete
functions.
If AccessRights is set to ReadOnly, the ChangeStyleList property is also set to False.
See Also
ProjectList.xml (on page 34)
Set up an Isometric Project on a Network Server (on page 119)
AccessRights
Indicates the level of access to the project. You can set AccessRights to Write or ReadOnly.
To change the access rights on a project, you must use the Project Access Rights
command. For more information, see Define project access rights.
You can lock the style files against unwanted modification in two ways:
1. Set the file system access control on the style XML file or style folder.
2. Set a password in the Project Access Rights dialog box.
The style CanWrite and CanExport properties indicate whether you have rights to save the
style or export the style to ISOGEN control files.
The AccessRights property is set to ReadOnly if you do not have write access to the
Project_data.xml file in the project folder. In this case, no changes can be saved to project
properties.
See Also
CanExport (on page 151)
CanWrite (on page 151)
Set up an Isometric Project on a Network Server (on page 119)
SystemXML
Displays the path to the SystemPOD.xml configuration file.
This is a system file, and its contents should not be modified.
ProjectXML
Displays the path to the PipelineProject.xml file. This configuration file contains the
user-specified extensions to pipeline, component, weld and bolt attributes that have been
defined for the project.
132
Isometric Projects
LockedBy
Displays the name of the individual who locked the project, presuming that AccessRights is set
to ReadOnly. Otherwise, the property is blank.
See Also
Define Project Access Rights (on page 119)
IsoDirectoryName
Specifies the name of the isometric directory that contains the current project. An isometric
directory can contain multiple projects. This information is read-only and cannot be modified.
SystemMaterialManagerXML
Displays the path to the SystemMaterialManager.xml configuration file.
ProjectMaterialManagerXML
Displays the path to the ProjectMaterialManager.xml file. This configuration file contains
user-specified materials and attributes.
SystemMaterialDataXML
Displays the path to the SystemMaterialData.xml configuration file.
ProjectMaterialDataXML
Displays the path to the ProjectMaterialData.xml file. This configuration file contains
user-specified information regarding the components that are used in the ProjectPipeline.xml
and ProjectMaterialManager.xml configuration files.
133
SECTION 8
Isometric Drawing Styles

An isometric drawing style contains a group of object properties that control some aspect of the
drawings and reports that are produced by I-Configure. Collectively, these drawing styles
contain all the properties necessary to control ISOGEN, resulting in a set of drawings and report
files. The way that you configure styles determines what the isometric drawing looks like when it
is generated and what information is included on a report. Multiple drawing styles can exist
side-by-side to produce different outputs from the same design file.
Each isometric drawing style has its own set of object properties that are stored in an XML file
named <Style Name>.xml. During isometric drawing generation, the contents of this XML file are
converted into the set of text control files that are read by ISOGEN.
I-Configure includes a set of template XML files that you can use as a starting point for defining
isometric drawing styles to meet your specific requirements. After you configure a user-defined
drawing style, it can be used as a template for future projects. For more information, see Sample
Files (on page 34).
During a default installation of the software, the isometric drawing style template XML
files are delivered to the <Installation Drive>:\Program Files\Common
Files\Intergraph\I-Configure\Templates folder.
Drawing Preview
The Preview Drawing
command exports the current isometric drawing style and runs
ISOGEN on a standard Piping Component File (PCF) to create an isometric drawing. You can
then view the drawing to see the effect of the current style settings on the isometric drawing
output. The default drawing output is DWG. If ISOGEN encounters any errors during drawing
generation, they are written to a message file, which you can also view.
New Style Dialog Box (on page 142)

Drawing Preview Dialog Box (on page 143)
Create a new isometric drawing style (on page 136)

Select an isometric drawing style (on page 137)
View ISOGEN controls (on page 137)
Copy and paste an isometric drawing style (on page 139)
Delete an isometric drawing style (on page 140)
Save an isometric drawing style (on page 141)
Preview the drawing (on page 141)
See Also
Import and Export Style Settings (on page 144)
Backup Isometric Style Settings (on page 143)
135
Isometric Drawing Style Common Tasks

The following tasks are frequently used when you create a new isometric drawing style.
Create New Isometric Styles

You can add a new isometric drawing style that is based on any one of the template files that
are delivered with the product. For more information, see Create a new isometric drawing style
(on page 136).
Import Data from External Sources

You can import drawing styles into an isometric project from several external sources. When you
import an isometric drawing style, it is shown immediately in the Project View panel. For more
information, see Import and Export Style Settings (on page 144).
Develop the Look and Feel of Drawings

You can change the look and feel of an isometric drawing by changing the drawing style
properties that appear in the Detail panel. Style object properties can specify everything from
drawing content to the system controls for output definition. For more information, see Appendix:
Isometric Drawing Style Objects (on page 167).
Use Alternative Text

AText is an abbreviation for alternative text, an ISOGEN feature that allows you to change or
remove any text on the isometric drawing. You can substitute your own text in place of standard
ISOGEN words. For more information, see Alternative Text Object (on page 173).
Configure the Material List

You can specify three different styles for the material lists that are plotted on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Drawing Setup Tool (on page 37).
Create a new isometric drawing style

New isometric drawing styles are based on one of the templates that are delivered with
I-Configure.
a. Create a new isometric directory and project.
Create a new isometric project (on page 118)
b. Select an existing isometric project in the Project View panel.
2. Click New Style
. Alternatively, click File > New > Style.
The New Style dialog box (on page 142) appears.
3. Select the product to which the isometric drawing style applies in the Application list.
The software displays all the template styles that are available for the selected product.
4. Clear the check boxes of the XML style templates that you do not want to create, and
ensure any required XML style template is selected.
5. Double-click the Name box of the selected isometric drawing style, highlight the existing
style name, and then type the new style name.
136

6. Click OK.
The software displays the new isometric drawing style under the selected isometric project
in the Project View panel.
You can edit the properties of the new style as required. For more information, see Detail
Panel (on page 26).
If you leave all style templates checked, and click OK, any existing styles with the same
name under the selected project are duplicated, and _1 is appended to the style name. For
example, Final-Basic becomes Final-Basic_1.
Before a style can be used, it must first be exported. When you export a style, a variety of
control files that ISOGEN requires to process isometric drawings and reports, such as *.opl,
*.pos, *.alt, or *.fls files, are created based on the settings made for the style. For more
information, see Export isometric drawing style settings (on page 147).
You can also create styles when a new project is created.
Select an isometric drawing style
In the Project View pane, select an isometric drawing style in the tree view.
As in Windows Explorer, you can click

and
to expand and close the nodes in the
tree view.
You can use the Style objects in the Detail panel to modify the selected isometric drawing
style.
View ISOGEN controls

1. Select an isometric drawing style in the Project View panel, and click Tools > View
ISOGEN Controls.
The View ISOGEN Controls dialog box appears, allowing you to preview the ISOGEN
settings for the selected style. The example below lists the configuration files for the
Final-Basic style.
137

2. To view the contents of a configuration file, double-click it.
The software opens it using your default text editor. The example below shows the contents
of the Final-Basic Drawing Definition (DDF) file.
3. To close the file, click File > Cancel.

138
Copy and paste an isometric drawing style

1. In the Project View panel, select an isometric drawing style and then click Copy
.
Alternatively, click Edit > Copy, or right-click the style and then select Copy in the shortcut
menu.
2. Click Paste
. Alternatively, click Edit > Paste, or right-click in the Project Panel and
then click Paste.
The New Style Name dialog box appears.
139

3. Type a name for the new style in the New style name box, and click OK.
The software displays a default name based on the style being copied.
The software creates a copy of the style and adds it to the styles listed in the Project View
panel, as shown in the example below. The properties of the original style are persisted to
the new style.
140
Delete an isometric drawing style

Deleting a drawing style cannot be undone.
1. In the Project View panel, select the isometric drawing style that you want to delete.
2. Click Delete
.Alternatively, click Edit > Delete, or right-click the style name in the
Project View panel, and click Delete.
Save an isometric drawing style

Before any changes that you make to an isometric drawing style can be used, you must first
save the updated style.
Click Save
. Alternatively, click File > Save.
The software saves the current I-Configure settings to the <Style Name>.xml file. This is a
necessary step before any new settings become available in the application being used.
Preview the drawing

1. Select the isometric drawing style in the Project View panel, and click Preview Drawing
on the toolbar. Alternatively, click Tools > Preview Drawing.
ISOGEN processes the data. When processing completes, I-Configure opens the Isogen
Preview dialog box.
141

2. Select the file you want to view in the Files generated list, and click View.
If you select DRAWING in the File Type list, the software opens up the drawing in the View
window on the Basic Setup page. An example is shown below.
If you select MESSAGE or MATERIAL, the software opens the file using the default text
editor.
3. Click Close to return to I-Configure window.
The default drawing output is DWG.

To view any errors reported by ISOGEN, open the message file.
New Style Dialog Box

Sets options for a new isometric drawing style.
Application - Associates the isometric drawing style with an application. Select an application in
the list.
Optional styles - Lists all of the template styles that are currently available. Use the check
boxes to indicate on which template XML file the new isometric drawing style is to be based.
142
Drawing Preview Dialog Box

Isogen returned - Displays any errors that ISOGEN encountered during the isometric
generation process.
Files generated - List all of the files output by the generation process.
View - Displays the contents of the selected file. Report files are opened using a default text
editor, such as Notepad.
Close - Closes the dialog box.
143
Backup Isometric Style Settings

You can save selected isometric drawing styles and their associated references to external files,
such as the backing sheet, in a single folder. In addition, you can also choose to include any
drawing style-related output files, such as drawings and reports, in the backup. After the
isometric drawing style settings are saved, you can restore that version of the style and its
associated data in the event of system failure. The Backup Style command is also used to
permit the sending of isometric drawing style settings to another location.
Backup Style Dialog Box (on page 144)
Create a backup of an isometric drawing style

1. Select an isometric drawing style in the Project View panel, and click Tools > Backup
Style.
The Backup Project dialog box (on page 123) displays.
2. Click Browse
, and navigate to the folder in which the backup is to be saved.
3. Modify the options as needed.
Include external data is selected by default. If there are any drawings or reports within
the selected drawing style that you want included in the backup, select Include existing
Style outputs (Drawings and Reports).
4. Click OK.
When the backup is complete, the software displays an informational message.
Backup Style Dialog Box

Sets options for backing up the selected isometric drawing style settings.
Specify folder for backup - Enter the full path location to the folder that contains the isometric
drawing style that you want to back up.
Include external data - Includes references to external files, such as backing sheets, as part of
the backup. This is the default setting.
Include existing Style outputs (Drawings and Reports) - Includes any drawings and reports
that currently exist within the selected isometric drawing style as part of the backup.
OK - Starts the backup process. This option is available only when a valid location is specified in
the Specify folder for backup box.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box without backing up the isometric drawing style.
144
Import and Export Style Settings

You are not limited to using only the style XML templates that are delivered with the software.
I-Configure allows you to import isometric drawing styles into an isometric project from the
sources listed below.
I-Configure XML style file
Personal ISOGEN FLS file
SPOOLGEN OPT file
PDS ISOGEN DEF file

Alias .IDF file
I-Configure XML backup file
When you import an I-Configure XML backup file, you are essentially restoring a previously
backed up version of an isometric drawing style's settings, including any external data
referenced in the project. This feature is useful for situations you are moving projects and styles
from one location to another.
You can also import isometric drawing style fragments into the current style. A style fragment is
contained in an XML file that specifies a set of properties to be set and/or a set of members for a
collection object, such as a set of TextColumns to be used with MaterialList.SummaryFile
object.
Before an isometric drawing style can be used, it must first be exported. When you export a
drawing style, a variety of control files that ISOGEN requires to process isometric drawings and
reports (*.opl, *.pos, *.alt, *.fls), are created based on the settings made for the style.
Import Style Dialog Box (on page 147)

Import Style from Backup Dialog Box (on page 148)
Import isometric drawing style settings from file (on page 146)
Import isometric drawing style settings from backup (on page 146)
Import an isometric drawing style fragment (on page 147)
Export isometric drawing style settings (on page 147)
Export an isometric drawing style fragment (on page 147)
145
Import isometric drawing style settings from file

1. In the Project View panel, select the isometric project in which you want to import the
isometric drawing style settings.
2. Click Tools > Import Style.
The Import Style dialog box appears.
3. Click Browse
and navigate to the XML file whose style settings you want to import.
The Select Style Settings to Import dialog box appears.
If you know the full path location and file name of the style XML file, enter it in the
Import settings from box instead of using the browse feature
4. Select the file type, navigate to the required file, and then click Open.
5. In the Import Style dialog box, specify the required import options, and then click OK.
Depending on the current status of the styles within the project, do one of the
following:
If the isometric drawing style being imported does not exist in the isometric project,
select Create a new style.
If the isometric drawing style already exists within the isometric project but is to be used
as a basis for another new drawing style, select Create a new style, and type a name
for the new style.
If the isometric drawing style already exists in the isometric project, and you want its
settings to be overwritten, clear the Clear style first checkbox, and select Import into
the current style.
To import into an existing style but clear the contents of the style first, select Import into
the current style and Clear style first checkbox.
The isometric drawing style is imported. You have an opportunity to view a log file created
during the import process.
After import, the drawing style becomes available under the isometric project into which is
was imported and is shown in the Project View panel
Import isometric drawing style settings from backup

1. In the Project View panel, select an isometric project.
2. Click Tools > Import Style > From Backup.
The Import Style from Backup dialog box (on page 148) appears.
, navigate to the folder that contains the backup drawing style
XML file that you want to restore, and click OK.
The software displays the full path location and file name in the Path to Style backup box.
4. If the isometric drawing style being restored already exists on the target machine, specify
whether you want the existing style settings to be replaced or updated.
If the isometric drawing style to be restored does not exist on the target machine, and
you do not want the software to create a backup of the current style data, clear the Keep
backup of the current Style data check box.
5. Click OK.
When the restore is complete, the software displays an informational message.
146

The Project View panel displays the restored isometric drawing style under the selected
isometric project.
Import an isometric drawing style fragment

1. In the Project View panel, select the isometric drawing style to which the style fragment
applies, such as Final-Basic.
2. Click Tools > Import Style Fragment.
3. Browse to the XML file for the style fragment, and then click Open.
I-Configure reads the content of the style fragment XML file and applies the new properties
to the isometric drawing style.
If a style fragment file exists in the same folder as a template file, with the same name
and with an .xml extension, it is automatically loaded. This allows the setting of properties
specific to the template XML file, such as margins and list locations.
Export isometric drawing style settings
Click Export Style

. Alternatively, click File > Export.
The software writes the settings to the <Style Name>.xml file.
This is not a required procedure because the products perform it for automatically before
running ISOGEN.
The Export command is useful for debugging and, if the ExportBehaviour (on page 150)
property for the style is set to Never Export, allows the style to be manually modified.
Export an isometric drawing style fragment

1. In the Project View panel, select the isometric drawing style to which the style fragment
applies, such as Final-Basic.
2. Click Tools > Export Style Fragment.
The Export Style Fragment dialog box appears.
3. Navigate to the required style fragment file, and click Save.
I-Configure reads the content of the drawing style and creates an XML file.
Import Style Dialog Box

Sets options for importing isometric drawing styles from supported sources.
Import settings from - Type the name and full path location to the isometric drawing style file
whose settings you want to import. Alternatively, click Browse
and use the Select Style
Settings to Import dialog box to navigate to the style file you want to import.
Create a new style - Creates a new isometric drawing style based on the settings of the file you
import. Use this option if the drawing style being imported does not exist in the project.
Import into current style - Overwrites the settings in the existing isometric drawing style file
with those in the imported style file. The isometric drawing style must already exist in the
isometric project.
Clear style first - Erases the contents of the existing style file and replaces them with the
contents of the imported style file.
147
Import Style from Backup Dialog Box

Sets options for restoring a previously saved I-Configure XML backup file.
Path to Style backup - Type the full path location and filename of the backup isometric drawing
style XML file to be restored.
Replace the existing Style - Deletes the settings of the existing isometric drawing style and
replaces with the settings of the backup, creating a new isometric drawing style. This option is
not available if an existing style with the same name does not exist on the target machine.
Update the existing Style - Overwrites the existing isometric drawing style settings with the
backup data. Isometric drawing styles with the same name are updated. Any settings within the
existing style that are not part of the backup are untouched.
Keep backup of the current Style data - Restores the isometric drawing style and
simultaneously copies the existing style to a new folder named Style_Backup_n, where Style is
the name of the isometric drawing style and n indicates the revision number of the backup, as in
Final-Basic_Backup_1, Final-Basic_Backup_2, and so on. This is the default setting.
OK - Restores the isometric drawing style.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box without restoring the isometric drawing style.
See Also
Import and Export Style Settings (on page 144)
148
Isometric Drawing Style Object Properties

When you select an isometric drawing style in the Project View panel, the software updates the
Properties panel to display those properties that are specific to it. In the example below, the
Properties panel is showing the default object properties that are defined for the Final-Basic
style.
You can modify any of the properties as needed to satisfy your project requirements. Some
object properties have a selection list that displays when the Value box is double-clicked. Other
object properties are typed entries: click once in the Value box to place the cursor, and type the
required value.
Name (on page 150)
Path (on page 150)
ExportBehaviour (on page 150)
StyleState (on page 150)
StyleType (on page 150)
ProjectName (on page 150)
CanWrite (on page 151)
CanExport (on page 151)
See Also
Isometric Project Object Properties (on page 128)
149
Name
Displays the name of the current isometric drawing style.
Path
Displays the file path to the <Style Name> folder. The Options (OPL) file and the Data Definition
(DDF) file are located in the <Style Name> folder.
ExportBehaviour
Controls the behavior of the File > Export command.
Always Export - Export the Style object property to the ISOGEN control files.
Export if Pending - Export the Style object property only exported if the StyleState
property is defined as Export Pending or Export and Save Pending.
Never Export - Suppress export of the Style object property.
See Also
StyleState (on page 150)
StyleState
Reports whether the isometric drawing style has been changed. If it has been changed,
StyleState also indicates whether the change has been saved and/or exported since the last
change was made. This property is read only.
Unchanged - No changes have been made.
Export Pending - Changes have been saved but not exported.
Save Pending - Changes have been exported but not saved.
Export and Save Pending - Changes have not been saved or exported.
StyleType
Indicates whether the isometric drawing style is a system style, such as the special purpose
SGImport Style (used by SmartPlant Spoolgen) or a general purpose user style. The property is
read only and has no effect on I-Configure behavior.
ProjectName
Displays the name of the isometric project to which the selected isometric drawing style belongs.
150
Options
Supplements the properties delivered with I-Configure to include properties specific to
SmartPlant 3D.
CanWrite
Controls whether the changes can be written back to the <Style Name>.xml file. To do so
requires write access to the <Style Name>.xml file. By default, the CanWrite property is set to
False if the project AccessRights property is set to Read.
See Also
CanExport
Controls whether the isometric drawing style can be exported. Exporting a style requires write
access to the style folder.
See Also
151
SECTION 9
Techniques
In This Section
Fonts in Isometric Drawings .......................................................... 153
Output a bar code on the isometric drawing .................................. 157
Add the barcode font to an AutoCAD backing sheet ..................... 158
Bends ............................................................................................. 159
Elbows ........................................................................................... 159
Weld Lists ...................................................................................... 159
Weld Logic ..................................................................................... 160
Weld Constructions ........................................................................ 161
Fonts in Isometric Drawings

You can change the font that appears on the isometric drawing. A font information file (.fif),
which contains a default collection of fonts, is delivered in the workstation setup in the [Product
Folder]\Drawings\3rdParty\Alias\ProjectManager\Data folder.
On a 64-bit computer, this file is delivered to the [Installation Drive]\Program Files
(x86)\Common Files\Alias\Data folder.
The full path location and filename of the ISOGEN font information file is specified by the
Supplementary.Fonts object (on page 457). The software reads the contents of the file and
displays a list of fonts that are available for the material list and the drawing.
If there is a requirement to use a font that is not available in the standard font information file
delivered in the workstation setup, the software supports user-specified dynamic fonts. ISOGEN
recognizes the font definition automatically during isometric drawing generation.
Select a font for isometric drawing output (on page 154)

Define a dynamic font for isometric drawing generation (on page 154)
153
Techniques
Select a font for isometric drawing output

2. In the Detail panel, expand the Drawing node and click Format.
The Properties panel displays the Drawing.Format properties.
3. Locate TextFont in the Properties list, and double-click the Value box.
A list of font styles appears.
4. Select the required font style in the list.
Define a dynamic font for isometric drawing generation

2. In the Detail panel, expand the Drawing and Dynamic Fonts nodes and click Fonts.
154
Techniques
The Properties panel displays the properties for the Drawing.DynamicFonts Fonts
collection.
3. Click Add to Collection

.
The software inserts a blank row in the Properties panel.
4. Define the options as needed. In the example below, the Calibri font is being defined as a
dynamic font.
You must define FontNumber and FontName. For more information about these
properties, see Drawing.DynamicFonts Fonts Collection (on page 290).
155
Techniques
5. Click Save
to save the changes to the selected drawing style's XML file. You must have
write permissions to the active isometric project to save changes to isometric drawing styles.
After the font is saved to the style XML file, it appears in the list of available text fonts for
thos isometric drawing style objects that have a TextFont property. Two examples are shown
below.
Figure 1: Drawing.Format.TextFont Property
Figure 2: MaterialList.TextFont Property
156
Techniques
Output a bar code on the isometric drawing

To output a bar code on the isometric, such as the example show below for the pipeline
reference, you must create an attribute.
1. In the DFAttributes collection, create an attribute:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Set the following properties as indicated:

AttributeName (on page 485) to Pipeline Reference.
BarCode (on page 336) to one of the valid codes (1,2 or 3).
CharHeight (on page 485) to appropriate value.
Font (on page 485) to the font that matches the bar code value (Bar Code 39, Bar Code 25,
Bar Code 25 Interleaved).
7. XPos (on page 485) to the X position for start of bar code.
8. YPos (on page 485) to the Y position for the start of bar code.
The required bar code must be installed in your system fonts directory.
For AutoCAD users, the backing sheet must have the bar code font defined in it.
See Also
Supplementary.TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection (on page 484)
157
Techniques
Add the barcode font to an AutoCAD backing sheet

1. Open the DWG, or DXF file, and add a new text style using the guidelines listed below.
2. In the Style Name list, set the style name to the name of the font file without the extension.
In the example above, this is Bar39.ttf.
You must ensure that the style name matches the filename specified in the ISOGEN
font information file (Fontstd.fif).
ISOGEN-FONT 151
FAMILY T
DESCRIPTION Bar Code 39
FILENAME BAR39.ttf
3. Select the required font name in the Font Name list to the required font. In the example
above, this is Bar Code 39.
4. Click Apply, and then click Close.
If the backing sheet is a DWG file, save it.
If the backing sheet is a DXF file, the file must be saved as DXF Release12 format. Use
a text editor to edit the DXF as follows:
i. Locate the second occurrence of the text style name (Bar39).
ii. Change the .TXT entry that follows it to match what you selected in the Font Name
list (Bar Code 39 in the example above).
These actions are necessary because of restrictions in SmartPlant Spoolgen, which
cannot handle DXF files later that AutoCAD Release 12. Also, the DXFOUT routine in AutoCAD
for a Release 12 version DXF does not allow references to TrueType fonts to be made. Instead,
they are changed to .TXT files.
158
Techniques
Bends
You can control the way bends are depicted on the isometric using the BendRadius and
BendRepresentation properties of the Drawing.Format object.
The dimensioning for bends is controlled by the Drawing.Dimensions object's
CoordInateOutputBends and SeparatePulledBend properties.
See Also
Drawing.Format Object (on page 242)
SeparatePulledBend (on page 223)
Elbows
You can control the elbows are depicted on the isometric using the ElbowRadius and
ElbowRepresentation properties of the Drawing.Format object. The project property
ElbowConversion is used to define the rules for this.
In SmartPlant Spoolgen, elbows can also be converted to bends.
See Also
Drawing.Format Object (on page 242)
ElbowRadius (on page 252)
ElbowRepresentation (on page 252)
Weld Lists
There are four types of plotted weld list:
1. Fixed original
2. Fixed operations box
3. Variable layout
4. User-defined
Setting the ActiveList property on the WeldList object controls this.
If this property is set to Fixed, then the ShowOperationsBox property on the FixedLayout
object below the WeldList object is used to control whether it is an Original or Operations
box weld list.
If the property is set to Variable, then the data for the VariableLayout object needs to be
set.
If this property is set to User defined, then the data for the UserDefined object needs to be
set. Also, for the user-defined weld list there must be a backing sheet, which has the
columns and headings required for the weld list.
The properties on the WeldList object need to be set for all types of weld lists, as these control
the number of welds at special situations.
The VariableLayout object's HeaderLines property sets up the text header line for the variable
layout, and the contents (MaterialList.VariableLayout TextColumns) define to ISOGEN the data,
start column, and justification on the horizontal line.
159
Techniques
The UserDefined object's properties and contents (XYColumns collection) define to ISOGEN
how the data is positioned on the isometric, such that it lines up with the columns on the backing
sheet. The properties define the start position, layout, and font for the data, and the XYColumns
collection stores each data item to be output.
Printed Weld List

The properties of the SummaryFile object below the WeldList object control the format, titles
and headers, and so on, for the printed weld list. The XYColumns collection below the
SummaryFile object stores each data item to be output, and their position along the line in the
file.
See Also
ActiveList (on page 390)
MaterialList.VariableLayout TextColumns Collection (on page 383)
ShowOperationsBox (on page 392)
WeldList.SummaryFile Object (on page 399)
WeldList.UserDefined Object (on page 394)
WeldList.VariableLayout Object (on page 393)
WeldList Object (on page 389)
Weld Logic
Logic used to control welds.
The four properties listed below control ISOGEN behavior regarding welds and weld numbers.
WeldTypes (on page 322)
WeldNumberSize (on page 321)
If ShowWelds is FALSE:
All weld numbering options are suppressed.
That is, ShowWeldNumbers, WeldTypes and WeldNumberSize are ignored.
OS 53.1 = 0 (all weld numbers are suppressed)
OS 54 = 1 (all welds are suppressed)
else (ShowWelds is TRUE)
160
Techniques
If ShowWeldNumbers is TRUE
WeldTypes and WeldNumberSize are used to control setting of Option Switch 53 Position
1, Option Switch 53 Position 4 and Option Switch 54, as shown in the table below
Weld Types
All
Fabrication Only
Erection Only
OffShore Only
All - Implied Erection as

Fabrication
WeldNumberSize OS 53 Pos 1
OS 53 Pos 4
OS 54
Small
Medium
Large
Small
Medium
Large
Small
Medium
Large
Small
Medium
Large
Small
Medium
Large
else (ShowWeldNumbers = FALSE)

WeldTypes and WeldNumberSize properties are ignored
OS 53.1 = 0 (Weld numbers are suppressed)
OS 53.4 = 2 (Offshore weld numbers are suppressed)
161
Techniques
Weld Constructions
Below are details for all the weld construction types used in ISOGEN.
Bores are indicated so that in those cases where there are two or more, it is clear what the size
is for a given weld on the weld list summary on the isometric, and in printed output summary file.
The AText numbers listed in the panels are used to change the weld type characters from the
defaults shown to the users' own definitions, if required.
90 Set On Branch
90 Reinforced Set On Branch
At reinforced set on branches like this, ISOGEN can be set to generate either three weld
numbers as shown in the previous illustration, or just two weld numbers. When the setting is for
only two weld numbers, number three is omitted.
162
Techniques
Angled Set-On Branch
Reinforced Angled Set-On Branch
numbers as shown in the previous illustration, or just two weld numbers. When the setting is for
only two weld numbers, number three is omitted.
Olet
163
Techniques
Half Coupling
Tee Bend
Tee Elbow
Trunnion Support - Dummy Tee Bend
164
Techniques
Trunnion Support - Un Reinforced
Angled Trunnion Support - Un Reinforced
Trunnion Support - Reinforced
numbers as shown above, or just two weld numbers. When the setting is for only two weld
numbers, number three is omitted.
165
Techniques
Angled Trunnion Support - Reinforced
numbers as shown above, or just two weld numbers. When the setting is for only two weld
numbers, number three is omitted.
See Also
ExtraRPadWelds (on page 390)
166
Appendix: Isometric Drawing Style Objects
APPENDIX A
Appendix: Isometric Drawing Style

Objects
Style objects are used to define the drawing output, which includes drawing symbols,
dimensions, layers, drawing frame, attributes, material lists, weld lists, and detail sketches. Each
isometric drawing style object is associated with a set of options. The list below describes the
style objects.
AlternativeTexts - Specifies text on the drawing that is different from the ISOGEN text. You
can substitute your own text terminology or language in place of the standard ISOGEN
words on the isometric drawing. For more information, see Alternative Text Object (on page
173).
Drawing - Defines general options for the isometric drawing style. For more information, see
Drawing Object (on page 174).
DrawingFrame - Specifies the content and format of the drawing frame on a drawing. The
drawing frame area can include attribute text such as the drawing number and date. For
more information, see DrawingFrame Object (on page 327).
MaterialList - Provides options to control the material list report on the isometric drawing.
For more information, see MaterialList Object (on page 346).
WeldList - Controls the ISOGEN weld list on the isometric drawing and controls the way
that ISOGEN counts welds. For more information, see WeldList Object (on page 389).
Options that deal with the representation of welds on the drawing are in the Welds
folder under Drawing. A user defined weld list is allowed only with a backing sheet. That is, if
an ISOGEN-generated drawing frame is in use, only the fixed layout and variable layout
styles are available.
CutList - Sets options for the cut list, which provides a list of pipes that are cut into smaller
lengths during construction. For more information, see CutList Object (on page 402).
Supplementary - Provides additional options for input and output files. For more
information, see Supplementary Object (on page 415).
167

Selecting a style object in the Detail panel refreshes the view of the Properties panel so that it
displays all of the selected style object's currently defined properties. In the example below, the
properties of the Drawing.Content object are displayed in the Properties panel.
Most style object properties can be modified as required by your project. Some properties have
a selection list that displays when the object property Value box is double-clicked. Other object
properties are typed entries: click once in the Value box to place the cursor, and type the
required value. Changing the value of each property ultimately determines the appearance of
the isometric drawings and report file content that is produced when the style is exported for use
in other products. In the example above, changing the True/False settings determines whether
the feature controlled by each of the properties shown is displayed on the drawing or not. For
example, setting ShowNozzles to True displays equipment nozzle indicators on the isometric
drawing. Setting it to False suppresses the display of equipment nozzle indicators.
Collections
A style object can also contain a collection of other objects, which is a set of identical and
related objects also known as definitions. For example, the MaterialList.SummaryFile object
contains a collection called TextColumns. Each object in the collection--AttributeName,
Justifiation, Start, MaxChars, and Comment--defines a single column in the SummaryFile
output. In the example below, the Properties panel shows the properties defined for the
TextColumns collection.
168
The number that appears in parentheses after the collection name indicates the number of
definitions, or objects, currently defined in the collection.
For more information, see Collections (on page 170).
In This Appendix
Collections ..................................................................................... 170
Alternative Text Object .................................................................. 173
Drawing Object .............................................................................. 174
DrawingFrame Object .................................................................... 327
MaterialList Object ......................................................................... 346
WeldList Object .............................................................................. 389
CutList Object ................................................................................ 402
Supplementary Object ................................................................... 415
169
Collections
A collection is a special type of object that holds a set of other objects. The collection has its
own properties, which apply to the collection as a whole. For example, the
MaterialList.UserDefined object contains a collection of XYColumn objects, such as the
headers used for the material list. All collections have a Count property that shows the number
of objects in the collection. When you select a collection in the Detail panel, the Properties
panel displays its definitions.
Comment
You use the Comment column to enter a text comment for any definition contained in
TextColumns and XYColumns collections.
If any text is entered in this field, it is output as a comment--preceded by a "!"--to the relevant
data or summary report file. As an example, consider the following:
Declared attribute names are no longer output automatically as a comment in the MLD/WDF If a
SmartPlant Isometrics I-Data Integrator project is dependent on this to generate column names
170

in output files, you can now manually set these values in the Comment column instead. Any
comment field in an imported MLD is preserved.
When you right-click a definition or row that belongs to a collection in the Properties panel,
the software displays a shortcut menu that provides quick access to several useful
commands, such as those used to manipulate the order of the definitions. The Clear
command clears the value of the definition.
Use the Clear command on the shortcut menu to clear the value of a definition.
Use the commands on the shortcut menu to manipulate the order of the definitions (as rows
in the collection).
To change the value of a definition, do one of the following:
c. Double-click it, and select a new value from those available in a drop-down or pop-up
list.
d. Click once in the field to place the cursor, and type a new value.
e. Browse to a file to set a file path.
Add an item to a collection (on page 171)

Remove an item from a collection (on page 172)
Add an item to a collection

There are several different collections in I-Configure, but they all use the same mechanism to
add data entries.
Click Add to Collection
Alternatively, you can click Add Row on the shortcut menu.
171
Remove an item from a collection

There are several different collections in I-Configure, but they all use the same mechanism to
remove data entries.
Click Remove from Collection
Alternatively, you can click Delete Row on the shortcut menu.
Row Manipulation
There are various features available on the shortcut menu that allow the user to control the
number and order of the objects (Definitions/Rows) that make up the contents of a collection.
Add a row (on page 172)

Delete a row (on page 172)
Copy a row (on page 172)
Move up a row (on page 173)
Move down a row (on page 173)
Add a row
5. Click in the last row in the collection.
6. Right-click and then click Add Row in the shortcut menu.
7. Double-click the various fields of the row to change the values, to set file paths, and so on.
Delete a row
8. Click in the row you want to delete.
9. Right-click and then click Delete Row in the shortcut menu.
Copy a row
10. Select the row to be copied.
11. Right-click and then click Copy Row in the shortcut menu.
The row is copied and appears beneath the row that was copied.
12. Double-click the various fields of the row to change some of the values, to set file paths, and
so on.
172
Move up a row
13. Select the row you want to move up the list.
14. Right-click and then click Move Row Up in the shortcut menu.
The row moves up one level to be higher in the list.
15. Repeat to move the row further up the list.
Move down a row

16. Select the row that you want to move down the list.
17. Right-click and then click Move Row Down in the shortcut menu.
The row moves down one level to be higher in the list.
18. Repeat to move the row further down the list.
Comment
You use the Comment column to enter a text comment for any definition contained in
TextColumns and XYColumns collections.
If any text is entered in this field, it is output as a comment--preceded by a "!"--to the relevant
data or summary report file. As an example, consider the following:
173
Alternative Text Object

Contains a collection called ATexts, which is used to store the definitions of changes to ISOGEN
standard text. For more information, see AlternativeTexts ATexts Collection (on page 174).
The AlternativeTexts object has only one property:
Count (on page 174)
Count
Displays the number of ATexts stored in the ATexts collection.
See Also
AlternativeTexts ATexts Collection (on page 174)
AlternativeTexts ATexts Collection

Stores the definitions of changes to ISOGEN standard text. The value that the software displays
after the name is a count of how many definitions are stored in the collection, as indicated in the
following illustration by ATexts(13) in the Detail panel and again in the Value column of the
Properties panel.
See Also
Add an Item to a Collection (on page 171)
Remove an Item from a Collection (on page 172)
AlternateText
Stores the text to be used to replace the standard ISOGEN text.
ISOGENTextID
Stores the number used by ISOGEN to identify a standard text string.
DefaultText
Displays the standard text that ISOGEN outputs if you choose not to use an Alternative Text.
174
Drawing Object
Sets general options for the isometric drawing style. The Drawing object contains a single
property:
Visible (on page 175)
The Drawing object also contains the following groups of options:
Content - Defines various options about the content of the drawing, such as whether or not
to display enclosures and coordinates. For more information, see Drawing.Content Object
(on page 175).
Controls - Defines various system controls on the isometric drawing. For more information,
see Drawing.Controls Object (on page 185).
Definitions - Customizes line weight, size, and output level of the data on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Drawing.Definitions Object (on page 200)
Dimensions - Controls the dimensions of the different components on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Drawing.Dimensions Object (on page 204).
Format - Defines various options about the format of the drawing, including the isometric
type and enclosure shapes. For more information, see Drawing.Format Object (on page
242).
Layers - Changes the default colour for layers. For more information, see Drawing.Layers
Object (on page 289).
Dynamic Fonts - Contains a collection of options used to store the parameters of the
user-defined fonts that are available for output on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Drawing.DynamicFonts Object (on page 290).
End Connections - Stores the definitions of the end connection identifiers. For more
information, see Drawing.EndConnections Object (on page 291).
Welds - Specifies information about welds on the isometric drawing. For more information,
see Drawing.Welds Object (on page 299).
Visible
Controls whether the drawing is generated.
True - Generate the drawing.
False - Suppress drawing generation.
Defines
OS 21, Pos 1
Drawing.Content Object
Sets options that control the content on isometric drawings.
ShowBIP (on page 176)
ShowClosedEnd (on page 176)
ShowCoordAtRefItem (on page 176)
ShowContAtSplitPoint (on page 177)
ShowCoordAtSplitPts (on page 177)
ShowCptFlowArrows (on page 178)
ShowDrainPosition (on page 178)
ShowEquipConn (on page 178)
175
ShowFlangeRotation (on page 178)

ShowGaskets (on page 179)
ShowIsometricSpindles (on page 180)
ShowMiscPosition (on page 180)
ShowNozzles (on page 181)
ShowNSUnitsOnDrg (on page 181)
ShowNSUnitsInReports (on page 182)
ShowOpenEnd (on page 182)
ShowPipeLineCont (on page 183)
ShowReferenceDims (on page 183)
ShowRPads (on page 183)
ShowSiteAssemblyTable (on page 183)
ShowSupports (on page 184)
ShowTapBrnchCoords (on page 185)
ShowVentPosition (on page 185)
ShowBIP
Controls whether the coordinate information for break-in points is shown on the isometric
drawing. The default setting is True.
True - Display the coordinates on the isometric drawing.
False - Suppress the display of coordinates on the isometric drawing.
Defines
OS 5 Pos 8
ShowClosedEnd
Controls whether the coordinate information for closed end of pipe work and ISO TEXT are
shown on the isometric. The default setting is True.
True - Display the coordinates.
False - Suppress the display of the coordinates.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for closed end is -241; the default is Blank.
Defines
OS 5 Pos 4
ShowCoordAtRefItem
Controls whether the coordinate information for referenced Items is shown on the isometric. The
default setting is False.
True - Display the coordinates.
False - Suppress the display of the coordinates.
Defines
OS 66 Pos 5
176
ShowContAtSplitPoint
Controls the location of drawing continuation messages at drawing split points on the isometric
drawing. This option works in conjunction with ShowCoordAtSplitPts (on page 177).
True - Output a drawing continuation message that points to the drawing split point. If
ShowCoordAtSplitPts is also set to True, coordinate data is displayed (1). However, if
ShowCoordAtSplitPts is set to False, the software displays the drawing continuation
message but suppresses the display of coordinate data (2).
False - Output a drawing continuation message that points to the end of continuation
components, and suppress the output of coordinate data (1). Requires that
ShowCoordAtSplitPts also be set to False. If ShowCoordAtSplitPts is set to True, the
software displays a full set of coordinates and a drawing continuation message that points to
the drawing split point (2).
Setting AText -209 and -276 to Blank, suppresses the isometric output of the
ShowContAtSolitPoint and ShowCoordAtSplitPts settings.
Defines
OS 66 Pos 4
ShowCoordAtSplitPts
Controls whether the connections coordinates at split points and ISO TEXT are shown on the
isometric. The default setting is False.
True - Display a full set of connection coordinates in both drawings when a user-defined
split point is used.
False - Suppress the display of connection coordinates at split points.
Defines
OS 66 Pos 4
177
ShowCptFlowArrows
Controls the use of flow arrows that are plotted alongside certain types of in-line components.
Their purpose is to show the fluid or gas flow direction in a pipeline. The default setting is True.
True - Display flow arrows.
False - Suppress the display of flow arrows.
Defines
OS 17 Pos 1
ShowDrainPosition
Controls whether the coordinate information at drain positions and ISO TEXT are shown on the
isometric. The default setting is True.
True - Display the coordinate information.
False - Suppress the display of the coordinate information.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for drain position is -239; the default text is
DRAIN.
Defines
OS 5 Pos 6
ShowEquipConn
Controls whether the coordinate information at connection to equipment nozzles and ISO TEXT
are shown on the isometric drawing. The default setting is True.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for connections to equipment nozzles is -208;
the default is CONN. TO.
Defines
OS 5 Pos 2
ShowFlangeRotation
Controls the output of flange rotation angles, which are used by the fabricator when welding on
flanges that have to be rotated away from the normal off-centre axes. Although the facility can
be used on all types of isometrics, it is particularly beneficial on spool isometrics.
There are a variety of enclosure box styles that can be used for the output of flange
rotation angles on the isometric controlled by FlangeRotationStyle property.For more
information, see FlangeRotationStyle (on page 254).
True - Display flange rotation angles.
False - Suppress the display of flange rotation angles.
Defines
OS 124 Pos 1
178
ShowFlowArrows
Controls the use of flow arrows that are plotted directly on the pipe. Their purpose is to show the
flow direction of fluid or gas in the pipeline. The size of the flow arrow is controlled by
FlowArrowScale.
True - Show flow arrows on pipe on isometric.
False - Suppress flow arrows on pipe on isometric.
You can generate this type of flow arrow only if the relevant information is included in the
input pipeline data file.
You can also use a separate type of flow arrow that is plotted alongside in-line fittings, either
as well as, or instead of, the one output on pipe. For more information, see
ShowCptFlowArrows (on page 178).
Defines
OS 112 Pos 1,2
FlowArrowScale (on page 254)
ShowGaskets
Controls the output of gaskets on the isometric drawing.
ISOGEN does not normally output a fitting shape to depict a gasket on the isometric
drawing. Where a gasket is present between two flanged components, a gap appears between
the components.
True - Output a gasket fitting shape on the isometric drawing.
179
False - Suppress output of a gasket fitting shape on the isometric drawing.
Defines
OS 17 Pos 2
ShowIsometricSpindles
Controls the display of valve and instrument spindles in isometric projection.
True - Display valve and instrument spindles in isometric projection.
False - Display valve and instrument spindles as flat.
Defines
OS 95 Pos 6
180
ShowMiscPosition
Controls whether the coordinate information at miscellaneous positions and ISO TEXT is shown
on the isometric drawing. The default setting is True.
True - Display the coordinate information..
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for miscellaneous positions is -242; the default
is Blank.
Defines
OS 5 Pos 7
ShowNozzles
Controls whether equipment nozzle indicators are plotted (in dotted line style) on the isometric
drawing. The default setting is False.
True - Display equipment nozzle indicators.
False - Suppress the display of equipment nozzle indicators.
Defines
OS 111 Pos 1
ShowNSUnitsOnDrg
Controls how nominal size information is output in a number of tables and lists appearing on the
isometric drawing. ISOGEN does not have an option when outputting the nominal size on
whether the units (typically the character) is appended to the output text. To give you control
over the output of the nominal size units, the software adds keywords to the appropriate control
files.
True - Appends the keyword OUTPUT-UNITS to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD when this
appears in the control files for tables and lists appearing on the isometric drawing. An
example is shown below.
PRINTED-M/C-DATA-ITEMS
'PIPELINE-REFERENCE' 1 L
'REVISION' 18 L
'ITEM-CODE' 24 L
'N.S.' 41 L OUTPUT-UNITS
'QTY' 57 N
'GROUP' 64 L
False - Appends the keyword SUPPRESS-UNITS to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD when
this appears in the control files for tables and lists appearing on the isometric drawing.
You can control nominal size units for the following output tables and report files:
Material List Style 2
Material Control File
Cut Pipe List
Cut Pipe Report File
Weld List
181
Welding Report File

Site Welding Report File
Operations List (default units output)
Site Assembly Report File (default units output)
ShowNSUnitsInReports
Controls how nominal size information is output in a number of summary report files. ISOGEN
does not have an option when outputting the nominal size on whether the units (typically the
character) is appended to the output text. To give you control over the output of the nominal size
units, the software adds keywords to the appropriate control files.
True - Append the keyword OUTPUT-UNITS to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD when this
appears in the control files for summary report files. An example is shown below.
PRINTED-M/C-DATA-ITEMS
'REVISION' 18 L
'ITEM-CODE' 24 L
'N.S.' 41 L OUTPUT-UNITS
'QTY' 57 N
'GROUP' 64 L
'WEIGHT' 77 N
False - Append the keyword SUPPRESS-UNITS to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD when
this appears in the control files for Operations List and Site Assembly Report File (these
reports have units output by default).
You can control nominal size units for the following output tables and report files:
Material Control File
Cut Pipe List
Cut Pipe Report File
Weld List
Welding Report File
Site Welding Report File
Operations List (default units output)
Site Assembly Report File (default units output)
ShowOpenEnd
Controls whether the coordinate information at the open end of pipe work and ISO TEXT are
shown on the isometric drawing. The default setting is True.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for open end is - 240; the default is Blank.
Defines
OS 5 Pos 3
182
ShowPipeLineCont
Controls whether the coordinate information for pipeline continuations and ISO TEXT are shown
on the isometric drawing. The default setting is True.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for pipeline continuation is -209; the default is
CONT. ON.
Defines
OS 5 Pos 1
ShowReferenceDims
Controls whether reference dimensions are output on the isometric drawing.
True - Output reference dimensions.
False - Suppress the output of reference dimensions.
Defines
OS 119 Pos 3
ShowRPads
Controls the automatic generation of an item code and a material description on the material list
and a plotted shape for the pad on the isometric drawing. The default setting is False.
True - Generate an item code and a material description and plotted pad shape to be shown
on the isometric drawing.
False - Suppress the generation of an item code and a material description and plotted pad
shape.
Defines
OS 77 Pos 3
ShowSiteAssemblyTable
Controls the display of the site assembly table on the isometric drawing. The default setting is
False.
True - Display the site assembly table.
False - Suppress the display of the site assembly table.
Defines
OS 79 Pos 4
183
ShowSupports
Controls the display of pipe supports on the isometric drawing.
True - Display pipe supports on the isometric drawing and in the material list.
False - Suppress the display of pipe supports on the isometric drawing and the material list.
Defines
OS 40 Pos 1
184
ShowTapBrnchCoords
Controls the output of coordinates at tapped branch connection points--the point on the host
component where the tapped branch is connected.
True - Output the coordinates.
False - Suppress the output of the coordinates.
Defines
OS 122 Pos 1
ShowVentPosition
Controls the display of coordinate information at vent positions and ISO TEXT on the isometric.
The default setting is True.
The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for connections to vent positions is -230; the
default text is VENT.
Defines
OS 5 Pos 5
Drawing.Controls Object
Sets options for system controls.
AppendStandardExts (on page 186)
AutoDrawingSplit (on page 186)
DateFormat (on page 187)
DateSource (on page 187)
DiagnosticLevel (on page 188)
DisconnectionMessage (on page 188)
DrawingRotationAngle (on page 188)
DrawingSize (on page 189)
FlatSpoolOrientation (on page 190)
FourDigitYear (on page 190)
HeatTracingOptions (on page 191)
IgnoreUserSplitPoints (on page 191)
IsometricType (on page 191)
IsoScale (on page 191)
MinAngleOffset (on page 192)
NoOfDrawings (on page 192)
NorthDirection (on page 193)
DrawingsPerFile (on page 193)
OutputFormat (on page 193)
OverwritePlotFile (on page 194)
PipeLineScale (on page 194)
PipeLineSplitting (on page 194)
PipeLineSplittingInTube (on page 195)
185
PipeNameInContMessages (on page 195)

PipeNameStyle (on page 195)
PlotFileLength (on page 196)
PlotFilePath (on page 196)
PostScriptSize (on page 196)
PrintedOutputPageLen (on page 197)
SetPipeLineDisconnected (on page 197)
ShowIsogenVer (on page 197)
StartDrawingNumber (on page 197)
SupportAdditionsWeight (on page 198)
TrueScale (on page 198)
Units (on page 198)
UseI01TypeExts (on page 199)
WeightOutput (on page 199)
LinearWeightDenominator (on page 192)
ContinuationGraphicsOnSpoolIsos (on page 187)
AppendStandardExts
True - Append plot file output format extension to the I01 type file name extension on all plot
files generated that do not use a user-defined plot file prefix. The UseI01TypeExts property
must also be set to True.
False - Suppress appending plot file output format extension to the I01 type file name
extension on all plot files generated that do not use a user-defined plot file prefix.
Defines
OS 71 Pos 7
See Also
UseI01TypeExts (on page 199)
AutoDrawingSplit
Invokes automatic splitting of drawings.
Unless IgnoreUserSplitPoints is set to True, this property is ignored if you
manually-added pipeline split points are present in the pipeline data file.
True - Calculate the volume of pipeline graphics that can be satisfactorily displayed on the
selected drawing size, and generate the required number of isometrics to contain the
complete pipeline.
False - Use NoOfDrawings to specify a fixed number of drawings. Setting to False allows
you to directly dictate how many isometric drawings are to be produced for a pipeline.
Only set the number of drawings in special cases, such as for single pipeline runs,
since the setting is applied to all the pipelines in a run.
Defines
OS 7 Pos 1, 2
See Also
NoOfDrawings (on page 192)
186
ContinuationGraphicsOnSpoolIsos
Controls the display of continuation graphics at the ends of spool isometric drawings. Where a
spool continues on another spool, an appropriate continuation message is also output on the
isometric drawing.
False - Display continuation graphics on spool isometric drawings.
True - Suppress display of continuation graphics on spool isometric drawings.
Defines
OS 38 Pos 5
DateFormat
Controls the format of the date that is to be output on the isometric and in summary files.
None - Display no date.
British - Display the date in British format (dd/mm/yy)
European - Display the date in European format (dd/mm/yy).
American - Display the date in American format (mm/dd/yy).
Defines
OS 6 Pos 1
See Also
DateSource
Takes the actual date that is output from either the pipeline data file that has been created by
the host 3D design system or the computer system date at run time.
DataFile - Use the date contained in the pipeline data file.
System - Use the system clock date.
Defines
OS 6 Pos 2
See Also
187
DiagnosticLevel
Controls the amount of information written to the message file.
Low - Write ISOGEN program version and plot file generation messages to the message
file.
Medium - Write plot and module run messages to the message file.
High - Write plot, module run, and ISOPLOT messages to the message file.
Defines
OS 55 Pos 1
DisconnectionMessage
Specifies an IDFGEN-generated diagnostic and controls output of disconnection messages on
the isometric drawing.
True - Output disconnection message local to pipeline break where increased tolerance is
used to connect pipeline.
False - Suppress output of local disconnection message where increased tolerance is used
to connect pipeline.
Defines
OS 55 Pos 2
DrawingRotationAngle
Controls the rotation of the isometric drawing in a clockwise direction by a specified number of
degrees. Where pipelines are oriented in a non-primary, or skewed, direction, the subsequent
isometric drawing output can be congested and difficult to read. The ability to orient pipelines in
the horizontal plane so that the majority of skewed pipeline sections are rotated to a primary
direction can simplify isometric drawing output.
The example drawing below shows pipe oriented in a southeasterly direction:
188

The next example shows the same pipe rotated 45 so that it is now in a southerly direction:
0 - Orient isometric drawings in the horizontal plane using the setting defined by
NorthDirection. This is the default setting.
Value - Orient isometric drawings in the horizontal plane in a clockwise direction by the
specified number of degrees. Enter a value in tenths of a degree up to a maximum of 3600.
If you define a value, it overwrites the setting defined by NorthDirection (on page
193).
Defines
OS 42, Pos 4-7
DrawingSize
Specifies a standard paper size for the isometric drawing.
European Sizes
A0 - 841 x 1189 mm
A1 - 594 x 841 mm
A2 - 420 x 594 mm
A3 - 297 x 420 mm
A4 - 210 x 297 mm
ANSI Sizes
A - 8.5" x 11"
B - 11" x 17"
C - 17" x 22"
D - 22" x 34"
E - 34" x 44"
If set to Custom, then you must also set CustomHeight and CustomWidth.
Defines
OS 14 Pos 1, 2
See Also
CustomHeight (on page 329)
CustomWidth (on page 329)
189
FlatSpoolOrientation
Controls placement of the longest pipe in a flat spool drawing. Acceptable options are::
Maximum Legs Flat
Parallel Legs Flat
Longest Leg in E/W plant, Second Longest in N/S plane
Setting FlatSpoolOrientation to Parallel Legs Flat is not recommended.
Defines
OS 42 Pos 3
See Also
FlatSpoolUpArrow (on page 190)
FlatSpoolUpArrow
Allows the Up direction to be displayed on the isometric drawing. The Up direction shown is
relevant to the longest leg length output in the horizontal plane (bottom left to top right) of the
isometric drawing.
True - Display Up direction on longest leg of flat spool. This setting is only applicable when
FlatSpoolOrientation is set to Longest Leg in E/W plant, Second Longest in N/S plane.
False - Display North arrow on all drawings except flat spool isometric drawings.
The following example shows the Up direction rotated 90-degrees counter clockwise:
Defines
OS 42 Position 2
See Also
FlatSpoolOrientation (on page 190)
FourDigitYear
Controls whether the year portion of the date is output as two or four digits.
True - Output four-digit year, such as 2009.
False - Output two-digit year, such as 09.
Defines
OS 6 Pos 3
See Also
190
HeatTracingOptions
Controls heat tracing options.
On - Use heat tracing options.
Off - Suppress the use of heat tracing options.
Defines
OS 21 Pos 4
IgnoreUserSplitPoints
True - Ignore user-defined drawing split points present in the piping data file.
False - Process user-defined drawing split points present in the piping data file.
Defines
OS 7 Pos 3
IsometricType
Sets the required isometric type.
Combined - Fabrication, erection and offshore information.
Erection/Offshore - Erection/offshore type isometric drawing.
Fabrication Only - Fabrication only isometric.
Flat Spool (Flat) - Individual flat spool isometrics (maximum legs flat).
Flat Spool (Parallel) - Individual flat spool isometrics (maximum legs parallel).
Spool - Individual spool isometrics As-Built orientation.
Material List Only - Isometrics suppression - no isometric drawings are generated.
Combined Material - Combined material list only, without pipeline graphics.
Erection Material - Erection material list only, without pipeline graphics.
Fabrication Material - Fabrication material list only, without pipeline graphics.
Spool Material - Spool material list only, without spool graphics.
Defines
OS 21 Pos 1 & 2
IsoScale
Controls the finished isometric drawing size. You can increase or decrease the final plotted
isometric size from the size defined by DrawingSize, or CustomHeight and CustomWidth.
0 or 100 - No scaling change (100% of set size). The software generates the isometric
drawing at the size defined by DrawingSize or CustomHeight and CustomWidth.
n - Scale the drawing to increase or decrease the final isometric size by n%, where n is an
integer number. For example, n = 71 generates a reduced size drawing at 71% of the set
size, such as A2 reduced to A3. Whereas n = 120 generates an increased size drawing at
120% of the set size.
Defines
OS 32
See Also
DrawingSize (on page 189)
191
LinearWeightDenominator
Specifies the units for the linear weight denominator, regardless of the units used for weights.
None - The linear denominator is the default. For example: LBS/FT when weight is in LBS,
and KGS/M when weight is in KGS.
m - The linear denominator is in metres. For example: LBS/M when weight is in LBS, and
KGS/M when weight is in KGS.
ft - The linear denominator is in feet. For example: LBS/FT when weight is in LBS, and
KGS/FT when weight is in KGS.
The weight unit is specified in the WeightOutput property.
Defines
OS 41 Pos 4
WeightOutput (on page 199)
MinAngleOffset
Controls how the software interprets and acts on small angular deviations detected in the
pipeline input data. These deviations can lead to small unwanted skews being generated on the
isometric. You can define an angular cut-off value with this property so that any skew that is
found to have an angular deviation below this value is ignored by the software and not treated
as a skew. The default setting is 0.
0 - Use no angular offset tolerance.
Value - Use the user-defined required angle tolerance. Type a value in range 1-10, such as
0.5 for 0.5-degrees.
Defines
OS 115
NoOfDrawings
Specifies the number of drawing sheets required for split control.
0 - Automatic control of drawing numbers.
Value - User-defined number of drawings. Type a value in range 1-99
Unless IgnoreUserSplitPoints is set to True, this property setting is ignored if manually

placed pipeline split points are present in the pipeline data file.
This option dictates how many drawing sheets are extracted for a pipeline. Therefore, you
should use this option only for special cases for single pipe runs as the setting applies to all
the pipelines in a run.
To use the NoOfDrawings option, you must set the AutoDrawingSplit option to False.
Defines
OS 7 Pos 1 & 2
See Also
192
NorthDirection
Controls the viewing direction (isometric orientation), or the direction that the north arrow points
on the isometric drawing. There are four orientation options you can choose:
Top Left
Top Right
Bottom Left
Bottom Right
The option you select is indicated on the isometric by the direction the north arrow is pointing.
You can specify that the arrow be displayed in a box with NorthArrowBox (on page 261).
Defines
OS 42 Pos1
DrawingsPerFile
Controls how and where any isometric drawings are to be output.
All On Same Sheet - Output isometric drawings generated during a run to a single plot file
or to a series of plot files, depending upon the PlotFileLenth setting
One Per File - Generate an individual plot file for each isometric drawing.
One Per Sheet - Plot each ISOGEN drawing sheet to a separate sheet within a single
drawing file.
Only applies to SmartSketch (IGR) and SmartPlant Shape2D (SHA) formats.
Defines
OS 31 Pos 1
See Also
PlotFileLength (on page 196)
OutputFormat
Controls the 2D CAD file format that ISOGEN creates. Use the OutputFormat list to select the
required output format.
AutoCAD DXF (DXF)
MicroStation (DGN)
Smart DWG (DWG)
Smart DGN (DGN)
Smart DGN v8 (DGN)
SmartSketch (IGR)
Shape2d (SHA)
POD2
POD3
ISOGEN
Postscript
In the case of Smart DGN v8 output, template backing sheets (supplied by Alias) are
suffixed with .dg8.
To use .dg8 templates:
193

f. Rename the .dgn v5 template backing sheets to .dg5.
g. Rename the .dg8 templates to .dgn.
Defines
OS 71 Pos 1
OverwritePlotFile
Overwrites and deletes any plot files existing with the same name.
True - Allocate plot file name using selected sequence method after deleting previously
generated files.
False - Allocate next available plot file, generate name using selected sequence method.
Defines
OS 31 Pos 2
PipeLineScale
Increases or decreases the scale of the pipeline picture part of the isometric only, while leaving
all other parts, such as the drawing frame, material list, title block and line summary areas,
unaltered. Using this property, you can re-scale the pipeline picture and all text pointing to it.
0 or 100 - Use the default scale.
Value - Use the user-defined integer number to increase or decrease the scaling effect as a
percentage.
Defines
OS 34
PipeLineSplitting
Controls the amount of drawing data that triggers a drawing split. This value is a scale factor
expressed as a percentage. Setting a value less than 100 causes less of the pipeline to appear
on each drawing before automatic splitting occurs, resulting in a less crowded drawing.
This option is intended only for modest modifications of the drawing whitespace. Specify a value
in the range 90-110. If a particular value does not work, gradually adjust the value and re-extract
the drawing to check the results.
0 or 100 - Default for what ISOGEN considers to be the limit for drawing information content.
This limit is set within the software and varies for each size of drawing.
Value - Increase or decrease the drawing information content as a percentage.
Defines
OS 38
194
PipeLineSplittingInTube
Controls the actions taken by the software whenever the ISOGEN automatic pipeline split facility
selects a split point that is located in a straight length of pipe.
Normal - Default for pipeline splitting to function as normal when the split point occurs along
a section of pipe. The relevant split point information is passed back to the 3D design
system using the isometric repeatability file, if it is being used.
Reject - If a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe, the warning message,
UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, is written to the message file. No plots are produced and
no information is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.
Message - If a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe, the warning message,
UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, is written to the message file. Plots are produced with the
message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT plotted at the top of each affected drawing. No
information is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.
Defines
OS 108
PipeNameInContMessages
Controls whether the pipeline name is output as part of the drawing continuation message on
the isometric.
True - Output pipeline name as part of the drawing continuation message.
False - Output a standard drawing message.
Defines
OS 38 Pos 4
PipeNameStyle
Controls the style of pipeline name output for drawing continuation messages.
If PipeNameInContMessages is True.
Blank - Output a standard drawing continuation message.
Drawing Identifier - Output a drawing continuation message that includes
CLIENT-DRAWING-IDENTIFIER.
Pipe Reference - Output a drawing continuation message includes pipeline name.
Sequence Number - Output a drawing continuation message that includes
PIPELINE-DRAWING-SEQUENCE-NUMBER.
Spool Drawing Sequence Number - Output a drawing continuation message that includes
SPOOL-DRAWING-SEQUENCE-NUMBER.
Defines
OS 38 Pos 4
See Also
PipeNameInContMessages (on page 195)
195
PlotFileLength
Controls the physical length of the plot file that is generated by ISOGEN.
It is only necessary to set this property when OneFilePerDrawing is set to False, and the
required PlotfileLength is different than the built-in default value of 3275mm.
0 - Default for plot file length of 3275mm.
Value - The required plot file length in whole mm's.
The maximum length is limited to 3350mm.
Defines
OS 1
See Also
DrawingsPerFile (on page 193)
PlotFilePath
Specifies the folder into which drawings are written. Double-click in the PlotFilePath box and
use the Browse for file dialog box to navigate to the required folder.
PostScriptSize
Specifies the PostScript plotter size.
European Sizes:
A0 - 841 x 1189 mm
A1 - 594 x 841 mm
A2 - 420 x 594 mm
A3 - 297 x 420 mm
A4 - 210 x 297mm
ANSI Sizes
A - 8.5" x 11"
B - 11" x 17"
C - 17" x 22"
D - 22" x 34"
E - 34" x 44"
Defines
OS 14 Pos 3 & 4
196
PrintedOutputPageLen
Controls the number of lines per page on any printed output (reports) generated by the ISOGEN
system.
0 - Use the default for 55 lines per page.
Value - Specify the required number of lines to be output per page. Type the required value
(integer number).
Defines
OS 63
SetPipeLineDisconnected
Specifies an IDFGEN-generated diagnostic.
True - Set pipeline to disconnected when an increased tolerance is used to connect
pipeline. Output a disconnected pipeline message at top of drawing.
False - Suppress output of disconnected pipeline message at top of drawing if pipeline has
connected using the increased tolerance.
Message is always output if pipeline does not connect using increased tolerance.
Defines
OS 55 Pos 3
ShowIsogenVer
Controls the optional plotting of the ISOGEN version banner, together with the run date and
generation time of the isometric. The information is plotted on a single line located at the bottom
left-hand corner of the isometric, but inside any cut marks that can be present.
True - Plot the banner.
False - Suppress plotting of the banner.
Defines
OS 127
StartDrawingNumber
Allows the first sheet to start at an alternative number instead of starting with drawing number 1
0 - Start first sheet at drawing number 1.
x - Start first sheet at x+1.
Defines
OS 31, Pos 3-5
197
SupportAdditionsWeight
Controls inclusion of the weight of additional material associated with supports when performing
centre-of-gravity calculations. The default setting is Include.
Include - Include the weight of additional materials.
Ignore - Ignore the weight of additional materials.
Defines
OS 40 Pos 6
TrueScale
Attempts to adjust the length of sections of pipe to be proportional to their actual physical length.
True - Use true scaling of isometrics (proportional pipe lengths).
False - Use normal scaling of isometrics (variable pipe lengths).
Defines
OS 95 Pos 3
Units
Defines the style of units used throughout: Metric or Imperial.
Metric / MM Bores - Use millimetre lengths and millimetre pipe bores.
Metric / Inch Bores - Use millimetre lengths and inch pipe bores.
Imperial / Inch Bores - Use inch lengths and inch pipe bores.
You can specify the changeover point from where lengths are reported in inches only,
to feet and inches.
198
Imperial / MM Bores - Use inch pipe bores with lengths in feet and inches.
The combination MM bore, FT-IN dimensions is invalid

Defines
OS 41 Pos 1
See Also
UseI01TypeExts
Controls the use of I01 type extensions.
True - Use I01 type filename extensions on all plot files generated that do not use a user
defined plot file prefix.
False - Use normal filenames / extensions.
Defines
OS 71 Pos 7
WeightOutput
Controls how component weights are displayed on the isometric drawing. The default setting is
None.
None - Output no weight information. Applies to all outputs, including such things as
material lists, weight output on drawing frame, and material control files.
Kg - Input and output all weights in kilograms (Kgs).
Lb - Input and output all weights in pounds (Lbs.)
LinearWeightDenominator specifies the units used for the linear weight denominator,
irrespective of the units used for weights.
Defines
OS 41 Pos 4
See Also
LinearWeightDenominator (on page 192)
199
Drawing.Definitions Object
Contains a collection of options called Definitions, which is used to define how to represent
pipeline components or facilities on the drawing. For more information, see Drawing.Definitions
Definitions Collection (on page 201).
LineStyleTable (on page 200)
Count (on page 201)
LineStyleTable
Displays the LineStyle Table window, which is a free format text field that you can use to define
a standard name to line style number mapping. Any line style number that you enter here is
displayed in the LineStyle list.
19. Double-click the LineStyleTable Value box.
The software displays the LineStyle Table window.
20. Type a line style number and its corresponding line style name.
21. Continue entering line style numbers and names as needed, pressing Enter after each
entry.
22. When you are finished, click File > Update to save the line styles.
The entry must be the name of a line style defined in the output CAD system.
The software supports up to 1000 user-defined line styles.
See Also
LineStyle (on page 203)
200
Count
Displays the number of definitions stored in the Drawing Definitions collection.
Drawing.Definitions Definitions Collection

Defines how to represent pipeline components or facilities on the drawing. For example, you can
specify that valves are to be drawn 1.5 times normal size with a line thickness of 1 on layer 5,
and appear in the colour blue. This collection is used to construct the corresponding Drawing
Definition (DDF) file.
The value that appears in parentheses after the collection name is a count of how many
definitions are stored in the collection.
AppliesTo (on page 201)
LowerBore (on page 201)
UpperBore (on page 202)
Category (on page 202)
Colour (on page 202)
Layer (on page 203)
DScale (on page 203)
ThicknessActual (on page 203)
ThicknessLogical (on page 203)
LineStyle (on page 203)
See Also
AppliesTo
Specifies the component type. This is set using a list, which includes the allowable settings for
this property.
LowerBore
Defines the minimum bore as an integer or real number. This value must be in the current
nominal size units.
When there are two or more definitions with the same AppliesTo setting, you can use a zero
(0) in the first of the lower bore positions to signal there is no lower bore, as shown in the
example below.
AppliesTo
LowerBore
UpperBore
Pipeline
Pipeline
2.5
Pipeline
I-Configure displays the LowerBore/UpperBore parameter together, rather than

separated as they are currently.
See Also
AppliesTo (on page 201)
201

UpperBore
Defines the maximum bore as an integer or real number. This value must be in the current
nominal size units.
When there are two or more definitions with the same AppliesTo setting, you can use a zero (0)
in the last maximum bore position to signal there is no maximum bore limit, as shown in the
example below.
AppliesTo
LowerBore
UpperBore
Pipeline
Pipeline
2.5
Pipeline
I-Configure displays the LowerBore/UpperBore parameter together, rather than

separated as they are currently.
Category
Specifies the category for the definition. For example, you can choose Fabrication, Erection,
Offshore, and so forth.
Colour
Specifies the index number that represents a specific colour as defined in the output drawing
software.
AutoCAD uses a fixed 256 colour pallet starting at 1 (red) to 256. In MicroStation, in addition to a
default colour pallet, each design file can have a unique custom colour table. For example,
colour index number 3 may be red in one design file, but it may be green in another.
The table below shows a colour comparison between a sampling of AutoCAD and MicroStation
colour index numbers.
Number
MicroStation Colour Index

Number
14

Drawing
For specific information about AutoCAD, MicroStation, and other 3rd party drawing
software colour tables, refer to the product documentation delivered with your software.
202

Layer
Defines a number that corresponds to the layer. This number is an integer that identifies the
required layer (level) to which the component type is to be assigned. You must use a value in
the range 1-50.
DScale
Specifies an integer value for the scale that represents an increase or decrease to the basic
100% standard symbol size for all types of fitting. This value must be in the range 75 - 200.
ThicknessActual
Defines the actual thickness (width) of the plotted line in millimetres (a real number). This value
is in the range 0.0 to 10.0.
ThicknessLogical
Specifies an integer for the required thickness. This value is in the range 0 - 99.
LineStyle
Specifies the number that corresponds to the line style that is to be output on the isometric
drawing. A line style is a simple pattern of lines and gaps. In the LineStyle list, the 12 line styles
generated by ISOGEN, shown below, are listed by default.
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
You can define additional line styles using LineStyleTable.
The ISOGEN-generated line styles only apply for showing heat tracing on the isometric
drawing. They do not apply for piping. User-defined line styles can be applied for showing either
heat tracing or piping.
See Also
LineStyleTable (on page 200)
203
Drawing.Dimensions Object
Sets options for dimension display on the isometric drawing.
AdditionalAllowanceFormat (on page 205)
AddRoundOff (on page 205)
BranchBoreLimit (on page 206)
BranchCptLimit (on page 206)
CoordOutputBranches (on page 207)
CoordOutputHTCpts (on page 207)
CoordSupports (on page 208)
CoordType (on page 208)
CurvedPipeDimensioning (on page 208)
DoubleUnits (on page 208)
FabWeldsInPipe (on page 209)
GasketDimPrecision (on page 216)
ImperialFormat (on page 217)
IdfgenConnectionTolerance (on page 218)
Inches (on page 218)
IsometricText (on page 218)
JacketDimensioning (on page 219)
MinOffset (on page 219)
NominalSize (on page 220)
NonLinearValves (on page 221)
Overall (on page 221)
OverallAcrossFabItemsOnly (on page 222)
PipesThroughPenetrationPlates (on page 222)
SeparatePulledBend (on page 223)
StandOutComposite (on page 223)
StandOutOverall (on page 224)
StandOutVertical (on page 225)
SuppDimAsDim (on page 225)
SuppDimToCentre (on page 226)
SuppFormat (on page 227)
SuppOptions (on page 228)
SuppStandOut (on page 229)
TapOnCpt (on page 230)
TapOnPipe (on page 230)
TapBranchDimension (on page 231)
TapOnPipeFittings (on page 233)
204
USAStyle (on page 233)

ValveBW (on page 234)
ValveCP (on page 234)
ValveFL (on page 235)
ValveHY (on page 236)
ValveLimit (on page 237)
ValvePL (on page 238)
ValveSC (on page 238)
ValveSW (on page 239)
VertOption (on page 240)
WeldDimensionAccuracy (on page 241)
WeldDimensioning (on page 241)
AdditionalAllowanceFormat
Controls how additional allowances are displayed alongside or as part of dimensions.
Suppress - Display no additional allowances.
Dim + Allowance -Display dimension plus allowance.
Dim Includes Allowance - Add allowance to dimension.
Only use Dim Includes Allowance if you are using a Spool style.
Defines
OS 9 Pos 5
AddRoundOff
Controls the Dimension Round Off Carry-Over function, which is used to control how remainders
are handled when dimensions are calculated and output on the isometric. At branch locations, or
components, this permits the remainder part of a dimension either to be carried over and added
to the next dimension, or discarded.
Normal - Round off dimensions to + or - 1mm, or 1/16th-inch, and carries over any reminder
to the next dimension.
Branch Intersect - Round off dimensions to + or - 1mm or 1/16th-inch with no carry-over of
the remainder beyond a branch intersection.
Current Component - Round off dimensions to + or - 1mm or 1/16th-inch with no
carry-over of the remainder beyond current component.
Defines
OS 117
205
BranchBoreLimit
Specifies a branch bore limit to suppress dimensions. The acceptable range of values is 0-999.
BranchBoreLimit works in conjunction with BranchCptLimit, if defined.
0 - Dimension all pipe.
Value (in range 0-999) - Suppress the dimensions of branches having a bore equal to or
less than the defined value. Value is in 1/16th of an inch or mm, depending on the bore
units. For example, the branch in the following illustration has a pipe bore of less than the
value stated in BranchBoreLimit; consequently, it is not dimensioned.
Any branch containing pipe (100 record), fixed length pipe (101 record) or pipe block (103
record) does not have branch dimension suppression applied to it.
Branch dimension suppression using this property does not apply to tapped branches.
BranchBoreLimit and BranchCptLimit work either independently of each other or
together, depending upon your requirements.
Defines
OS 81 Pos 4,5,6
See Also
BranchCptLimit (on page 206)
BranchCptLimit
Controls the dimensioning of branches based on the number of components. Works in
conjunction with BranchBoreLimit, if defined.
Branches with a specified number of components are un-dimensioned.
Blank - Dimension all branches.
Value (in range 0-99) - Suppress dimensions for branches having a number of components
equal to or less than the specified value. Gasket and bolt entries are counted as
components. For example, the branch in the following illustration has six components: a
weldolet, a weld neck flange, two gaskets, a valve and a blind flange. In this example,
BranchCptLimit has been set to 7, so the branch has not been dimensioned.
206
Any branch containing pipe (100 record), fixed length pipe (101 record) or pipe block (103
record) does not have branch dimension suppression applied to it.
Branch dimension suppression using this property does not apply to tapped branches.
The BranchBoreLimit and BranchCptLimit properties work either independently of each
other or together, depending upon your requirements.
Defines
OS 81 Pos 7 & 8
See Also
BranchBoreLimit (on page 206)
CoordOutputBends
Controls whether coordinates and elevations are printed at bends and elbows on the isometric
drawing.
Elev and coords at changes - Output elevations and coordinates that have changed.
Defines
OS 66 Pos 2
CoordOutputBranches
Controls the coordinate display at branch intersections.
Elev and coords at changes - Output elevations and co-ordinates that have changed.
Defines
OS 66 Pos 3
CoordOutputHTCpts
Controls whether coordinates are output on heat traced components.
On - Output coordinates on heat traced components.
Off - Suppress coordinates on heat traced components.
Defines
OS 66 Pos 9
207
CoordSupports
Controls output of coordinates at different types of pipe supports.
None - Suppress display of coordinates on pipe supports.
Fabrication - Output coordinates at Fabrication pipe supports only.
Erection - Output coordinates at Erection pipe supports only.
Offshore - Output coordinates at Offshore pipe supports only.
All - Output coordinates at all pipe supports.
Defines
OS 66 Pos 6
CoordType
Controls the output type for supplementary coordinates, that is, coordinates at bends or at
branches. You can choose output with arrows or witness lines. The default setting is Arrowed.
This option does not apply to end connection coordinates. It also does not apply when
CoordOutputBends or CoordOutputBranches is set to Full.
Arrowed - Output coordinates and elevations as arrowed-out message type.
Witness Lines - Output coordinates and elevations along witness lines.
Defines
OS 66 Pos 1
CurvedPipeDimensioning
Controls the dimensioning of curved pipe.
Message - Output curved pipe dimensions as a message.
Standard - Output curved pipe dimensions as a standard dimension.
Suppress - Suppress curved pipe dimensions.
Defines
OS 84 Pos 1
DoubleUnits
Controls whether measurements are output in both imperial and metric units, or just one. The
default setting is False.
True - Output measurements in both imperial and metric units.
False - Output measurements in one type of unit only.
Defines
OS 9 Pos 7
208
FabWeldsInPipe
Controls dimensioning of fabrication welds in pipe.
True - Show dimension to fabrication weld.
False - Suppress dimension to fabrication weld.
Defines
OS 119 Pos 4
209
Format
Controls the dimension format on the isometric drawing.
Basic - Plot ordinary string dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference
dimensions on the isometric drawing. This is the default setting.
210
Combined Erec/Offsh - Basic - Plot ordinary string dimensions. Do not dimension

separately erection pipe fittings (bends, elbows, tees, and so forth), support/message
dimensions and reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
211
212
Composite - Plot composite dimensions together with support/message dimensions and

reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Combined Erec/Offsh - Composite - Plot composite dimensions. Do not dimension

separately erection pipe fittings (bends, elbows, tees, and so forth), support/message
dimensions and reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
Support - Plot only support/message and reference dimensions on the isometric drawing.
213
Reference Only- Plot only reference dimensions on the isometric drawing. Suppress all
other dimensions.
Full String - Plot full string dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference
dimensions on the isometric drawing. All components are dimensioned individually.
Pipe Only - Plot pipe dimensions, support/message dimensions, and reference dimensions
on the isometric drawing. Suppress fitting dimensions.
Defines
OS 9 Pos 1
214
FtInTolerance
Defines a value below which a ft-in dimension appears in inches. Type a value in whole inches.
This value must be greater than 12.
In the example below, the 19.9/16" long pipe is dimensioned as 1' 7.9/16", as FtInTolerance is
set at 19.
In the next example, the same pipe is dimensioned as 19.9/16", as FtInTolerance is set at 20.
Defines
OS 41 Pos 6 & 7
Gaskets
Specifies gasket dimensions. You can choose to not show gasket dimensions, to include the
dimension with the component, or to treat the dimension separately.
None - Suppress gasket dimensions.
Gasket thicknesses are not included. The component dimension is indicated by the
presence of two leader lines.
215
Included - Include gasket dimensions with the component.
Gasket thicknesses are included. The component dimension is indicated by the

presence of only single leader lines.
The length of the valve has now increased by the thickness of the gaskets (2mm in this
case) either side.
Separate - Dimension gaskets separately.
Defines
OS 9 Pos 2
See Also
GasketDimPrecision (on page 216)
216
GasketDimPrecision
Controls precise dimensioning of gaskets.
True - Output gasket dimensions to the nearest 1/10th mm.
False - Output gasket dimensions to the nearest mm.
Defines
OS 119 Pos 5
See Also
ImperialFormat
Controls the format of imperial measurements used on the isometric drawing.
Standard - Output standard ft/in format: 6' 10.3/4".
Standard dash - Add a dash between the feet and inches: 6'-10.3/4".
Space dash - Use a blank space instead of a dot (.) between inches and fractions of an
inch: 6'-10 3/4".
Stacked fractions with dash - Output stacked fractions with a dash: 6'-10".
Stacked fractions without dash - Output stacked fractions without a dash: 6' 10".
1DecimalPlace - Output decimal inches to 1 decimal place.
2DecimalPlace - Output decimal inches to 2 decimal places.
The Stacked fractions options only apply to MicroStation DGN output.
Defines
OS 41 Pos 3
217
IdfgenConnectionTolerance
Controls the tolerance to be used when connecting components in IDFGEN. Set a value in mm.
Backward Compatibility
To avoid problems where this control is set as a single value, no tolerance is set in Option
Switch 116, Positions 4-6. IDFGEN continues to use positions 1-3 to determine the connection
tolerance.
Defines
116 Pos 4-6
See Also
MinOffSet (on page 219)
Inches
Controls whether pipes are dimensioned in inches only or in feet and inches. The default setting
is False.
True - Output dimensions in inches.
False - Output dimensions in feet/inches for any dimensions greater than 24-inches.
Inches overrides FtInTolerance.
Defines
OS 41 Pos 6
See Also
IsometricText
Dimension text and messages placed along a section of pipe in isometric projection (oblique
angle \ slanted text). Text oblique angle is adjusted to be parallel to the dimension standout
direction. ISOGEN attempts to set a vertical dimension standout for horizontal sections of
pipeline wherever practical.
True - Text is isometric.
False - Text is not isometric.
This feature is only available for DXF format output styles generated using the POD
interface.
Defines
OS 8 Pos 3
218
JacketDimensioning
Controls how dimensioning is used for jacketed pipework.
Full - Full jacket dimensioning.
Minimal - Minimal detail.
Defines
OS 9 Pos 9
MetresCoordinates
Determines whether to plot coordinates in M.mm format
mm - Output coordinates in mm format.
m - Output coordinates in M.mm format.
10th mm - Output coordinates in 10th mm format. The following example shows dimensions
to nearest 10th mm:
Defines
OS 41 Pos 2
See Also
MetresDimensions
Determines whether to plot metric dimensions in M.mm format
mm - Output dimensions in mm format.
m - Output dimensions in M.mm format.
10th mm - Output dimensions in 10th mm format.
Defines
OS 41 Pos 2
See Also
219
MinOffset
Controls how small dimensional deviations detected in the input pipeline data file are to be
interpreted and acted upon. These deviations can lead to small, unwanted skews being
generated on the isometric drawing. You can use MinOffset to define a dimensional cut-off
value, whereby any offset coordinate numerically below this value is ignored by the software.
0 - Use the default for no dimensional offset tolerance to be set.
Value - Use the user-defined value (real number). Set to the required dimensional tolerance
in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units. For example, you can type
1.0 mm or 0.04 inch.
Defines
OS 116 Pos 1-3
See Also
IdfgenConnectionTolerance (on page 218)
NominalSize
Controls whether nominal size is output at branch (tee/olet/cross) and reducer locations.
True - Output nominal size information at branches and reducers as normal.
False - Suppress output of nominal size information at branches and reducers.
Defines
OS 41 Pos 8
220
NonLinearValves
Produces arrowed dimensions for angle, 3-way, and 4-way valve and instrument legs.
Otherwise, the software prints a message. The default setting is False.
True - Dimension angle, 3-way and 4-way valve and instruments normally.
False - Dimension angle, 3-way and 4-way valve and instruments using message.
Defines
OS 9 Pos 8
Overall
Controls the use of overall dimensions. You can specify whether overall dimensions are plotted,
and if they are, which type.
None - Plot no overall dimensions.
Across Branches - Plot overall dimensions across branches (tees, olets and crosses).
221
Stop At Branches - Plot overall dimensions that stop at branches.
Valves / Across Branches - Plot overall dimensions to valve centres and across branches.
Valves / Stop At Branches - Plot overall dimensions to valve centres, stopping at

branches.
Overall dimensions to valve centres are only available to valves that have a spindle.
Defines
OS 118 Pos 1
OverallAcrossFabItemsOnly
Controls the output of overall dimensions across spool breaks.
True - Output overall dimensions across fabrication items only.
False - Output overall dimensions across component categories.
Defines
OS 118 Pos 4
222
PipesThroughPenetrationPlates
Controls the dimensioning of pipes passing through penetration plates.
Dimension From Adjacent Plate Face - Dimension pipes passing through penetration
plates from adjacent plate face.
Dimension From Same Plate Face - Dimension pipes passing through penetration plates
dimensioned from same plate face.
Defines
119 Pos 6
SeparatePulledBend
Controls how bends are dimensioned. The default setting is False.
True - Plot separate dimensions for the pipe and bend sections of pulled bends.
False - Plot combined dimensions for the pipe and bend sections of pulled bends.
Defines
OS 9 Pos 6
StandOutComposite
Controls dimension line standout distances for the following:
23. String and composite dimensions that are normally plotted as the middle layer of multi-layer
dimensions.
24. Dimensioned messages, support dimensions and reference dimensions on the inner layer,
but only when SuppStandOut is not set.
25. Overall dimensions on the outer layer, but only when StandOutOverall is not set.
In the StandOutComposite box, type one of the following:
0 - If the value is set to 0 (zero), the default, then the following standard dimension line
standouts are used:
When TextSize is set to
Small
String / Composite Dimension Standout = 12mm.
Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout - 6mm.
Overall Dimension Standout = 18mm.
Medium
Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 7mm.
Large
223
XLarge
XXLarge
XXXLarge
String / Composite Dimension standout = 22mm.
Value - Set a value in the data field, where value (real number) equals the required standout
distance for string and composite dimensions on the middle layer in mm or inches. In the
following illustration, StandOutComposite is set to 18, so all dimension lines are 18 mm
away from the pipe.
Values set to < = 11mm are ignored by the software and substituted by the appropriate
standard dimension line standout distance.
When the value is set > 11mm, that value is used by the software to set the dimension line
standout distance for string and composite dimensions on the middle layer. The inner
dimension layer for dimensioned messages, Support dimensions and reference dimensions
are then be set to 0.5 X this distance, while the outer layer overall dimensions is set to 1.5 X
this distance.
Defines
OS 8 Pos 1,2
See Also
StandOutOverall (on page 224)
224
StandOutOverall
Controls the standout distance for overall dimensions. The acceptable range of values is
between 0 and 99. The default is 0.
0 - No overall dimension standout is set.
Value - Specify the overall dimension standout distance in mm or inches, depending on the
setting of the drawing units. For example, you can type 40 to set the Value at 40 mm.
Defines
OS 118 Pos 2,3
StandOutVertical
True - Position the standout dimension vertically, if possible.
False - Use normal standout rules. This is the default setting.
Defines
OS 8 Pos 4
SuppDimAsDim
Controls which side of the pipeline the supports are drawn.
True - Draw support dimensions on the same side of pipe as the normal dimensions.
225
False - Draw support dimensions on the opposite side of the pipe to the normal dimensions.
When this option is set to False, the software ignores any distance set by SuppStandOut.
Defines
OS 40 Pos 2
See Also
SuppDimToCentre
Controls whether support dimensioning obeys the same rules as centreline pipe dimensioning.
True - Obey the same rules as centreline pipe dimensioning. The following example shows
centreline string dimensions to the support:
226
False - Obey normal sting/overall rules. The following example shows normal string
dimensions to the support:
Defines
OS 40 Pos 7
SuppFormat
Specifies the format for support dimensions.
None - Support dimensions not shown on the isometric.
227
String - Pipe supports dimensioned in string format.
Overall - Pipe supports dimensioned in overall format
Included - Pipe supports dimensioned in included format.

Suppress - Pipe supports dimensions are suppressed.
Defines
OS 40 Pos 1
See Also
228
SuppOptions
Defines selective support dimensioning.
All - Dimension all supports.
Fabrication - Dimension only fabrication supports.
Erection - Dimension only erection supports. The following example shows only one of two
supports dimensioned. The support that is dimensioned has its category set to Erection.
Offshore - Dimension only offshore supports.

Erection and Offshore - Dimension only erection and offshore supports.
Defines
OS 40 Pos 5
SuppStandOut
Specifies the support dimension standout. The acceptable range of values is between 0 and 99.
The default is 0.
0 - No support dimension line stand-out distance set. The software default is used for all
support dimensions.
Value - Specify the required support dimension line stand-out distance in mm or inches,
depending on the setting of the drawing units.
Defines
OS 40 Pos 3,4
See Also
SuppFormat (on page 227)
229
TapOnCpt
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on actual fitting components, such as valves and
flanges
A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point.

None - Suppress the display of tapped branch dimensions.
Full - Display dimensions for tapped branches as set for the main pipeline.
Pipe Only - Display dimensions for pipes and pipe type components (elbows, tees,
reducers, and so forth) only.
Defines
121 Pos 1
See Also
TapOnPipe (on page 230)
TapOnPipe
Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on pipe-type components, such as elbows, tees,
and pipe. The default setting is None.
230

None - Turn off dimensions for tapped branch dimensions.
Full - Turn on tapped branch dimensions.
Pipe Only - Turn off tapped branch dimensions, except for those on pipe and pipe-type
components.
Defines
OS 121 Pos 2
TapBranchDimension
Controls the dimensioning of tee and tap branches to allow dimensioning to the edge of pipe.
Centreline- Originate dimensions from the centrelines of the main run.
231
TapAndSetOnStartPoint - Dimension to the edge of pipe
TapStartPoint - Define tap dimensions only.
Defines
OS 81 Pos 9
See Also
TapOnCpt (on page 230)
232
TapOnPipeFittings
Controls the dimensioning of tapping points on pipe type components, such as elbows/teed
elbows, bends/teed bends, tees, and crosses.
None - Suppress dimensioning of tapped branches on pipe fittings.
Full - Dimension tapped branches on pipe fittings.
Defines
OS 121 Pos 3
TeedBendBranchDimension
Controls the dimensioning of tee bend/elbows.
Connection - Dimension tee bend/elbows from connection point.
Centre-line Intersection - Dimension tee bend/elbows from centreline intersection point.
Defines
OS 119 Pos 2
USAStyle
Controls whether the dimension line is broken to make space for the dimension characters.
True - Use USA dimensioning style--positioned on top of dimension line.
False - Use regular dimensioning style--inserted into dimension line.
Defines
OS 9 Pos 3
233
ValveBW
Displays the dimension to the centre of butt weld valves. Butt weld valves and straight through
Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their centre points rather
than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions. The default setting is False.
The ValveBW property can operate in conjunction with ValveLimit, which adds bore
selectivity.
True - Dimension components with butt-weld ends to their centre point.
False - Dimension butt-weld ends across their length.
Defines
OS 80 Pos 1
See Also
234
ValveCP
Displays the dimension to the centre of compression valves. Compression type valves and
straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their
center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions.
ValveCP can operate in conjunction with ValveLimit, which adds bore selectivity.
True - Dimension components with compression ends to their centre point.
False - Dimension components with compression ends across their length.
Defines
OS 80 Pos 2
See Also
235
ValveFL
Displays the dimension to the centre of flanged valves. Flanged valves and straight through
Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their centre points rather
than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions.
ValveFL can operate in conjunction with ValveLimit, which adds bore selectivity.
True - Dimension components with flanged ends to their centre point.
False - Dimension components with flanged ends across their length.
Defines
OS 80 Pos 5
ValveHY
Displays the dimension to the centre of hygienic valves. Hygienic type valves and straight
through instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their centre points
rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions. The default setting is
False.
ValveHY can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property, which adds bore
selectivity.
236
True - Dimension components with hygienic ends to their centre point.
False - Dimension components with hygienic ends across their length.
Defines
OS 80 Pos 7
See Also
ValveLimit
Provides the bore limit. Type a value in range 0-999. The default setting is 0.
If you set ValveLimit and the valve is above this limit, the software generates end
dimensions.
0 - Dimension valves/instruments that have their end type set in ValveBW, ValveCP, and so
on, to their centre point.
Value - Dimension valves/instruments that have their end type set in ValveBW, ValveCP,
and so on, and have a bore equal to or less than the value set to their centre point. Value is
in 1/16th of an inch or mm, depending on the bore units. For example, 32 x 1/16th is
equivalent to 2 bore.
Defines
OS 81 Pos 1,2,3
237
ValvePL
Displays the dimension to the centre of plain valves. Plain-ended valves and straight through
instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their centre points rather
ValvePL can operate in conjunction with ValveLimit, which adds bore selectivity.
True - Dimension components with plain ends to their centre points
False - Dimension components with plain ends across their length.
Defines
OS 80 Pos 6
See Also
238
ValveSC
Displays the dimension to the centre of screwed valves. Screwed valves and straight through
instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their centre points rather
ValveSC can operate in conjunction with ValveLimit, which adds bore selectivity.
True - Dimension components with screwed ends to their centre points.
False - Dimension components with screwed ends across their length.
Defines
OS 80 Pos 3
See Also
ValveSW
Displays the dimension to the center of socket weld valves. Socket weld valves and straight
through instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points
rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions. The default setting is
False.
ValveSW can operate in conjunction with ValveLimit, which adds bore selectivity.
239
True - Dimension components with socket weld ends to their center points.
False - Dimension components with socket weld ends to be across their length.
Defines
OS 80 Pos 4
See Also
VertOption
Controls how vertical pipe positions are indicated on the isometric drawing.
Normal - Display normal vertical pipe dimensions, with elevations at intersection points
when the level changes.
240
Suppressed - Suppress all vertical pipe dimensions, replaced by elevations in the form of
text messages at all positions where dimensions would normally be output.
Elevation - Display vertical dimensions and elevations at all normal dimensioning positions.
Defines
OS 119
WeldDimensionAccuracy
Allows welds to be dimensioned to the nearest 10th mm.
Nearest mm - Dimension welds to the nearest mm.
Nearest 10th mm - Dimension welds to the nearest 10th mm. If the decimal place value is
zero, the dimension is output in whole millimetres.
Defines
OS 119 Pos 8
WeldDimensioning
Controls the dimensioning of welds.
True - Dimension welds.
False - Suppress dimensioning of welds.
Defines
OS 119 Pos 7
241
Drawing.Format Object
Sets options for the isometric drawing format, including text size and skew dimensions.
AngleAccuracy (on page 244)
AngleStyle (on page 244)
AngleType (on page 244)
AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 246)
AdditionalWeldEnclosure (on page 248)
AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248)
AssemblyIDSequencing (on page 248)
BendRadius (on page 249)
BendRepresentation (on page 249)
ComponentLegLength (on page 249)
ComputeNozzleAxis (on page 250)
ConnectionIDCategory (on page 250)
CptAttributesEnclStyle (on page 245)
CptTagEnclStyle (on page 250)
CptTagsStyle (on page 250)
CurveThreshold (on page 251)
CutPieceNoLength (on page 251)
CutPieceEnclosureStyle (on page 251)
ElbowRadius (on page 252)
FabricationAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 252)
FallCutOff (on page 253)
FallRepresentation (on page 253)
FlangeRotationStyle (on page 254)
FlowArrowScale (on page 254)
GhostGapDimension (on page 255)
InstIDEnclosureSize (on page 255)
InstIDEnclosureStyle (on page 255)
InstIdentification (on page 256)
InsulationStyle (on page 256)
MessageCircleEnclosure (on page 257)
MessageDiamondEnclosure (on page 257)
MessagePointedEnclosure (on page 258)
MessageRoundEnclosure (on page 259)
MessageSquareEnclosure (on page 259)
MessageTriangleEnclosure (on page 260)
MultiPortConnections (on page 261)
NorthArrowBox (on page 261)
OffshoreAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 261)
OletBranchOrientationMessage (on page 262)
OrientationFrom (on page 262)
PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 263)
242
PartNoEnclSize (on page 264)

PartNoSpaces (on page 265)
PartNoLength (on page 265)
PartNoVisible (on page 265)
SeparateSpoolUnion (on page 266)
ShowFlowArrows (on page 179)
SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 266)
SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 268)
SiteAssemblyIDs (on page 268)
SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing (on page 268)
SiteWeldsNotAssignedToSpools (on page 269)
SkewDimStandout (on page 269)
SkewDimStyle (on page 269)
SkewHatchCptGap (on page 270)
SkewHatchCutOff (on page 270)
SkewHatchDimText (on page 271)
skewHatching (on page 271)
SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 272)
SkewHatchSpacing (on page 272)
SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 273)
SkewMinCpts (on page 273)
SkewMixed (on page 274)
SkewOverall (on page 274)
SkewRepresentation (on page 275)
SkewAngleStyle (on page 276)
SkewTriangleRightAngleIndication (on page 276)
SpecBrkEnclosure (on page 276)
SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 277)
SpoolIDAllocation (on page 277)
SpoolIDContinuation (on page 277)
SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 277)
SpoolIDSize (on page 280)
SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 280)
SpoolIDLength (on page 281)
SpoolDrawingID (on page 281)
SpoolIDType (on page 282)
SpoolPrefix (on page 282)
SupportIdentification (on page 283)
SupportTagEnclStyle (on page 283)
TapBranchInlineScale (on page 283)
TapBranchPipeScale (on page 284)
TapBranchSuppression (on page 284)
TeeCrossNS (on page 285)
TestIso (on page 285)
TextFont (on page 286)
243
TextSize (on page 286)

UserTextSize (on page 286)
TextWeight (on page 287)
TextWidth (on page 287)
TracingStyle (on page 287)
ReferenceNameStyle (on page 287)
CurvedPipeAngleStyle (on page 289)
CurvedPipeRadiusStyle (on page 289)
AngleAccuracy
Controls the accuracy at which angle information is output on the isometric drawing.
Default - Output all angles to ISOGEN default accuracy of 0.1 degrees with no trailing
zeros. For example, 80.16 is output as 80.2 degrees, and 80.01 is output as 80 degrees.
Nearest Degree - Output angles to the nearest degree.
Nearest 10th Degree (1 decimal place) - Output angles to the nearest 0.1 degrees.
Nearest 100th Degree (2 decimal places) - Output angles to the nearest 0.01 degrees.
Defines
OS 67 Pos 4
AngleStyle
Controls the output of angle information for bends and elbows in the pipeline.
All - Output all angle information on the isometric (including angles that are exactly 90- and
180-degrees.)
All except 90/180 deg - Output all angle information on the isometric drawing except angles
that are within 0.5-degrees of 90- and 180-degrees.
All except within 10th degree of 90/180 deg - Output angle information on the isometric
drawing unless when rounded angles are within .1-degree of 90- and 180-degrees.
None - Suppress angle information on the isometric drawing.
Defines
OS 67 Pos 2
See Also
AngleType (on page 244)
244
AngleType
Controls whether the angles output for bends and elbows are the included or deflected angle.
Deflected
Included
If set, AText -396 is combined with the angle information and displayed on the isometric
drawing.
If not set (default), only the angle information is output.

Defines
OS 67 Pos 3
See Also
AngleStyle (on page 244)
245
CptAttributesEnclStyle
Contains the text output to the Data Definition File (DDF) for the component attribute enclosure.
Adheres to the following format:
Message-Type Attribute
Message-Types:
MESSAGE-POINTED
MESSAGE-ROUND
MESSAGE-TRIANGLE
MESSAGE-DIAMOND
MESSAGE-SQUARE
MESSAGE-CIRCLE
MESSAGE-UNBOXED
Attributes:
COMPONENT-NAME
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10
You can output attributes to the following:
Material list (Variable and UserDefined)
Printed material list
Material control file
Cut list report
Cut list file
AdditionalEnclosureStyle
Specifies the style for part number enclosures.
Type 1:
None - Display no enclosure style.
Type 1 Square
246
Type 1 Round
Type 1 Diamond
Type 2 - Use PartNoEnclosureStyle to define the style of end used with Type 2 additional
enclosure.
Type 2 Square
Type 2 Round
Type 2 Diamond
PartNoSpaces needs to be set to control the number of blank spaces used.

If PartNoEnclosureStyle is set to Circle, Double Circle or Ellipse, then Type 2
AdditionalEnclosureStyle is switched off, as this uses the same setting.
For Type 2, the enclosure style for the box with the part numbers in it is defined using
PartNoEnclosureStyle.
All pipe part numbers, which are usually output as messages along the pipe, are converted
to arrowed out type messages.
Defines
OS 73 Pos 5
OS 76 Pos1
See Also
247
AdditionalWeldEnclosure
Controls special part number box for welds.
True - Display a special part number box for welds.
False - Suppress display of a special part number box for welds.
Welds must have part numbers and descriptions, and the MLType property must be set
to Special.
Defines
OS 73 Pos 6,7
See Also
PartNovisible (on page 265)
AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces
Sets the number of spaces used when AdditionalWeldEnclosure is set to True.
Value - Specifies the number of spaces to be used. A default value of 2 is used if no value is
set.
Defines
OS 73 Pos 6,7
See Also
PartNovisible (on page 265)
AssemblyIDSequencing
Controls how assembly identifiers are sequenced.
Combined - Sequence all assembly identifiers.
Category - Sequence assembly identifiers by category.
Defines
OS 79 Pos 7
248
BendRadius
Sets the bend radius in millimetres. Use this option only if you set the bend representation to
round.
Value - Type a value in the range of 0-9. In the following example, the BendRadius is 8mm.
If you specify a value of 0, the software uses a default radius of 3mm.
See Also
BendRepresentation (on page 249)
BendRepresentation
Defines how bends look on the isometric drawing.
Square
Round
ComponentLegLength
Specifies a plotted leg length for elbows, tees, and crosses. ComponentLegLength does not
apply to fabricated (pulled) bends or set-on (stub-in) type tees or crosses.
Value - Specify the required leg length in whole millimetres. For example, for a 12 mm leg
length, type 12.
Use this option with care, as it can produce undesirable results on the drawing. The
maximum suggested value is 18 (18 mm), and the minimum suggested value is 6 (6 mm).
If you set the Value to 0, the software uses a default value of 9 mm.
Defines
OS 95 Pos 1
249
ComputeNozzleAxis
Controls the calculation of Nozzle axes directions and insertion of this information into the PCF
(Piping Component File) when using the Pcfgen program.
True - Nozzle axis direction calculated and inserted into the PCF.
False - No calculation of Nozzle axis direction calculated or output to the PCF.
Currently not in use - leave set at False.
Defines
OS 111 Pos 2
ConnectionIDCategory
Controls which category of end connections is assigned an identifier.
All - Assign an identifier to all end connections.
Fabrication - Assign an identifier only to Fabrication end connections.
Erection - Assign an identifier only to Erection end connections.
Offshore - Assign an identifier only Offshore end connections.
Erection and Offshore - Assign an identifier only to Erection and Offshore end
connections.
Defines
OS 79 Pos 8
CptTagEnclStyle
Controls the enclosure shapes used for components if CptTagsStyle is set to Boxed.
Square-ended box
Diamond-ended box
Round-ended box
Triangular
Diamond
Rectangular
Circular
Elliptical
Hexagonal
Defines
OS 60 Pos 3
See Also
CptTagsStyle (on page 250)
250
CptTagsStyle
Defines the style for tag numbers on inline items.
None - Suppress plotting of tags/names.
Boxed - Plot and box in tags/names.
Unboxed - Plot tags/names without boxing in.
Tagging of pipe and pipeline elements made from pipe is not supported.
For instruments, see InstIDEnclosureStyle (on page 255).
Defines
OS 60 Pos 1
See Also
CptTagEnclStyle (on page 250)
CurveThreshold
Defines the minimum radius at which bends are output as curved pipe on the isometric drawing.
Value - Type a value in the range of 0-99.
Curved pipe can be drawn only in primary planes.
CutPieceNoLength
Sets a fixed (1-9 characters or variable) length for part numbers.
Value - Specify the fixed length.
Defines
OS 72 Pos 2
See Also
CutPieceEnclosureStyle (on page 251)
CutPieceEnclosureStyle
Controls the shape of the enclosure used to surround the cut piece numbers on the isometric.
<n> Default
Circle
Diamond
Diamond Ends
Double Circle
Double Ellipse
Ellipse
Hexagon Ends
Round Ends
Square Ends
Triangle
Defines
OS 2 Pos 7
251
ElbowRadius
Controls the radius depiction (in millimetres) on the isometric drawing for elbows. Acceptable
values are in range 3mm to 9mm.
Value - Specify the elbow radius. In the following illustration, ElbowRadius is set at 4.5mm.
Use this option only if you set ElbowRepresentation to Round.

The default radius used for elbows is 3mm.
See Also
ElbowRepresentation
Defines how elbows look on the isometric drawing.
Square
Round
FabricationAssemblyIDEnclosure
Controls the enclosure style for Fabrication assembly identifiers output on the isometric drawing.
None - Display assembly identifiers with no box enclosure.
Diamond Ended - Display assembly identifiers in a diamond-ended box enclosure.
Round Ended - Display assembly identifiers in a round-ended box enclosure.
Triangle - Display assembly identifiers in a triangular-shaped enclosure.
Diamond - Display assembly identifiers in a diamond-shaped enclosure.
Square Ended - Display assembly identifiers in a square-ended box enclosure.
Circle - Display assembly identifiers in a circular enclosure.
Suppress - Suppress the display of assembly identifiers.
Double Circle - Display assembly identifiers in a circular-shaped enclosure inside another
circle.
Ellipse - Display assembly identifiers in an elliptical-shaped enclosure.
Defines
OS 79 Pos 5
252
FallCutOff
Defines the minimum slope treated as a fall. Slopes steeper than the cut-off value are shown
with a 2D or 3D box or triangle skew indication as appropriate.
0 - Use the default for 5 angle cut-off or its equivalent depending upon the type of indication
selected by FallRepresentation.
Value - Define a cut-off number to suit the type of indication selected by
FallRepresentation.
For fall cut off of 5 Degrees, type 5 or 0.
For fall cut off of 1:11 Ratio, type 11.
For fall cut off of 9 Percent, type 9.
For fall cut off of 5 Grads, type 5.
For fall cut off of 1" Per foot, type 1.
For fall cut off of 88 mm per metre, type 88.
Always set FallCutOff to 0 when sloping pipeline indication has been suppressed by
FallRepresentation.
Defines
OS 20
See Also
FallRepresentation (on page 253)
FallRepresentation
Specifies how sections of falling pipelines (downward slopes) are indicated on the isometric
drawing. This option determines the method of how the fall value is to be indicated numerically
on the isometric, as specified by one of the options shown below.
None - Suppress falling line indication.
D deg - Output angle to nearest degree.
D.d deg - Output angle to nearest 1/10th degree.
D.dd deg - Output angle to nearest 1/100th degree.
deg.min - Output angle in degrees and minutes.
G grad - Output gradient to nearest grad.
G.g grad - Output gradient to nearest 1/10th grad.
G.gg grad -Output gradient to nearest 1/100th grad.
Incline~1/16th"/ft - Output incline to nearest 16th of an inch per foot.
Incline~1/100"/ft - Output incline to nearest 100th of an inch per foot.
Incline~1mm/m - Output incline to nearest mm per metre.
Incline~5mm/m - Output incline to nearest 5 mm per metre.
Incline~10mm/m - Output incline to nearest 10 mm per metre.
P% - Output percentage to nearest whole value.
P.p% - Output percentage to nearest 1 decimal place.
253

P.pp% - Output percentage to nearest 2 decimal place.
Ratio~5 (>1:30) -Output ratio to nearest 5 when greater than 1:30.
Ratio~5 (>1:100) - Output ratio to nearest 5 when greater than 1:100.
Ratio~1 - Output ratio to nearest 1.
Defines
OS 19
See Also
FallCutOff (on page 253)
FlangeRotationStyle
Specifies the style of the enclosure box for flange rotation angles on the isometric drawing,
when ShowFlangeRotation is set to True.
No box - Output un-boxed angle output.
Diamond ends - Output a diamond-ended enclosure box.
Round ends - Output a round-ended enclosure box.
Square ends - Output a square- ended enclosure box.
Defines
OS 124 Pos 2
See Also
ShowFlangeRotation (on page 178)
FlowArrowScale
Scales flow arrows that are plotted directly on the pipe. Flow arrows are used to show the flow
direction of fluid or gas in the pipeline.
Value - Plot pipeline flow arrows at an alternative scale factor (default 8) in the range value
5 to 15 (value 5 produces smaller arrows, 15 larger).
You can generate this type of flow arrow only if the relevant information is included in the
input pipeline data file.
You can also use a separate type of flow arrow, which is plotted alongside in-line fittings,
either as well as or instead of, the flow arrow annotation output on pipe.
Defines
OS 112 Pos 1,2
See Also
ShowCptFlowArrows (on page 178)
254
GhostGapDimension
Controls the plotted length of a ghost gap element. A ghost gap element is a physical gap on the
plotted isometric that can be used when generating individual pipeline isometrics, or as a link
between related, but unconnected, pipelines on a system type isometric. The default setting is 0.
0 - Use the normal minimum gap as controlled by ISOGEN.
Value - Specify a user-defined minimum gap dimension in whole millimeters.
The smallest allowable value is 18 mm, and the largest allowable value is 60 mm.
The software defaults to using the appropriate maximum value if it detects a setting outside
these limits.
Defines
OS 110
InstIDEnclosureSize
Specifies the size of the enclosure for instrument text. You can choose 1 through 4 characters
on each of the two available lines within an instrument balloon, or you can specify no balloon.
No Balloon- Suppress plotting of a balloon around the instrument name.
1 character - Plot a balloon size at least 1 character on each line.

2 character - Plot a balloon size at least 2 characters on each line.
A two line name output is derived by inputting a $ character in the name at the point a
new-line is required, such as CV$101.
A variety of other box type enclosures is available by using InstIDEnclosureStyle.

Defines
OS 123 Pos 1
255
InstIDEnclosureStyle
Specifies the shape of the instrument name box.
No Box - Revert to using the setting for InstIDEnclosureSize .
Diamond - Display a diamond-ended box enclosure.
Round - Display a round-ended box enclosure.
Triangular - Display a triangle-shaped enclosure.
Diamond - Display a diamond-shaped enclosure.
Square - Display a square-ended box enclosure.
Circle - Display a circular-shaped enclosure.
Ellipse - Display an elliptical-shaped enclosure.
Hexagon - Display a hexagonal-shaped enclosure.
To reduce the chances of these enclosures becoming quite large, especially the diamond
and triangle enclosures, limit the display to only 2 or 3 characters.
Defines
OS 123 Pos 3
See Also
InstIDEnclosureSize (on page 255)
InstIdentification
Specifies whether to use the instrument tag or item code in the material list or any material
control file that is generated. Typically, 3D design systems have parameters for both the
instrument name (tag) and the specification reference (Item code), but only one of these can be
selected for output.
Use Tag - Output the default for the instrument name (tag).
Use Item Code - Output the instrument item code.
Defines
OS 59
InsulationStyle
Specifies whether to show insulation along pipe only or along pipe and components.
None - Suppress insulation indication.
Alongside Pipe - Plot dashed insulation lines alongside pipe only, with a gap of 1 mm.
Alongside Pipe and Components - Plot dashed insulation lines alongside pipe and all
components, both with a 1 mm gap.
Defines
OS 61
256
MessageCircleEnclosure
Controls the physical size of the circle enclosure used to contain user input messages.
This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that are used
by the software to pad-out the normal message record to effectively increase the size of the
enclosure. The size of the text (set by TextSize) displayed within any increased size enclosure
is not increased in size.
The data string associated with each identifier consists of a combination of @, $ and ?
characters.
The @ character signals a blank (space) requirement.
The $ character signals a new line requirement.
The ? character indicates where the actual data from the declared record is located in the
padded-out record.
Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the message enclosure as shown in the
following illustration:
Ideally, the message enclosure should only contain two or three characters, and should
also be used with care, as a large circle message considerably affects the isometric
representation.
See Also
MessageDiamondEnclosure
Controls the physical size of the diamond enclosure used to contain user input messages.
by the program to pad- out the normal message record to effectively increase the size of the
characters.
The ? character indicates where the actual data from the declared record is be located in
the padded-out record.
257

Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the message enclosure, as shown in the
also be used with care, as a large message enclosure considerably affects the isometric
representation.
See Also
MessagePointedEnclosure
Controls the physical size of the pointed-ended enclosure used to contain user input messages.
characters.
Ideally, use the message enclosure with care, as a large message enclosure
considerably affects the isometric representation.
See Also
258
MessageRoundEnclosure
Controls the physical size of the round-ended enclosure used to contain user input messages.
characters.
Use the message enclosure with care, as a large message enclosure considerably
affects the isometric representation.
See Also
MessageSquareEnclosure
Controls the physical size of the square enclosure used to contain user input messages.
characters.
259

Use the message enclosure with care, as a large message enclosure considerably
affects the isometric representation.
See Also
MessageTriangleEnclosure
Controls the physical size of the triangle enclosure used to contain user input messages.
characters.
also be used with care, as a large circle message considerably affects the isometric
representation.
See Also
260
MultiPortConnections
Controls the connection leg depiction of multi-port components.
All Dotted - Display dotted connection lines on all multi-port connections.
Dotted for Clarity - Display dotted connection lines only when necessary for picture clarity,
such as when two or more ports are positioned on the same side with attached pipe work
running parallel to each other.
Not shown - Suppress the display of dotted connection lines shown.
Defines
OS 95 Pos 5
NorthArrowBox
Controls whether the north arrow, as specified by NorthDirection, is displayed in an enclosing
box.
True - Display the north arrow in an enclosing box.
False - Suppress the display of the north arrow in an enclosing box.
Defines
OS 42 Pos 1
See Also
NorthDirection (on page 193)
OffshoreAssemblyIDEnclosure
Controls the enclosure style for Offshore assembly identifiers output on the isometric drawing.
None - Display assembly identifiers in no box enclosure.
Diamond Ended - Display assembly identifiers in a diamond-ended box enclosure.
Round Ended - Display assembly identifiers in a round-ended box enclosure.
Triangle - Display assembly identifiers in a triangular-shaped enclosure.
Diamond - Display assembly identifiers in a diamond-shaped enclosure.
Square Ended - Display assembly identifiers in a square-ended box enclosure.
Circle - Display assembly identifiers in a circular enclosure.
Suppress - Suppress the display of assembly identifiers.
Double Circle - Display assembly identifiers in a circular-shaped enclosure inside another
circle.
Ellipse - Display assembly identifiers in an elliptical-shaped enclosure.
Defines
OS 79 Pos 6
261
OletBranchOrientationMessage
Controls the output of an orientation message on undeveloped olet branches that are in primary
directions.
Create Orientation Message - Output an orientation message on undeveloped olet
branches in a primary direction.
No Message - Suppress output of an orientation message on the isometric drawing.
Defines
OS 70 Pos 4
OrientationFrom
Controls the output of Skew orientation.
Previous Position - Output the orientation direction message showing rotation relative to
previous position.
Primary Direction - Output the orientation direction message showing rotation from primary
direction.
Defines
OS 70 Pos 3
262
PartNoEnclosureStyle
Specifies the part number enclosure box shape.
None - No enclosure box. Only plots part numbers.
Square Ends
Round Ends
Diamond Ends
Circle
Double Circle
263
Ellipse
The size at which the circle, double circle and ellipse is drawn is controlled by
PartNoEnclosureSize (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure.
If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to
accommodate.
Defines
OS 76 Pos 1 and 2
See Also
PartNoEnclSize
Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and eclipse enclosure
style. The default is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters, or set to Variable size,
which dynamically sizes the enclosure.
The following example shows the default size of 2 used for the circle enclosure style:
The number of characters defines the minimum size that the circle, double circle and
ellipse is drawn at. If there are more characters than the value that is defined, the enclosure
dynamically adjusts to suit. If the option is set to Variable size, this allows the circle, double
circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjust to
suit the number of characters.
Defines
OS 76 Pos 3
See Also
264
PartNoSpaces
Sets the number of spaces used in the Type 1 and Type 2 part number boxes specified by
AdditionalEnclosureStyle.
Value - Specify the number of spaces to be used. A default value of 2 is used if no value is
set.
Defines
OS 73 Pos 1 and 2 or
OS 73 Pos 3 and 4
See Also
PartNoLength
Sets a fixed length for part numbers (1-9 characters or variable).
Value - Specify a fixed length for part numbers.
Defines
OS 76 Pos 4
See Also
PartNoVisible
Suppresses the plotting of part numbers and associated enclosure boxes on the drawing.
True - Display part numbers on the isometric drawing.
False - Suppress the display of part numbers on the isometric drawing.
Defines
OS 76 Pos 1
See Also
265
SeparateSpoolUnion
Controls spool break points at unions.
True - A fabrication union connecting fabrication components does not create separate
spools.
False - A fabrication union connecting fabrication components creates separate spools.
Defines
OS 39 Pos 7
SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure
Controls the enclosure style used for site assemblies on the isometric drawing.
None - Display no box enclosure.
266
Diamond - Display a diamond-ended box enclosure.
Round - Display a round-ended box enclosure.
Triangular - Display a triangular-shaped enclosure.
Diamond - Display a diamond-shaped enclosure.
Rectangular - Display a rectangular-shaped enclosure.
Circular - Display a circular-shaped enclosure.
Double Circle - Display a circular-shaped enclosure inside another circle.
Ellipse - Display an elliptical-shaped enclosure.
The site assembly uses AText -478, default J--such as J1 or JA--to prefix the flange
assembly identification.
The size that the circle, double circle and ellipse is drawn at is controlled by
SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (default 2 characters) which defines the minimum size for the
enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts
to suit.
Defines
OS 79 Pos 3
See Also
267
SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize
Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and ellipse enclosure
style. The default is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters or set to Variable size,
The following example shows the default size of 2 used for a circle style enclosure:
ellipse is drawn at. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure is dynamically
adjusted to suit. Setting the size to Variable size, allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to
be smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjusts to suit the number of
characters.
Defines
OS 79 Pos 9
See Also
SiteAssemblyIDs
Controls site assembly information displayed on the isometric drawing.
Off - Suppress display of flange assembly identification.
Numeric - Display numeric flange assembly identification.
Alphabetic - Display alphabetic flange assembly identification.

Defines
OS 79 POS 1
SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing
Controls whether site assemblies are numbered per drawing or per pipeline.
True - Number flange assembly identification per drawing.
False - Number flange assembly identification per pipeline.
Defines
OS 79 Pos 2
268
SiteWeldsNotAssignedToSpools
By default, site welds are assigned to spools if they are adjoining.
True - Suppress assignment of site welds to adjoining spools.
False - Assign site welds to adjoining spools.
Defines
OS 83 Pos 1
SkewDimStandout
Controls the dimension line standout distance used on boxed or triangle skew dimensions.
0 - Use the dimension line standout setting defined in StandOutComposite, except when
SkewDimStyle is set to Triangle - Alternative, in which case the default dimension position
is 4 mm.
Value - Specify the value (real number) used as an alternative dimension line standout in
mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units. Used when SkewDimStyle is
set to Triangle - Skew standout.
Defines
OS 100
See Also
StandOutComposite (on page 223)
SkewDimStyle
Specifies how skewed pipe sections are drawn on the isometric, along with the form of skew
dimensioning to be used.
Box - normal standout - Depict skew box with normal dimensioning.
Triangle - normal standout - Depict skew triangle with normal dimensioning.
Triangle - skew standout - Depict skew triangle with normal dimensioning. Uses the value
set in SkewDimStandout.
Triangle - alternative - Depict skew triangle with alternative dimensioning. Actual
dimensions are positioned close to the sides of triangle with no witness lines.
Defines
OS 99 Pos 1
See Also
SkewHatching (on page 271)
269
SkewHatchCptGap
Specifies the gap left unhatched for inline components.
0 - Use a gap local to pipeline of 2.5 mm.

Value - Specify value (real number) as an alternative gap in mm or inches, depending on
the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
Defines
OS 102 Pos 3,4
See Also
SkewHatchCutOff
Controls the maximum length in whole mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing
units in the Options dialog box, of the hatching lines to be plotted. Type a value in the range
0-99.
Blank - Use the default for no hatch line cut-off value. All triangles are fully hatched.
Value - Specify the value that equals the hatch line cut-off length. For example, type 25 for a
25 mm cut-off value. In this case, hatch lines in excess of 25 mm long are not be plotted.
This gives a partial hatched effect.
Defines
OS 101 Pos 3,4
See Also
270
SkewHatchDimText
Controls the physical size of the un-hatched gaps (white areas) to be left local to dimensions or
text that fall within any skew triangle hatching.
Blank - Use the default for gap local to dimensions / text of 1.5mm.
Value - Specify the value used as an alternative gap. You can express the value in mm or
inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
Defines
OS 102 Pos 5,6
See Also
SkewHatching
Specifies whether skew hatching is on or off.
True - Turn on skew hatching.
False - Turn off skew hatching.
Defines
OS 101 Pos 1
See Also
271
SkewHatchPipeGap
Controls the physical size of the unhatched gaps (white space) to be left local to the pipeline.
The default value is 2.5 mm.
0 - Use the default value for the gap local to pipeline.
Value - Specify the value (in the range 0-10) used for the alternative gap. You can type the
value in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog
box.
Defines
OS 102 Pos 1, 2
See Also
SkewHatchSpacing
Controls the spacing of the hatching lines used in hatched triangles.
Value - Specify the value (in range 0-10) that equals the alternative hatch line spacing. Type
a value in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog
box.
Defines
OS 101 Pos 1, 2
See Also
272
SkewInVerticalBranch
Controls the drawing depiction method used when a vertical branch connection is made to a
sloping (falling) pipeline using a special zero length bend component. The default setting is
True.
This special bend (which has no length) is used to carry the angle between the vertical branch
and the sloping pipeline. Two drawing methods are available. One shows a small 2D skew box
section between the branch and the main pipe, while the other does not.
Where olets are used in such cases, a text message indicates the orientation direction if the
branch is not developed.
True - Show the short tee branch leg section of pipe skewed. Olets have an orientation
message instead of a skewed section. Both are dimensioned separately to the connecting
pipe.
False - For no separate skew sections, the vertical branch is connected straight into the
main pipe. Olets do not have an orientation message. Both are included in a single inclusive
dimension.
In both cases the angle between the vertical branch and the sloping (falling) pipeline will
be indicated.
Defines
OS 68
See Also
273
SkewMinCpts
Optionally permits simple skewed branch legs to have the normal skew box/triangle enclosure
suppressed and replaced by a single pipe length dimension and a text message giving the
branch orientation. Acceptable range of values is 0-99. The default value is 0.
When used to suppress the normal box enclosure, the value set represents the maximum
number of fittings permitted in the branch. Branches found to contain more fittings than this are
drawn with the normal skew box/triangle enclosure.
0 - Draw all branches with normal skew box/triangle depiction.
Value - Suppress skew box/triangle depiction on branch legs whose number of components
is less than or equal to the value set, and output an orientation message.
This facility is only available on straight through branches. Any change in direction along
the branch automatically causes the program to default to normal skew box/triangle output.
Defines
OS 70
SkewMixed
Shows 3D skew boxes and 2D skew triangles.
True - For mixture of skew indication types--3D skews are indicated with boxes, and 2D
skews are indicated with triangles.
False - All skew indications similar, as defined by SkewDimStyle.
Defines
OS 99 Pos 2
See Also
274
SkewOverall
Controls how skew pipe sections containing branch connections are depicted in terms of the
skew indication on the isometric drawing. Such skews may be shown as either a single, overall
enclosure or as a series of separate box or triangle enclosures.
Individual - Depict skews with a series of separate box or triangle enclosures, one
enclosure per branch.
Overall - Depict a single overall skew.
Defines
OS 97
See Also
SkewRepresentation
Controls the method used to depict sloping (falling) sections of a pipeline that are skewed in the
horizontal plane.
3D box - Show the full 3D box or triangle.
2D Skew + Fall - Show the 2D skew box or triangle plus fall indicator.
Defines
OS 67
See Also
275
SkewTriangleRightAngleIndication
Controls the output of a right angle indicator on skew triangles.
True - Output right angle indicators on skew triangles.
False - Suppress output of right angle indicators on skew triangles.
Defines
OS 99 Pos 4
SkewAngleStyle
Controls the output of skew angles on skewed section of pipeline.
Both Angles With Arrowheads - Display both skew angles with arrow heads on the arc
radius.
Both Angles Without Arrowheads - Display both skew angles without arrow heads on the
arc radius.
Not Shown - Suppress output of skew angles.
With Arrowheads - Display a single skew angle with arrow heads on the arc radius.
Without Arrowheads - Display a single skew angle without arrow heads on the arc radius.
Defines
OS 99 Pos 3
See Also
SpecBrkEnclosure
Controls the shape of the enclosure that surrounds the indication of a specification break
(specification change) on the isometric drawing.
None - Suppress the display of an enclosure around the specification break reference on
Square Ended - Display a square-shaped box enclosure around the specification break
reference on the isometric drawing.
Diamond Ended - Display a diamond-shaped enclosure around the specification break
Round Ended - Display a round-ended box enclosure around the specification break
276
Hexagonal Ended - Display a hexagonally-shaped enclosure around the specification break

Defines
OS 114 Pos 2
See Also
SpecBrkRepresentation
Specifies single or dual specification break indication boxes on the isometric drawing
Single - Indicate a single specification. Boxed message consisting of the new specification
reference pointing to the position on the pipeline where the change occurs.
Dual - Indicate two specifications. Two boxed messages containing the current and new
specification references are positioned at the point on the pipeline where the change occurs.
Defines
OS 114 Pos 1
See Also
SpecBrkEnclosure (on page 276)
SpoolIDAllocation
Controls allocation of spool numbers for lone fabrication components.
Allocate Lone IDs - Allocate spool numbers for lone fabrication components.
No Lone IDs - Do not allocate spool numbers for lone fabrication components.
User Spools Only - User controlled pipe spools only--no automatically generated spools.
Defines
OS 39 Pos 6
See Also
SpoolIDContinuation
Controls the spool identifier sequence.
True - For the current spool identifier sequence to continue on to each new drawing.
False - Causes spool identifiers to re-commence at 1 on each new drawing.
Defines
OS 39 Pos 2
277
SpoolIDEnclosure
Specifies the enclosure shape for the spool identifiers.
None - Use no enclosure.
278
Square Brackets - Enclose spool identifiers in the standard square brackets or a double
box enclosure.
Diamond Ends - Enclose spool identifiers in a diamond-ended box.
Round - Enclose spool identifiers in a round-ended box.
Triangular - Enclose spool identifiers in a triangle-shaped box.
Diamond Box - Enclose spool identifiers in a diamond-shaped box.
Square Box - Enclose spool identifiers in a square-ended box.
Circle - Enclose spool identifiers in a circle.
Double Circle - Enclose spool identifiers in a double circle.
Ellipse - Enclose spool identifiers in an ellipse.
The size that the circle, double circle and ellipse will be drawn at, is controlled by
SpoolIDSize (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there
are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit.
Defines
OS 39 Pos 3, 8
See Also
279
SpoolIDSize
styles. The default is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters, or set to Variable, which
dynamically sizes the enclosure.
The following example shows the default size of 2 used for an circle enclosure.
ellipse are drawn at. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically
adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable, allows the circle, double circle and ellipse, to be
smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjust to suit the number of
characters.
Defines
OS 39 Pos 9
See Also
SpoolIDEnclosureStyle
Increases the size of the SpoolID enclosure.
by the software to pad-out the SpoolIDEnclosure record to effectively increase the size of the
is not increased in size. The data string associated with each identifier consists of a combination
of @, $ and ? characters.
The ? character indicates where the actual data from the declared record should be located
in the 'padded-out' record.
Setting the value to the text string @$@@?@@$@ increases the SpoolIDEnclosure with the
diamond-end enclosure as shown in the following illustration:
Use the increase in size with care as it affects the isometric representation considerably.
280
SpoolIDLength
Sets a fixed (1-9 characters) or variable length for spool ID length.
Value - Specify from 1-9 to set the number of characters or set as variable.
Defines
OS 72 Pos 1
See Also
SpoolDrawingID
Controls the spool drawing identifier used on Spool isometrics.
Default - The default, which is the pipeline name followed by the spool identifier (set by
AText -257 to default of SPL) followed by the spool number, unless the spool has been
named, in which case the spool name is used.
No spool name:
Spool named:
USER - Pipeline name followed by the user Spool name.
If the spool is not named, then the spool drawing identifier will be the same as the
default.
Auto Pipeline Ref - Pipeline name followed by spool number, unless the spool has been
named, in which case the spool name is used
No spool name:
Spool named:
281
Auto Pipeline Filename - Pipeline filename followed by Spool number, unless the Spool
has been named, in which case the Spool name is used.
No Spool name:
Spool named:
Defines
OS 39 Pos 4, 5
See Also
SpoolIDType
Turns on and off the display of spool identifiers.
None - Turn off the display of spool identifiers to be suppressed.
Numeric - Include model spool numbers on the isometric drawing.
Alphabetic - As for value 0 but using an alphabetic system of A, B, C, and so on.
Defines
OS 39 Pos 1
See Also
SpoolPrefix
Sets a spool prefix (output to DDF).
282
SupportIdentification
Specifies whether support names are shown on the isometric drawing and whether the names
are boxed or unboxed. This option also controls whether supports are in the material list (BOM)
and whether the tag or specification reference (item code) is in the item code field.
No Tags / Spec Ref - Suppress output of support names (tags) on the isometric drawing
and output of the specification reference (item code) in the item code field of the material list.
Unboxed Tags / Tags - Output unboxed support names (tags) on the isometric drawing,
and outputs support names in the item code field of the material list.
Boxed Tags / Spec Ref - Output boxed support names (tags) on the isometric drawing, and
outputs the specification reference in the item code field of the material list.
Unboxed Tags - Output unboxed support names (tags) on the isometric drawing, and
excludes supports from the material list.
Boxed Tags - Output boxed support names (tags) on the isometric, and excludes supports
from the material list.
Defines
OS 64 Pos 1
SupportTagEnclStyle
If SupportIdentification is set to Boxed Tags / Spec Ref or Boxed Tags, controls the
enclosure shapes used for supports.
Default Rectangle
Round Ends
Diamond Ends
Triangle
Diamond
Rectangle
Circle
Ellipse
Hexagon
Defines
OS 64 Pos 3
See Also
SupportIdentification (on page 283)
283
TapBranchInlineScale
Provides a tapped branch scaling factor for taps on inline items such as valves and flanges. The
value represents a percentage of the main pipeline size. The minimum value is 75 and the
maximum is 125.
0 - Default for no tapped branch scaling. Tapped branches shown the same size as the
main pipeline (100%).
Value - Specify a value that represents an alternative tapped branch scaling factor. For
example, type 110 to increase scaling, 90 to decrease scaling.
A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point. The

components in a tapped branch can be scaled up or down from the size used for the main
pipeline.
50% is the minimum recommended value.
Defines
OS 120 Pos 1,2,3
TapBranchPipeScale
Provides a tapped branch scaling factor for taps on pipe type components.
Examples of pipe type components are elbows, tees, reducers, and so forth. The value
represents a percentage of the main pipeline size. The minimum value is 1 and the maximum is
99 (%).
0 - Use the default for tapped branch scaling at 65% of main pipeline size.
Value - Specify a number that represents an alternative tapped branch scaling factor. For
example, type 80 to increase scaling, 45 to decrease scaling.
Defines
OS 120 Pos 4,5
TapBranchSuppression
Tapped branch connections can sometimes be difficult to draw clearly on an isometric,
particularly where a number of fittings are in close proximity. ISOGEN suppresses the drawing
of tapped branches for particular components. This allows the alternative of using a detailed
sketch to show branch connections instead.
Where tapped branches have been suppressed, part numbers and weld numbers can still be
output on the isometric.
The suppressed components are defined by either by component type SKEY--such as
VALVEVB**-- or component type as follows:
ALL - Suppress the output of all tapped branches.
PIPE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on pipe.
FITTING - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on fittings.
FLANGE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on flanges.
VALVE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on valves.
INSTRUMENT - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on instruments.
MISC-ITEM - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on misc. components.
284

Double-clicking this property opens the TapBranchSuppression dialog box, into which you can
type the component types you want to suppress.
TeeCrossNS
Controls the nominal size (N.S.) output at set-on type tees and crosses.
Combined - Display nominal size output at set-on tees and crosses as combined.
Separate - Display nominal size output at set-on tees and crosses separately.
Defines
OS 41 Pos 9
TestIso
Allows test isometrics to be produced for proving isometric output, or to resolve drawing
production issues.
True - Generates a normal isometric.
False - Generate a test isometric with all dimensions and material list quantities output as
X's.
Defines
OS 21 Pos 3
285
TextFont
Defines the font used when outputting text on the isometric. Use the TextFont list to specify the
font type.
Defines
OS 4 Pos 7,8,9
See Also
TextSize
Specifies the size of the text characters on the drawing. The default setting is Medium (2.5
mm).
Small (2.1 mm) - Output small characters, 2.1mm high.
Medium (2.5 mm) - Output medium-sized characters, 2.4mm high.
Large (2.8 mm) - Output large-sized characters, 2.8mm high.
XLarge (3.5 mm) - Output extra large characters, 3.5mm high.
XXLarge (4.2 mm) - Output extra large characters, 4.2mm high.
XXXLarge (4.9 mm) - Output extra large characters, 4.9mm high.
Or User - Output characters with a height defined by UserTextSize.
Title block text, which is always output using large characters (2.8mm) and material list
text, which is controlled by properties of the material list object, are not affected by this setting.
Defines
OS 4 Pos 1
See Also
UserTextSize
Specifies a user-defined size. Type the required value as an integer in range 10-99, in mm or
Use this option only if TextSize is set to User.
Defines
OS 4 Pos 1,2
See Also
286
TextWeight
Specifies the thickness of the text. Specify a value between 1 and 9. Used only for MicroStation.
Defines
OS 4 Pos 5
See Also
TextWidth
Specifies the character width if you are using a fixed-width font. Type the value required (in
range 10-99) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options
dialog box.
Defines
OS 4 Pos 3,4
See Also
TracingStyle
Specifies where heat tracing is shown on the isometric drawing.
Alongside Pipe - Use the default to plot chain dotted tracing lines alongside the pipe only,
with a gap of 1 mm.
None - Suppress tracing indication.
Alongside Pipe and Components - Plot chain dotted tracing lines alongside pipe and all
components, both with a 1 mm gap.
Defines
OS 62
287
ReferenceNameStyle
Controls the physical size of the characters that are used for dimensions, co-ordinates and
message text on the 'picture section' of the isometric.
Default (Along Reference Lines)
1 Character Circular Enclosure

2 Characters
3 Characters
4 Characters
5 Characters
6 Characters
7 Characters
8 Characters
9 Characters
Defines
OS 123 Pos 5
288
CurvedPipeAngleStyle
Suppress - Suppress curved pipe angles.
With dimension - Output curved pipe angles as part of dimensions.
Defines
OS 84 Pos 2
CurvedPipeRadiusStyle
Message - Output curved pipe radii as a message.
Suppress - Suppress curved pipe radii.
Defines
OS 84 Pos 3
Drawing.Layers Object
Sets the default colour for the layer.
The Drawing.Layers object also folder contains a collection of options that are used to list the
layers of the isometric drawing and the content for each layer. For more information, see
Drawing.Layers Layers Collection (on page 289).
DefaultColour (on page 289)
Count (on page 289)
DefaultColour
Identifies an integer value that corresponds to a colour as defined in an output drawing system,
such as MicroStation or AutoCAD. This colour is the default colour for all layers, if a colour is not
set explicitly.
Count
Displays the number of layers defined in the current style and stored in the Drawing.Layers
Layers collection (on page 289).
Drawing.Layers Layers Collection

Stores the definitions of the layer names and colours assigned to layer numbers.
definitions are currently stored in the collection.
LayerColour (on page 290)
LayerNumber (on page 290)
Name (on page 290)
289

LayerColour
Specifies the optional colour integer number to override the default colour as defined in the
output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).
LayerNumber
Specifies the integer number that corresponds to the layer used in the Drawing.Definitions
Definitions collection (on page 201).
Name
Specifies the name for the layer with this LayerNumber (on page 290).
Drawing.DynamicFonts Object
The Drawing.DynamicFonts object contains a collection of options called Fonts, which is used
to store the parameters of the user-defined fonts that are available for output on the isometric
drawing. For more information, see Drawing.DynamicFonts Fonts Collection (on page 290).
Count (on page 290)
Count
Displays the number of dynamic fonts defined in the current style and stored in the
Drawing.DynamicFonts Fonts collection.
Drawing.DynamicFonts Fonts Collection

Controls the output of user-specified dynamic fonts on the isometric drawing.
FontNumber (on page 291)
FontName (on page 291)
FontCorrectionFactor (on page 291)
FontStyleName (on page 291)
FontMicrostationNumber (on page 291)
FontMultibyteWidth (on page 291)
290

FontNumber
Specifies the ISOGEN font number. The value you enter must be 3 digits and cannot exist in the
ISOGEN font information file (Fontstd.fif). The first 300 numbers are reserved exclusively for use
in the .fif file. As such, the value you enter must be 301 or higher.
FontName
Specifies the name of the user-specified font. The TrueType font that you enter must already be
installed on the computer. Type the name of the font exactly as it appears in the
C:\Windows\Fonts folder.
To view a list of installed fonts, click Start > Control Panel > Fonts.
FontCorrectionFactor
Specifies the factor by which the width of characters are adjusted so that the font neither falls
short of nor overlaps the boxes/gaps that are provided for the text on the drawing. The default
setting is 1. Typically, this value is adjusted up or down by 1 or 2 after viewing the isometric
drawing output.
FontStyleName
Specifies the AutoCAD text style name.
FontMicrostationNumber
Specifies the MicroStation-specific index number of the required font. This option is required
only if you want to view the correct font on the screen.
FontMultibyteWidth
Specifies the factor by which the width of all multibyte characters are adjusted so that the font
neither falls short of nor overlaps the boxes/gaps that are provided for the text on the drawing..
The default setting is 2. Typically, this value is adjusted up or down by 1 or 2 after viewing the
isometric drawing output.
Drawing.EndConnections Object
The Drawing.EndConnections object contains a collection called End Connections, which is
used to store the definitions of end connection identifiers. For more information, see
Drawing.EndConnections EndConnections Collection (on page 292).
Count (on page 291)
Count
Displays the number of end connections defined in the current style and stored in the
Drawing.EndConnections EndConnections collection.
291
Drawing.EndConnections EndConnections Collection

Stores the definitions of the end connection identifiers.
Accumulation (on page 292)
EnclErec (on page 292)
EnclFab (on page 293)
EnclOffsh (on page 294)
Enclosure (on page 294)
Group (on page 295)
GroupErec (on page 295)
GroupFab (on page 295)
GroupOffsh (on page 296)
Origin (on page 296)
Prefix (on page 296)
PrefixErec (on page 296)
PrefixFab (on page 296)
PrefixOffsh (on page 296)
SKEY (on page 296)
Accumulation
Controls how end connection identifiers are sequenced.
Combined - Sequence end connection identifiers as combined. This is the default setting.
Category - Sequence end connection identifiers on a category basis.
This option is only relevant if Group is set to Individual.
See Also
Group (on page 295)
EnclErec
Controls the type of enclosure that is used for Erection end connection identifiers output on the
isometric drawing.
Circle - Display end connection identifiers inside a circular enclosure.
Circle Double - Display end connection identifiers inside a circular-shaped enclosure inside
another circle.
Diamond Double - Display end connection identifiers inside a diamond-shaped enclosure
inside another diamond-shaped enclosure.
Diamond Ended - Display end connection identifiers inside a diamond-ended box
enclosure.
Diamond Ended Double - Display end connection identifiers inside a diamond-ended box
enclosure inside another diamond-ended enclosure.
Ellipse - Display end connection identifiers inside an elliptical-shaped enclosure.
Ellipse Double - Display end connection identifiers inside an elliptical-shaped enclosure
inside another ellipse.
292
Round Double - Display end connection identifiers inside a round-ended box enclosure
inside another round-ended enclosure.
Round Ended - Display end connection identifiers inside a round-ended box enclosure.
Square Ended - Display end connection identifiers inside a square-ended box enclosure.
Square Ended Double - Display end connection identifiers inside a square-ended box
enclosure inside another square-ended enclosure.
Suppressed - Suppress the display of an enclosure.
Triangle - Display end connection identifiers inside a triangular-shaped enclosure.
Triangle Double - Display end connection identifiers inside a triangular-shaped enclosure
inside another triangle.
Unboxed - Display Erection end connection identifiers as unboxed.
EnclFab
Controls the type of enclosure that is used for Fabrication end connection identifiers output on
another circle.
enclosure.
Unboxed - Display Fabrication end connection identifiers as unboxed.
293

EnclOffsh
Controls the type of enclosure that is used for Offshore end connection identifiers output on the
isometric drawing.
another circle.
enclosure.
Unboxed - Display Offshore end connection identifiers as unboxed.
Enclosure
Controls the type of enclosure that is used for end connection identifiers output on the isometric
drawing.
another circle.
enclosure.
294
Unboxed - Display end connection identifiers as unboxed.
Format
Controls the format of end connection identifiers that are output on the isometric drawing.
Numeric - Assign numeric values to end connection identifiers.
Alphabetic - Assign alphabetic characters to end connection identifiers.
See Also
Group (on page 295)
Group
Controls which group of end connections are assigned identifiers on the isometric drawing.
Individual - Assign end connection identifiers to each individual occurrence of the specified
end connection.
Assembly - Assign end connection identifiers to assemblies.
Weld - Assign end connection identifiers to welds.
GroupErec
Controls which group of Erection category end connections are assigned identifiers on the
isometric drawing.
Individual - Assign end connection identifiers to each individual Erection occurrence of the
specified end connection.
Assembly - Assign identifiers to Erection assemblies.
Weld - Assign identifiers to Erection welds.
GroupFab
Controls which group of Fabrication category end connections are assigned identifiers on the
isometric drawing.
Individual - Assign end connection identifiers to each individual Fabrication occurrence of
the specified end connection.
Assembly - Assign identifiers to Fabrication assemblies.
Weld - Assign identifiers to Fabrication welds.
295

GroupOffsh
Controls which group of Offshore category end connections are assigned identifiers on the
isometric drawing.
Individual - Assign end connection identifiers to each individual Offshore occurrence of the
specified end connection.
Assembly - Assign identifiers to Offshore assemblies.
Weld - Assign identifiers to Offshore welds.
Origin
Controls the origin of sequencing of end connection identifiers.
Pipeline - Sequence end connection identifiers on a per pipeline basis. This is the default
setting.
Drawing - Sequence end connection identifiers on a per drawing basis.
See Also
Group (on page 295)
Prefix
Controls the prefix used when outputting end connection identifiers on the isometric drawing.
PrefixErec
Controls the prefix used when outputting Erection category end connection identifiers output on
PrefixFab
Controls the prefix used when outputting Fabrication end connection identifiers output on the
isometric drawing.
PrefixOffsh
Controls the prefix used when outputting Offshore end connection identifiers output on the
isometric drawing.
SKEY
Identifies the end connection that is being defined. You can specify any of the following:
SW - Socket Weld
SC- Screwed
CP - Compression
FL- Flanged
PL - Plain End
BW - Butt Weld
CL - Clamped
GL - Glued
296
FA - Flared
PF - Push Fit
Drawing.Revisions Object
Controls the output of revision changes on the isometric drawing. Revision output is triggered
only when the component and pipeline revisions match. During isometric drawing generation,
the software considers each component individually. When a revision match occurs, the
component is highlighted on the isometric drawing.
The Drawing.Revisions object contains the properties listed below, any of which can be
modified as needed.
Enabled (on page 297)
Distance (on page 297)
Layer (on page 298)
FillColour (on page 298)
EnclosureType (on page 298)
MinCloudArc (on page 299)
MaxCloudArc (on page 299)
Enabled
Controls the output of the Revision block to the Data Definition (DDF) file. When the component
revision matches the pipeline revision, the revision output is triggered.
True - Output the revision block to the DDF file.
False - Suppress output of the revision block to the DDF file.
Distance
Controls the distance that highlighting displays from the component centerline.
Value - Type a value in 1/10th mms. The default setting is 50. The setting you define should
not exceed the setting of a standard leg length, as this can create an unsatisfactory
representation.
Colour
Controls the colour of the revision box.
Value - Type the index number that corresponds to the colour defined in drawing system.
The default setting is the colour associated with the Layer attribute.
See Also
Layer (on page 298)
297
Layer
Controls the layer of the revision box.
Value - Type the layer number. The default setting is 0.
FillColour
Controls the fill colour of the revision box.
Value - Type the index number that corresponds to the colour defined in the drawing
system. The default setting is the colour associated with the Layer attribute.
See Also
Layer (on page 298)
EnclosureType
Controls the output of the enclosure type that surrounds the revision block to the Data Definition
(DDF) file
Polygon - Highlights revised components with a polygon. This is the default setting.
298
Cloud - Highlights revised components with a cloud.
MinCloudArc
Defines the minimum pitch of the cloud enclosure. This option is required only when you set
EnclosureType to Cloud.
Value - Type a value in 10th mms. The default setting is 20.
MaxCloudArc
Defines the maximum pitch of the cloud enclosure. This option is required only when you set
EnclosureType to Cloud.
Value - Type a value in 10th mms. The default setting is 60.
Drawing.Welds Object
Sets options for the display of welds on the isometric drawing.
The Drawing.Welds object also contains a group of options called Weld Enclosures, which is
used to store the definitions of special enclosures. There are several different formats for the
enclosure, For more information, see Drawing.Welds WeldEnclosures Object (on page 323).
ImpliedWelds (on page 301)
GeneralPrefix (on page 301)
GeneralWeldStartNo (on page 301)
WeldNumbers (on page 301)
showFabWeldNos (on page 301)
ShowFabWeldPrefix (on page 302)
FabPrefix (on page 302)
FabWeldStartNo (on page 302)
MessageArrowHeads (on page 302)
FabWeldEnclosure (on page 303)
FabWeldEnclSize (on page 305)
ShowErectWeldNos (on page 305)
ShowErectWeldPrefix (on page 305)
OffshorePrefix (on page 309)
OffshoreWeldStartNo (on page 309)
OffshoreWeldEnclosure (on page 309)
OffshoreWeldEnclSize (on page 311)
ShowFabSupportWeldNos (on page 311)
ShowFabSupportWeldPrefix (on page 311)
FabSupportPrefix (on page 312)
FabSupportWeldStartNo (on page 312)
FabSupportWeldEnclosure (on page 312)
FabSuppWeldEnclSize (on page 314)
ShowErectSupportWeldNos (on page 314)
ShowErectSupportWeldPrefix (on page 315)
ErectSupportPrefix (on page 315)
299
ErectSupportWeldStartNo (on page 315)

ErectSupportWeldEnclosure (on page 315)
ErectSuppWeldEnclSize (on page 316)
ShowOffshoreSupportWeldNos (on page 317)
ShowOffshoreSupportWeldPrefix (on page 317)
OffshoreSupportPrefix (on page 317)
OffshoreSupportWeldStartNo (on page 317)
OffshoreSuppWeldEnclSize (on page 319)
SpoolMatchesPipe (on page 320)
SupportWeldNumbers (on page 320)
SupportWeldSeq (on page 320)
SupportWeldTypeNos (on page 321)
TypeSequenceNumbers (on page 321)
WeldNumberLength (on page 322)
WeldNumberType (on page 322)
WeldTypeIdentifiers (on page 322)
SpecialStatusWeldIdentifiers (on page 323)
WeldDiameterCalculationMethod (on page 323)
ShowWelds
Turns on and off the display of welds and weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
True - Display welds and weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
False - Suppress the display of welds and weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
WeldTypes allows a separate control on the different categories of weld that can be
output. For more information, see Weld Logic (on page 160).
Defines
OS 53 Pos 1
OS 54 Pos 1
ShowWeldNumbers
Turns on and off the display of weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
True - Turn on the display of weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
False - Turn off the display of weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
This is a general control. There is also a separate control for all other supported weld
types. For more information, see Weld Logic (on page 160).
Defines
OS 53 Pos 1
300
ImpliedWelds
Controls the creation of implied welds, such as those welds that are not explicitly defined in the
PCF or IDF.
True - Generate implied welds.
False - Suppress implied welds.
Defines
OS 54 Pos 8
GeneralPrefix
General weld prefix used when none of the separate weld prefixes are set.
GeneralWeldStartNo
Sets a general start weld number in the WDF.
WeldNumbers
Controls the generation of weld numbers for any welds that do not have weld numbers defined
in the Piping Component File (PCF) or Intermediate Data File (IDF). This property interacts with
WeldNumberSequence and SpoolMatchesPipe. If WeldNumbers is set to False, then this
property takes precedence over the other two when setting the value.
True - Generate weld numbers.
False - Suppress weld numbers.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 8
See Also
SpoolMatchesPipe (on page 320)
ShowFabWeldNos
Displays the fabrication weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
True - Display fabrication weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppress fabrication weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines
OS 75 Pos 1
301
ShowFabWeldPrefix
True - Show fabrication weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppress fabrication weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
Defines
OS 75 Pos 2
FabPrefix
Sets the prefix used for fabrication type welds. In the following illustration, the prefix is set to F.
FabWeldStartNo
Sets a start weld number for fabrication welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
MessageArrowHeads
Controls whether messages to welds (including weld numbers and attributes) have arrowheads
attached to message leader lines.
On - Show arrowheads on message leader lines.
302
Off - Suppress arrowheads on message leader lines.
Defines
OS 54 Pos 9
FabWeldEnclosure
Sets the style of enclosure for fabrication welds.
Default Circle - Display a fixed-sized circle enclosure.
Diamond End - Display diamond-ended box enclosure.
Round End - Display a round-ended box enclosure.
Small Triangle - Display a small, triangular-shaped enclosure.
Small Diamond - Display a small, diamond-shaped enclosure.
303
Dynamic Circle - Display a dynamically-sized circle enclosure.
Double Circle - Display a dynamically-sized double circle enclosure.
Ellipse - Displays an elliptical enclosure.
None - Suppress the display of a weld number enclosure.
All the previous illustrations use weld prefixes except for Default Circle, where weld
prefixes cannot be used, as this is limited to numeric values (3 characters maximum).
The size at which the circle, double circle and ellipse are drawn is controlled by
FabWeldEnclSize (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure.
If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to
suit.
When the weld number enclosure style is not the original circular type, then the weld
number character size is controlled by TextSize and not WeldNumberSize .
Defines
OS 75 Pos 1, 7
See Also
FabWeldEnclSize (on page 305)
304
FabWeldEnclSize
style. The default setting is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters or Variable size,
The number of characters defines the minimum size at which the circle, double circle and
ellipse enclosures are drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the
enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting FabWeldEnclSize to Variable size allows the
circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again all will
dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.
Defines
OS 54 Pos 2
ShowErectWeldNos
Displays the erection weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
True - Display erection weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppress erection weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines
OS 75 Pos 3
ShowErectWeldPrefix
True - Show erection weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppress erection weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
Defines
OS 75 Pos 4
305
ErectPrefix
Sets the prefix used for erection type welds.
In the following illustration, the prefix is set to E.
ErectWeldStartNo
Sets a start weld number for erection welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
ErectWeldEnclosure
Sets the style of enclosure for erection welds.
All of the following illustration use weld prefixes, except for the default circle where weld
prefixes cannot be used, as this is limited to numeric values, 3 characters maximum.
306
Diamond End - Display a diamond-ended enclosure.
Round End - Display a round-ended enclosure.
Small Triangle - Display a small triangular-shaped enclosure.
Small Diamond - Display a small diamond-shaped enclosure.
Square - Display a square-ended box.
Dynamic Circle - Displays a dynamically-sized circle.
307
Ellipse - Display an elliptical enclosure.
The size at which the Circle, Double Circle and Ellipse are drawn is controlled by
ErecWeldEnclSize (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the
enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts
to suit.
number character size is controlled by TextSize and not by WeldNumberSize .
Defines
OS 75 Pos 3, 8
See Also
ErectWeldEnclSize (on page 308)
ErectWeldEnclSize
style. The default setting is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters and Variable size,
The number of characters defines the minimum size at which the circle, double, circle,
and ellipse are drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure
dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting ErecWeldEnclSize to Variable size allows the circle, double
308

circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also allowing the enclosure to
dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.
Defines
OS 54 Pos 3
ShowOffshoreWeldNos
Displays the offshore weld numbers on the isometric drawing.
True - Display offshore weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppress offshore weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines
OS 75 Pos 5
ShowOffshoreWeldPrefix
True - Shows offshore weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppresses offshore support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
OffshorePrefix
Sets the prefix used for offshore type welds.
In the following illustration, the prefix is set to O.
OffshoreWeldStartNo
Sets a start weld number for offshore welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
OffshoreWeldEnclosure
Sets the style of enclosure for offshore welds.
309
310
Diamond End - Display a diamond-ended box enclosure.
Defines
OS 75 Pos 5
OffshoreWeldEnclSize
dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting OffshoreWeldEnclSize to Variable size allows the circle,
double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also allowing the
enclosure to dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.
Defines
OS 54 Pos 4
ShowFabSupportWeldNos
Displays weld numbers for the specified weld type.
True - Display fabrication support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppress fabrication support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines
OS 78 Pos 1
ShowFabSupportWeldPrefix
True - Show fabrication support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
311
False - Suppress fabrication support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
Defines
OS 78 Pos 2
FabSupportPrefix
Sets the prefix used for fabrication support welds.
In the following illustration, the prefix is set to FS.
FabSupportWeldStartNo
Sets a start weld number for fabrication support welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
FabSupportWeldEnclosure
Sets the style of enclosure for fabrication welds.
312
Diamond End - Display a diamond-ended enclosure.
Round End - Display a round-ended enclosure.
Square - Display a square-ended enclosure.
Double Circle - Display a dynamically-size double circle enclosure.

313
FabSuppWeldEnclSize (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the
enclosure. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically
adjusts to suit.
number character size is controlled by TextSize and not WeldNumberSize.
Defines
OS 78 Pos 1, 7
See Also
FabSuppWeldEnclSize
The number of characters defines the minimum size that at which the circle, double,
circle, and ellipse are drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the
enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting FabSuppWeldEnclSize to Variable size allows
the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also
allowing the enclosure to dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.
Defines
OS 54 Pos 5
ShowErectSupportWeldNos
True - Display erection support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppress erection support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines
OS 78 Pos 3
314
ShowErectSupportWeldPrefix
True - Show erection support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppress erection support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
Defines
OS 78 Pos 4
ErectSupportPrefix
Sets the prefix used for erection support welds.
In the following illustration, the prefix is set to ES.
ErectSupportWeldStartNo
Sets a start weld number for erection support welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
ErectSupportWeldEnclosure
Specifies the style of the weld number enclosure for this weld type.
315

Ellipse - Displays an elliptical enclosure.
ErectSuppWeldEnclSize (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the
enclosure. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically
adjusts to suit.
number character size is controlled by TextSize and not WeldNumberSize.
Defines
OS 78 Pos 3
See Also
ErectSuppWeldEnclSize
style. The default setting is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters and Variable size,
The number of characters defines the minimum size that the circle, double circle, and
ellipse are drawn at. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure
316

dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting ErecSupportWeldEnclSize to Variable size allows the
circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also allowing
the enclosure to dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.
Defines
OS 54 Pos 6
ShowOffshoreSupportWeldNos
True - Display offshore support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppress offshore support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.
Defines
OS 78 Pos 5
ShowOffshoreSupportWeldPrefix
True - Show offshore support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
False - Suppress offshore support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.
Defines
OS 78 Pos 6
OffshoreSupportPrefix
Sets the prefix used for offshore support welds.
In the following illustration, the prefix is set to OS.
OffshoreSupportWeldStartNo
Sets a start weld number for offshore support welds in the weld definition file (WDF).
OffshoreSupportWeldEnclosure
Specifies the style of the weld number enclosure for this weld type.
Default Circle - Displays a fixed-sized circle enclosure.
317
318

Defines
OS 78 Pos 5
OffshoreSuppWeldEnclSize
dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting OffshoreSuppWeldEnclSize to Variable size allows the
circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also allowing
the enclosure to dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.
Defines
OS 54 Pos 7
319
SpecialSiteWeldCategory
Assigns special site welds to a specific category. You can select Erection Type or Fabrication
Type.
Defines
OS 83 Pos 3
SpoolMatchesPipe
Controls whether the weld numbers on the spool isometric match those on the full isometric.
True - Spool isometric weld numbers to match full isometric weld numbers.
False - Spool isometric Weld numbers done separately.
For spool weld numbers to match the full isometric numbers, the properties that affect the
number of welds and the sequence used must be the same for both spool and full styles.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 3
See Also
SupportWeldNumbers
Numbers support welds separately. The default is False.
True - Number support welds separately.
False - Number support welds using the same sequence as standard welds.
If set to True, then SupportWeldTypeNos is used to determine whether each category
of weld has its own sequence or not.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 6
See Also
SupportWeldSeq
Controls whether the support weld numbers continue across drawings, or start again on each
new drawing.
Per Drawing - Re-start support weld numbering sequence on each drawing.
Continuous - Continue support weld numbering sequence across drawings.
The numbers used depend on the settings defined by SupportWeldTypeNos.

If you set SupportWeldNumbers to True, SupportWeldSeq controls weld numbering,
similar to WeldNumberSequence.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 7
See Also
320
SupportWeldTypeNos
Controls the numbering of support welds. The default is False.
True - The software numbers each type of support weld in a different sequence.
False - The software numbers each type of support weld using the same sequence for
numbers.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 6
TypeSequenceNumbers
Controls whether there is an individual sequence for weld numbers based on their category
(Fabrication, Erection or Offshore) or just one sequence for all welds.
True - Each type of Weld has its own sequence numbers.
False - Single sequence for all Welds.
If set to True, then the SupportWeldNumbers and SupportWeldTypeNos properties
allow additional control for support weld numbering.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 5
See Also
SupportWeldNumbers (on page 320)
WeldNumberSequence
Continuous - For weld number current sequence to continue on each new drawing.
Per drawing - For weld number sequence to restart on each new drawing.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 3
See Also
WeldNumberSize
Controls the size of plotted weld numbers, if welds appear.
Small - Plot small weld numbers (1.5 mm).
Medium - Plot medium-sized weld numbers (1.8 mm).
Large - Plot large weld numbers (2.1 mm).
These size values are only valid for the original circular style enclosure. If one of the
alternative enclosure styles is being used, then TextSize is used.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 1
See Also
321
WeldNumberLength
Controls the number of characters output for a weld number. For numeric weld numbers, leading
zeros are output; for alphabetic weld numbers, spaces are output
Variable - Output the weld number without leading zeros or spaces.
1 to 9 - Set the number of characters to be output. For example, 3 outputs 001 through to
999 for numeric weld numbers.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 9
WeldNumberType
Controls whether weld numbers are numeric or alphabetic.
Numeric - Numeric weld identifiers.
Alphabetic - Alphabetic weld identifiers. Generates A to Z, and then starts AA, AB, AC, and
so on.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 8
WeldTypes
Controls whether all welds are numbered/plotted or allows single weld category (Fabrication,
Erection or Offshore) to be numbered/plotted.
All - Number/plot all welds.
Fabrication Only - Number/plot only fabrication welds.
Erection Only - Number/plot only erection welds.
Offshore Only - Number/plot only offshore welds.
If Offshore Only is set, then erection welds are plotted but not numbered. This is a
general control, but there is also a separate control for all six weld types. If the separate weld
types are set not to be plotted, then this control still causes a weld number to be generated for
those welds so that they can be used on weld reports.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 1, 4
OS 54 Pos 1
322
WeldTypeIdentifiers
Defines the text to be output to the weld definition file (WDF) for weld type identifiers.
Double-click the WeldTypeIdentifiers box. The software opens the WeldTypeIdentifiers text
editor, in which you can input the required data as follows:
26. Piping Specification
27. Minimum Nominal size
28. Maximum Nominal size
29. Weld Type (replacement for BW welds)
30. Wall Thickness / Schedule (optional)
The WELD-TYPE-IDENTIFIER heading is output by I-Configure, and only the data records are
required in the text file.
CS-150
0.5 1.5 B2 80
CS-150
2
6
B3 40
CS-150
8
12
B8 30
The nominal size units are assumed to be those specified by Drawing.Controls.Units
(OS 41). This is only used when the weld type is output on the weld operation list or welds
report, and replaces the BW weld type identifier. If using the Wall Thickness / Schedule
column, and the BW type is not being changed, then BW must be entered on the line.
See Also
Units (on page 198)
SpecialStatusWeldIdentifiers
Controls the generation of weld numbers on special status welds.
True - Generate weld numbers on special status welds.
False - Suppress generation of weld numbers on special status welds.
Defines
OS 83 Pos 2
WeldDiameterCalculationMethod
Defines the method used by ISOGEN to calculate weld diameter totals.
Using Cost Factor - Calculate weld diameter totals using specified cost factors.
Using Nominal Size - Calculate weld diameter totals using nominal sizes
Defines
OS 83 Pos 4
Drawing.Welds WeldEnclosures Object

The Drawing.Welds WeldEnclosures object contains a collection called WeldEnclosures,
which is used to store the definitions of special enclosures. There are several different formats
for the enclosure, which are controlled by the settings of the EnclosureType property. For more
information, see Drawing.Welds WeldEnclosures Collection (on page 324).
Count (on page 324)
323

Count
Displays the number of WeldEnclosures currently defined in the style.
Drawing.Welds WeldEnclosures Collection

Defines special types of enclosure used for welds in order to display attributes set on the weld in
the PCF/IDF.
The special weld enclosure supersedes weld enclosure styles set as a property of the
Drawing.Welds object for each category of weld or all welds, depending on the Category
setting on the WeldEnclosure collection.
AttributeName (on page 324)
Category (on page 324)
ForceAllWeldsAsSpecial (on page 325)
NonSpecialPosition (on page 326)
SpecialPosition (on page 326)
Width (on page 327)
AttributeName
Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the
required attribute.
Category
Specifies the category. Use the Category list to select the appropriate one: Fabrication,
Erection, Offshore or All.
EnclosureType
Controls the type of enclosure to be used.
Pointed
324
Round
Triangle
Diamond
Square
Circle
Unboxed
SpecialPointed
SpecialRound
SpecialSquare
ForceAllWeldsAsSpecial
Only applies to objects with EnclosureType set to SpecialPointed, SpecialRound, or
SpecialSquare and AttributeName mapped to WELD-NO.
True - Force all welds to adopt the special layout for their enclosure.
False - Allow the generation of an enclosure containing only the weld number, when the
data for all the other fields in an enclosure are missing.
See Also
325

NonSpecialPosition
Defines the position for the specified weld attribute to be output along the horizontal display.
Type the position number.
Applies only to the following enclosure types, all of which allow multiple attributes displayed
horizontally:
Pointed
Round
Square
SpecialPosition
Controls selection of the compartment or quadrant (position) for the weld number when weld
attributes are to be output in a special enclosure. Select the position from the following list of
choices: Top, TopLeft, TopRight, Bottom, BottomLeft, and BottomRight.
In the following example, the weld number is output TopRight, where 1 denotes the weld
number and there are three weld attributes (T2, R2 and F8).
You can divide special enclosures into two compartments (top and bottom) or four
compartments (quadrants).
The maximum number of compartments is four.
This attribute only applies to SpecialPointed, SpecialRound, or SpecialSquare enclosure
types.
The previous example is SpecialRound.
See Also
NonSpecialPosition (on page 326)
326

Width
Specifies the number of characters.
DrawingFrame Object
Sets options for the drawing frame on the isometric drawing.
BottomMargin (on page 327)
TopMargin (on page 328)
LeftMargin (on page 328)
RightMargin (on page 328)
CustomHeight (on page 329)
CustomWidth (on page 329)
DXFUnits (on page 329)
ReservedAreaDrawing (on page 329)
ReservedAreaDrawingTop (on page 330)
ReservedAreaMatList (on page 330)
TemplateFile (on page 330)
TemplateFormat (on page 330)
The DrawingFrame object also contains the following groups of options:
Attributes - Maps ISOGEN attributes to attributes in the software and specifies the X- and
Y-coordinates of the attribute placement. For more information, see
DrawingFrame.Attributes Object (on page 331).
Table Attributes - Stores the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. For more
information, see DrawingFrame.TableAttributes Object (on page 338).
Symbol Table - Defines the properties for symbol shape frame positioning. For more
information, see DrawingFrame.SymbolTable Object (on page 341).
The existing Supplementary.TableAttributes object (on page 484) contains the same
information as the DrawingFrame.TableAttributes object. You can use either object to
modify the properties, although the DrawingFrame.TableAttributes object supports real
numbers in the XPos and YPos properties.
BottomMargin
Specifies the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line of the
drawing frame at the bottom of the drawing.
0 - Use the default for no reserved area.
Value - User-defined distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer
line of the drawing frame that is being used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches,
depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box.
Defines
OS 13
See Also
327
TopMargin
drawing frame at the top of the drawing.
Value (real number) - User-defined distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet
and the outer line of the drawing frame that is being used. Type a value in mm or inches,
Defines
OS 12
See Also
LeftMargin
drawing frame on the left side of the drawing.
Defines
OS 10
See Also
RightMargin
drawing frame on the right side of the drawing.
Defines
OS 11
See Also
328
CustomHeight
Sets the height of a non-standard paper size. That is, sizes that do not conform to either the
metric-based European A series or the imperial-based American ANSI sizes.
0 - Use a non-standard drawing height.
Value - User-defined overall drawing height. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches,
Defines
OS 15
See Also
CustomWidth
Sets the width of a non-standard paper size. That is, sizes that do not conform to either the
metric-based European A series or the imperial-based American ANSI sizes.
0 - Use a non-standard drawing width.
Value - User-defined overall drawing width. . Type a value (real number) in mm or inches,
Defines
OS 16
See Also
DXFUnits
mm - Specifies metric units.
Inch - Specifies imperial units.
Defines
OS 92
ReservedAreaDrawing
Provides the distance between the bottom of the drawing area and the outer line of the drawing
frame.
Value (real number) - User-defined value equal to the depth of the required reserved area
along the bottom of the isometric, measured from the outer line of the drawing frame. Type a
value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the
Options dialog box.
Defines
OS 35 Pos 1, 2, 3
See Also
329
ReservedAreaDrawingTop
Defines the reserved area along the top of the isometric.
along the bottom of the isometric, measured from the outer line of the drawing frame. Type a
value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the
Options dialog box.
Defines
OS 35 Pos 7, 8 and 9
See Also
ReservedAreaMatList
Provides the distance between the bottom of the material list and the outer line of the drawing
frame.
Blank - Use the default for no reserved area.
along the bottom of the material list measured from the outer line of the drawing frame. Type
a value in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options
dialog box.
Defines
OS 35 Pos 4, 5, 6
See Also
TemplateFile
Specifies the file used for the backing sheet.
31. Double-click in the TemplateFile box.
32. In the Browse for file dialog box, navigate to the required file and then click OK.
TemplateFormat
Select the drawing format for the backing sheet.
330
Visible
Controls plotting of the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.
It is likely that if you either plot your own design of backing frame or plot to frames on
pre-printed forms, you will want to suppress the plotting of the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.
True - Plots the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.
False - Does not plot the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.
Defines
OS 18
DrawingFrame.Attributes Object
The DrawingFrame.Attributes object contains a collection called DFAttributes, which is used
to store the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. For more information, see
DrawingFrame.Attributes DFAttributes Collection (on page 331)
Count (on page 331)
Count
Displays the number of attributes to be plotted in the drawing frame.
DrawingFrame.Attributes DFAttributes Collection

Specifies the attributes to plot on the drawing frame. Specifies attributes to plot in the drawing
frame. You use these options with the Attribute Map and other Drawing Frame options.
Many of the attributes for the drawing frame originate from the pipe runs in the model. During an
extraction, the software obtains the values for pipe run attributes from the run with the largest
NPD.
The value that displays in parentheses after the collection name is a count of how many
CharHeight (on page 335)
Xpos (on page 336)
Ypos (on page 336)
Font (on page 336)
BarCode (on page 336)
CharWidth (on page 336)
Justification (on page 336)
Layer (on page 336)
RotationAngle (on page 337)
TruncationLength (on page 337)
ColumnsNumber (on page 337)
Direction (on page 337)
LinesNumber (on page 337)
Xspacing (on page 337)
331
Yspacing (on page 337)
See Also
AttributeName
Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Double-click the AttributeName list to select
the required attribute.
The -700 records listed below can be output using TextPos:
Equipment
-742
Equipment name
-743
Nozzle name
-744
Nozzle identifier
-745
Pipeline reference
-746
Nozzle size
-747
Nozzle world coordinates
-748
Nozzle relative coordinates
Flat Spools
-708
Flange part number
-709
Flange rotation angle
Location Points
332
-732
Location point to nearest steelwork staunchion
-733
Location point above nearest floor level
-749
Location point index number
-750
Location point (forward and aft)
-751
Location point (transverse)
-752
Location point (elevation)
-758
Volume name (reference plane sub-volume)
Miscellaneous
-700
North arrow X-Y position on drawing
-702
Drawing (sheet) number
-703
Number of drawings (sheets)
-741
Fitting shapes/symbols and associated description
Pipeline Information
-730
Pipeline erection factor
-734
Pipeline nominal sizes
-735
Pipeline centreline lengths
-736
Pipeline insulation lengths
-737
Pipeline heat tracing lengths
-738
Pipeline surface area (per pipeline)
-739
Pipeline surface area (per drawing)
-772
Pipeline start point coordinates
Spool Information
-728
Spool centreline length
-729
Spool erection factor
-740
Spool surface area (spools on current drawing)
-762
Spool number (without prefix)
-763
Number of spools on pipeline
-768
Spool weld diameter inches (spools on current drawing)
-769
Spool centreline lengths (spools on current drawing)
-770
Spool erection factor (spools on current drawing)
-771
Number of spools on drawing
-772
Spool start point coordinates
-773
Spool identifier (all spools in pipeline)
333
System Information
-755
System data
-756
System time
-757
User name
Weights
334
-704
Total weight for drawing
-705
Total Fabrication weight
-706
Total Erection weight
-707
Total Offshore weight
-710
Total weight unlisted items
-711
Total weight of pipeline
-712
Total wet (full) weight of pipeline
-713
Total insulation weight for pipeline
-714
CoG position of dry (empty) pipeline
-715
CoG position of dry pipeline + insulation
-716
CoG position of wet (full) pipeline
-717
CoG position of wet pipeline + insulation
-718
Total pipeline Fabrication weight
-719
Total pipeline Erection weight
-720
Total pipeline Offshore weight
-725
Spool weight
-726
Spool CoG position
Weld Diameters
-727
Weld diameters (per drawing)
-731
Weld diameters (per pipeline)
-759
Weld diameters - Fabrication (per pipeline)
-760
Weld diameters - Erection (per pipeline)
-761
Weld diameters - Offshore (per pipeline)
-776
Pipe weld diameters/Pipe weld cost factors on drawing
-777
Support weld diameters/Support weld cost factors on

drawing
Welds
-753
Number of welds on drawing
-754
Last weld number/Identifier on drawing
-764
Number of spool welds (spools on current drawing)
-765
Number of Fabrication welds on drawing
-766
Number of Erection welds on drawing
-767
Number of Offshore welds on drawing
-774
Number of pipe welds on drawing
-775
Number of support welds on drawing
CharHeight
Sets the character height for the text. Type the required size in mm or Inches (as a real
number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See Also
335

Xpos
Defines the X position for the text in mm or inches (set as real number), depending on the
setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See Also
Ypos
Defines the Y position for the text in mm or inches (set as real number), depending on the
See Also
Font
Defines the font to be used. Use the Font list to select an appropriate font.
BarCode
Several barcode standards exist worldwide to suit different industries, but Alias has
standardized on just three. Type 1, 2 or 3 for the appropriate barcode:
1 - Barcode 39
2 - Barcode 25
3 - Barcode 25 Interleaved
CharWidth
Sets the character width for the text. Type the required size in mm or inches (as a real number),
depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See Also
Justification
Defines the justification for the text. Specify Left, Right, or Centre.
Layer
Specify the integer number that identifies the required layer to which the definition is applied.
336

Colour
Type the integer number that represent the colour number as defined in the output drawing
system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).
RotationAngle
Defines the angle of rotation in degrees clockwise.
TextWeight
Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used for MicroStation only
TruncationLength
Defines the number of output characters.
ColumnsNumber
Specifies the number of columns in the table.
Direction
Specifies the table direction.
LinesNumber
Specifies the number of lines in the table.
XSpacing
Specifies the table offset dimension in X (horizontal) direction.
Type a value in mm or inches (set as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing
units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch.
The value can be a negative number.
See Also
YSpacing
Specifies the table offset dimension in Y (vertical) direction.
units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch.
See Also
337
DrawingFrame.TableAttributes Object
The DrawingFrame.TableAttributes object contains a collection called DFTableAtributes,
which is used to store the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. For more information,
see DrawingFrame.TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection (on page 338).
The existing Supplementary.TableAttributes object contains the same information as
the DrawingFrame.TableAttributes object. You can use either object the properties, although
the DrawingFrame.TableAttributes object supports real numbers in the XPos and YPos
properties.
Count (on page 338)
See Also
Supplementary.TableAttributes Object (on page 484)
Count
Displays the number of TableAttributes to be plotted in the drawing frame.
DrawingFrame.TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection

Stores the definitions of text used on the drawing frame.
Xpos (on page 339)
Font (on page 339)
Ypos (on page 339)
Layer (on page 340)
TruncationLength (on page 340)
XSpacing (on page 340)
YSpacing (on page 341)
See Also
338

AttributeName
required attribute.
CharHeight
number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See Also
Xpos
setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See Also
Font
Defines the font to be used. Use the Font list to select an appropriate font.
Ypos
Defines the Y position for the text in mm or inches (set as real number), depending on the
See Also
BarCode
Several barcode standards exist worldwide to suit different industries, but the software has
1 - Barcode 39
2 - Barcode 25
339

CharWidth
See Also
Justification
Defines the justification for the text. Specify either Left or Right.
Layer
Specify the integer number that identifies the required layer to which the definition is applied.
Colour
RotationAngle
TextWeight
TruncationLength
ColumnsNumber
Direction
LinesNumber
XSpacing
Specifies the table offset dimension in X (horizontal) direction.
units set on the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch.
340

YSpacing
Specifies the table offset dimension in Y (vertical) direction.
units set on the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch.
See Also
DrawingFrame.SymbolTable Object
Defines the properties for symbol shape frame positioning.
This facility allows symbol shapes, which could only be displayed on the standard drawing
frame, to be positioned on to a user-defined backing sheet. You set the properties to control the
symbol shape/text that appears on the isometric. The four options listed below are available.
Single Vertical
Multiple Vertical
Single Horizontal
341

Multiple Horizontal
Set the options listed below appropriately to output symbol table as required.
DrawingLayer (on page 342)
HorizontalSpacing (on page 342)
Layout (on page 342)
MaxColumns (on page 343)
MaxRows (on page 343)
StartX (on page 343)
StartY (on page 343)
PipeLength (on page 343)
SymbolScale (on page 343)
SymbolSelect (on page 344)
SymbolList (on page 344)
TextOffsetX (on page 344)
TextOffsetY (on page 344)
TextHeight (on page 344)
TextWidthFactor (on page 345)
VerticalSpacing (on page 345)
Visible
Controls whether symbol shape frame positioning is used. If it is set to True, then the definitions
in the Symbol table are written to the data definition (DDF) file, which switches on the facility.
DrawingLayer
Sets the drawing layer for symbol shape frame positioning. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.
HorizontalSpacing
Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the symbol shape output when the
table is horizontally formatted or two dimensional. Type a value in mm or inches (as a real
See Also
342
Layout
Controls whether the table is in horizontal, vertical, or multiple style.
SingleVertical - Defines a single vertical table.
SingleHorizontal - Defines a single horizontal table.
MultipleVertical - Defines a multiple vertical table.
MultipleHorizontal - Defines a multiple horizontal table.
MaxColumns
Defines the maximum number of columns before a new row is started when using multiple
tables or the maximum number of entries for a single horizontal table.
MaxRows
Defines the maximum number of rows before a new column is started when using multiple
tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is vertical.
StartX
Defines the bottom left-hand X position of the first symbol shape in mm, or inches (as a real
See Also
StartY
Defines the bottom left-hand Y position of the first symbol shape in mm, or inches (as a real
See Also
PipeLength
Specifies a single value for the length of pipe (including symbols), with a maximum value of
15mm or 0.5 inches. A negative value (-1) suppresses the output of pipe.
Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set
on the Options dialog box.
See Also
SymbolScale
Specifies a single value for the percentage symbol scale factor. Used to control the scaling of
symbol shapes.
343
SymbolSelect
Controls whether to output all the symbols that are defined or only those that are used on the
drawing.
Fixed - All the symbols defined are output.
Dynamic - Only those symbols which are used on the drawing are output.
SymbolList
Double-clicking the SymbolList field opens a text editor, which you can use to type the symbols
and associated text to be output. Each line must contain the symbol name and associated text
separated by a space, as shown in the following examples:
O1HG Pipe Support
WS Site Weld
WW Workshop Weld
TRACING Tracing
LAGGING Lagging
TextOffsetX
Specifies a single value for the horizontal movement from the symbol origin to the text origin.
See Also
TextOffsetY
Specifies a single value for the vertical movement from the symbol origin to the text origin. Type
a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the
Options dialog box.
See Also
TextFont
Defines the font to be used. Use the TextFont list to specify the font type.
TextHeight
Specifies the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on
the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See Also
TextWeight
Controls the character thickness. Specify a value between 1 and 9. Used only for MicroStation.
344
TextWidthFactor
Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height to be used for output of the cut list.
VerticalSpacing
Sets the vertical spacing required between each row of the symbol shape output when the table
is vertically formatted or two dimensional.
Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units
set on the Options dialog box.
See Also
345
MaterialList Object
Sets options for controlling position, format, and contents of the parts list.
BoltAccumulation (on page 347)
ErectAccumulation (on page 349)
FabAccumulation (on page 349)
FixedPipeAccumulation (on page 349)
GasketAccumulation (on page 349)
OffshoreAccumulation (on page 351)
WeldAccumulation (on page 357)
BoltDiameterUnits (on page 347)
BoltLengthUnits (on page 348)
Drg1of1OnSingleIsos (on page 348)
ItemCodeLength (on page 350)
LinearQuantityStyle (on page 350)
MaterialsBySpool (on page 350)
MaterialListOverflow (on page 350)
MaterialListSplitting (on page 351)
OverflowDrawingID (on page 351)
SheetNumberFormat (on page 351)
SmallXLargeNS (on page 352)
SpoolsMatchFull (on page 352)
SupportsWithMatchingNamesAccumulation (on page 352)
WastageArea1 (on page 353)
WeightsStyle (on page 357)
ComponentsWithNoItemCodesInPCF (on page 348)
The MaterialList object also contains the following groups of options:
Fixed Layout - Defines the original ISOGEN material list options. ISOGEN plots the column
headings. For more information, see MaterialList.FixedLayout Object (on page 358).
User Defined - Defines the user defined material list. The software prints this type of list into
a drawing frame that contains a pre-existing table with header text. For more information,
see MaterialList.UserDefined Object (on page 361). A user defined material list is allowed
only with a backing sheet. That is, if an ISOGEN-generated drawing frame is in use, only the
fixed layout and variable layout styles are available.
346
Variable Layout - Defines the alternative variable layout material list. This style is a
variation of the basic fixed layout type, with additional user options for header text. For more
information, see MaterialList.VariableLayout Object (on page 379).
Summary File - Controls the summary file for the material list. For more information, see
MaterialList.SummaryFile Object (on page 384).
Transfers - Reassigns particular record types to a new sort group. For more information,
see MaterialList.Transfers Object (on page 388).
Fixed Layout produces a simple material list. Variable Layout and User Defined are
fully user-definable: Variable Layout is based on columns and lines, and User Defined is based
on X- and Y-coordinate positions.
ActiveList
Defines which of the three available material list styles is being used. The default is Fixed.
Fixed (see "MaterialList.FixedLayout Object" on page 358)
UserDefined (see "MaterialList.UserDefined Object" on page 361)
Variable (see "MaterialList.VariableLayout Object" on page 379)
Defines
OS 23 Pos 3
BoltAccumulation
Controls how bolt components are included on or excluded from the material list.
None - Each occurrence of an item results in an individual entry on the material list
Normal - Accumulate bolts normally.
Suppress - Suppress all bolts.
Defines
OS 74 Pos 5
BoltDiameterUnits
Controls the units used for bolt diameters.
As Drawing - Same as the Units property on the Drawing Controls object.
INCH - For inch diameters.
MM - For millimetres diameters.
Defines
OS 65 Pos 2
See Also
Drawing.Controls Object (on page 185)
Units (on page 198)
347
BoltLengthUnits
Controls the units used for bolt lengths.
As Drawing - Same as the Units property on the Drawing Controls object.
INCH - For inch diameters.
MM - For millimetres diameters.
Defines
OS 65 Pos 1
See Also
Drawing.Controls Object (on page 185)
Units (on page 198)
CentrelineLengths
Controls how ISOGEN determines the length of bends and elbows.
Calculate the distance around curve of Bends/Elbows - Calculate the centerline length
using the distance around the radius.
Calculate the distance to intersection of Bends/Elbows - Calculate the centerline length
using the distance from the end point to the intersection point.
Defines
OS 24 Pos 4
ComponentsWithNoItemCodesInPCF
Controls IDFGEN's output of components present in the PCF that have no item code specified.
Default - Set components with no item code to Not On Material List.
Generate Blank Item Code - Assign a blank item code and description and output to the
material list.
Defines
OS 74 Pos 8
Drg1of1OnSingleIsos
Allows a single drawing to be identified as Drg 1 of 1 on single-sheet isometric drawings.
True - Write Drg 1 of 1 on isometrics consisting of one drawing.
False - Drg 1 of 1 is not written on isometrics consisting of one drawing
Defines
OS 30
348
ErectAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of erection material. The default setting is Normal.
All Except Pipe - Suppress accumulation of all erection materials (excluding pipe).
None - Suppress accumulation of erection materials (including pipe).
Normal - Accumulate erection materials normally.
Pipe Only - Accumulate only piping
Suppress - Suppress display of erection items in the material list.
Defines
OS 74 Pos 2
FabAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of fabrication materials. The default is Normal.
All Except Pipe - Suppress accumulation of all fabrication materials (excluding pipe).
None - Suppress accumulation of fabrication items but list them separately in the material
list.
Normal - Accumulate fabrication materials normally.
Pipe Only - Accumulate only pipe.
Suppress - Suppress the display of fabrication items in the material list.
Defines
OS 74 Pos 1
FixedPipeAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of fixed pipe materials.
ISOGEN considers fixed pipe to be a component and accumulates materials by quantity. Using
FixedPipeAccumulation you can specify that ISOGEN accumulate fixed pipe materials by
length for output to Material List and Material Control files.
By Quantity - Accumulate fixed pipe by quantity.
By Length - Accumulate fixed pipe by length.
Defines
OS 74 Pos 7
GasketAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of gaskets.
Normal - Accumulate gaskets normally.
None - Non-accumulation of gaskets.
Suppress - Suppresses all gaskets.
Defines
OS 74 Pos 4
349
ItemCodeLength
Sets the number of characters in the material list item code.
0 - Use the default for 8 characters in the item code.
Value - Use an alternative number of characters, such as 12. Acceptable values are in the
range 6-29.
The maximum number of item code characters is 29.
Changes in this property cause the material list to be correspondingly wider or narrower.
Defines
OS 28
LinearQuantityStyle
Specifies the style for linear quantities in the material list
n. n M n. n ft - Output pipe length in the form Metres (M) or Feet: 1 decimal place, as in
10.4 M or 10.4'.
n MM n ft n in - Output pipe length in the form Millimetres (MM) or Feet and Inches, as in
1040 MM or 10'5".
n. nnn M n. nnn ft - Output pipe length in the form Metres or Feet: 3 decimal places, as in
1.045 M or 10.375'.
Defines
OS 24 Pos 2
MaterialsBySpool
Controls the splitting of fabrication materials by spool on the material list.
False - List Fabrication materials as normal under the Fabrication section of material list.
True - Group spool materials separately, with part numbering on a per spool basis.
Defines
OS 24 Pos 3
MaterialListOverflow
Controls the overflow of the material list to subsequent drawings.
Same Sheet - Give automatic overflow onto secondary material list plotted alongside the
first. This creates a wider non-standard drawing size.
Continuation Sheet - Give a second "dummy" isometric containing the overflow material list
but no pipeline graphics. This isometric is allocated the next drawing (sheet) identifier in the
sequence.
Defines
OS 30
350
MaterialListSplitting
Controls the plotting of the material list when a pipeline splits onto two or more drawings
Per Drawing - Plot the material list per isometric drawing.
Per Pipeline - Plot the material list per pipeline.
Defines
OS 24 Pos 1
OffshoreAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of offshore materials. The default setting is Normal.
All Except Pipe - Suppress accumulation of all offshore materials (excluding pipe).
None - Suppress accumulation of offshore materials (including pipe).
Normal - Accumulate offshore materials normally.
Pipe Only - Accumulate only piping.
Suppress - Suppress display of offshore items in the material list at all.
Defines
OS 74 Pos 3
OverflowDrawingID
Controls the numbering of overflow drawing sheets.
Next ID - The second isometric drawing has the next sheet number in the sequence.
Alpha suffix - The second isometric drawing has the same sheet number as the first one,
with a character suffix, for example, A, B, and so forth.
This option applies only when you set the MaterialListOverflow to Continuation Sheet,
in order to produce a second sheet displaying the material list continuation.
Defines
OS 30 Pos 1
See Also
MaterialListOverflow (on page 350)
351
SheetNumberFormat
Controls the number of characters output for the sheet number. If the sheet number output has
less than the requested number of characters, leading zero(s) are inserted where appropriate.
0 - No leading zeros
1 Character - Fixed number of characters
2 Characters
3 Characters
4 Characters
5 Characters
6 Characters
7 Characters
8 Characters
9 Characters
Defines
OS 30 Pos 3
SmallxLargeNS
Free format text field that allows you to enter a table of record ids and SKEYs, which are output
with the nominal size in small x large order.
The following example illustrates the required format (Record identifier SKEY (optional)):
50 AR
80
100 RAFL
SpoolsMatchFull
Controls whether part numbers on a spool isometric match those on the full isometric.
True - Spool isometric material part numbers to match full isometric part numbers.
False - Spool isometric material part numbers to be independent from full isometric part
numbers.
Defines
OS 24 Pos 1
SupportsWithMatchingNamesAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of supports with matching tags.
Off - Support with matching names (tags) not accumulated.
On - Support with matching names (tags) accumulated.
Defines
OS 64 Pos 4
352
TextFont
Specifies a font corresponding to a font entry in the .fif file.
Defines
OS 27 Pos 7, 8, 9
Visible
Controls the display of the material list.
True - Plot the material list.
False - Turn off all material list types, except the material control file and cut list. The
software controls these files separately.
Defines
OS 23 Pos 1
WastageArea1
Controls any additional pipe quantity that needs to be added to the material list to allow for
wastage during fabrication.
The property is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe wastage
allowances. Each of the nine properties is applicable to a particular Plant area, which can be
identified in the input Pipeline data file.
0 - Use a percentage multiplication factor of zero. This setting allows you to obtain no
increase in pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the input
pipeline data file.
1 - Use a percentage multiplication factor of 1. This value does not increase the basic
wastage percentage that can be set in application records in the input pipeline data file. This
is the default setting
Value - Use the specified value as an additional factor that is multiplied by the basic
wastage factor (input on appropriate records in the pipeline data input file) to arrive at a final
wastage factor percentage. For example, a value of 2 gives a final percentage of twice the
value of any figure included in the input pipeline data file.
Defines
OS 43
WastageArea2
pipeline data file.
353
Defines
OS 44
WastageArea3
pipeline data file.
Defines
OS 45
WastageArea4
pipeline data file.
Defines
OS 46
354
WastageArea5
pipeline data file.
Defines
OS 47
WastageArea6
pipeline data file.
Defines
OS 48
355
WastageArea7
pipeline data file.
Defines
OS 49
WastageArea8
pipeline data file.
Defines
OS 51
356
WastageArea9
pipeline data file.
Defines
OS 51
WeightsStyle
Controls the output of component weights.
Total - Each component weight is a total weight. For example: quantity x unit weight.
Individual - Each component weight is the individual weight of the component type. The
quantity is not multiplied by the unit weight.
None - Suppress the output of component weight on material lists.
Defines
OS 41 Pos 5
WeldAccumulation
Controls the accumulation of welds.
Normal - Accumulate welds normally.
None - Suppress accumulation of weld items but list them separately in the material list.
Suppress - Suppress display of welds in the material list.
Defines
OS 74 Pos 6
357
MaterialList.FixedLayout Object
Sets options for the fixed layout material list format. This format produces a simple material list.
You can use either a user-defined drawing frame or the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.
ActiveList must be set to Fixed. For more information, see ActiveList (on page
347).
InsertBlankLines (on page 358)
LineSpacing (on page 359)
MLType (on page 359)
RightSide (on page 359)
ShowDividingLines (on page 359)
ShowItemDescriptions (on page 360)
TitleblockPos (on page 361)
TitleBlockVisible (on page 361)
InsertBlankLines
Sets whether the software inserts blank lines
True - Insert blank lines after single line entries in the material list.
False - Blank lines not inserted following single line entries. This provides the possibility of
the material list being shorter.
Defines
OS 26 Pos 2
Layout
Specifies the material list layout pattern.
Standard - Produce the standard sectionalized type with group headings and component
sub-group headings.
Continuous - Produce a layout without headings and sub-headings.
This type of list is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups,
such as pipe, flanges, and fittings. If required, you can switch off the dividing lines using
ShowDividingLines.
Defines
OS 23 Pos 5
See Also
358
LineSpacing
Controls the line spacing distance on a plotted material list. This value is a ratio that applies to
standard line spacing. For example, a value of 90 reduces the line spacing, while a value of 110
increases it.
Type a value in the range 75-125. The default is 100.
Defines
OS 29
MLType
Controls the type of material list.
Normal - The software does not create a special type of material list
Special - Give every item a separate entry except gaskets and bolts, which are
accumulated. Pulled bends get U prefixes, and welds have W or B prefixes.
Normal with alpha pointers - The software does not create a special type of material list.
The software uses an alpha system of material list pointers (A, B, C...) instead of the default
numeric system.
Defines
OS 23 Pos 2
RightSide
Sets the position of the material list.
True - Print the material list on the right side of the drawing.
False - Print the material list on the left side of the drawing.
Defines
OS 25 Pos 1
ShowDividingLines
Specifies lines in the material list. This option provides a way to separate the different groups in
the material list when the list does not have headings and sub-headings.
True - Display dividing lines between groups, such as PIPES, FLANGES, or FITTINGS.
False - Display no horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups.
This option works only when Layout is set to Continuous and MLType is set to Special.
Defines
OS 23 Pos 5
See Also
359
ShowItemDescriptions
Controls whether item descriptions are printed on the material list. When item descriptions are
suppressed, the material list becomes correspondingly narrower.
True - Print item descriptions on the material list.
False -Suppress the printing of item descriptions on the material list.
Defines
OS 26 Pos 1
TextSize
Controls the material list text size. The default setting is Medium (2.5 mm).
Small (2.1 mm) - Output characters 2.1mm high.
Medium (2.5 mm) - Output characters 2.4mm high.
Large (2.8 mm) - Output characters 2.8mm high.
XLarge (3.5 mm) - Output characters 3.5mm high.
XXLarge (4.2 mm) - Output characters 4.2mm high.
XXXLarge (4.9 mm) - Output characters 4.9mm high.
Defines
OS 27 Pos 1
See Also
UserTextSize
Specifies a user-defined size in 1/10 millimetres for text output in the fixed material list. Type a
value (integer) in range 10-99.
Only use this option if TextSize is set to User.
Defines
OS 27 Pos 1, 2
See Also
TextWeight
Specifies the thickness of the text. Type a value in the range 0-9. Used only for MicroStation.
Defines
OS 27 Pos 5
360
TextWidth
Specifies the character width if you are using a fixed-width font. Type a value (real number) in
mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
Defines
OS 27 Pos 3, 4
See Also
TitleblockPos
Controls the position of the title block.
Pipeline - Position the title block at the bottom right corner of pipeline drawing area. This is
the default position.
MatList - Position the title block at the bottom of material list.
Defines
OS 25 Pos 2
TitleBlockVisible
Controls whether the title block appears on the drawing.
True - Display the title block as defined by TitleblockPos.
False - Suppress the title block.
Defines
OS 25 Pos 2
MaterialList.UserDefined Object
Sets options for the user-defined material list format. The user-defined material list offers more
flexibility than the other two material list styles.
This style of material list requires a backing sheet.

ActiveSection (on page 362)
DefaultDescriptionWidth (on page 363)
DrawingColour (on page 363)
ShowRemarks (on page 363)
ShowGroupHeadings (on page 364)
GroupHeadingX (on page 364)
GroupUnderline (on page 364)
CategoryUnderline (on page 364)
ShowAccumulatedPipeData (on page 365)
ShowCategoryHeadings (on page 365)
AccumulatedPipePosition (on page 365)
361

AccumulatedPipeQuantity (on page 365)
AccumulatedPipeDesc (on page 365)
Count (on page 367)
The MaterialList.UserDefined object also contains the following groups of options:
One Section - Sets options for the user-defined material list format. This format displays
one section in the material list. For more information, seeMaterialList.UserDefined
OneSection Object (on page 368).
Two Section - Sets options for the user-defined material list format. This format displays
two sections in the material list. For more information, see MaterialList.UserDefined
TwoSection Object (on page 369).
Three Section - Sets options for the user-defined material list format. This format displays
three sections in the material list. For more information, see MaterialList.UserDefined
ThreeSection Object (on page 371)
Remarks Box - Sets options for the user-defined material list remarks box. For more
information, see MaterialList.UserDefined RemarksBox Object (on page 373).
Spool Table - Stores the settings for spool table quantities, which can be output as part of a
user-defined material list. For more information, see MaterialList.UserDefined SpoolTable
User Defined Collection - Defines the columns for a user-defined material list. For more
information, see MaterialList.UserDefined XYColumns Collection (on page 367).
ActiveSection
Defines the number of sections in the material list.
1- Use the OneSection object properties for material list layout.
2 - Use the TwoSection object properties for material list layout.
3 - Use the ThreeSection object properties for material list layout.
See Also
MaterialList.UserDefined OneSection Object (on page 368)
MaterialList.UserDefined TwoSection Object (on page 369)
MaterialList.UserDefined ThreeSection Object (on page 371)
362
DefaultDescriptionWidth
Specifies the default number of characters to use for the Description. You can override this
option by setting the Width property for this column. The column width for fixed-width fonts is
important only for this attribute.
Type a value in the range 1-130.
DrawingLayer
Sets the drawing layer for material list text. Type a value (integer) in the range of 1-50.
For more information about drawing layers, see Drawing.Definitions Object (on page
200).
DrawingColour
Specifies a number that represents the colour number as defined in the output drawing system
(MicroStation or AutoCAD). Type the required value (integer).
MLType
Normal - The software does not create a special type of material list.
Special - Gives every item a separate entry except gaskets and bolts, which are
accumulated. Pulled bends get U prefixes, and welds have W or B prefixes.
Normal with alpha pointers - The software does not create a special type of material list.
The software uses an alpha system of material list pointers (A, B, C...) instead of the default
numeric system.
Defines
OS 23 Pos 2
ShowRemarks
Controls the appearance of a remarks list, as defined by the separate RemarksBox object.
True - Display the Remarks list.
False - Suppress the display of the Remarks list.
StartX
Defines the bottom left X position of the first line of the material list. Type a value (integer) in mm
or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See Also
363
StartY
Defines the bottom left Y position of the first line of the material list. Type a value (integer) in mm
See Also
ShowGroupHeadings
Specifies whether group headings are displayed.
True - Display group headings.
False - Suppress the display of group headings.
GroupHeadingX
Specifies the displacement from the StartX setting for the group heading. Type a value (integer)
in millimetres.
See Also
GroupUnderline
Controls whether group headings are underlined. If set to True, the group heading is underlined.
CategoryHeadingX
Defines the displacement in X from StartX for the category heading. Type a value (real
number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog
box.
See Also
CategoryUnderline
Controls whether category headings are underlined. If set to True, the category heading is
underlined.
364
ShowAccumulatedPipeData
Controls the plotting of accumulated pipe information in a material list containing
non-accumulated quantities. That is, for pipe only, it is possible to have both accumulated and
non-accumulated information in the same material list. The default setting is False.
True - Export AccumulatedPipePosition, AccumulatedPipeQuantity and
AccumulatedPipeDesc to the material list definition (MLD) file.
False - The properties defined previously (as set when True is selected) are not exported to
the material list definition file.
ShowCategoryHeadings
Specifies whether or not the category headings appear.
True - Display group category headings.
False - Suppress the display of group category headings.
AccumulatedPipePosition
Specifies the horizontal offset in millimetres or inchesto contents of Alternate Text 394. The
offset is from the material list StartX property
See Also
AccumulatedPipeQuantity
Specifies the horizontal offset in millimetres or inches to horizontal offset to accumulated pipe
quantity. The offset is from the material list StartX property.
See Also
AccumulatedPipeDesc
Specifies the horizontal offset in millimetres or inches to horizontal offset to accumulated pipe
description. The offset is from the material list StartX property.
See Also
365
TextFont
Specifies a font corresponding to a font entry in the .fif file. Use the TextFont list to specify the
font type.
TextHeight
Specifies the text height. The text height applies to all sections in the material list. Type a value
(real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options
dialog box.
See Also
TextWeight
Specifies the text weight. Type a value (integer) between 1 and 9. Used only for MicroStation.
Defines
OS 27 Pos 5
TextWidthFactor
Defines the ratio of width to height of the text in the material list. Type a value (integer).
VerticalSpacing
Specifies the vertical spacing between the lines of data. The vertical spacing applies to all
sections in the material list. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the
See Also
UniqueDelimiter
Defines the character used as a delimiter when the file format is delimited. The possible
characters are:
Blank
Comma (,)
Semi-colon (;)
Colon (:)
366
Count
Displays the number of columns in the UserDefined material list plotted on the isometric, as
defined in the MaterialList.UserDefined XYColumns collection (on page 367).
MaterialList.UserDefined XYColumns Collection

The MaterialList.UserDefined XYColumns collection defines the data output for three
user-definable lists - Material, Weld and Cut Lists.
This must be used with a backing sheet, as the positions given are for the X coordinate
only.
You can define the following properties:
Offset (on page 368)
MaxChars (on page 368)
Comment (on page 368)
To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change
and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Offset and MaxChars
properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then press Enter.
See Also
367

AttributeName
Specifies a property to appear in the column. Use the AttributeName list to select the required
property.
Offset
Specifies the offset in mm from the StartX and StartY .
Type a value (real number) in mm, or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in
the Options dialog box.
See Also
MaxChars
Sets the width of the column.
Comment
Outputs a text comment for any definition contained in the previous columns. If any text is
entered in this field, it is output as a comment--preceded by a !--to the relevant data or summary
report file.
MaterialList.UserDefined OneSection Object

Contains properties that are used when the ActiveSection property on the
MaterialList,UserDefined object is set to 1.
Content (on page 368)
ListDown (on page 369)
MaxEntries (on page 369)
See Also
MaterialList.UserDefined Object (on page 361)
Content
Selects the category of data for the material list content. The default is Continuous.
Continuous - List all items in the material list.
Fabrication - List fabrication components only.
Erection - List erection components only.
Offshore - List offshore components only.
Erection/Offshore - List erection/offshore components only.
368

ListDown
Specifies the plotting of the material list. Controls the direction in which the material list is printed
with reference to StartX and StartY of the MaterialList.UserDefined object.
True - Plot the material list from top to bottom.
False - Plot the material list from the bottom up.
For a three section material list, all section must be in the same direction.
See Also
MaxEntries
Sets the maximum number of entries in the material list before an overflow sheet is generated.
Type the required value (positive integer).
MaterialList.UserDefined TwoSection Object

MaterialList.UserDefined object is set to 2.
Section1Content (on page 369)
Section1Down (on page 370)
Section1MaxEntries (on page 370)
Section2Down (on page 370)
Section2YOffset (on page 371)
See Also
Section1Content
Selects the category of data for the material list content in Section 1. The default setting is
FABRICATION.
FABRICATION - List only fabrication components.
ERECTION - List only erection components.
OFFSHORE - List only offshore components.
ERECTION/OFFSHORE - List only erection/offshore components.
369

Section1Down
Specifies the plotting of the material list. Controls the direction in which the material list is printed
with reference to StartX and StartY of the MaterialList UserDefined object.
True - Plots data from the top down in Section 1.
False - Plots data from the bottom up in Section 1.
See Also
Section1MaxEntries
Sets the maximum number of entries in Section 1 of the material list before an overflow sheet is
generated. Type the required value (integer),
Section2Content
ERECTION. This option cannot be same as Section1Content.
Section2Down
Specifies the plotting of the material list. Controls the direction in which Section 2 of the material
list is printed with reference to Section2YOffset. The default setting is True.
True - Plots data from the top down in Section 2.
False - Plots data from the bottom up in Section 2.
See Also
Section2MaxEntries
Controls the maximum number of entries for Section 2 of the material list before an overflow
sheet is generated. Type the required value (integer).
370

Section2YOffset
Controls the Y offset for section 2 of the material list with reference to StartX and StartY of the
MaterialList UserDefined object. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on
the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See Also
MaterialList.UserDefined ThreeSection Object

MateriaList.UserDefined object is set to 3.
See Also
ListDown
Sets the plotting of the material list. Controls the direction in which the material list is printed with
reference to StartX and StartY of the MaterialList.UserDefined object. The default setting is
True.
True - Plot data from the top down.
False - Plot data from the bottom up.
For a three section material list, all section must be in the same direction.
See Also
371

Section1Content
Selects the category of data for the material list content in Section 1. The default is
FABRICATION.
Section1MaxEntries
generated. Type the required value (integer).
Section2Content
ERECTION.
This option cannot be the same as Section1Content.

Section2MaxEntries
Section2YOffset
Controls the Y offset for section 2 of the material list with reference to StartX and StartY of the
MaterialList.UserDefined object. Type a value (integer) in mm or inches, depending on the
See Also
372

Section3Content
Selects the category of data for the material list content in Section 3 of the material list. The
default setting is OFFSHORE.
This option cannot be the same as Section1Content or Section2Content. .

Section3MaxEntries
Section3YOffset
Controls the Y offset for section 3 of the material list with reference to the StartX and StartY
properties of the MaterialList.UserDefined object. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches,
See Also
MaterialList.UserDefined RemarksBox Object

Contains the necessary data to define the position and properties of a Style3 Remarks box,
which is used to plot user-specified remarks attached to components.
MaxCharacters (on page 374)
373

DrawingLayer
Sets the drawing layer for material list text. Type a value (integer) in the range 1-50.
For more information about drawing layers, see Drawing.Definitions Object (on page
200).
MaxCharacters
Sets the maximum number of characters per line in the remarks box. Type a value (positive
integer).
MaxEntries
Sets the maximum number of entries in the remarks box. Type a value (positive integer).
When the maximum is reached, ISOGEN does not output any further lines, and a
warning message is output to the message file.
StartX
Specifies the X-coordinate of the starting position for the remarks box. Type a positive real
number in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog
box.
See Also
StartY
Specifies the Y-coordinate of the starting position for the remarks box. Type a positive real
box.
See Also
TextHeight
Specifies the height of the characters in remarks text. Type a positive real number in mm or
See Also
374

TextWeight
Specifies the weight of the characters in remarks text. Type a value in range 1 - 9. Used for
MicroStation only.
Defines
OS 27 Pos 5
VerticalSpacing
Sets the vertical spacing between the horizontal lines of remark text. Type a positive real
box.
See Also
MaterialList.UserDefined SpoolTable Object

Stores the settings for the spool table quantities, which can be output as part of a user-defined
material list.
HeaderOffsetX (on page 376)
HeaderOffsetY (on page 376)
ColumnOffset (on page 376)
NoColumns (on page 377)
TableOverflow (on page 377)
DataOffsetX (on page 377)
DataOffsetY (on page 378)
OutputLinesTube (on page 379)
TextHeightMultiple (on page 379)
Enabled
Controls whether the spool table settings are written to the material list definition (MLD) file.
375

HeaderOffsetX
Sets the X offset to the spool identifier position in mm or inches (as a real number), depending
on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See Also
HeaderOffsetY
Sets the Y offset to the spool identifier position in mm or inches (as a real number), depending
on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box
See Also
376

ColumnOffset
Controls the horizontal offset between each column of spool quantities on the material list.
in the Options dialog box.
See Also
NoColumns
The maximum number of spool quantity columns that can fit on the backing sheet.
TableOverflow
Indicates if automatic spool table overflow on to a second sheet is allowed.
True - Overflow is allowed.
False - Overflow is not allowed.
TextHeight
Sets the text height to be used.
Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the
Options dialog box.
See Also
TextWeight
DrawingLayer
Sets the drawing layer for the spool table text. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.
377
DataOffsetX
Sets the X offset to the first spool quantities position in mm or inches (as a real number).,
depending on the setting in of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See Also
DataOffsetY
Sets the Y offset to the first spool quantities position in mm, or inches (as a real number),
depending on the setting of the drawing units set in the Options dialog box.
See Also
378

OutputLinesTube
Used in conjunction with AText -537 to control the number of lines used for output of pipe
lengths.
The form of length output on the material list is controlled by LinearQuantityStyle; however, in
order to save space, it is possible to have a two line format.
By default, OutputLinesTube is set to 1, which uses the default LinearQuantityStyle. If AText
-537 is being used, then OutputLinesTube must be set to 2.
AText -537 is used to indicate the new line by using the $ and the setting for the units
indication to be output, as shown in the following example:
-537$m
13.5
m
-537$mm
13500
mm
mm
-537$FT
19.5
Ft
Ft
-537$FT
13.5
Ft (instead of 13.5')
Ft (instead of 13.5')
Do not use AText -537 if pipe quantities are requested in Ft-Ins (13'-5") units.
If set, this AText takes over control of the units indication output on all styles of material list,
as well as allowing a new line indicator to force two line output. If it is not set, then normal
defaults apply.
See Also
LinearQuantityStyle (on page 350)
TextHeightMultiple
Sets the height of the text to be output in multiple line form on the material list.
Type the value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in
See Also
379
MaterialList.VariableLayout Object
Sets options for the variable layout material list format. This format includes options to define
column headers. You can use either a user-defined drawing frame or the standard ISOGEN
drawing frame.
The MaterialList.VariableLayout object also contains a collection of options called
TextColumns. These options are used to define the columns for a variable layout material list.
For more information, see MaterialList.VariableLayout TextColumns Collection (on page 383).
DefaultDescriptionWidth (on page 380)
HeaderLines (on page 380)
InsertBlankLines (on page 380)
LineSpacing (on page 381)
RightSide (on page 381)
Count (on page 383)
DefaultDescriptionWidth
Specifies the default number of characters for the description.
Type an appropriate value in the range 0-130.
HeaderLines
Specifies a text string for the column header.
\ - Start a new line.
| - Produce a vertical break.
The HeaderLines width is defined by the length of the last line, terminated with the pipe
character (|). The length of the last line should be at least as long as the total width of data to be
displayed below it.
Column description text in the HeaderLines field must lie in the column bounds as defined.
380
Do not put text in columns that are not within the specified range of column.
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the material list
definition (MLD) file.
You can use the @ symbol instead of a space when you create headings for variable layout
bills of materials. ISOGEN interprets the @ symbol as a null character. It is easier to count
the number of spaces between the individual headers if you use the @ symbol instead of
using spaces.
InsertBlankLines
Sets whether the software inserts blank lines.
True - Insert blank lines after single line entries in the material list.
False - Blank lines not inserted following single line entries. This provides the possibility of
the material list being shorter.
Defines
OS 26 Pos 2
Layout
Specifies the material list layout pattern.
Standard - Produce the standard sectionalized type with group headings and component
sub-group headings.
Continuous - Produce a layout without headings and sub-headings.
This type of list is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups,
such as pipe, flanges, and fittings. If required, you can switch off the dividing lines using
ShowDividingLines.
Defines
OS 23 Pos 5
See Also
LineSpacing
Controls the line spacing distance on a plotted material list. This value is a ratio that applies to
standard line spacing. For example, a value of 90 reduces the line spacing, while a value of 110
increases it.
Type a value in the range 75-125. The default is 100.
Defines
OS 29
MLType
Normal - Create a special type of material list.
Special - Give every item a separate entry except gaskets and bolts, which are
accumulated. Give pulled bends a U prefix and welds a W or B prefix..
Normal with alpha pointers - Suppress creation of a special type of material list. The
software uses an alpha system of material list pointers (A, B, C.) instead of the default
numeric system.
Defines
OS 23 Pos 2
381
RightSide
Sets the position of the material list.
True - Print the material list on the right side of the drawing.
False - Print the material list on the left side of the drawing.
Defines
OS 25 Pos 1
ShowDividingLines
Specifies lines in the material list. This option provides a way to separate the different groups in
the material list when the list does not have headings and sub-headings.
True - Displays dividing lines between groups, such as PIPES, FLANGES, or FITTINGS.
False - No horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups.
This option works only when Layout is set to Continuous and MLType is set to Special.
Defines
OS 23 Pos 5
See Also
TextSize
Controls the material list text size. The default setting is Medium (2.5 mm).
Small (2.1 mm) - Output characters 2.1mm high.
Medium (2.5 mm) - Output characters 2.4mm high.
Large (2.8 mm) - Output characters 2.8mm high.
XLarge (3.5 mm) - Output characters 3.5mm high.
XXLarge (4.2 mm) - Output characters 4.2mm high.
XXXLarge (4.9 mm) - Output characters 4.9mm high.
Defines
OS 27 Pos 1
UserTextSize
Specifies a user-defined text size in mm or inches, depending on the setting in the Options
dialog box. Type a value (integer) in range 10 to 99.
Only applicable if TextSize is set to User.
Defines
OS 27 Pos 1, 2
See Also
382
TextWeight
Specifies the thickness of the text. Type a value in the range 0-9. Used only for MicroStation.
Defines
OS 27 Pos 5
TextWidth
Specifies the character width if you are using a fixed-width font. Type a value (real number) in
mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
Defines
OS 27 Pos 3, 4
See Also
Count
Displays the number of columns in the VariableLayout material list plotted on the isometric.
UniqueDelimiter
characters are:
Blank
Comma (,)
Semi-colon (;)
Colon (:)
MaterialList.VariableLayout TextColumns Collection

Specifies the columns for a variable layout material list.
Start (on page 384)
See Also
AttributeName
attribute.
383

Justification
Sets the alignment. You can choose from left- or right-justified, or numeric.
Start
Specifies the starting point of the column. The valid range is 1-999.
MaxChars
Defines the maximum number of characters.
Comment
report file.
In the example below, a text comment has been entered for the part number, nominal size, item
code, and quantity attributes.
The next example illustrates how the text comment is output to the relevant file.
MaterialList.SummaryFile Object
Sets options for the material list summary file.
The MaterialList.SummaryFile object also contains a collection of options that are used to
define the columns for a material list summary file. For more information, see
MaterialList.SummaryFile TextColumns Collection (on page 387).
Path (on page 385)
Append (on page 385)
FileFormat (on page 385)
Delimiter (on page 385)
ShowHeaders (on page 386)
MaterialHeadings (on page 386)
IncludeBolts (on page 386)
IndividualEntries (on page 386)
TitleText (on page 387)
ShowTitles (on page 387)
384
UserDefined (on page 387)

Count (on page 387)
Enabled
Specifies whether the summary file is created.
True - Create the summary file.
False - Suppress creation of the summary file.
Path
Specifies the full path location and filename of the summary file.
33. Double-click the Path box.
34. In the Specify path for file dialog box, navigate to the appropriate file and then click OK.
Do not include special characters in the summary filename.
Append
Defines whether the file is opened in appended mode or overwrite mode.
True - Append the file.
False - Overwrite the file.
FileFormat
Defines the format of the output file
Fixed - Output a fixed format file.
Delimited - Output a delimited file.
Delimiter
characters are
Blank
Comma (,)
Semi-colon (;)
Colon (:)
385
ShowHeaders
Specifies whether the header lines are shown.
True - Display header lines.
False - Suppress the display of header lines.
HeaderLines
Specifies the text string for the column header.
The HeaderLines width is defined by the length of the last line, terminated with the bar
character |. The length of the last line should be at least as long as the total width of data to be
displayed below it.
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the material list
definition (MLD) file.
Do not put text in columns that are not within the specified range of column.
MaterialHeadings
Controls whether there is a single output of material headings or for each pipe/drawing.
Pipeline - Output headings for each pipeline.
Drawing - Output headings for each drawing.
Single - Output a single output of the headings.
IncludeBolts
Specifies whether bolts are included in the summary file. The default setting is True.
True - Include bolts included in the material control file.
False - Exclude bolts from the material control file
Defines
OS 65 Pos 1
IndividualEntries
Controls whether Individual entries are output to the material control file when material
accumulation is being used on the material list. This allows components with different attributes
to be listed correctly but avoids non-accumulation of materials which can often create overflow
drawings.
True - Output individual entries to the material control file.
False - Suppress output of individual entries.
386
TitleText
Specifies text for the title.
ShowTitles
Specifies whether the title line is shown.
True - Display the title line.
False - Suppress the display of the title line.
UserDefined
Specifies whether the software creates the old standard material control file, or the software
uses the properties of the summary file object to control the data output to the material control
file.
True - Create the material control file using the summary file object properties.
False - Create a standard material control file.
See Also
MaterialList.SummaryFile Object (on page 384)
UniqueDelimiter
characters are:
Blank
Comma (,)
Semi-colon (;)
Colon (:)
Count
Displays the number of attributes to be output in the Material list Summary file (material control
file).
MaterialList.SummaryFile TextColumns Collection

Stores the definitions of the data to be output for the different types of lists.
Start (on page 388)
See Also
387

AttributeName
required attribute.
Justification
Sets the alignment of the text. You can choose from left- or right-justified, or numeric.
Start
MaxChars
Comment
report file.
MaterialList.Transfers Object
Stores the information that allows you to move a component from one sort group to another on
the material list. For example, a blank flange can be moved to the FLAN sort group.
The MaterialList.Transfers object contains a collection of options called Transfers, which is
used to store the components to be transferred. For more information, see
MaterialList.Transfers MLTransfers Collection (on page 388).
Count (on page 388)
Count
Displays the number of items in the MaterialList.Transfers MLTransfers collection (on page 388).
Each represents a material that is to be assigned to a group other than its default.
MaterialList.Transfers MLTransfers Collection

Stores the list of components to be transferred from one sort group to another.
RecordID (on page 389)
NewGroup (on page 389)
SKEY (on page 389)
See Also
388

RecordID
Specifies the record ID of the component type. This is the IDF record number for the
component, such as 107 for a blank flange or 90 for a control valve. Valid IDs are integers in the
range 0-999.
NewGroup
Specifies a new group for the component type. Available sort groups include:
PIPE (pipe)
VALV (valves and inline items)
FITT (fittings)
INST (instruments)
FLAN (flanges)
SUPP (supports)
GASK (gaskets)
MISC (miscellaneous)
BOLT (bolts)
WELD (welds)
SKEY
Transfers a record ID to a component group based on a user-defined SKEY. In the following
example, record ID 90 (instrument) is transferred to the valve group (VALV) but only instruments
that have an SKEY of CV** (refers to a control valve with any end preparation).
RecordID Group SKEY
90
VALV CV**
389
WeldList Object
Sets options for the ISOGEN weld list. The weld list is the report that appears on the drawing,
while the weld list summary file is the weld data formatted in a text file. For options that control
weld representation on the drawing, see Drawing.Welds Object (on page 299).
ExtraRPadWelds (on page 390)
SlipOnFlangeWelds (on page 391)
YTypeWelds (on page 391)
TackWeldNumbers (on page 392)
ClampWelds (on page 392)
The WeldList object also contains the following groups of options.
Fixed Layout - Defines the fixed layout weld list. For more information, see
WeldList.FixedLayout Object (on page 392).
Variable Layout - Defines the alternative variable layout weld list. The fixed layout list is a
fixed-format list that you cannot modify. The variable layout list is a column-based list. For
more information, see WeldList.VariableLayout Object (on page 393).
User Defined - Defines the alternative user defined weld list. The software prints this type of
list into a drawing frame that contains a pre-existing table with header texts. The user
defined list is a collection of start positions expressed in millimetres. For more information,
see WeldList.UserDefined Object (on page 394).
Summary File - Defines the titles section of a user-defined weld summary file and contains
a series of column definitions. You can suppress the display of title and column header
information to produce a more readily machine-readable summary file. For more information,
see WeldList.SummaryFile Object (on page 399).
ActiveList
Defines which of the three weld list styles is being used.
UserDefined (see "WeldList.UserDefined Object" on page 394)
FixedLayout (see "WeldList.FixedLayout Object" on page 392)
VariableLayout (see "WeldList.VariableLayout Object" on page 393)
Defines
OS 53 Pos 2
ExtraRPadWelds
Controls the quantity of extra weld numbers generated at reinforcement pads. You can type 0, 1,
or 2.
0 - Generates no extra weld numbers.
390
1 - Generates one extra weld number.
2 - Generates two extra weld numbers.
These are extra weld numbers because they are created in addition to the normal single
and double branch connection weld numbers that are generated at set-on tee and cross
positions.
Defines
OS 77 Pos 2
SlipOnFlangeWelds
Controls the quantity of weld numbers generated at slip-on flanges. You can generate either one
or two weld numbers at slip-on flanges. Type a value of 1 or 2.
1 - Generates one weld number.
2 - Generates two weld numbers. 2 is the default setting.
Defines
OS 77 Pos 1
Visible
Turns on or off the display of the weld or operations summary on the drawing.
True - Plot the weld list.
False - Suppress plotting of plot the weld list.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 2
YTypeWelds
Controls the allocation of weld numbers on the fabricated Y-type components. You can type 1 or
2.
1 - Allocate one weld number.
391
2 - Allocate two weld numbers.
Defines
OS 77 Pos 4
TackWeldNumbers
Controls the allocation of weld numbers on tack welds.
True - Allocate weld numbers.
False - Suppress the allocation of weld numbers.
Defines
OS 77 Pos 5
ClampWelds
Controls the number of weld numbers allocated to victaulic welded/gorged ring type clamps
(CLVR). Type a value in the range of 1 to 9.
If set to 0 (the default value), two weld numbers are allocated.
Defines
OS 77 Pos 7
WeldList.FixedLayout Object
Sets options for the fixed layout weld list format. This format produces a simple weld list. You
can use either a userdefined drawing frame or the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.
The ActiveList property on the WeldList object must be set to Fixed.

ShowOperationsBox
See Also
ShowOperationsBox
Controls whether the weld operations box is shown.
True - Display the weld operations box. This operations box replaces the original weld list if
the Visible property on the WeldList object is set to True.
False - Suppress the display of the weld operations box. The original weld list is plotted if
the Visible property on the WeldList object is set to True.
Defines
OS 53 Pos 2
392
WeldList.VariableLayout Object
Sets options for the variable layout weld list format. This format includes options to define
column headers. You can use either a user-defined drawing frame or the standard ISOGEN
drawing frame.
Headerlines (on page 393)
Count (on page 393)
The WeldList.VariableLayout object also contains a collection of options that are used to
define the columns for a variable layout weld list. For more information, see
WeldList.VariableLayout TextColumns Collection (on page 393).
The ActiveList property on the WeldList object must be set to Variable.
HeaderLines
Controls the column header text in the material list.
Makes sure that the column headers match the column positions when you use this
option.
Count
Displays the number of definitions in the TextColumns collection. This value is defined by the
software.
See Also
WeldList.VariableLayout TextColumns Collection (on page 393)
WeldList.VariableLayout TextColumns Collection

Specifies the columns for a variable layout weld list.
Start (on page 394)
See Also
AttributeName
required attribute.
Justification
Sets the text alignment. You can choose from left- or right- justified, or numeric.
393

Start
Specifies the starting point of the column. The valid range is 1 to 999.
MaxChars
Sets the width of the column. Type a value of zero or greater.
Comment
report file.
WeldList.UserDefined Object
Sets options for the user-defined weld list format. The user-defined weld list offers more
flexibility than the other two weld list styles.
The WeldList.UserDefined object also contains a collection of options that are used to define
the columns for a user-defined weld list. For more information, see WeldList.UserDefined
XYColumns Collection (on page 397).
394
The ActiveLlist property on the WeldList object must be set to UserDefined.

DrawingColour (on page 395)
MaxCols (on page 395)
TableLayout (on page 397)

Count (on page 397)
DrawingLayer
Sets the drawing layer for weld list text. For more information about drawing layers, see
Drawing.Definitions Object (on page 200). Type a value (integer) in range 1-50.
DrawingColour
Specifies a number that represents the colour number as defined in the output drawing system
(MicroStation or AutoCAD). Type the required value (integer).
ListDown
Sets the plotting of the weld list.
True - Plot the material list from the top down.
False - Plot the material list from the bottom up.
See Also
MaxEntries
Sets the maximum number of entries for the weld list. Type the required value (integer).
MaxRows
tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is vertical. Type the required value
(integer).
MaxCols
tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is horizontal. Type the required value
(integer).
StartX
Defines the bottom left X position of the first line of the weld list. Type a value (integer) in mm or
inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See Also
395
StartY
Defines the bottom left Y position of the first line of the weld list. Type a value (integer) in mm
See Also
TextFont
Specifies a font number corresponding to a font entry in the .fif file.
Defines
OS 4 Pos 7, 8, and 9
TextHeight
Specifies the text height in millimetres. Type the required value (real number) in mm or inches,
depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See Also
TextWeight
Specifies the character thickness. Type a value in range 1-9. Used only for MicroStation.
TextWidthFactor
Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height to be used for output of the weld list
on the isometric. Type the required value (real number)
HorizontalSpacing
Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the weld list output when the table
is horizontally formatted or two dimensional. Type a value (integer) in mm or inches, depending
on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See Also
396
TableLayout
Controls the order in which a Weld list table is organized.
Horizontal - Plot data from left to right.
Vertical - Plot data from top to bottom.
VerticalSpacing
Specifies the vertical spacing between each horizontal line. Type the required value (real
number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options
dialog box.
See Also
Count
Indicates the number of definitions in the XYColumns collection. This value is defined by the
software.
See Also
WeldList.Userdefined XYColumns Collection (on page 397)
WeldList.UserDefined XYColumns Collection

Specifies the columns for a user-defined weld list. This must be used with a backing sheet, as
the positions given are for the X coordinate only.
See Also
397

AttributeName
required attribute.
Offset
Specifies the offset in mm from the StartX and StartY.
Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set in
See Also
MaxChars
Sets the width of the column. The width must be zero or greater.
Comment
report file.
398
WeldList.SummaryFile Object
Sets options for the titles and column headers in a user-defined weld summary file. You can
suppress the display of title and column header information in order to produce a more readily
machine-readable summary file.
The WeldList.SummaryFile object also contains a collection of options that are used to define
the columns for a weld list summary file. For more information, see WeldList.SummaryFile
TextColumns Collection (on page 401).
Path (on page 399)
Count (on page 401)
Enabled
Controls whether weld summary file is created.
True - Create the weld summary file. If you want to set this option to True, you first must
specify the columns under WeldList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection.
False - Suppress creation of the weld summary file.
Path
Specifies a path to the summary file. Type the full path and filename.
Do not include special characters in the summary file name.
35. Double-click in the Path box.
36. In the Specify path for file dialog box, navigate to the file and then click OK.
399
Append
Specifies an append file for welds.
True - Create an append file. The current pipeline is added to an accumulation file.
False - Create a new file.
FileFormat
Sets the format of the site weld file.
Fixed - Produce a fixed format file.
Delimited - Produce a delimited file. The delimiter is specified in the Delimiter property.
See Also
Delimiter
Specifies a delimiter to use for the header lines that appear at the top of a Weld List Summary
file. The possible characters are:
Blank
Comma (,)
Semi-colon (;)
Colon (:)
HeaderLines
Controls the column header text in the weld list. Specify the text string for the column header.
Check that the column headers match the column positions set in the welding list
definition (WLD) file.
ShowHeaders
Controls whether column headers appear.
400
TitleText
Constructs the weld summary file title block. Type the text to be used for the title.
ShowTitles
Controls whether titles appear in the weld summary file. This option overrides the setting in
TitleText.
Count
Displays the number of definitions in the TextColumns collection. This value is defined by the
software.
See Also
WeldList.SummaryFile TextColumns Collection (on page 401)
WeldList.SummaryFile TextColumns Collection

Specifies the columns for a weld list summary file.
Start (on page 402)
See Also
AttributeName
required attribute.
Justification
Sets the text alignment. You can choose from left- or right-justified, or numeric.
401

Start
MaxChars
Sets the width of the column. Type a value of zero or greater.
Comment
report file.
402
CutList Object
Sets options for the cut list, which provides a list of pipes that are cut into smaller lengths during
construction.
IncludeAdditionalMaterial (on page 403)
CutPieceID (on page 404)
CutPieceSequence (on page 404)
DecimalInchOutput (on page 404)
LengthToCL (on page 404)
LengthToBranchPoint (on page 404)
OffshoreAllowance (on page 405)
OnShoreAllowance (on page 405)
ShopWeldAllowance (on page 405)
UseWeldGapData (on page 405)
UseTangentData (on page 406)
The CutList object also contains the following groups of options:
Fixed Layout - Defines the fixed layout cut list format. For more information, see
CutList.FixedLayout Object (on page 406).
User Defined - Defines the user-defined cut list format. For more information, see
CutList.UserDefined Object (on page 407).
Summary File - Sets options for the cut list summary file. For more information, see
CutList.SummaryFile Object (on page 411).
ActiveList
Controls the format of the cut list.
Fixed - Use the properties of the FixedLayout object.
UserDefined -Use the properties of the UserDefined object.
See Also
CutList.FixedLayout Object (on page 406)
CutList.UserDefined Object (on page 407)
IncludeAdditionalMaterial
Controls how additional material is handled in the cut list.
None - No entry to cut list for additional material.
Pipe Only - Add entry to cut list for additional material (PIPE).
Misc Only - Add entry to cut list for additional material (MISC).
Pipe and Misc - Add entry to cut list for additional material (PIPE and MISC).
Defines
OS 2 Pos 9
403
CutPieceID
Specifies the cut piece identifier type at the appropriate positions along pipelines.
Numeric - Display cut piece identifiers that are numeric.
Alphabetic - Display cut piece identifiers that are alphabetic.
Defines
OS 2 Pos 3
CutPieceSequence
Specifies whether cut piece numbers increase across drawings.
Continuous - Increase cut piece numbers across drawings.
Per drawing - Start cut piece numbers at 1 (one) or A on each drawing, depending on the
setting of CutPieceID.
Defines
OS 2 Pos 1
See Also
CutPieceID (on page 404)
DecimalInchOutput
Specifies the output of cut piece lengths in decimal inches for imperial units used.
True - Output supplementary cut lengths in decimal inches format in the REMARKS column
of the new style cut piece list. This option only applies to imperial units users.
False - Output standard cut lengths only.
Defines
OS 2 Pos 4
LengthToCL
Specifies the calculation of branch cut length. You can specify that the length be measured to
the actual branch connection point or to the run centreline.
True - Calculate to the centreline of the main pipeline in all situations.
False - Calculate the cut length to whatever the branch point position implies. That is, no
adjustment to cut length is made.
LengthToCL and LengthToBranchPoint are mutually exclusive; setting one to True
sets the other one to False.
Defines
OS 2 Pos 5
See Also
LengthToBranchPoint (on page 404)
404
LengthToBranchPoint
Controls the calculation of branch cut length to the branch point position.
True - Calculate the cut length to whatever the branch point position implies, that is, no
adjustment to cut length is made.
False - Calculate to the centreline of the main pipeline in all situations.
LengthToCL and LengthToBranchPoint are mutually exclusive; setting one True sets
the other one to False.
Defines
OS 2 Pos 5 = 2
See Also
LengthToCL (on page 404)
OffshoreAllowance
Sets the amount of extra pipe that is added at loose flange and field fit weld (FFW) positions for
offshore piping. Extra pipe is added both to cut pipe length dimensions and to pipe quantities on
0 or Blank - Obtain 0 (zero) mm allowance.
Value (real number) - Use the value (in range 0-999) of an alternative allowance.
Defines
OS 22 Pos 4-6
OnShoreAllowance
Sets the amount of extra pipe that is added at loose flange and field fit weld (FFW) positions for
onshore piping. Extra pipe is added both to cut pipe length dimensions and to pipe quantities on
Defines
OS 22 Pos 1-3
ShopWeldAllowance
Sets the amount of extra pipe that is added for shop test purposes where certain welds are
cut-off together with a short length of pipe after testing.
ShopWeldAllowance is applied only to shop test welds.
Defines
OS 22 Pos 7-9
405
UseWeldGapData
If set to True, the data stored in the WeldGaps property at the project level is written to the
welding definition file (WDF). This data is used for setting the various weld gaps.
When you import a style, if the WDF contains a WELD-GAPS entry, the WeldGaps and the
WeldGapData properties are both set to True.
See Also
Import Isometric Style Settings from File (on page 146)
WeldGaps (on page 130)
UseTangentData
If set to True, the data stored in the ElbowConversion property at the project level is written to
the drawing definition file.
If there is data in the ElbowConversion property, then this property must be set to True;
otherwise, any cut lengths can be wrong.
When importing a style, if the DDF contains a STANDARD-BEND-LENGTHS entry, the
ElbowConversion and the UseTangentData properties are both set to True.
See Also
Import Isometric Style Settings from File (on page 146)
Visible
Turns on and off the display of the cut piece list and cut piece identifiers. The cut list is a report
on the cut pieces that ISOGEN has determined to be in the pipeline. The type of cut list report
can be Fixed or UserDefined.
ActiveList controls which list is used.
True - Show the cut piece list and numbers on the isometric drawing.
False - Suppress the display of cut piece list and numbers on the isometric drawing.
Defines
OS 2 Pos 1
See Also
CutList.FixedLayout Object (on page 406)
CutList.UserDefined Object (on page 407)
406
CutList.FixedLayout Object
Defines the fixed layout cut list format.
If either of these types of cut list is required, the ActiveList property on the CutList
object must be set to Fixed. For more information, see ActiveList (on page 403).
Content
Specifies a limited or full cut list.
Standard - Use the old style cut list with limited information.
Extended - Use the new style cut list with full information.
Defines
OS 2 Pos 2
CutList.UserDefined Object
Defines the user-defined cut list format.
The CutList.UserDefined object also contains a collection of options that are used to define the
columns for the user defined cut list. For more information, see CutList.UserDefined XYColumns
Collection (on page 410).
AllowOverflowDrawings (on page 407)
HorizontalDirection (on page 408)
MaxColumns (on page 409)
ShowEnclosure (on page 409)
VerticalDirection (on page 410)
Count (on page 410)
AllowOverflowDrawings
Controls whether the cut list causes an overflow drawing. True is the default setting.
True - Cut list can cause an overflow drawing.
False - Cut list cannot cause an overflow drawing. If AllowOverflowDrawings is set to
False, and there was no overflow drawing created for any other reason, then the cut list
overflow data is lost.
407
DrawingLayer
Sets the drawing layer for the cut list text. Type an integer in the range 1-50.
HorizontalDirection
Sets the horizontal direction for the cut list. The default setting is Right.
Right - Cut list is to the right.
Left - Cut list is to the left.
HorizontalSpacing
Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the cut pipe list output when the
table is horizontally formatted or two-dimensional. Type a value (integer).
Layout
Controls whether the table is horizontal, vertical, or multiple style.
SingleVertical - Output same data items vertically against their relevant heading. Number
of columns output dependent on MaxRows setting.
408
SingleHorizontal - Output same data items horizontally against their relevant heading.
Number of columns output dependent on MaxRows setting.
MultipleVertical (Across/Down) - Layout of data items is Across > Down. Number of

columns output dependent on MaxRows setting.
MultipleVertical (Down/Across) - Layout of data items is Down > Across. Number of

columns output dependent on the MaxRows property.
See Also
MaxColumns
tables or the maximum number of entries for a single horizontal table. Type a value (integer).
MaxRows
tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is vertical. Type a value (integer).
ShowEnclosure
Controls whether cut list enclosures are shown.
True - Display cut list enclosures.
False - Suppress the display of cut list enclosures.
StartX
Defines the bottom left X position of the first line of the cut list. Type a value (integer).
StartY
Defines the bottom left Y position of the first line of the cut list. Type a value (integer).
TextFont
Specifies a font corresponding to a font entry in the .fif file. Select an appropriate font from the
list.
TextHeight
Sets the height of the text in the cut list. Type a value (as a real number) in mm or inches (as a
real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See Also
TextWeight
Sets the character thickness. Define a value between 1 and 9. Only used for MicroStation.
409
TextWidthFactor
Defines the ratio of width to height of the text in the cut list. Type a value (integer).
VerticalDirection
Sets the vertical direction for the cut list.
Up - Cut list goes up.
Down - Cut list goes down.
VerticalSpacing
Sets the vertical spacing required between each row of the cut list output when the table is
vertically formatted or two dimensional. Type a value in mm or inches (real number), depending
on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See Also
Count
Displays the number of columns in the user-defined cut list report plotted on the isometric
drawing. This value is defined by the software.
CutList.UserDefined XYColumns Collection

Specifies the columns for the user defined cut list.
This must be used with a backing sheet, as the positions given are for the X coordinate only.
See Also
410

AttributeName
required attribute.
Offset
Specifies the offset in mm from the StartX and StartY.
Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set in
See Also
MaxChars
Comment
report file.
411
CutList.SummaryFile Object
Sets options for the cut list summary file.
The CutList.SummaryFile object also contains a collection of options that are used to define
the columns for a material list summary file. For more information, see CutList.SummaryFile
Path (on page 412)
UserDefined (on page 412)
Count (on page 414)
Enabled
Specifies whether the summary file is created.
True - Enable the export of cut list summary details to the material list definition (MLD) file.
False - Suppress the export of cut list summary details to the material list definition (MLD)
file.
Path
Specifies a path to the summary file. Type the full path and filename.
Do not include special characters in the summary file name.
Append
UserDefined
Specifies whether the cut list summary file uses the properties of the summary file object to
control the data and headings output to the material control file or if the old standard cut list
summary file is created.
True - Use the properties of the summary file object.
False - Create the old standard material control file.
Defines
OS 23 Pos 4
See Also
CutList.SummaryFile Object (on page 411)
412
FileFormat
Defines the format of the output file.
Delimiter
characters are:
Blank
Comma (,)
Semi-colon (;)
Colon (:)
HeaderLines
Specifies the text string for the column header. You must ensure that the column headers match
the column positions set in the Material List Definition (MLD) file.
The HeaderLines width is defined by the length of the last line, terminated with the pipe
character (|). The length of the last line should be at least as long as the total width of data to be
displayed below it.
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the material
list definition (MLD) file.
ShowHeaders
Controls whether header lines are shown.
TitleText
Specifies the text for the title.
ShowTitles
413
Count
Displays the number of attributes to be output to the material list cut list summary file.
CutList.SummaryFile TextColumns Collection

Stores the definitions of the data to be output to the cut list summary report file. You can define
the following properties:
Start (on page 414)
See Also
AttributeName
Specifies a property to appear in the column
Justification
Sets the alignment of the text. You can choose from left- or right-justified, or numeric.
Start
Specifies the starting point of the column for the output data on a fixed format file, and specifies
the field number for a delimited file.
MaxChars
Specifies the maximum number of characters.
414

Comment
report file.
Supplementary Object
Sets options for various input and output files.
The Supplementary object contains the following groups of options:
Additional Data - Defines the DDF file. For more information, see
Supplementary.AdditionalData Object (on page 416).
Auxiliary Programs - Lists programs that run before or after ISOGEN. For more
information, see Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms Object (on page 417).
Bending Report - Activates and configures the bending report. For more information, see
Supplementary.BendingReport Object (on page 419).
Centre-of-Gravity - Specifies options about the centre-of-gravity for pipes. For more
information, see Supplementary.CentreOfGravity Object (on page 420).
Data Files - Provides the names of input data files that ISOGEN uses in various functions.
For more information, see Supplementary.DataFiles Object (on page 422).
Detail Sketches - Defines detail sketches on the isometric drawing. For more information,
see Supplementary.DetailSketches Object (on page 445).
Drawing Information File - Stores the definitions for the Drawing Information Cross
Reference output file in the DwgInfoFile collection. For more information, see
Supplementary.DwgInfoFile Object (on page 453).
Equipment Trim - controls the various functions related to the generation of equipment trim
(vessel trim) drawings and associated material control files. For more information, see
Supplementary.EquipmentTrim Object (on page 455).
Fonts - Controls the use of the ISOGEN font information file. If required, it can be used to
turn Off the use of fonts in the ISOGEN output files. For more information, see
Supplementary.Fonts Object (on page 457).
Heat Treatment - Sets up heat treatment /NDE testing data. For more information, see
Supplementary.HeatTreatment Object (on page 458).
Instrument SKEYs - Specifies user-defined symbol keys. ISOGEN treats these keys as
instruments. For more information, see Supplementary.InstrumentSKEYS Object (on page
460).
415
Neutral File - Controls the basic format and content of the Neutral report file. For more
information, see Supplementary.NeutralFile Object (on page 461).
Pipeline Attributes - Defines the PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION
attribute in the data definition file (DDF). For more information, see
Supplementary.PipeLineAtts Object (on page 467).
Printed Material List - Defines the header content of the printed material list. For more
information, see Supplementary.PrintedMaterialList Object (on page 492).
Reference Planes - Defines reference planes on the isometric drawing. For more
information, see Supplementary.ReferencePlanes Object (on page 470).
Repeat Files - For more information, see Supplementary.RepeatFile Object (on page 473).
Report Files - Provides the names of supplementary output files. For more information, see
Supplementary.ReportFiles Object (on page 475).
Site Weld File - Defines the site weld file. For more information, see
Supplementary.SiteWeldFile Object (on page 477).
Spool Attributes - Defines the data required for the output of spool attributes data on the
isometric and to summary report files, such as the spool Information file. For more
information, see Supplementary.SpoolAttributes Object (on page 479).
Spool Information - Stores the definitions for the spool information file in the Columns
collection. For more information, see Supplementary.SpoolInformation Object (on page 481).
Table Attributes - Stores the definitions of the DFTable Attributes. For more information,
see Supplementary.TableAttributes Object (on page 484).
Title Texts - Specifies user-defined text strings to be plotted on an ISOGEN- generated
drawing frame. The Visible option for the drawing frame must be set to False. For more
information, see Supplementary.TitleTexts object (on page 487).
Traceability - Defines a unique part numbers table that can be output on the isometric
drawing and a traceability output file. For more information, see Supplementary.Traceability
Supplementary.AdditionalData Object
Defines additional data for the Data Definition file (DDF).
DDFLines (on page 417)
Enabled
Controls whether the data in the property DDFLines is added to the Drawing Definition file
(DDF).
True - Include the data.
False - Exclude the data.
See Also
DDFLines (on page 417)
416
DDFLines
Specifies a block of text to be added to the Data Definition File (DDF). When you double-click
the DDFLines data field, the software opens a text editor and displays the current text (if any
exists). You can use the text editor to set the data lines to be added to the data definition file.
Click File > Update to add the text, or click File > Cancel to close the text editor without
saving the changes.
Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms Object
Specifies information about pre- and post-processor programs.
StartProgram (on page 417)
StartTimeout (on page 418)
StopOnError (on page 418)
PODGraphicsProgram (on page 418)
PODGraphicsTimeout (on page 418)
EndProgram (on page 418)
StartProgram
Specifies a pre-processor program to run before Personal ISOGEN.
37. Double-click the Value box.
The Specify path for file dialog box appears.
38. Click Browse
.
The Browse for file dialog box appears.
417

39. Navigate to the appropriate file, and then click Open.
The path location to the selected file appears in the dialog box.
40. Click OK.
StartTimeout
Defines the number of seconds before the start program is terminated and ISOGEN begins
processing. Type the required value (integer). The default time is 60 seconds.
StopOnError
Controls whether Personal ISOGEN runs if the pre-processor program experiences an error and
fails.
True - Suppress the running of Personal ISOGEN if the pre-processor fails.
False - Run Personal ISOGEN even if the pre-processor fails.
PODGraphicsProgram
Specifies an external program to run before ISOGEN's output is translated to the final drawing
output, which allows you to complete some minor editing of the drawing output.
PODGraphicsTimeout
Specifies the number of seconds before the external program specified by
PODGraphicsProgram is terminated and ISOGEN begins processing.
EndProgram
Specifies a post-processor program to run after Personal ISOGEN.
42. Click Browse
.
418

44. Click OK.
Supplementary.BendingReport Object
Controls options for bending pipe reports.
Path (on page 419)
ReportContents (on page 419)
Enabled
Controls whether the properties bending report is created.
True - Create the file.
False - Suppress creation of the file.
Path
Provides the path to the Bending peport.
46. Click Browse
.
48. Click OK.
Append
419
ReportContents
Determines the information included in the Bending Report.
Standard - Include pipe fabrication information including details of each cut piece, listing the
length, diameter, end preparation, material part number, and other related details to assist
manufacturing. In addition bending information giving distances to/between bends, angle
and radius details are also output.
Full - Include the same pipe fabrication information as with Standard, with the addition of
details to enable profiling the shaped ends of pipe and the cutting of holes, such as for tees,
olets, crosses, and so on.
Supplementary.CentreOfGravity Object
Specifies options for centre-of-gravity and weight calculations.
ForDryPipe (on page 420)
ForWetPipe (on page 421)
PerPipeLine (on page 421)
ShowInsulationWeight (on page 421)
ShowWetWeight (on page 421)
Enabled
Controls whether any centre-of-gravity and weight calculations are done.
True - Calculate those centre-of-gravity and weight calculations which are set by
ForDryPIpe, ForWetPipe, ShowInsulationWeight and ShowWetWeight.
False - Suppress all four centre-of-gravity and weight calculations.
Defines
OS 82 Pos 1
See Also
ForDryPIpe (on page 420)
ForWetPipe (on page 421)
ShowInsulationWeight (on page 421)
ShowWetWeight (on page 421)
ForDryPipe
Controls which centre-of-gravity calculations are done for dry (empty) pipe. Calculated values
can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities, or output in a Weight/CofG
summary report.
Not Required - Centre-of-gravity for dry pipe not required.
Calc C of G - Calculate centre-of-gravity for dry pipe.
Calc C of G with Insulation - Calculate centre-of-gravity for insulated dry pipe.
Calc C of G with and without Insulation - Calculate centre-of-gravity for dry pipe and
insulated dry pipe.
Defines
OS 82 Pos 4
420
ForWetPipe
Controls which centre-of-gravity calculations are done for wet (full) pipe. Calculated values can
then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities or output in a Weight/CoG
summary report.
Not Required - Centre-of-gravity for wet pipe not required.
Calc C of G - Calculate centre-of-gravity for wet pipe.
Calc C of G with Insulation - Calculate centre-of-gravity for insulated wet pipe.
Calc C of G with and without Insulation - Calculate centre-of-gravity for wet pipe and
insulated wet pipe.
Defines
OS 82 Pos 5
PerPipeLine
Controls whether the centre-of-gravity and weight calculations are per pipeline or per
drawing/spool.
Enabled must also be set to True.
True - Calculations are per pipeline.
False - Calculations are per drawing/spool.
Defines
OS 82 Pos 1
See Also
ShowInsulationWeight
Controls whether insulation weight is calculated. Insulation weight can then be output on the
drawing using text positioning facilities or in a Weight/CofG summary report.
True - Calculate insulation weight.
False - Suppress the calculation of Insulation weight.
Defines
OS 82 Pos 3
ShowWetWeight
Controls whether wet (full) weight is calculated. Wet weight can then be output on the drawing
using text positioning facilities or in a Weight/CofG summary report.
True - Calculate wet weight.
False - Suppress calculation of wet weight.
Defines
OS 82 Pos 2
421
Supplementary.DataFiles Object
The Supplementary.DataFile object contains a collection of options that are used to store the
names of the input files used by ISOGEN. For more information, see Supplementary.DataFiles
ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 422).
Count (on page 451)
Count
Displays the number of data files--input files to be read by ISOGEN--currently defined in the
style.
Supplementary.DataFiles ISOGENFiles Collection

Provides the names of input and output data files ISOGEN uses in various functions. For
example, ISOGEN can calculate weights of components if a data file containing weight
information is available.
FileType (on page 422)
FilePath (on page 423)
FileText (on page 477)
See Also
FileType
Double-click in the FileType data box and then use the FileType list to select the type of input
data file. You can choose from the following:
ASCII-SYMBOLS (on page 423)
ASCII version of the ISOGEN symbol file.
BENDING-DATABASE-FILE (see
"Supplementary.BendingReport Object" on
page 419)
Bending, cutting and hole information file.
BINARY-SYMBOLS (on page 424)
Binary version of the ISOGEN symbol file.
BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE (on page 424)
Bolting information file.
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (on
page 424)
Contains detailed information related to individual components.
FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE (on page 425) Defines the content and structure of other files that form part of the
Component Information facilities.
422
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE (on page 427)
Contains weights of insulation on a bore / unit length basis for each

Insulation specification.
PROJECT-MATERIAL-DATA (on page 428)
System specified.
PROJECT-MATERIAL-MANAGER (on page

428)
System specified.
PROJECT-PIPELINE (on page 429)
System specified.
REMARKS (on page 431)
Remarks data file.

OPTION-SWITCH-LONG
User alternative control files.
DRAWING-DEFINITION
POSITIONED-TEXT
ALTERNATIVE-TEXT
User now have the option of specifying an alternative file (in the
Supplementar. DataFiles).
MATERIAL-LIST-DEFINITION
WELDING-DEFINITION
TITLE-BLOCK
SPECIAL-INSTRUMENTS
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY (on page 431)
Contains the specific gravity values for pipeline fluid or gas contents.
FilePath
Defines the file path.
49. Double-click the FilePath box.
FileText
51. Double-click the FileText box.
52. In the text editor that displays, edit the data as necessary.
53. Click File > Update to save your changes.
To close the text editor without saving your changes, click File > Cancel.
File Types
ASCII-SYMBOLS
Contains definitions of the user-defined ISOGEN symbols, such as new and re-defined SKEYS.
Information in this file is used to override default ISOGEN behavior when plotting shapes in the
isometric drawing to represent components in the pipeline.
This item points to the ASCII (human-readable) form of the symbol data. It can be created using
the ISOGEN Symbols editor software.
423

BINARY-SYMBOLS
Contains definitions of the user-defined ISOGEN symbols, such as new and re-defined SKEYS.
Information in this file is used to override default ISOGEN behavior when plotting shapes in the
Isometric drawing to represent components in the pipeline.
This item points to the BINARY (computer-readable) form of the symbol data. It can be created
using the ISOGEN Symbols editor software.
BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE
Contains the look up data to allow ISOGEN to produce reports on the bolted connections in the
pipeline. For a description of the contents of this file, see FDF BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT (on
page 431).
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE
For each component entry, the COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (CIF) holds the following
items of information:
Design contractor's item code (the Item code in the input Piping data file).
Main and secondary component bores.
Main and secondary Thickness/Ratings.
Fabricator's item code.
Fabricator's material description.
Component weight.
This is the maximum amount of information that can be held for each component. What actually
appears depends upon what facilities are actually being used.
The structure/layout of the CIF file is defined by the COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE
Section of the FUNCTION DEFINITION FILE.
CIF Rules Summary

54. Weight data in the CIF takes precedence over weights in the piping data file. However, in
the event of missing values, SmartPlant Spoolgen can supplement the data in the CIF by
searching the Piping data file.
55. If the CoG facility is to be used, then component weight information must be available in
either the CIF or the piping data files.
56. Several ITEM-CODE-IDENTIFIER entries can be made in the CIF to cater to a variety of
different Design Contractor or Fabricator item codes. The actual ones to be used are
specified in the COMPONENT- INFORMATION-SELECTION section of the FDF file.
57. If you want to handle projects with Metric bore piping data files and Imperial bore piping
data files, two sets of N.S. and N.S.SEC information can be included in a CIF, with both
projects sharing the one CIF. However, two separate FDFs are required to specify the
required N.S. to be used on a particular project.
424

Item Codes in the CIF
Item codes for components in the CIF can be constructed (and specified) in two different ways,
as outlined below.
58. In the form of unique codes with built-in bore information:
E.g.
E-90-CS1-40:3 - this is an elbow of 3" bore
E-90-CS1-40:4 - this is the same elbow, but of 4" bore
R-C-CS1-40:4X3 - this is a concentric reducer of bore 4" X 3".
This type of Item code does not need N.S. and N.S.SEC data fields to specify the bore
information because this is built-in to the Item code.
59. Codes having separate bores:
E.g.
E-90-CS1-40
R-C-CS1-40
This type of Item code does need N.S. and N.S.SEC data fields to completely identify the
component.
There are no rules as to whom should use which of the two types of item code construction.
Some Design contractors use the first type.
See Also
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE Section (on page 433)
FUNCTION DEFINITION FILE. (see "FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE" on page 425)
FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE
The function definition file (FDF) provides the following functions:
60. It defines the units for:
Lengths
Weights
Nominal sizes
61. It defines the content and structure of other files that form part of the component information
facilities, namely:
COMPONENT INFORMATION FILE (CIF) (see "COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE"
on page 424)
INSULATION WEIGHT FILE (IWF) (see "INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE" on page 427)
SPECIFIC GRAVITY FILE (SGF) (see "SPECIFIC-GRAVITY" on page 431)
62. Through a system of cross-reference pointers in the
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION Section, (see
"COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION Section" on page 436) it defines the functions
of the various columns of data in the COMPONENT INFORMATION FILE (see
"COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE" on page 424) .
425

63. Bend Radius (see "MISC-DEFINITIONS Section" on page 437) identification.
64. The format of the Weight and C of G summary file (see "WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE
Section" on page 442) .
65. Definition of IDF changes (see "IDF-REVISIONS Section" on page 436) - where nominated
IDF record types can have their normal use either changed or deleted.
66. The format of the
Bolting output (see "BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT" on page 431)
Pipeline attribute file (see "PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE" on page 427)
HeatTreatment/NDE file (see "HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE" on page 426)
Site Assembly report (see "SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT" on page 438)
Spool attribute file (see "SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE" on page 441)
The FDF has several sections, each having a keyword identifier
UNITS-DEFINITION (see "UNITS-DEFINITION Section" on page 441)
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (see "COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE Section" on
page 433)
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION (see
"COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION Section" on page 436)
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE (see "INSULTATION-WEIGHT-FILE Section" on page 437)
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE (see "SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE Section" on page 438)
MISC-DEFINITIONS (see "MISC-DEFINITIONS Section" on page 437)
WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE (see "WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE Section" on page
442)
IDF-REVISIONS (see "IDF-REVISIONS Section" on page 436)
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT (on page 431)
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (on page 427)
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE (on page 426)
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT (on page 438)
SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (on page 441)
Each of these sections has its own list of data inputs.
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE
This FDF section defines the format of the HeatTreatment/NDE file, which must be defined in
the Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles collection.
The section heading HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE is followed by the following identifiers and
associated data:
DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the
HeatTreatment/NDE attribute file. (Optional).
IGNORE_CHARACTER data - Where data is any character that should be ignored when
the software is extracting data for the HeatTreatment/NDE attribute file if it is a delimited file.
(Optional).
426
Data Items - The data items are the -900 to -999 series text type record identifiers, followed
by either start-col,. end-col,. or position in file dependent upon whether a delimiter character
is set. The data after the ! is a comment for user information, as shown in the following
example:
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE
DELIMITER-CHARACTER ,
-950 2 ! PWHT N.S. RANGE
-951 3 ! PWHT TEMPERATURE
-952 4 ! PREHEAT N.S RANGE
-953 5 ! PREHEAT TEMPERATURE
-954 6 ! % RT
-955 7 ! % MT
-956 8 ! % PT
-957 9 ! % BHN
See Also
Supplementary.Datafiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 422)
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE
Contains weights of insulation on a bore/unit length basis for each insulation specification. This
is needed if Insulation weights are to be calculated and output.
CAL199
1/2
1.04
CAL199
3/4
1.04
CAL199
1
1.04
CAL199
1.1/4 1.04
CAL199
1.1/2 1.19
CAL199
2
1.49
CAL199
2.1/2 1.63
OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE
You can specify an OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE file, which can contain specific values for
particular option switches:
130 6
139 12
The switches in the previous example override any value output by I-Configure. Alternatively,
switch positions can be specified using a * to indicate an unchanged switch position.
For example, to set switch 1 position 3 to 4, type the following in the file:
1 4**
Likewise, to set switch 10 position 5 to 1, and position 2 to 3, type the following:
10 1**3*
427

PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE
This FDF section defines the format of the Pipeline attributes file, which must be defined in the
Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles collection. The section heading
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE is followed by the following identifiers and associated data.
DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the Pipeline
attribute file. (Optional).
the program is extracting data for the Pipeline attribute file if it is a delimited file. (Optional).
The data items are the -900 to -999 series text type record identifiers, followed by either
start-col. end-col. or position in file dependent upon whether a delimiter character is set. The
data after the ! is a comment for user information.
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE
DELIMITER-CHARACTER ,
-900 1 ! LINE REF.
-901 2 ! P-ID FROM
-902 3 ! P-ID TO
-903 4 ! UNIT NO.
-904 5 ! SERVICE CODE
-905 6 ! PAINT CODE
-906 7 ! OPERATING TEMP.
-907 8 ! DESIGN TEMP.
-908 9 ! OPERATING PRESSURE
-909 10 ! DESIGN PRESSURE
-910 11 ! TEST PRESSURE
-911 12 ! TEST TYPE
-912 13 ! INSULATION THKS.
-913 14 ! HEAT TRACING
-914 15 ! INSULATION CODE
-915 16 ! DESIGN CODE
-916 17 ! MATERIAL
If the pipeline attribute mechanism is being used, do not add the same record to the
project defaults. Doing so overwrites the data when the isometric is being created by the data in
the Pipeline attributes file.
See Also
Project Defaults (see "Project Defaults Tab (Project Defaults Dialog Box)" on page 102)
PROJECT-MATERIAL-DATA
The file contains data to add to, or override the information in the SystemMaterialData.xml file.
This defines the available component types, SKEYs, PCF data and groups (and the mapping
between them) for use in other software, such as SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant
Spoolgen.
This item only needs to be set on one of the mandatory import styles such as SGImport or
ISImport - if such a file has been created for use on a particular project.
428

PROJECT-MATERIAL-MANAGER
The file contains data that adds to or overrides the information in the
SystemMaterialManager.xml file. This defines the attributes available for materials used in
other software. This item only needs to be set on one of the mandatory import styles such as
SGImport or ISImport - if such a file has been created for use on a particular project.
PROJECT-PIPELINE
The file contains data that adds to or overrides the information in the SystemPOD.xml file. This
defines the attributes available for different objects, such as pipelines, components, and welds,
that are used in other products.
By default, this item is set on the mandatory SGImport and ISImport styles delivered with
SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen respectively. This setting should not normally
be changed.
REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION
ISOGEN can be configured to display the coordinates of nominated points in the pipeline
relative to a reference plane, rather than as absolute values. The nominated points are indicated
by the presence of LOCATION-POINT entries in the PCF. The reference plane can be a set of
steel columns and floor levels in a process plant, or it can be a set of decks and bulkheads in a
ship.
The reference planes are defined in a file and properties of this object are used to control how
ISOGEN behaves when plotting the location points. A location point table can be defined and
plotted on the isometric drawing. Optionally, location points can be shown with coordinates.
Six AlternateText numbers have been assigned to output relative directions.
-443 ^ + ? (used for positive relative position in e/w plane).
-444 ^ - ? (used for negative relative position in e/w plane).
-445 ^ + ? (used for positive relative position in n/s plane).
-446 ^ - ? (used for negative relative position in n/s plane).
-447 ^ + ? (used for positive relative position in u/d plane).
-448 ^ - ? (used for negative relative position in u/d plane).
^ is substituted with the reference plane name.
? is substituted with the distance from the reference plane.
An AlternateText record has been assigned to be output as a delimiter text between the relative
direction and its relative position.
429

-449 = (default setting)
449 AlternateText set to blank only outputs the relative position.
See Also
Supplementary.ReferencePlanes Object (on page 470)
430

REMARKS
The Remarks file contains a set of texts (remarks) that can be associated with components in
the pipeline by setting the Remark property. The file has the following format:
Remark# Remark
1 Remark1
2 Remark2
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY
Contains the specific gravity values for pipeline fluid or gas contents. Each pipeline in the project
needs to have an entry in this file if the weight of full--or wet weight--pipelines are required to be
output.
4"-DDE-4325
1.1
4"-ARR-6000
1.0
6"-ASC-6900
1.2
FDF Sections
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT
This FDF section defines the format of the output for Bolted connections on the Erection
operations list.
The section heading BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT is followed by the following three sub-section
headings, each of which has its own data items:
BOLTING-INFO-CONTROLS
List - (MANDATORY) The form of list to be output, either:
CONTINUOUS-DOWN
CONTINUOUS-UP
Start Position - (MANDATORY) Information to identify the START - POSITION for the
output of the bolting Information (where X pos and Y pos are input in mm--real (one decimal
place) or integer, such as 225, or 225.0, or 225.5).
START-POSITION X pos Y pos
Vertical Spacing - (MANDATORY) The vertical spacing required between each horizontal
line of text on the bolting information list (where value is input in mm--real (one decimal
place) or integer, such as 6, 6.0, or 6.2).
VERTICAL-SPACING value
Max Number of Lines - (MANDATORY) The maximum number of output lines that can fit
on the backing sheet (where the value is an integer number).
MAXIMUM-ENTRIES value
Text Height - The height of the characters in the text to be output on the bolting information
list (where value is real (one decimal place) or integer, such as 2, 2.0, or 2.3_)
TEXT-HEIGHT value (in mm)
Drawing Layer - (OPTIONAL) Identification of the drawing layer for outputting the text on to
(where value is an integer number that is valid for the graphics system being used).
DRAWING-LAYER value
Text Thickness (Weight) - (OPTIONAL) Identification of the text thickness (weight) for all
output text to the bolting information list (where value is an integer number that is valid for
the graphics system being used).
TEXT-THICKNESS value
431

BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT - - - - - - -
Section Header
BOLTING-INFO-CONTROL
CONTINUOUS-DOWN
START-POSITION
450.0
106.0
VERTICAL-SPACING
4.0
TEXT-HEIGHT
2.5
MAXIMUM-ENTRIES
12
DRAWING-LAYER
16
TEXT-THICKNESS
2
BOLTING-DATA-ITEMS
BOLT-SET NO - Bolted connection number - generated by the system.
N.S. - Nominal size at bolted connection. Output in this format: - 4" = 040.
BOLT-UP-TYPE - One of these values from the related piping specification entry in the
bolting information file (-146 type).
HT HW MW NW
BOLT-DIA - Diameter of the bolts used for the flanged connection. Taken from the 115 bolt
record in the IDF. Output in this format: - " = 050 " = 007 1" = 010.
BOLT-QUANTITY - Number of bolts required for the flanged connection. Taken (two digits)
from the 115 bolt record in the IDF.
TENSION-A: Any value set in the BIF (-146) file against the relevant piping specification
/ size combination.
TENSION-B: Any value found to go into relevant column on operations list.
TORQUE-SETTING
Each of the previous is followed by the X position for location on the drawing frame.
BOLTING-INFO-DATA-ITEMS
'BOLT-SET-NO'
450.0
'N.S.'
463.0
'BOLT-UP-TYPE'
486.0
'BOLT-DIA'
504.0
'BOLT-QUANTITY'
522.0
'TENSION-A'
540.0
'TENSION-B'
558.0
'TORQUE-SETTING
576.0
BOLTING-INFO-FILE
432
'PIPINGSPEC
Start Col
End Col
MINN.S.
Start Col
End Col
MAXN.S.
Start Col
End Col
BOLTUPTYPE
Start Col
End Col
TENSIONA
Start Col
End Col
TENSIONB
Start Col
End Col
TORQUESETTING
Start Col
End Col

Where Start Col and End Col indicate the extremities of each data column in the file.
MINN.S. and MAX-N.S. - Must be stated in the Units specified at the top of the FDF file.
BOLTUPTYPE - Must be one of the following:
HT = Hydraulic Tensioner
HW = Hydraulic Wrench
MW = Manual Torque Wrench
NW = Non Mandatory (Hand Tightening)
TENSION-A, TENSIONB or TORQUESETTING All entries on the list are triggered by the presence of a Bolt Record (-115 type) in the IDF
or the attribute BOLT in a PCF.
Each bolted connection is indicated on the isometric using the following properties:
The site assembly uses AText -478, default J to prefix the flange assembly identification (J1 or
JA).
Considering the following example:
BOLTINGINFOFILE
PIPINGSPEC
1
12
MINN.S.
15 20
MAXN.S.
23 29
BOLTUPTYPE
32 33
TENSIONA
35 45
TENSIONB
50 60
TORQUESETTING
65 75
See Also
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT (on page 438)
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE Section
This FDF Section provides a cross-reference to entries in the Component Information File (CIF)
by defining the layout and content of that file.
The section heading COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE is followed by the following identifiers
and associated data.
ITEM-CODE-IDENTIFIER
N.S.
N.S.SEC
N.S.THIRD
N.S.THICKNESS/RATING
N.S.SEC.THICKNESS/RATING
N.S.WALL-THICKNESS
N.S.SEC.WALL-THICKNESS
DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT-WEIGHT
COMPONENT-CONTENT-WEIGHT
EQUIVILANT-INSULATION-LENGTH
N.S.CONVERSION-CODE
433

RADIUS-DIAMETERS
RADIUS-MM
RADIUS-INCH
DETAILED-SKETCH
INFORMATION-NOTE
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 (-190 tom -199)
MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE10 (-80 to -89)
User Defined Names matching those used in the PCF file
DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the Component
Information File (see "COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE" on page 424).
Each of the following is followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending on
whether a delimiter character is set.
FDF Identifier
Used For
Used For
ITEM-CODE-IDENTIFIER
1) Design contractors item code.
2) Fabricator's item code.
2) Fabricator's item code.
434
N.S.
The main bore of a component specified in accordance with the

UNITS-BORE Identifier in the
UNITS-DEFINITION section of the
FDF.
The main bore of a component - specified in

accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in
the UNITS-DEFINITION section of the FDF.
N.S.SEC
The secondary bore of a component The secondary bore of a component - specified

- specified in accordance with the
in accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in
FDF.
N.S.THIRD
A third bore of a component specified in accordance with the

FDF.
A third bore of a component - specified in

accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in
N.S.THICKNESS/RATING
Thickness/Rating for the main bore

of a component.
Thickness/Rating for the main bore of a

component.
N.S.SEC.THICKNESS/RATIN
G
Thickness/Rating for the secondary

bore of a component.
Thickness/Rating for the secondary bore of a

component.
N.S.OUTSIDE-DIAMETER
The outside diameter of the main

bore of the component.
The outside diameter of the main bore of the

component.
N.S.SEC.OUTSIDE-DIAMETE
R
The outside diameter of the

secondary bore of the component.
The outside diameter of the secondary bore of

the component.
N.S.WALL-THICKNESS
The wall thickness of the main bore

of the component.
The wall thickness of the main bore of the

component.
N.S.SEC.WALL-THICKNESS
The wall thickness of the secondary

bore of the component.
The wall thickness of the secondary bore of the

component.
DESCRIPTION
Fabricator's Material descriptions.
Fabricator's Material descriptions.
COMPONENT-WEIGHT
The weight of a component - in the

weight units specified in accordance
with the UNITS-WEIGHT Identifier
in the UNITS- DEFINITION section
of the FDF.
The weight of a component - in the weight units

specified in accordance with the
UNITS-WEIGHT Identifier in the UNITSDEFINITION section of the FDF.
FDF Identifier
Used For
Used For
COMPONENT-CONTENT-WE The weight of the components

IGHT
water volume specified in
accordance with the
UNITS-WEIGHT Identifier in the
UNITS- DEFINITION section of the
FDF. For PIPE the weight specified
heres the weight per unit length for
the length units specified in the
UNITS-LENGTH Identifier in the
FDF.
The weight of the components water volume

specified in accordance with the
UNITS-WEIGHT Identifier in the UNITSDEFINITION section of the FDF. For PIPE the
weight specified heres the weight per unit length
for the length units specified in the
UNITS-LENGTH Identifier in the
UNITS-DEFINITION section of the FDF.
EQUIVILANT-INSULATION-LE Used to equate the component

NGTH
insulation weight to a length based
weight. Values here are the
equivalent length of insulation in
accordance with the weight and
length units in the UNITS- LENGTH
and UNITS-WEIGHT Identifiers in
the UNITS- DEFINITION section of
the FDF.
Used to equate the component insulation weight

to a length based weight. Values here are the
equivalent length of insulation in accordance
with the weight and length units in the UNITSLENGTH and UNITS-WEIGHT Identifiers in the
UNITS- DEFINITION section of the FDF.
N.S.CONVERSION-CODE
This is used where the N.S. and

N.S. Header output on the Weld list
and Weld summary outputs is to be
replaced by a user supplied code.
This is used where the N.S. and N.S. Header

output on the Weld list and Weld summary
outputs is to be replaced by a user supplied
code.
RADIUS-DIAMETERS
Bend radius specified as a number

of diameters.
Bend radius specified as a number of diameters.
RADIUS-MM
Bend radius specified in mm.
RADIUS-INCH
DETAILED-SKETCH
Detail sketch file name.
Detail sketch file name.
INFORMATION-NOTE
Information note name.
Information note name.
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1
to
Data for Component attributes.
Data for Component attributes.
MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to
MATERIAL- ATTRIBUTE10
Data for Material attributes.
Data for Material attributes.
User-defined names matching

those used in the PCF file.
Data for user-defined names.
Data for user-defined names.
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10
The actual number of these data items present will depend upon which of the available
facilities are being used.
The maximum width of the file is 500 characters and any characters outside this limit are
ignored.
435

COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION Section
This FDF section provides a link between the Design contractor's item code that appears in the
Piping data file and the location of the corresponding entry for that component in the
COMPONENT INFORMATION-FILE. (see "COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE" on page 424)
This FDF section defines:
Design Contractors Item Code
Alternative Item Code
Alternative Description
The section heading COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION is followed by the following
Identifiers:
ITEM-CODE-INPUT data
ITEM-CODE-OUTPUT data
DESCRIPTION data
Where data is either a start column or file position, dependant upon whether the Component
Information file is a delimited file or not.The minimum requirement in this section is the Input
Item code:
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION
(section identifier)
ITEM-CODE-INPUT 1
Alternatively, if Item Code Transposition and Material Description Substitution were being
used, the file would look like this:
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION
(section identifier)
ITEM-CODE-INPUT 1
ITEM-CODE-OUTPUT 51
DESCRIPTION 76
Or for a Delimited file.
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION (section identifier)
ITEM-CODE-INPUT
1
ITEM-CODE-OUTPUT
7
DESCRIPTION
10
436

IDF-REVISIONS Section
The IDF-REVISIONS FDF section allows you to delete or change the meaning of the numeric
record identifiers that are present in all IDFs in order to make them fully compatible with
ISOGEN. This facility is particularly useful to those customers who use the Component
Information facility, but who are handling non-standard Alias IDFs, such as IDFs generated by
PDMS.
The IDF-REVISIONS section heading is followed by one or several of these entries, depending
on what manipulation of records needs to be performed:
DELETE-RECORD data - Where data = any invalid record number that is to be ignored.
CHANGE-RECORD data1 data2 - Where data1 = any invalid record number and data2=
the replacement record number for data1.
REDEFINED-SKEY data1 data2 - Where data 1 is the SKEY in the IDF file and data2 is the
SKEY to be used instead.
The previous examples are for illustrative purposes only--do not use them. If you
need assistance, contact Intergraph Support.
IDF-REVISIONS
DELETE-RECORD -900
CHANGE-RECORD 707 877
REDEFINED-SKEY LWWN FLWN
INSULTATION-WEIGHT-FILE Section
This FDF section provides a cross reference to entries in the insulation weight file (IWF) by
defining the layout and content of that file.
The INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE section heading can be followed by the following identifiers
and associated data:
DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the insulation
weight file, as shown in the following example:
DELIMITER-CHARACTER :
INSULATION-SPECIFICATION 1
N.S. 2
INSULATION-WEIGHT 3
Start-col. End-col. - Position in the file dependent upon whether a delimiter character is set,
as shown in the following example:
INSULATION-SPECIFICATION 1 14
N.S. 15 24
INSULATION-WEIGHT 25 34
437

MISC-DEFINITIONS Section
This FDF section is for facilities that do not warrant their own separate section. Currently, it is
only used to define BEND RADIUS values.
The input structure in this FDF section is a section heading:
MISC-DEFINITIONS
followed by the bend radius definition:
BEND-RADIUS data units
where
data = the pipe bend radius.
units = Inch or mm, when radius is a value, and D when the radius is a number of pipe
diameters.
Consider the following:
MISC-DEFINITIONS
BEND-RADIUS 5 D
Other typical data inputs are:
BEND-RADIUS 3 D
BEND-RADIUS 5.5 D
BEND-RADIUS 12 INCH
BEND-RADIUS 18.5 INCH
BEND-RADIUS 220 MM
BEND-RADIUS 1250 MM
Bend radius information is used by both the CofG and weights facilities.
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE Section
This FDF section provides a cross reference to entries in the specific gravity file (SGF) by
defining the layout and content of that file.
The SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE section heading is followed by the following identifiers and
associated data.
DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the specific
gravity file .
PIPELINE-REFERENCE - Followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending
on whether a delimiter character is used.
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY - Followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending on
whether a delimiter character is used.
Start col. end col. Example
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE
PIPELINE-REFERENCE
1 20
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY
21 30
Delimiter Example
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE
DELIMITER-CHARACTER :
PIPELINE-REFERENCE
1
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY
2
438

SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT
This FDF section defines the format of the output for the Site assembly report.
The section heading SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT is followed by two sub-section headings:
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-COLUMN-HEADINGS - The column headings are arranged
and spaced out just as they are required to appear in the output report file, as shown in the
following example:
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-COLUMN-HEADINGS
LINEREF DRG ASSY NS BOLT NO ASSY
NO NO DIA OFF ATT1
The column headings look out of line in the example as the space character is
narrower than an actual character.
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-DATA-ITEMS - Permissible data items are:
Unique Name
IDF Record Number
PIPELINE-REFERENCE
-6
DRG
REVISION
-8
BATCH
-10
AREA
-10
PROJECT-IDENTIFIER
-9
PIPING-SPEC
-11
NOMINAL-CLASS
-12
NOMINAL-RATING
-12
DATE-DMY
-14
INSULATION-SPEC
-15
TRACING-SPEC
-16
PAINTING-SPEC
-17
PIPELINE-TEMP
-19
MISC-SPEC1
-41
MISC-SPEC2
-42
MISC-SPEC3
-43
MISC-SPEC4
-44
MISC-SPEC5
-45
BOLT-SET-NO
N.S.
BOLT-UP-TYPE
BOLT-DIA
BOLT-QUANTITY
TENSION-A
TENSION-B
439

Unique Name
IDF Record Number
TORQUE-SETTING
ATTRIBURE0 to ATTRIBUTE99
-600 to -699
ATTRIBUTE100 to ATTRIBUTE199
-900 to -999
ASSEMBLY-ATTRIBUTE1 to
ASSEMBLY- ATTRIBUTE10
-190 to -199

SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-DATA-ITEMS
'DRG'
10 L
'BOLT-SET-NO'
15 L
'N.S.'
21 L
'BOLT-DIA'
26 L
'BOLT-QUANTITY'
36 L
'ASSEMBLY-ATTRIBUTE1' 45 L
All the above is carried out in I-Configure, the Assembly attribute is set in the software
(SmartPlant Spoolgen) by selecting each bolt and then setting the value for the Assembly
attribute on that bolt.
The data items BOLT-UP-TYPE, TENSION-A, TENSION-B and TORQUE-SETTING
require the bolting info file (BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT section of FDF).
See Also
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT (on page 431)
440

SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE
This FDF section defines the format of the spool attribute file, which must be defined in the
Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles collection.
The SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE section heading is followed by the following identifiers and
associated data.
DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the Spool
attribute file. (Optional).
the program is extracting data for the Spool attribute file if it is a delimited file. (Optional).
The data items are -28, -91, -170 to -179, followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file,
depending on whether a delimiter character is set. This can be followed by an ! as a comment
for user information.
SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE
DELIMITER-CHARACTER ;
IGNORE-CHARACTER
-28
1
!
Spool Name
-170 2
!
Spool Attribute 1
-171 3
!
Spool Attribute 2
See Also
UNITS-DEFINITION Section
This FDF section defines the following units for data items listed in the
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (CIF):
Unit Length
Weight
Nominal Size (N.S.)
The section heading UNITS-DEFINITION is followed by the following identifiers and associated
data.
UNITS-BORE data - Where data = Inch or mm.
UNITS-LENGTH data - Where data = Foot (Weights / Foot) or Metre (Weights / Metre).
UNITS-WEIGHT data - Where data = Kgs. or Lbs.
UNITS-DEFINITION
UNITS-BORE INCH
UNITS-LENGTH METRE
UNITS-WEIGHT KGS
441

Input Data Formats
Inch bores - You can type 1/2, 0.1/2, 0.5, 1, 1.0, 1.1/2, 1.5, 2, 10 (1 1/2 is also permitted
for 1).
mm bores - You can type. 50 or 50.0.
Weights - You can type. 25 or 25.0
Units Selection Process

Usually, it is expected that the units' settings in OS 41 and the FDF match, as they should do.
However, if they do not match, the following sequence is followed.
Units for Weights & Lengths - The units specified in OS 41 are regarded as the master
units. For example, if OS 41 specifies weights in LBS but the weights in the CIF are kgs,
then all kgs values are converted to lbs. on output. A similar procedure is applied to length
units.
Units for N.S. - The unit settings in the FDF and Piping data file must be the same. A check
is performed between the N.S. units as defined by O.S.41 and the UNITS-BORE attribute in
the FDF. If they differ, the run is terminated with Error Code 35:1126.
WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE Section
This FDF Section defines the required content and layout structure of the weight and
centre-of-gravity printed output summary file.
The input definition for this section is in three separate parts:
SUMMARY-FILES-TITLES
The section heading SUMMARY-FILE-TITLES is followed by the title data. There are two
different types of title data information items:
67. Variable user-defined descriptive title text, such as PROJECT NO. or AREA REF.
68. Fixed data items. These are standard keywords or equivalent I/D numbers that are used to
describe a required data field. They are written inside single quote marks ( ' ' ) to distinguish
them from the variable user-defined title text.
The two types are used together to make-up the required file heading.
The following rules apply to the title data section SUMMARY-FILE-TITLES text:
Both user-defined descriptive title text and fixed keyword text are positioned in the output file
on the exact line and in the column position at which they are input.
User-defined descriptive title text can be written in upper- or lower- case characters and is
re-produced as specified in this respect.
Fixed data items can be defined either as keywords written in upper-case characters and
enclosed in single quotes, or can be represented by their standard text record numbers
(inside single quotes).
Empty lines for spacing purposes are created by the instruction Blank.
Use the characters ' ' in conjunction with the word PAGE to obtain page numbers. For
example, PAGE ' ' automatically produces PAGE 1, PAGE 2, and so on, at the top of each
printed output page.
442

SUMMARY-FILE-COLUMN-HEADINGS
The section heading SUMMARY-FILE-COLUMN-HEADINGS is followed by the column
headings data (this section is optional).
All column headings data are reported in the output file exactly as it is specified in the FDF. The
text should be positioned to suit the data items layout that follows it.
SUMMARY-FILE-DATA-ITEMS
The section heading SUMMARY-FILE-DATA-ITEMS is followed by the data item entries. Each
data item entry in this part of the FDF is input using either two, three, or five parameters,
depending on the type of data item being specified.
C of G with a vertical layout uses three parameters.
C of G with a horizontal layout uses five parameters.
All others including weight output use two parameters.
The first part is a keyword that must be enclosed in single quotes ( ' ' ).
Typical entries would appear like this:
Most keywords have an equivalent numeric identifier which can be used as an alternative to the
text. For example, the numeric equivalent of PIPELINE-REFERENCE is -6.
Numbers, when used, must also be enclosed by single quotes ' '.
Character justification letters.
L Left
R Right
N Number (the column position in this case is the decimal)
V Vertical output
443

For example:
E3252
N1020
EL -1566
H Horizontal output
For example:
E3252 N1020 EL -1566
V and H parameters are only used on C of G output data because this type of data has three
output values, not one, and their output layout direction must be specified. The V parameter
gives an automatic Vertical layout but where Horizontal justification is specified, extra starting
column information must be given one for each C of G output value, as shown in the following
example:
'COFG-POSITION-DRY' 44 58 72 L H
Data items available for output in the WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARYFILE.
Key Name
Equivalent I/D Number
AREA or BATCH
-10
-10
COFG-POSITION-DRY
-714
-714
COFG-POSITION-DRY+INSU
-715
-715
COFG-POSITION-WET
-716
-716
COFG-POSITION-WET+INSU
-717
-717
DATE
-14
-14
ERECTION-WEIGHT-DRG
-706
-706
ERECTION-WEIGHT-PIPELINE
-719
-719
FABRICATION-WEIGHT-DRG
-705
-705
FABRICATION-WEIGHT-PIPELINE
-718
-718
INSULATION-SPEC
-15
-15
OFFSHORE-WEIGHT-DRG
-707
-707
OFFSHORE-WEIGHT-PIPELINE
-720
-720
PIPELINE-REFERENCE
-6
-6
PIPING-SPEC
-11
-11
PROJECT-IDENTIFIER
-9
-9
REVISION
-8
-8
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY
-18
-18
SYSTEM-REFERENCE
-25
-25
TOTAL-DRY-WEIGHT-DRG
-704
-704
TOTAL-DRY-WEIGHT-PIPELINE
-711
-711
TOTAL-INSULATION-WEIGHT
-713
-713
DRG
444
Key Name
TOTAL-WET-WEIGHT
-712
-712
If a -143 Specific Gravity File (SGF) is present then values from that file will be used in preference to any
Specific Gravity value found in an IDF -18 record (see table above).
The name of the output C of G summary file is specified in I-Configure in the

Supplementary.ReportFiles ISOGENFiles collection (on page 475). Also, the properties on the
Supplementary.CentreOfGravity object (on page 420) in I-Configure control the data generated
for center of gravity.
Supplementary.DetailSketches Object
Specifies the characteristics of detail sketches on the isometric drawing.
Path (on page 446)
LabelLayer (on page 446)
LabelType (on page 446)
LabelX (on page 447)
LabelY (on page 447)
SketchHeight (on page 448)
SketchPosition (on page 449)
SketchWidth (on page 449)
PositionFix (on page 450)
NoteFormat (on page 450)
NoteHeight (on page 451)
445

NotePosition (on page 451)
NoteWidth (on page 451)
PositionFix (on page 450)
The Supplementary.DetailSketches object also contains the following group of options:
Local Sketches - Stores the properties for local detail sketches and information notes. For
more information, see Supplementary.DetailSketches LocalSketches Object (on page 451).
FileFormat
Sets the format of the detail sketch symbols. In most cases, this setting agrees with the drawing
output format.
The format of the detail sketch, information note and, drawing output, must be
consistent. If the FileFormat is DXF, then the NoteFormat and OutputFormat properties must
also be DXF. These properties change automatically whenever the OutputFormat or
TemplateFormat properties change.
See Also
NoteFormat (on page 450)
Path
Defines the full path to the detail sketch folder containing DXF data, or sets the location of a
DGN CEL file, which is a cell library.
Colour
Sets the drawing colour for the detail sketch. This value is expressed as an integer number
representing the colour number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or
AutoCAD).
LabelLayer
Specifies the layer on which the label text resides. For example, the label text in Detail A is the
letter A.
LabelType
Specifies whether you want sketches ordered alphabetically (A, B, C...) or numerically (1, 2,
3...).
Alpha - Order sketches alphabetically.
446
Number - Order sketches numerically.
LabelX
Provides the X-coordinate of the label text, relative to the bottom left corner of a sketch.
Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the
Options dialog box.
See Also
LabelY
Provides the Y-coordinate of the label text, relative to the bottom left corner of a sketch.
See Also
447
SketchHeight
Sets the height of user-generated sketches. This setting must be the same for all sketches.
in the Options dialog box.
See Also
448
SketchPosition
Defines the location of detail sketches on the isometric drawing.
Default - Plots detail sketches along the top of the drawing. The horizontal positioning of the
detail sketches is controlled by the North arrow setting. Under normal circumstances,
ISOGEN displays the sketches from right to left (Figure 1). However, if there is no North
arrow, the sketches are displayed from left to right (Figure 2), as shown in the figures below.
Fixed - Plots detail sketches along the top of the drawing from right to left, regardless of the
position of the North arrow.
Local - Plots detail sketches as close as possible to the related pipeline component.
Overflow - Overflows detail sketches to a separate sheet.
SketchWidth
Sets the width of user-generated sketches. Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number),
See Also
449
TextHeight
Specifies the size of the label text. Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number), depending
on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.
See Also
TextWeight
Controls the character thickness. Specify a value between 1 and 9. Used only for MicroStation.
TextFont
Specifies a font corresponding to a font entry in the .fif file.
PositionFix
This style setting is not used in the current version of the software.
NoteFormat
Specifies the format of informational notes, which refer to a pipeline, spool, or component in the
drawing.
The format of the detail sketch, information note and, drawing output, must be consistent.
If the FileFormat is DXF, then the NoteFormat and OutputFormat properties must also be
DXF. These properties change automatically when the OutputFormat or TemplateFormat
properties change.
See Also
450
NoteHeight
Specifies the height of the informational notes. Type a value (as a real number) in mm or inches,
See Also
NotePosition
Specifies the location of informational notes.
Default - Plots notes along the bottom of the drawing.
Local - Plots notes along the bottom of the isometric, near the reference.
OverFlow - In the case of duplicate occurrences, only one copy of each unique information
note is output on a single isometric.
NoteWidth
Specifies the height of the informational notes. Type a value (as a real number) in mm or inches,
See Also
Supplementary.DetailSketches LocalSketches Object

The Supplementary.DetailSketches LocalSketches object contains a collection called
LocalSketches. For more information, see Supplementary.DetailSketches LocalSketches
LocalSketch Collection (on page 452).
Count (on page 451)
Count
Displays the number of local detail sketches/information notes in the LocalSketch collection.
451

Supplementary.DetailSketches LocalSketches LocalSketch Collection
Stores the properties for local detail sketches and information notes.
ID (on page 452)
Height (on page 452)
Width (on page 452)
See Also
ID
Specifies the detail sketch or Information note string identifier. The following are examples:
Detail Sketch - SK1.dxf
Information Note - note_G.dxf or note_S.dxf
For AutoCAD and SmartSketch, the file format extension must be shown in the ID, such as
SK1.dxf or SK1.igr.
For MicroStation, specify just the name of the sketch as found in the graphic cell library, as
in SK1.
Inclusion of _G - as in GenNote_G.dxf or GenNote_G - as part of the information note
name signifies a general note, which is output on every sheet.
Inclusion of _S - as in SpecNote_S.dxf or SpecNote_S - signifies a specific note, which is
only output on the sheet on which the component having this particular note attached is
output.
Height
Specifies a single value for the height of the detail sketch / Information note in mm.
Width
Defines the width of the detail sketch/information note. Enter a single value in mm.
LabelX
Specifies the horizontal cross-reference position measured from the bottom left corner of the
detail sketch in mm.
See Also
LabelY
Specifies the vertical cross-reference position measured from the bottom left corner of the detail
sketch in mm.
See Also
452

TextHeight
Sets the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the
See Also
Supplementary.DwgInfoFile Object
The Supplementary.DwgInfFile object stores the definitions for the Drawing Information Cross
Reference output file in the DwgInfoFile collection.
Path (on page 453)
Count (on page 453)
Enabled
Controls whether a file is created.
True - File is created.
False - File is not created.
Path
Specifies the full path location and filename of the appropriate file. Double-click in the Path data
box, and then use the Browse button to navigate to the file.
HeaderLines
\ - Starts a new line.
| - Produces a vertical break.
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the material
list definition (MLD) file.
Count
Displays the number of columns in the Drawing Information Cross Reference file to be output.
453
Supplementary.DwgInfoFile TextColumns Collection

Stores the definitions of the data to be output to the Drawing Cross Reference summary report
file.
Start (on page 454)
See Also
AttributeName
Specifies the name of the attribute to be output to the drawing information file.
Justification
Start
Specifies the character position at which the attribute is output.
MaxChars
Defines the maximum number of characters to be output.
Comment
report file.
454
Supplementary.EquipmentTrim Object
Controls the various functions related to the generation of equipment trim (vessel trim) drawings
and associated material control files.
DataFile (on page 455)
MaterialFile (on page 455)
PartNos (on page 455)
IsometricOutputEnabled (on page 455)
NozzleIdentifier (on page 456)
NozzleIDEnclosure (on page 456)
ShowNozzleNominalSize (on page 456)
ShowNozzleCoords (on page 456)
DataFile
Specifies whether the information is for a single pipeline or multi-pipeline file.
One Pipeline per file - Use single pipeline type file (where there is only one set of header
records).
Multiple Pipelines per file - Use multiple pipeline type file (where there are multiple sets of
header records).
Defines
OS 52 Pos 3
MaterialFile
Controls the content of the material control file for equipment trims.
Accumulate Per Item - Relate all components to a single equipment item accumulated and
write to the material control file under a single pipeline entry. Equipment trim reference is
used as the Pipeline Reference for identification purposes.
Accumulate Per Nozzle - Keep components for each nozzle separate and write to the
material control file using the individual Pipeline Reference associated with each nozzle.
Defines
OS 52 Pos 2
PartNos
Controls the part number sequencing on the material list for equipment trim drawings.
Start at 1 per nozzle - Use single pipeline type file (where there is only one set of header
records).
Start at 1 per drawing - Use multiple pipeline type file (where there are multiple sets of
header records).
Defines
OS 52 Pos 1
455
IsometricOutputEnabled
Allows equipment trim data to create an isometric drawing.
True - Output isometric drawing and material list data
False - Output material list data only.
Defines
OS 52 Pos 4
NozzleIdentifier
Allows equipment nozzles to have an identifier associated with them.
Alphabetic - Assign alphabetic identifiers to equipment nozzles.
Numeric - Assign numeric identifiers to equipment nozzles.
None - Suppress assignment of identifiers to equipment nozzles.
Defines
OS 52 Pos 6
NozzleIDEnclosure
Specifies the enclosure shape used with equipment nozzle identifiers.
None - Use no enclosure.
Rectangular Ends - Enclose equipment nozzle identifiers in a rectangular-ended box.
Diamond Ends - Enclose equipment nozzle identifiers in a diamond-ended box.
Round Ends - Enclose equipment nozzle identifiers in a round-ended box.
Triangle - Enclose equipment nozzle identifiers in a triangular-shaped box.
Diamond - Enclose equipment nozzle identifiers in a diamond-shaped box.
Hexagonal Ends - Enclose equipment nozzle identifiers in an hexagonal-shaped box.
Circle - Enclose equipment nozzle identifiers in a circle.
Double Circler - Enclose equipment nozzle identifiers in a double circle.
Ellipse - Enclose equipment nozzle identifiers in an ellipse.
Defines
OS 52 Pos 7
ShowNozzleNominalSize
Controls the output of nominal size data at nozzle positions.
True - Display nominal size at nozzle positions.
False - Suppress display of nominal size at nozzle positions.
Defines
OS 52 Pos 8
456
ShowNozzleCoords
Controls output of equipment nozzle coordinates on the isometric drawing.
True - Output equipment nozzle coordinates on the isometric drawing.
False - Suppress output of equipment nozzle coordinates on the isometric drawing.

Defines
OS 122 Pos 2
Supplementary.Fonts Object
Controls the use of the ISOGEN font information file. If required, it can be used to turn off the
use of fonts in the ISOGEN output files.
By default, there is always a path to the supplementary fonts file. If one does not exist, for
example, you delete it, it is recreated automatically. However, if you set the Enabled switch, this
setting is persisted.
When importing a style, the Enabled property is set OFF before import starts, and only
resets if there was previously a FONT- INFORMATION-FILE (or IDF -152 record) reference in
the imported style.
Path (on page 458)
Enabled
Controls whether fonts are enabled.
True - Enable fonts..
False - Disable fonts.
457
Path
Specifies the full path location and filename for the ISOGEN font information file (.fif).
Supplementary.HeatTreatment Object
Sets options for heat treatment /NDE testing data.
Path (on page 458)
Text (on page 458)
Enabled
Controls whether a file is created.
Path
Specifies the filename and full path location to the heat treatment/NDE file.
Text
When you double-click the Text property box, the software opens the Edit Text dialog box, in
which you can type the data for heat treatment/NDE testing. This data is written to the data
definition file (DDF) when the Enabled property is set to True.
458

The data required is as follows:
69. The link between the piping data file and the data in the heat treatment / NDE file.
The form of this depends upon whether the heat treatment file is a delimited file or not.
h. Columnized style file:
ELEMENT1 'Data Identifier'
Start Pos
End pos
Start Pos
End pos
i. Delimited file:
'Data Field no'

'Data Field no'
In both cases a 'Data Identifier can be either:

i)
FIXED DATA IDENTIFIER
(PIPING SPEC)
(SERVICE / COMMODITY)
(BATCH)
etc
ii)
IDF RECORD No.
-10
-11
etc
iii)
ATTRIBUTE ID No.
-900 to -999
The Start Pos / End Pos or 'Data Field No.' entries are the location in the heat treatment /
NDE file of the required data items that are to be matched to the declared Data Identifier.
Any number of ELEMENTS can be used for matching up to a maximum of 10.
70. An optional selection based on nominal size.
The form of this depends upon whether the heat treatment file is a delimited file or not.
j. Columnized style file
N.S.-CHECK Start Pos End Pos Start Pos End Pos
or
N.S.-CHECK-WELD Start Pos End Pos Start Pos End Pos
k. Delimited file
N.S.-CHECK Data Field No. Data Field No.
N.S.-CHECK-WELD Data Field No. Data Field No.
In both cases the first data nominated must be the N.S. information, and the second - the
related data to be output.
Any number of N.S. - CHECK or N.S. - CHECK - WELD entries up to a maximum of 10.
Typical use of the N.S. - CHECK - WELD facility is for P.W.H.T. and PREHEAT
requirements in specific nominal sizes or size ranges only.
Whenever N.S. - CHECK or N.S. - CHECK - WELD is used, the N.S. information and any
related data must be in separate data fields.
459

N.S. information is restricted to only using the following characters.
<
Less than
>
Greater than
Equal to
18
Integer number representing a N.S. in either inches or mm.
Typical entries can be (all using inch bores):

= 54
Data only output if N.S. is 54.
> = 18
Data only output if N.S. is 18 or above.
> = 42 < = 48
Data only output if N.S. is 42 to 48 inclusive.
A combined data column to signal Y (for YES) N (for NO) or a N.S. entry can be used in
association with a related data column.
This would be done say P.W.H.T. information where the requirement was for a simple Y / N
indication in generated data files, but the actual P.W.H.T. temperature was required to be
output on any plotted isometric and the requirement for P.W.H.T. was also N.S. related.
Example of text entered in text box:
ELEMENT1
'PIPING-SPEC'
1
N.S.-CHECK
2
3
The section heading HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILEUSE- DEFINITION heading is
generated by I-Configure.
The corresponding entry in FDF:
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE (Delimited type file)
DELIMITE-CHARACTER
,
IGNORE-CHARACTER
-950 1
! Piping Specification
-951 2
! PWHT N.S. range
-952 3
! PWHT Temperature
-953 4
! Design Code
-954 5
! Service / Commodity
Supplementary.InstrumentSKEYS Object
The Supplementary.InstrumentSKEYS object contains a collection called InstrumentSKEYs,
which is used to store the SKEY of components to be treated as instruments. For more
information, see Supplementary.InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYs Collection (on page 460)
Count (on page 460)
Count
Displays the number of SKEYS to be treated as instruments, instead of their default type.
460
Supplementary.InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYs Collection

Specifies user-defined symbol keys.
ISKEYText (on page 461)
See Also
ISKEYText
Specifies a symbol key text string.
The Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYS collection contains a list of SKEYs
that ISOGEN treats as nstruments. This property holds one SKEY from that list.
See Also
Supplementary.InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYS Collection (on page 460)
Supplementary.NeutralFile Object
Controls the basic format and content of the Neutral report file.
Path (on page 461)
OutputCutPieces (on page 462)
GroupBy (on page 463)
RecordLength (on page 463)
Count (on page 463)
The Supplementary.NeutralFile object also contains the following groups of options:
Neutral File Output - Controls which groups of components are output in the Neutral report
file. For more information, see Supplementary.NeutralFile Output Object (on page 463)..
Neutral File Collection - Stores the content and format of each record to written to the
Neutral report. For more information, see Supplementary.NeutralFile NeutralFileColumns
Enabled
Controls creation of the Neutral report file. The default setting is FALSE.
True - Create the Neutral report file.
False - Suppress creation of the Neutral report file.
461
Path
Specifies the full path location and filename of the Neutral report file.
71. Double-click the Path box.
Do not include special characters in the Neutral report filename.
Append
Controls whether the file is opened in appended mode or overwrite mode. The default setting is
False.
FileFormat
Defines the format of the output file. The default setting is Fixed.
Delimited - Output a delimited file. Use the field separator defined by Delimiter (on page
462).
Delimiter
Defines the separator used between each record in the Neutral report file. Defining this option is
only necessary when FileFormat is set to Fixed. The possible characters are listed below. The
default setting is Semi Colon.
Tab
Comma (Field1,Field2,Field3)
Semi Colon (Field1;Field2;Field3)
HeaderLines
Controls the column header text in the report file. Specify the text string for the column header.
Make sure that the column headers match the column positions when you use this
option.
OutputCutPieces
Controls whether components are output grouped by cut piece. The default setting is False.
True - Output components to the report file grouped by cut piece.
False - Suppress grouping of components by cut piece. Each component has its own entry
in the Neutral report file.
To illustrate, consider the component grouping Pipe-Pulled Bend-Pipe. Because these
three components form a single cut piece, if OutputCutPieces is set to True, only one entry is
written to the Neutral report file. However, if OutputCutPieces is set to False, three entries
are written to the report file--one for each component.
462
GroupBy
Specifies how components are grouped in the Neutral report file. The default setting is Pipeline.
Pipeline - Group component output on a per pipeline basis.
Sheet - Group component output on a per sheet basis.
RecordLength
Defines the length of each record. This option is only applicable when FileFormat is set to
Fixed.
0 - Trim trailing white space from each record.
Value - Pad or truncate, as appropriate, to the number of characters specified. Type a real
number in the range of 1 to 9999.
Count
Displays the number of entries stored in the Supplemantary.NeutralFile NeutralFileColumns
collection (on page 465).
Supplementary.NeutralFile Output Object

Controls which groups of components are output in the Neutral report file.
Default (on page 463)
Bolts (on page 464)
Fittings (on page 464)
Flanges (on page 464)
Instruments (on page 465)
Miscellaneous (on page 465)
Pipe (on page 465)
Supports (on page 465)
Valves (on page 465)
Welds (on page 465)
463

Default
Controls the output of components in the Neutral report file.
Include - Output all components to the report file. This is the default setting.
Exclude - Suppress the output of all components.
This option implies all components. However, you can use the individual group type setting
to override Default. The table below illustrates the relationship between the Default setting
and the settings of the individual group types.
Attribute
Setting
Report File Output
Default
Include
Output all components.
Default
Bolts
Include
Exclude
Output all components except bolts.
Default
Flanges
Exclude
Include
Suppress output of all components except

flanges.
Penetration plates and pseudo-components, such as set on tees and taps, are not output to
the Neutral report file.
Bolts
Controls the output of bolt components in the Neutral report file. The default setting is Include.
Include - Output bolt components to the report file.
Exclude - Suppress the output of bolt components.
Inherit - Use the setting defined in Default (on page 463).
Fittings
Controls the output of fittings in the Neutral report file. The default setting is Include.
Include - Output fittings to the report file.
Exclude - Suppress the output of fittings.
Flanges
Controls the output of flange components in the Neutral report file. The default setting is
Include.
Include - Output flange components to the report file.
Exclude - Suppress the output of flange components.
Gaskets
Controls the output of gasket components in the Neutral report file. The default setting is
Include.
Include - Output gasket components to the report file.
Exclude - Suppress the output of gasket components.
464

Instruments
Controls the output of instrument components in the Neutral report file. The default setting is
Include.
Include - Output instrument components to the report file.
Exclude - Suppress the output of instrument components.
Miscellaneous
Controls the output of miscellaneous components in the Neutral report file. The default setting is
Include.
Include - Output miscellaneous components to the report file.
Exclude - Suppress the output of miscellaneous components.
Pipe
Controls the output of pipe components in the Neutral report file. The default setting is Include.
Include - Output pipe components to the report file.
Exclude - Suppress the output of pipe components.
Supports
Controls the output of supports in the Neutral report file. The default setting is Include.
Include - Output supports to the report file.
Exclude - Suppress the output of supports.
Valves
Controls the output of valve components in the Neutral report file. The default setting is Include.
Include - Output valve components to the report file.
Exclude - Suppress the output of valve components.
Welds
Controls the output of welds in the Neutral report file. The default setting is Include.
Include - Output welds to the report file.
Exclude - Suppress the output of welds.
465
Supplementary.NeutralFile NeutralFileColumns Collection

Stores the content and format of each record to be written to the Neutral report file.
The value in parentheses after the name is a count of how many definitions are stored in
the collection.
Group (on page 466)
Start (on page 466)
Context (on page 466)
Group
Specifies the component group output in the current report file record. Select a component
group in the list:
Default
Bolts
Fittings
Flanges
Gaskets
Instruments
Miscellaneous
Pipe
Supports
Valves
Welds
Enabled
Controls the display of data in the report file for the component group defined by the Group
setting.
True - Display component data for the specified group.
False - Suppress the display of component data for the specified group.
Start
MaxChars
Specifies the maximum number of characters allowed per column.
466

Context
Defines the mechanism by which Neutral file data is accessed. Acceptable values are:
POD
Pipeline
Component
Material
You must use the correct context and attribute name combination. If the combination
expressed by the Context and AttributeName settings does not exist, the report file displays a
blank value.
AttributeName
required attribute.
Supplementary.PipeLineAtts Object
Sets options in the PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION in the Data Definition file
(DDF).
Path (on page 468)
Text (on page 469)
The link between the pipeline and the data in the Pipeline attributes file, the format of which is
specified in the Function Definition File (FDF), is specified as follows:
RECORD-ID data1 data2

Where data1 specifies which IDF record is to be used as the key match field and data 2 is the
data record in the Pipeline Attributes file.
RECORD-ID -6 -900
In the previous example, it is the -6 record (pipeline reference) which is used to match the -900
in the pipeline attribute file. which should also be the pipeline reference.
FULL-REFERENCE data
Where FULL-REFERENCE means the Pipeline Reference in the IDF and data is the data
record in the Pipeline Attributes File, which corresponds to the Pipeline Reference.
FULL-REFERENCE -900
ELEMENTNo. Start Pos End Pos Attribute No.

ELEMENT1 Start Pos End Pos Attribute No.
Where Start Pos and End Pos are the positions in the Pipeline Reference of the required data
that will be used to look for a match in the Pipeline Attribute File.
467

Attribute No. is the -900 series Attribute ID that has been allocated to the particular element in
the Pipeline Attribute File, as shown in the following example of an actual pipeline reference (-6
record):
PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION
ELEMENT1 4 6
-902
ELEMENT2 8 9
-903
ELEMENT3 10 12 -904
Corresponding entry in FDF:
PIPELINE - ATTRIBUTE - FILE (Delimited type File)
DELIMITER - CHARACTER ,
IGNORE - CHARACTER
-900 1 ! P & ID From
-901 2 ! P & ID To
-902 3 ! Unit No.
-903 4 ! Service / Commodity
-904 5 ! Sequence No.
-905 6 ! Paint Code
Extracting a Service/Commodity Value from the Pipeline Reference

This information can be extracted from the Pipeline Reference by setting the following in the
DDF.
Section heading:
SERVICE/COMMODITY-DEFINITION
Followed by:
LOCATION-IN-PIPELINE-REF start pos end pos
Where Start Pos and End Pos are the positions in the Pipeline Reference (-6 record) of the
required Service/Commodity identifier
Using the previous example this would be:
SERVICE/COMMODITY-DEFINITION
LOCATION-IN-PIPELINE-REF 8 9
This identifier is available as a data item in both the Spool information file and the Site weld
information file.
Enabled
Controls whether a file is created or not.
True - Creates the file.
False - Does not create the file.
Path
Specifies the filename and full path location to the Pipeline attributes file.
468
Text
When you double-click the Text property box, the software opens the Edit Text box, in which
you can type in the data required for the PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION in
the data definition file (DDF). This data is written to the DDF when the Enabled property is set to
True.
The link can be specified either as:

RECORD-ID data1 data2
Where data1 specifies which IDF record is to be used as the key match field, and data2 is the
data record in the Pipeline Attributes file
RECORD-ID -6 -900
In the previous example, the -6 record (Pipeline Reference), which is used to match the -900 in
the Pipeline attributes file, is also used in the Pipeline Reference.
Or the link can be specified as:
FULL-REFERENCE data
Where FULL-REFERENCE means the Pipeline Reference in the IDF, and data is the data
record in the Pipeline attributes file, which corresponds to the Pipeline Reference.
FULL-REFERENCE -900
Elements are specified as follows:
In the previous example, Start Pos and End Pos are the positions in the Pipeline Reference of
the required data that is used to look for a match in the Pipeline attributes file.
Attribute No is the -900 series Attribute ID that has been allocated to the particular element in
the Pipeline attributes file.
Any number of elements can be used up to a maximum of 10.
469

Actual Pipeline Reference (-6 record)
ELEMENT1
ELEMENT2
ELEMENT3
4 6 -902
8 9 -903
10 12 -904
The PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION heading is generated by

I-Configure.
Corresponding entry in FDF:
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (Delimited type File)
DELIMITER-CHARACTER
,
IGNORE-CHARACTER
-900 1
! P & ID From
-901 2
! P & ID To
-902 3
! Unit No.
-903 4
! Service / Commodity
-904 5
! Sequence No.
-905 6
! Paint Code
See Also
Supplementary.ReferencePlanes Object
Sets up the data required for the output of location points on the isometric drawing.
Path (on page 471)
LocationPtStyle (on page 471)
CoordStyleAtLocationPts (on page 471)
CoordStyle (on page 472)
See Also
REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION (on page 429)
Enabled
Controls processing of the reference plane data.
True - Enable processing of the reference plane data.
False - Suppresses processing of the reference plane data.
470
Path
Specifies the filename and full path location to the reference plane file.
LocationPtStyle
Specifies the style used for location points on the isometric drawing.
Special Text Symbol (****) - Show a box containing ****.
Square Ended Box - Show a box containing the contents of AText nnn, such as AText
-471 LOCATION$POINT?
Defines
OS 123 Pos 4
CoordStyleAtLocationPts
Specifies the coordinate style used for location points.
None - Suppress the display of coordinates at location points.
World Coordinates - Show location point coordinates in world, or absolute, coordinates.
471
Relative Coordinates - Show location point coordinates in relative coordinates, with respect
to the nearest reference plane.
Defines
OS 66 Pos 7
CoordStyle
Specifies the reference plane coordinate style.
World Coordinates - Show coordinates in world, or absolute, coordinates.
Relative Coordinates - Show coordinates in relative coordinates with respect to the nearest
reference plane.
Defines
OS 66 Pos 7
472
Supplementary.RepeatFile Object
Controls what data is to be repeated from an ISOGEN run.
Path (on page 473)
ByPass (on page 473)
ComponentInfo (on page 473)
MatList (on page 474)
SplitPoints (on page 474)
SpoolID (on page 474)
StartPoint (on page 475)
WeldNos (on page 475)
Enabled
Controls whether repeatability return file is created.
True - Create the repeatability return file.
False - Suppress creation of the repeatability return file.
Path
Specifies the filename and full path location to the repeatability return file.
ByPass
Controls whether by-pass component re-ordering is done.
True - Re-ordering of components at by-pass closure points to be done.
False - No re-ordering of components at by-pass closure points.
Defines
OS 109 Pos 6
ComponentInfo
Controls whether and how component information is written to the repeatability return file.
Off - Component information not to be written to the repeatability return file.
With Numeric - For numeric component information to be written to the repeatability return
file.
With Alphabetic - For full alphanumeric component information to be written to the
repeatability return file. (Maximum of 4 characters).
Defines
OS 109 Pos 5
473
Content
Controls the type of repeatability return file output.
Standard - Default for standard repeatability return file type (FOR052) containing just a list
of successfully processed pipelines.
Original - For a repeatability repeatability return file containing the original repeat
information.
Revised - For a repeatability return file containing the original repeat information and new
records for spool information.
Original ASCII - ASCII version of Original.
Revised ASCII - ASCII version of Revised.
Defines
OS 109 Pos 1
MatList
Controls whether material list part number information is written to the repeatability return file.
True - Material list part number information to be written to the repeatability return file.
False - Material list part number information not to be written to the repeatability return file.
Defines
OS 109 Pos 8
SplitPoints
Controls whether split points are to be written to the repeatability return file.
True - Split point information to be written to the repeatability return file.
False - Split point information not to be written to the repeatability return file.
Defines
OS 109 Pos 3
SpoolID
Controls whether and how the SpoolID information is written to the repeatability return file.
Off - SpoolID information not to be written to the repeatability return file.
Numeric - SpoolID information to be written to the repeatability return file.
Alphabetic - For full alphanumeric SpoolID information to be written to the repeatability
return file. (Maximum of 4 characters).
Defines
OS 109 Pos 4
474
StartPoint
Controls whether the start point for data extraction is written to the repeatability return file.
True - Data extraction start point to be written to the repeatability return file.
False - Data extraction start point not to be written to the repeatability return file.
Defines
OS 109 Pos 2
WeldNos
Controls whether Weld number information is written to the repeatability return file.
True - Weld number information to be written to the repeatability return file.
False - Weld number information not to be written to the repeatability return file.
Defines
OS 109 Pos 7
Supplementary.ReportFiles Object
The Supplementary.ReportFiles object contains a collection called ISOGENFiles, which is
used to store the names of output files that ISOGEN can create and the file path to be used for
the particular file. For more information, see Supplementary.ReportFiles ISOGENFiles
Count (on page 475)
Count
Displays the number of data entries stored in the Supplementary.ReportFiles ISOGENFiles
collection (on page 475) collection.
Supplementary.ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection

Stores the output files, as well as their full path location, that ISOGEN creates during runtime.
System environment variables such as TEMP, USERNAME or COMPUTERNAME can
be used in folder or file paths for report files.
FileType (on page 476)
FilePath (on page 476)
FileText (on page 477)
475

FileType
Double click the FileType list to select the type of output report file:
FilePath
Defines the file path.
73. Double-click the FilePath box.
Set the actual filename required. The filename itself can be dynamic, using the Pipeline
Reference, for example, as part of the filename.
476

FileText
75. Double-click the FileText box.
76. In the text editor that displays, edit the data as necessary.
77. Click File > Update to save your changes.
To close the text editor without saving your changes, click File > Cancel.
Supplementary.SiteWeldFile Object
Specifies information about the site weld file.
The Supplementary.SiteWeldFile object also contains a collection of options that define the
columns for the site weld file. For more information, see Supplementary.SiteWeldFile
Path (on page 477)
Count (on page 478)
Enabled
Controls whether site weld file is created.
True - Create the file.
False - Suppress creation of the file.
Path
Provides the path to the site weld file. Type the full path and filename of the file.
FileFormat
Sets the format of the site weld file.
477
Delimiter
Specifies a delimiter to use for the header lines that appear at the top of a SiteWeldInfo file. The
possible characters are
Blank
Comma (,)
Semi-colon (;)
Colon (:)
HeaderLines
You must make sure the column headers match the column positions set in the Material
List Definition (MLD) file.
TitleText
ShowTitles
Count
Displays the number of data entries stored in the Supplementary.SiteWeldFile TextColumns
Supplementary.SiteWeldFile TextColumns Collection

Specifies the columns for the site weld file.
Start (on page 479)
See Also
AttributeName
attribute.
478

Justification
Start
MaxChars
Comment
report file.
479
Supplementary.SpoolAttributes Object
Defines the data required for the output of spool attributes data on the isometric and to summary
report files, such as the spool information file.
The Supplementary.SpoolAttributes object also contains a collection of options that are used
to control the assignment of enclosure styles to spool attributes used to plot them on the
isometric. For more information, see Supplementary.SpoolAttributes SpoolAttEnclosure
Path (on page 480)
ReferenceIDLocation (on page 480)
Count (on page 480)
Enabled
Controls the creation of spool attributes.
True - Attributes are created.
False - Attributes are not created.
Path
Specifies the filename and full path location to the spool attribute file.
ReferenceIDLocation
Sets the spool record as the key to map spool attributes.
Value - Spool records for possible mapping to spool attribute file:
-28
-91
- 170 to -179
The following is an example of the typical input in the DDF file:
SPOOL-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION
RECORD-ID -28
Count
Displays the number of SpoolAttEnclosure definitions defined.
480
Supplementary.SpoolAttributes SpoolAttEnclosure Collection

Controls the assignment of enclosure styles to spool attributes used to plot them on the
isometric.
AttributeName
required attribute.
EnclosureType
Specify the name of the enclosure type. Use the EnclosureType list to select the required
description.
Supplementary.SpoolInformation Object
Stores the definitions for the spool information file in the Columns collection.
The Supplementary.SpoolInformation object also contains the following collection of options
that are used to store the definitions of the data to be output to the spool information file. For
more information, see Supplementary.SpoolInformation TextColumns Collection (on page 483).
Path (on page 481)
Count (on page 482)
Enabled
Controls whether the creation of the spool information file.
Path
Specifies the filename and full path location to the spool information file.
481
FileFormat
Defines the format of the output file.
Fixed - Outputs a fixed format file.
Delimiter
characters are
Blank
Comma (,)
Semi-colon (;)
Colon (:)
HeaderLines
Specify the text string for the column header.
\ - Starts a new line.
| - Produces a vertical break.
You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the data
definition file (DDF).
Count
Displays the number of data entries stored in the Supplementary.SpoolInformation TextColumns
Append
TitleText
ShowTitles
482
Supplementary.SpoolInformation TextColumns Collection

Stores the definitions of the data to be output to the spool information file.
the collection.
Start (on page 483)
Comment
See Also
AttributeName
required attribute.
Justification
Start
Defines the start column for the output data on a fixed format file, and specifies a field number
for a delimited file.
MaxChars
Comment
report file.
483
Supplementary.TableAttributes Object
The Supplementary.TableAttributes object contains a collection called DFTableAttributes,
which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output as a table on the isometric drawing.
For more information, see Supplementary.TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection (on
page 484).
The existing Supplementary.TableAttributes object contains the same information as
the DrawingFrame.TableAttributes object. You can use either object to modify the properties,
although the DrawingFrame.TableAttributes object supports real numbers in the XPos and
YPos properties.
Count (on page 484)
Count
Displays the number of definitions in the Supplementary.TableAttributes DFTableAttributes
Supplementary.TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection

Stores the definitions of the data to be output as a table on the isometric.
Xpos (on page 485)
Ypos (on page 485)
Font (on page 485)
Layer (on page 486)
XSpacing (on page 487)
YSpacing (on page 487)
484

AttributeName
required attribute.
CharHeight
Sets the character height for the text. Type the required size in mm or inches (as a real number),
See Also
Xpos
See Also
Ypos
See Also
Font
Defines the font to be used when plotting the attribute in the table.
BarCode
Several barcode standards exist worldwide to suit different industries, but Alias has
1 - Barcode 39
2 - Barcode 25
485

CharWidth
Sets the character height for the text. Type the required size in mm or inches (as a real number),
See Also
Justification
Layer
Specify the integer number that identifies the required layer (in the Drawing.Layers Layers
collection (on page 289)) to which the definition is applied.
Colour
RotationAngle
TextWeight
TruncationLength
ColumnsNumber
Direction
486

LinesNumber
XSpacing
Specifies the table offset dimension in X (horizontal) direction. Type a value in mm or inches (set
as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. For
example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch.
See Also
YSpacing
Specifies the table offset dimension in Y (vertical) direction. Type a value in mm or inches (set
as a real number)<SPIConfigStart, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options
dialog box. For example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch.
See Also
Supplementary.TitleTexts Object
Specifies user-defined text strings for plotting on an ISOGEN-generated drawing frame. The
Supplementary.TitleTexts object also contains a collection called TitleTexts. For more
information, see Supplementary.TitleTexts TitleTexts Collection (on page 487).
Count (on page 487)
Count
Displays the number of definitions in the Supplementary.TitleTexts TitleTexts collection (on page
487).
Supplementary.TitleTexts TitleTexts Collection

The definitions in the Supplementary.TitleTexts TitleTexts collection each store one line of text
to be used for the titles.
TText (on page 488)
See Also
487

TText
Contains the text for each title line.
Supplementary.Traceability Object
Defines a unique part numbers table that can be output on the isometric drawing and a
traceability output file.
The Supplementary.Traceability object also contains a collection of options that define the
data output to the traceability file. For more information, see Supplementary.Traceability
Path (on page 488)
UniquePartNumber (on page 489)
IdentifierSuffix (on page 489)
PlotUniquePtNoTable (on page 489)
ContinuousDown (on page 489)
UniqueNosBolts (on page 491)
UniqueNosGaskets (on page 491)
Count (on page 490)
Enabled
Controls the creation of the traceability file.
Path
Defines the output path of the traceability file.
488
UniquePartNumber
Controls the type of suffix used for the unique part number and whether unique part numbers
are used.
Alpha - Use an alphabetic suffix.
Numeric - Use a numeric suffix.
Off - Switch off all unique part number facilities.
IdentifierSuffix
Controls sequencing of the IdentifierSuffix used for part numbering on the isometric.
Continuous - Generate unique part number suffixes as a continuous sequence across all
output drawings, such as 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.7 to 6.11 on Drg 2 of 2, and so on.
PerDrawing - Generate unique part number suffixes with a new sequence for each drawing,
such as 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.1 to 6.5 on Drg 2 of 2, and so on.
PlotUniquePtNoTable
Controls whether the unique part numbers table is plotted.
True - Plot the table.
False - Suppress plotting of the table.
ContinuousDown
Controls the direction of the unique part numbers table.
True - Table direction is down.
False - Table direction is up.
StartX
Defines the starting X position of the list in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the
See Also
StartY
Defines the starting Y position of the list in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the
See Also
489
VerticalSpacing
Sets the vertical spacing between each horizontal line in mm or inches (as a real number),
depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.
See Also
TextHeight
Sets the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the
See Also
MaxEntries
Controls the maximum number of entries before an overflow drawing is created if the
TableOverflow property is set to True.
See Also
TableOverflow
Controls whether an overflow drawing is created when MaxEntries is exceeded.
True - Create an overflow drawing.
False - Suppress creation of an overflow drawing.
See Also
DrawingLayer
Sets the drawing layer for unique part number table. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.
Count
Displays the number of definitions in the Supplementary.Traceability TextColumns collection (on
page 491).
490
UniqueNosBolts
Controls output of unique part numbers on bolts.
Yes - Output unique part numbers on bolts.
No - Suppress output of unique part numbers on bolts.
UniqueNosGaskets
Controls output of unique part numbers on gaskets.
Yes - Output unique part numbers on gaskets.
No - Suppress output of unique part numbers on gaskets.
Supplementary.Traceability TextColumns Collection

Stores the definitions of data for the output of unique part numbers.
the collection.
Start (on page 491)
Comment (on page 492)
See Also
AttributeName
required attribute.
Justification
Start
Defines the start column for the output data on a fixed format file, and specifies a field number
for a delimited file.
491

MaxChars
Comment
report file.
Supplementary.PrintedMaterialList Object
Defines the header content of the printed material list.
Path (on page 492)
Enabled
Controls creation of the printed material list.
True - Create the printed material list.
False - Suppress creation of the printed material list.
Path
Specifies the filename and full path location to the printed material list.
FileFormat
Defines the format of the printed material list.
Fixed - Output the printed material list in a fixed format.
Delimited - Output the printed material list in a delimited format.
Delimiter
Specifies a delimiter to use for the header lines that appear at the top of a printed material list.
The possible characters are
Blank
Comma (,)
Semi-colon (;)
Colon (:)
492
TitleText
ShowTitles
493
494
APPENDIX B
Appendix: Alternative Text

Alternative Text, or AText has it is often called, is a powerful ISOGEN feature that enables any
text on the isometric drawing to be easily changed or removed.
The feature operates by assigning a unique identification number to each standard text string.
The ID number is then referred to whenever a change is required to the text string that the
number represents.
For a complete list of available ATexts and their default values, see Grouping of AText
Listings (on page 497).
By definition, a standard text string can be a single character, a single word, or a group of
words. However, some ATexts are, by default, set to an all blank word. The total number of
separate standard text strings held by the software in this way is in excess of 300.
Identification Number Format

Because identification numbers are always negative, they are must be preceded by a minus
sign. For example, AText -249 represents the default word WEST, which is used in the main
isometric drawing area.
See Also
Specify Alternative Texts (on page 523)
Using Alternative Text (on page 495)
Using Alternative Text

AText allows you to substitute your own text terminology or language in place of the standard
ISOGEN words on the isometric. To make a word change, you do not have to replace the entire
standard AText--you can change as little as just one word if that is all is required.
Although the AText feature has a considerable degree of built-in flexibility, you must exercise a
certain amount of care when defining your own words, particularly in terms of word lengths. As a
general rule, newly defined words or word strings should be about equal in length or shorter
than the text that is being replaced. Obvious exceptions to this are the cases of the single line
headings in the material list region. In this respect, you must take full responsibility for word
definition. ISOGEN does not warn you in cases where words are too long and cannot be
accommodated in the standard space provided on the isometric. Badly designed AText can lead
to undesirable results, such as over-writing or incorrectly positioned text.
Special Characters
The following special characters further extend the functionality of ATexts:
The Dollar ($) Sign - The $ character, which is used in ISOGEN to force a new line in regular
isometric message text, can also be used with ATexts. However, when using the $ character, it
is recommended that you carefully check the output results of each occurrence.
495

The Question Mark (?) - The ? character has the following two different uses:
In ATexts -210, -211 and -212 to suppress the plotting of the single characters normally
associated with these ATexts, without switching off their associated facility, as would
normally happen when an AText is set to blank. For example, setting AText -210 ?
suppresses the F that is normally plotted. It does not completely suppress the plotting of
the flange material list part number as would normally happen when an AText item is set
to blank. Using the ? character is particularly advantageous on spool isometrics.
In some special ATexts at points where the software dynamically inserts information. By
default, AText -456 is set to DETAIL ?. As a result, the software inserts either a letter or
a number, depending upon which system you have specified at the position of the ?
character.
The "At" (@) Sign - You can use the @ character to pad out an AText string with trailing
blanks. As a result, the text that follows the AText has a series blanks between it and the AText.
Foreign Language Use

AText is particularly beneficial to foreign language users who want to produce isometrics
containing text in their native language. However, there are restrictions governing which
characters are permissible. Those restrictions are outlined in The Usable Character Set.
The Usable Character Set

You can only use the following standard English and special purpose characters in AText
definitions:
Upper- or lower-case letters in the range A to Z.
Numeric characters in the range 0 to 9 inclusive.
A blank space character.
The following special purpose symbols: * + - . , : [ ] ( ) # ' < > = | &
%
Other foreign language characters, such as those used in the Cyrillic, Greek, or
Chinese alphabets are excluded, as are specially accentuated characters, such as , , , and
so on.
AText and the Drawing Frame Symbols

The AText feature goes further than just controlling text characters. The standard symbols
appearing in the line summary area across the bottom of the standard ISOGEN drawing frame,
viz. for shop weld, field weld, and so on through traced pipe, can all be suppressed when they
are not required by setting their associated ATexts to blank.
Composite Text Messages

Composite text messages are made up of more than one text item and the composition is done
by ISOGEN automatically. Such messages can be composed in either of the following two
ways: By combining two or more related ATexts
By combining AText and an associated design database attribute value
Generally, in those cases where AText operates together with design database attribute
information to form a composite message, setting the AText part to blank to suppress the
plotting of it causes suppression of the attribute text also. For example, if the composite
message BATCH REF: 12/100A/C in the title block area needs to be completely suppressed,
then setting AText -252, which contains the words BATCH REF, to blank causes both this and
the attribute part, 12/100A/C, not to be plotted.
496
Examples
The following are some examples of standard ATexts:
The material list heading ERECTION MATERIALS.
The isometric connection messages CONN. TO and CONT. ON in the main drawing area.
The BATCH REF and PIPING SPEC headings in the title block area.
Each of these are default AText words that are programmed in by ISOGEN but which you can
re-program, if required, as explained in the following examples.
Example 1: ERECTION MATERIALS

You can find ERECTION MATERIALS as AText -310 (see "Plotted Material and Cut Pipe List
Heading Texts" on page 506). To change the default heading (ERECTION MATERIALS) to
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, the entry - 310 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS must appear in
the appropriate data input file.
Example 2: CONN.TO
CONN TO. is an example of a composite message that is used at locations where pipelines are
connected to equipment nozzles. You can find it as AText -208.
To change the message CONN. TO to JOIN TO, the entry -208 JOIN TO must appear in the
appropriate data input file. Information regarding the joined to component, that is, the nozzle
name as extracted from the design database, is automatically appended to the AText by
ISOGEN to form a composite message, such as JOIN TO D45-NZ12.
Example 3: BATCH REF

BATCH REF is another composite message example--AText -252 (see "Title Block/Drawing
Frame" on page 513). The message is used to convey plant zone or area information in the title
block area of the isometric where the contents of the BATCH (AREA) type record in the pipeline
input data file is automatically appended by ISOGEN. An example of this kind of message is
BATCH REF : AR-A/TF/N12.
To remove the batch reference entry from the isometric, set the AText entry in the input data file
(IDF) to blank, thus: -252
Doing so removes the entire composite message from the isometric, both the AText BATCH
REF : part and the following design database attribute that holds the batch reference
information.
497
Grouping of AText Listings

All the AText listings are logically grouped into the following isometric drawing regions:
Isometric Drawing Area (on page 498)
Plotted Material and Cut Pipe List Heading Texts (on page 506)
Specification Change Indication (on page 513)
Title Block/Drawing Frame (on page 513)
Line Summary Area (on page 515)
Printed Material List (on page 516)
Weld Box Summary (on page 516)
Flat Spools and Flange Rotation (on page 518)
Compipe Material Control Links (on page 519)
SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display (on page 519)
Reference Plane System (on page 523)
Isometric Drawing Area

-201
Denotes East at east coordinates.
-202
Denotes North at north coordinates.
-203
Denotes West at west coordinates.
-204
Denotes South at south coordinates.
-205
EL +
Denotes a positive Elevation at elevation coordinates.
-206
EL -
Denotes a negative Elevation at elevation coordinates.
-207
? NS
Denotes the pipe nominal size. By setting the AText to blank, the
nominal size message is suppressed. Using a ? symbol
determines the format used for outputting the nominal size
message.
-208
CONN. TO
Denotes CONNected TO, where a pipeline/branch end is

connected to a nozzle.
-209
CONT. ON
Denotes CONTinued ON at the point, where a pipeline/branch end

is continued onto another pipeline. Used in conjunction with
END-CONNECTION type record. Is also used with AText -255 to
create a CONT. ON DRG 2 type message when a pipeline is split
into multiple drawings. (Isometric drawing area and Material List
overflow).
-210
Denotes flange--the letter used with the material list

cross-reference pointer for flanges.
-211
Denotes gaskets--the letter used with the material list

cross-reference pointer for gaskets.
-212
Denotes bolts--the letter used with the material list cross-reference

pointer for bolts.
-213
SPINDLE
Indicates the direction of an operating spindle on a valve when it is

not pointing in a primary direction.
498

-214
MM
Denotes millimetres. Used with arrowed dimensions on angle and

multi-way valves to indicate leg length.
-215
REDUCING
FLANGE
Denotes a reducing flange. The indicator points to the location of

the reducing flange.
-216
OFFSET
Indicates a dimensional offset, such as eccentric reducer, offset

reducing flange, all forms of offset blocks.
You can use a ? symbol to determine format used for outputting
the offset messages. By setting this AText to blank, the offset
message is suppressed.
-217
MITRE
Denotes mitered bends. (It is used in conjunction with AText -231

BEND).
-218
LOBSTER
Indicates lobster back bends. (It is used in conjunction with AText

-231'BEND).
-219
REINFORCED
Plots an identification message that points to a reinforced tee or

cross when the symbol key is TERF or CRRF and no
reinforcement pad component is called for.
-220
LEFT LOOSE
Plots a distinguishing message that points to a flange where the

LOOSE indicator is set.
-221
FFW
Plots a distinguishing message that points to a field fit weld.
-222
FALL
Denotes a FALLing line. Used in conjunction with the Fall symbol.

You can use a ? symbol to determine the format used for
outputting the falling line messages. By setting this AText to blank,
the falling line message is now suppressed, but the fall indication
symbol is still ,shown.
-223
(Normally blank)
Produces a software-generated degree () symbol, which is output

at all angle indicators requiring a degree symbol (bends, falls, and
so on).
-224
This symbol is used for falling lines specified with a ratio, such as
1:10.
-225
(Normally blank)
Produces a system-generated percent (%)symbol used on falling

pipelines specified with a percentage indication
-226
GRAD
Indicates a falling line specified in gradients.
-227
PER M
Indicates a falling line specified as an incline in Metric units, such

as millimetres per metre.
-228
PER FT
Indicates a falling line that is specified as an incline in Imperial

units, such as inches per foot.
-229
SCREWED END
Plots an indicator that points to a pipe end that has been set to
screwed in the pipeline input data file.
-230
VENT
Plots an indicator that points to a vent position at any open ended

pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-VENT type
record.
-231
BEND
Identifies miter and lobster back type bends. Used in conjunction

with AText -217 and AText -218.
499

-232
SPEC
Plots an identification message points to any place in the pipe

where the piping specification changes. The name of the new
specification is automatically indicated.
-233
Identifies a connector as part of a material list cross-reference,

such as C13 in a box.
-234
(Normally blank)
Prefixes liners and nut material part numbers that are output on
the isometric drawing. Clamps use AText -233 to prefix their part
number.
-235
(default)
Plots a user-defined start point message on the isometric drawing.

Use the special characters listed below to output other items of
information as part of the message:
$ - Split message over several lines.
? - Output the system/pipeline reference (IDF record -25 or -6)
?? - Output the spool reference (IDF record -7 or -28)
#nnn - Output the pipeline attribute. Where nnn is set to 0 to
99, outputs ATTRIBUTES0 to ATTRIBUTES99 (IDF records
-600 to -699). Where nnn is set to 100 to 199, outputs
ATTRIBUTES100 to ATTRIBUTE199 (IDF records -900 to
-990)
-236
Identifies a support as part of a material list cross-reference, such

as S22 in a box.
-237
"
Denotes the inch sign indicator is used in Imperial dimensions

coordinates and nominal size outputs.
-238
'
Denotes the feet sign indicator used in imperial dimensions and

coordinates.
-239
DRAIN
Plots a message that points to a drain position any open-ended

pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-DRAIN type
record
-240
(Normally blank)
This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a

message at any open-ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an
END-POSITION-OPEN type record.
-241
(Normally blank)

message at any closed- ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with
an END-POSITION-CLOSED type record.
-242
(Normally blank)

message at any miscellaneous pipe end. It is used in conjunction
with an END-POSITION-NULL type record.
-243
(Normally blank)
This AText has no default text, but if you set it to a word, such as
FLAT, then that text acts as a trigger to output the flat direction of
eccentric reducers that have their flat side pointing in a primary
direction. (Is used in conjunction with ATexts -244 to -249
inclusive).
500

The following six ATexts (-244, -245, -246, -247, -248, and -249) are used to output
directions in conjunction with other ATexts on items that carry a direction setting on the
component record in the pipeline input data file.
-244
UP
Appends a primary direction as part of a composite message.

Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282.
-245
DOWN

-246
NORTH

-247
SOUTH

-248
EAST

-249
WEST

-275
SWEPT TEE
Plots a message that points to a tee whose symbol key starts with
the characters TS.
-276
CONT. FROM
Denotes CONTinued FROM. This message is plotted when a

pipeline is split onto two or more drawings, such as CONT. FROM
DRG 1. (The text DRG comes from AText -255. For more
information about this AText, see Title Block/Drawing Frame (on
page 513).
-277
ORIFICE FLANGE
Outputs text that points to orifice flanges.
-278
DIAL FACE
Outputs text that points to instruments dials whose symbol key

starts with the characters ID and is followed by a relevant direction
letter. See the following Notes for more information.
-279
Denotes lap joint stub end the letter used with the material list
cross-reference pointer for LJSE's.
-280
TAPPING
Outputs text that points to orifice plates and is followed by a

relevant direction letter. See the following Notes for more
information.
-281
TAIL
Outputs text that points to spectacle blinds and slip plates and is
followed a by relevant direction letter. See the following Notes for
more information.
-282
WINDOW
Outputs text that points to a site glass and is followed by a relevant

direction letter. See the following Notes for more information.
-283
FLAT
Identifies non-primary flat directions on eccentric reducers. The

contents of this AText is output in front of the contents of a
DIRECTION record containing the flat skew direction
AText Numbers -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282 are only output if a primary direction is set
in the component record in the pipeline input data file.
501
502
The appropriate direction (as defined by ATexts -244 to -249) is appended to the specific
fitting text to make a composite message--such as DIAL FACE WEST. Alternatively, the
content of any DIRECTION (Compound Directions) record can be appended.
-284
TEE BEND
Plots text at bends that have an off-line leg.
-285
RATING FLANGE
Provides an extra message at a flange that has a different

pressure rating to standard. This is achieved by giving the
mating gasket a symbol key of the required rating (such as.
300#) in the Intermediate Data File (IDF). The facility is only
used on fixed length piping.
-286
(Normally blank)
This AText is blank by default but if set it will output the text as a
message on screwed erection (construction) fittings.
-287
ORIENTATION
DIRECTION
Identifies the direction of skewed branches in cases where skew

box indication has been suppressed. A program generated
direction will be appended to this text to form a complete
message.
-288
PIPE
Denotes the position(s) of a change in the pipeline reference on

system isometrics
-298
TEE ELBOW
Identifies a tee elbow fitting.
-337
D BEND RADIUS
Outputs the text D bend radius on individual pulled bends where

the bend radius is expressed in terms of a number of pipe
diameters. The bend radius value is extracted from a
BEND-RADIUS type record in the pipeline input data file and
used as a prefix to this AText.
-338
BEND RADIUS
Outputs the text bend radius on individual pulled bends where

the bend radius is expressed in terms of the dimensional units in
use. The bend radius value is extracted from a BEND-RADIUS
type record in the pipeline input data file and used as a prefix to
this AText.
-346
GEARBOX
ORIENTATION
Is used in conjunction with directional information taken from a

GEARBOX type record in the pipeline input data file and which
is appended to this AText.
-349
PP
Indicates personal protection type insulation on insulation

Indication symbols having the symbol key 'NPP.
-350
REDUCING ELBOW Indicates a reducing elbow on fittings having the symbol key
ER**.
-356
Identifies special type pulled bends. Is used both on the

isometric area and on the material list.
-357
Identifies special type erection welds. Is used both on the

-358
Identifies special type fabrication welds. Is used both on the

-362
END$ONE
Identifies a specific end on a spool isometric.Used in special

circumstances. It also appears in the cut pipe list section for use
as a column heading on the cut pipe list.

-388
TANGENTIAL
CONNECTION
Identifies tangential / offset connections. In cases where the

tapping point method is used, the existing TAPPING
CONNECTION (AText No. -451) message will not be output.
-389
OFFSET
CONNECTION

CONNECTION (AText No. -451) message is not output.
-390
FROM ? ORIGIN

-391
(Normally Blank)

-392
MULTIPLE
Indicates that multiple components attributes are present for a

particular material entry.
-394
TOT
Distinguishes an accumulated pipe sub-total from an individual

pipe entry.
-395
Outputs a modified heat tracing component part number. Default

is ?.
-396
? INC ANGLE
Default is blank. If OS 67 set to 1 and this AText set ? character

is substituted by angle value and combined with INC ANGLE
text to indicate that angles displayed for elbows and bends on
isometric are included (not deflected) angles.
-399
N or U
Labels the viewpoint direction arrow. N denotes north and U

denotes up. The default label for combined, fabrication, erection
and normal spool isometrics is N, while U is the default label for
flat spool isometrics. If set to Blank, the viewpoint direction
arrow is suppressed.
-425
SEAL WELD
Indicates the weld type for seal welds on the isometric drawing.
-433
(Normally blank)
Plots a message that points to a user-positioned set on

connections.
-434
STUB IN
Plots a message that points to a user-positioned set in

connections.
-243
(Normally blank)
This AText has no default text but if it is set to a word (such as

FLAT) by the user then that text acts as a trigger to output the
flat direction of eccentric reducers that have their flat side
pointing in a primary direction. (Is used in conjunction with
ATexts -244 to -249 inclusive).
-437
(Normally blank)
Allows metric dimensions to have their dimensional units output

on the isometric drawing.
-439
(EOP)
Shows edge of pipe dimensions.
-440
NOZZLE?
Indicates the nozzle names attached to items of equipment.
-441
EQUIPMENT$LOCA Indicates equipment location.

TION
503

-451
TAPPING
CONNECTION
Is output along with coordinate values at the tapping point on a

user-defined fitting. Requires Option Switch 122 to be set to 1
for tapping coordinates output on the isometric drawing.
-452
UNACCEPTABLE
SPLIT
Indicates that an unacceptable drawing split point has been

found in tube. When used, the message is output in the top
left-hand corner of each affected drawing.
-454
CONNECTION
ORIENTATION
Indicates undeveloped set-on tees and olets, which have no

branch leg and are indicated in dotted form on the pipeline,
where the intended branch connection is in a skewed direction.
A system-generated direction word is appended to this text to
form a composite message.
-455
(Normally blank)
Indicates the elevation coordinate of the flange connection face.

Used at flange positions in vertical pipe legs. The special
characters ? and $ can be combined with this AText to allow you
to control the final form of the output text. ? is used to cause the
insertion of elevation value, and $ forces a new line of text. For
example, a setting of ?$FLANGE FACE produces EL +22613
FLANGE FACE. In this situation, the EL characters are obtained
by the software also using AText -205 automatically.
-456
SEE DETAIL ?
Provides a cross-reference message for detail sketches. This

AText appears on the drawing part of the isometric. The sketch
identifying number or letter is edited in by the software at the ?
position.
-457
MITRE ?
Identifies miter welds. The software edits in the miter angle into
the text string at the ? position which can be positioned
anywhere in the string.
-458
(Normally Blank)
Indicates the nominal size for metric bore units. For example, if
set to mm the output is 32mm NS; if set to Blank, then 32NS is
output.
-459
?THK
Shows thickness of a penetration plate on the drawing.
-469
REFERENCE POINT Identifies a reference dimension Item coordinates.
-470
SUPPORT
LOCATION
Identifies pipe support coordinates.
-477
CUT OUT ?
Shows the location of where material should be removed.
-479
PORT REF
Displays a reference message at each port on the isometric

drawing. If set to Blank, the message is suppressed.
-480
PORT CO-ORDS
Displays coordinate information at each port on the isometric

drawing. If set to Blank, the display of coordinate data output is
suppressed.
504
The following nine ATexts are all used for the identification of external reference Items when
using the reference dimension facility. Any associated text elements will be automatically
pre-fixed or appended, as appropriate, to the specified AText element.
In all these ATexts, the $ character causes a new line to be plotted, and a ? character is
where the software edits in the element name (from any -37, 70, 71 or 72 type record) to
derive the full text string.
-460
BEAM$?
Identifies horizontal steel-work element (SKEY HST*).
-461
COLUMN$?
Identifies vertical steel-work element (SKEY VST*).
-462
?$BUILDING CL
Identifies centreline of building (SKEY BLD*).
-463
CL EQUIPMENT$?
Identifies centreline of equipment (SKEY EQU*).
-464
CL PIPELINE$?
Identifies centreline of pipeline (SKEY PIP*).
-465
?$FLOOR LEVEL
Identifies specified floor level (SKEY FLR*).
-466
?$WALL
Identifies specified wall position (SKEY WAL*).
-467
GRID LINE$?
Identifies project grid line (SKEY GRD*).
-468
Used for miscellaneous user-defined elements (SKEY XXX*). The

default ? character causes any identification name associated
with the miscellaneous reference to be used when no other AText
setting is made.
-471
LOCATION-POINT?
Indicates a location point position on the plotted isometric. If more

than one is included on any single isometric, a simple ID number
is generated and output in the position indicated by the ?.
-475
(Normally blank)
Indicates the position of any location points that are included in an

incoming pipeline data file. Used in the SmartPlant Spoolgen
Probing module. Value must be defined.
-476
(Normally blank)
Trigger the indication of drawing identifiers. Used in SmartPlant

Spoolgen.
-498
(Normally blank)
Points to a site weld. Value must be defined.
-499
SHOP TEST WELD
Points to either a site weld or a field fit weld that requires a shop
test weld to be performed at the same location. (That is welds
with the key WSST or WFST).
-501
(Normally blank)
Points to an offshore weld if user-defined.
-502
SUPPORT
Indicates the orientation of a pipe support. Content of associated

DIRECTION record (containing compound directions for skewed
support) is appended to AText.
-512
TACK WELD
Plots a distinguishing message that points to a user-positioned

tack weld.
-533
FI
Identifies field Items on an erection type isometric whenever a

new style operations box is requested ( Option Switch 53 Position
2 set to 2).
-534
RL
Identifies a random length on an erection type isometric whenever

a new style operations box is requested ( Option Switch. 53
Position 2 set to 2).
-535
SU
Identifies a pipe support on an erection type isometric whenever a

new style operations box is requested ( Option Switch. 53
Position 2 set to 2).
505
506
-536
VL
Identifies a valve on an erection type isometric whenever a new

style operations box is requested ( Option Switch 53 Position 2
set to 2).
-539
Used as a delimiter between the material list cross-reference

identifier and the suffix that is added as a unique component
identifier in the new style of Identifier ( 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 as opposed to
3).
-541
_N
Used as delimiter/identifier in general note names.
-542
_S
Used as delimiter/identifier in general note names.
-543
(Normally blank)
Indicates the position of any special note names that are included
in an incoming pipeline data file. Used in SmartPlant Spoolgen
Probing module.
-544
(Normally blank)
Indicates the position of any additional materials that are included

in an incoming pipeline data file. Used in SmartPlant Spoolgen
probing module.
-545
Used as a separator between part numbers when outputting dual

numbers for associated additional material identification on the
plotted isometric.
-546
(Default) Used as the first character of the drawing output file

extension (used in conjunction with Option Switch 71 Pos. 7).
-547
(Default) Underline character.
-548
HOR ?
Distinguishes horizontal skew angles from vertical skew angles on

isometric drawings.
-549
? VER
Distinguishes vertical skew angles from horizontal skew angles on

isometric drawings.
-550
(Normally Blank)
Outputs a nominal size message on reducing tees, such as TEE

RED.
-551
(Normally Blank)
Outputs a nominal size message on equal tees, such as TEE

EQU.
-552
(Normally Blank)
Outputs a nominal size message on concentric reducers, such as

CONC RED.
-553
(Normally Blank)
Outputs a nominal size message on eccentric reducers, such as

ECC RED.
-885
- FFISYS
AText for FF isometric continuation message delimiter.
Plotted Material and Cut Pipe List Heading Texts

-274
(Normally blank)
If set, is used as a separator between the pipeline

reference and the spool identifier in the spool
isometric drawing identifier.
-300
FABRICATION MATERIALS
Is the category heading under which components

required for SHOP Fabrication are listed.
-301
PT
Is the part number heading used in conjunction

with AText -302 to form a composite message.
-302
NO
Used in conjunction with AText -301 to form a

composite message.
-303
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Is the heading in the material listing under which

components are described according to their
catalog component description.
-304
N.S.
Is the heading under which the nominal size of

each item is listed. Is used in conjunction with
AText -330 or AText -331 to form a composite
message.
-305
ITEM CODE
Is the heading under which component

identification codes are listed.
-306
QTY
Is the heading under which the required quantities

are listed.
-307
PIPE
Is the group sub-heading under which pipe is

listed.
-308
FITTINGS
Is the group sub-heading under which pipe fittings

are listed, such as elbows tees, and so.
-309
FLANGES
Is the group sub-heading under which all flanges

are listed.
-310
ERECTION MATERIALS

required for SITE Erection--or Construction--are
listed.
-311
GASKETS
Is the group sub-heading under which all gaskets

are listed
-312
BOLTS
Is the group sub-heading under which all bolts are

listed.
-313
VALVES / IN-LINE ITEMS
Is the group sub-heading under which all valves

and in-line Items are listed.
-314
INSTRUMENTS
Is the group sub-heading under which all

instruments are listed.
-315
SUPPORTS
Is the group sub-heading under which all supports

are listed.
-316
PIPE SPOOLS
Is the sub-heading under which all spool numbers

are listed.
507

-319
CUT PIPE LENGTH
Is the heading under which all the cut pipe lengths

are listed.
-320
PIECE
Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which the

cut pipe piece numbers are listed. This AText is
used in conjunction with AText -321 to form a
composite heading.
-321
NO

composite heading.
-322
CUT
Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which the

actual cut pipe lengths are listed. This AText is
used in conjunction with AText -323 to form a
composite heading.
-323
LENGTH

composite heading.
-324
REMARKS
Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which one

of the ATexts -326, -327, -328, or -500, if
applicable, is listed.
-325
(Normally blank)
Used for spool number separator on the material

list.
-326
PLD BEND
Used for a pulled bend remark, which is listed

under AText -324 if a cut pipe length contains a
pulled bend.
-327
LOOSE FLG
Is a remark which will be listed under AText -324 if

a cut pipe length has a loose flange requirement.
-328
FF WELD
Is the field fit weld remark which is listed under

AText -324 if a cut pipe length contains a field fit
weld.
-329
Used to denote lengths of pipe are in metres. Also

used to indicate unit type metres in centreline
length summary.
-330
INS
Used to denote nominal sizes are in inches. It is

used in conjunction with AText -304 and AText
-317.
-331
MM
Denotes the nominal sizes are in millimetres. Also

used to indicate unit type Millimetres in centreline
length summary. It is used in conjunction with
AText -304 and AText -317.
-334
Is used only on fixed length piping. The contents of

this AText are appended to the item code to form a
composite code when one or more ends of the
fixed length spool has a special flange.
-335
WITH SPECIAL RATING

FLANGE(S) (SEE ISO)
Is used only on fixed length piping. The contents of

the AText are appended to the item description to
form a composite message. Is used whenever
AText -334 is used.
508

-339
MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS
Is the group sub-heading under which all

non-categorized components are listed.
-340
INDUCTION BEND ID -
Used to identify pipe required in the fabrication of

induction bends. The induction bend tag is
appended to the AText to form a complete text
string.
-341
EQUIPMENT TRIM MATERIALS
Is the sub-heading under which all equipment trim

materials are listed.
-342
NOZZLE REF -
Is the sub-heading under which all materials

associated with an individual nozzle are listed. The
content of the related NOZZLE-REFERENCE is
appended to the AText to form a complete text
string. Used on equipment trim drawings only.
-343
CONTINUED
Used with AText -342 to identify situations where

the listing of components for a nozzle is being
continued from a previous drawing. Used on
equipment trim drawings only.
-344
END CONNECTORS
Is the group sub-heading under which all materials

for end connectors for hygienic type piping are
listed (liners, nuts, clamps, and so on.).
-345
AND
Used with AText -342 to form a sub-heading under

which all components associated with
interconnected nozzles are output on the material
list for an equipment trim drawing. The resultant
heading is of the form NOZZLE REF - N22 AND
N23.
-347
(Normally blank)
This has no default AText but is available as an

alternative to the AText used when generating a
material list overflow message at the bottom of the
master drawing material list (an AText -209 and
AText -255 combination). Any AText set by the
user has a program generated cross-reference
drawing number appended to it to form a
composite message.
-348
(Normally blank)
This has no default AText but is available as an

alternative to the AText used when generating a
material list overflow message at the top of
overflow material list drawings ( AText -276 and
AText -255 combination). Any AText set by the
user has a program generated cross reference
drawing number appended.
-351
FABRICATED (PULLED) BEND
Used to identify fabricated bends when listed as

separate items on the material list.
-352
WEIGHT
Column heading for weight.
-353
KGS
Units indicator for kilogram weights. Used as part

of Weight column heading and in pipeline weight
summary area at bottom of material list.
509

-354
LBS
Units indicator for pound weights. Used as part of

Weight column heading and in pipeline weight
summary area at bottom of material list
-355
TOTAL WEIGHT-THIS DRG
Identification text for total pipeline weight in Weight

column and also in weight summary area at bottom
of material list.
-356
Special ATEXT used only to identify special type

pulled bends. Is used both on the material list and
on the isometric area as a prefix to the part
number.
-357
Special ATEXT used only to identify special type

erection welds. Is used both on the material list and
on the isometric area as a prefix to the part
number.
-358
Special ATEXT only to identify special type

fabrication welds. Is used both on the material list
and on the isometric area as a prefix to the part
number.
-359
(Normally blank)
Used for bolt units sub-heading. ISOGEN outputs

in DIA x LENGTH sequence.
-362
END$ONE
Column heading on cut pipe list. (Also appears in

the isometric drawing area section when it is
necessary to identify a specific end of a cut piece).
-363
END$TWO
Column heading on cut pipe list.
-364
ITEM$CODE
Last column heading on cut pipe list when item

code heading is required. (See Also AText -365).
-365
(Normally blank)
Alternative last column heading on cut pipe list.

(See Also AText -364). If part number is required
on the cut list instead of item code, then AText
-364 should be set to blank, and AText -365 set to
the required alternative heading, such as part no.
-366
SQ.CUT
Used for square cut in End Condition columns on

cut pipe list.
-367
BEVEL
Used for bevel in End Condition columns on cut

pipe list.
-368
SCREWED
Used for screwed in End Condition columns on cut

pipe list.
-369
SHAPED
Used for shaped in End Condition columns on cut

pipe list.
-370
MITRED
Used for mitered in End Condition columns on cut

pipe list.
-371
OFFSHORE MATERIALS

required for OFFSHORE erection are listed.
510
-372
REMARKS
Remarks region heading at bottom of material list

where remarks text is collectively listed.
-373
REM
Remarks column heading in material list. Remark

reference numbers are listed in this column.
-374
ANGLE
Used on special type pulled bends where angle

information is appended to the item Description
field on the material list.
-375
WELDS
Is the group sub-heading under which all welds are

listed.
-376
FAB
Used to identify Fabrication material when category

is used as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 material
list.
-377
EREC
Used to identify Erection material when category is

used as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 material list.
-378
OFF
Used to identify Offshore material when category is

used as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 material list.
-379
TOTAL FABRICATION WEIGHT
Identification text for total fabrication weight in

Weight column and also in weight summary area at
bottom of material list.
-380
TOTAL ERECTION WEIGHT
Identification text for total erection weight in Weight

of material list.
-381
TOTAL OFFSHORE WEIGHT
Identification text for total offshore weight in Weight

of material list.
-382
TOTAL WEIGHT UNLISTED ITEMS
Identification text for the total weight of unlisted

items in the Weight column and also in the weight
summary area at the bottom of the material list.
-383
Missing weight indicator. The * is a special marker

that is used on both weight and CoG outputs to
indicate that component(s) with zero weight were
encountered.
-384
TANGENT+
Used in the REMARKS column of the cut list to

indicate where extra material has been added to a
cut piece length in order to provide a minimum
tangent length for either a start or finish bend leg.
-385
CUT/WELD
Used in the cut piece remarks section against cut

pieces that have additional material added
between adjacent bends.
-426
GROOVED
Used to indicate grooved end preparation for

Victaulic pipe connections on the cut pipe
list/report.
-427
FLARED
Used to indicate a flared end preparation on the cut

pipe list/report.
511

-428
SCREWED
Used to indicate a female screwed end preparation

on the cut pipe list/report.
-431
SOCKET
Used to indicate a female socket

weld/compression/glued/push fit end preparation
on the cut pipe list/report.
-472
No.?
Used to output a location point ID number on the

drawing frame. Is only output when multiple
location points are included on a single isometric.
-473
OF
Used as part of a location point position on the

drawing frame.
-474
ABOVE
Used as part of a location point position on the

drawing frame.
-500
SHOP TEST
Used on the cut list to identify cut pieces that need

to have an additional shop test allowance. (That is
welds with the SKEY WSST or WFST).
-503
SPOOL ID
Used as either a header or column identifier on the

following printed output whenever spool identifiers
are listed.
i) Printed material list (Style 1 or 2).
ii) Printed material control file.
iii) Printed weld summary.
-514
REINFPAD
Used as the item code for a reinforcement pad

whenever automatic item code generation is
requested.
-515
REINFORCEMENT PAD FOR @
Used as the first part of a description for a

reinforcement pad whenever automatic description
generation is requested. The second part of the
pad description is the description of the main
pipeline tube to which the pad is welded.
-537
(Normally blank)
If set, is used as an alternative units indication on

any length output on any style of material list.
(Overrules any length units setting in Option
Switch. 24 ).
-538
(Normally blank)
If set, is used to offer an alternative form of bolt

diameter/length output on any style of material list.
-540
(Normally blank)
If set, is used as an optional column heading for

bolt diameter where the bolt units are different to
the normal pipeline units.
-554
(Normally blank)
If set, outputs text to supplement scalar quantities

output to the material list on the drawing and
material control file.
-555
SPOOL -
If set, identifies materials belonging to spools on

the material list.
512
Specification Change Indication

The following ATexts are used for the indication of specification changes on the isometric
drawing.
-289
MATL
Indicates a piping material specification change. The content of

the PIPING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file is
appended to the AText to form a composite message.
-290
INSUL
Indicates an insulation specification change. The content of the

INSULATION-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file is
-291
TRACE
Indicates a tracing specification change. The content of the

TRACING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file is
-292
PAINT
Indicates a PAINTING specification change. The content of the

PAINTING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file is
-293
(Normally blank)
Reserved for user-defined AText. The contents of a

MISC-SPEC1 type record in the pipeline input data file is
-294
(Normally blank)

-295
(Normally blank)

-296
(Normally blank)

-297
(Normally blank)

Title Block/Drawing Frame

-250
DATE
The date is taken from the DATE type record in the

pipeline input data file and automatically appended in the
required format (UK, EUR or USA) to the AText.
If the date format is set to UK (see Option Switch 6 for details), this AText also uses
ATexts -258, -259, -260, -261, -262, -263, -264, -265, -266, -267, -268 and - 269 to form the
month part of the date output text.
-251
PROJECT NO.
This is used in the title block if the project number has

been set in a PROJECT-IDENTIFIER type record in the
pipeline input data file. The content of this record is
513

-252
BATCH REF
This is used in the title block area if a batch reference has

been set in a BATCH type record in the pipeline input data
file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to
-253
PIPING SPEC
Used in the title block if a piping specification has been set

in a PIPING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data
file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to
-254
ISS
Used in the title block if an issue (also known as Revision)

identifier has been set in a REVISION type record in the
-255
DRG
Used in conjunction with AText -256 to generate a

drawing identifier of the form - DRG n OF n - in cases
where a pipeline is split into multiple isometrics.
This AText is used in conjunction with AText -209 and AText -276 to form a composite
message.
514
-256
OF
Used in conjunction with AText -255.
-257
SPL
Used on spool isometric drawings for the identification of

individual spool pieces. A program generated spool
number is appended to the AText to form a composite
message. This AText is not used if either a spool prefix
(SPOOL-PREFIX type record) or spool identifiers
(SPOOL-IDENTIFIER type records) are included in the
pipeline input data file.
-258
JAN
-259
FEB
-260
MAR
-261
APR
-262
MAY
-263
JUN
-264
JUL
-265
AUG
-266
SEP
-267
OCT
-268
NOV
-269
DEC
Used in conjunction with AText -250 .
-270
THERMAL INSULATION
SPEC
Used in the title block if an insulation specification

identifier has been set in an INSULATION-SPEC record in
the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is
-271
TRACING SPEC
Used in the title block if a tracing specification identifier

has been set in a TRACING-SPEC type record in the
-272
PAINTING SPEC
Used in the title block if a painting specification identifier

has been set in a PAINTING-SPEC type record in the
-436
JACKET SPEC
Used in the title block if a jacket specification identifier has

been set in a JACKET-SPEC type record in the pipeline
input data file. The content of this record is appended to
the AText to form a composite message.
Line Summary Area

The ATexts that are used in the line summary area along the bottom of the isometric drawing
can either have their ATexts changed or made blank. If the AText is changed, then its
associated symbol is drawn. If it is set to blank, then the symbol is not drawn.
In these ATexts, the inclusion of a $ character creates a forced line feed causing the text
to be plotted over two lines.
-400
TRACED$PIPE
-401
LAGGED$PIPE
-402
PIPE$SUPPORT
-403
COMPN$JOINT
-404
SCREWED$JOINT
-405
SOCKET$WELD
-406
FIELD$WELD
-407
SHOP$WELD
-408
& -409
These two ATexts have no default text but can be used for
any user-specified general information on the drawing
frame. A typical example is PULLED BEND RADIUS IS
3X NOMINAL PIPE BORE.
-410
[1] DENOTES PIPE

SPOOL NO$
1 DENOTES PARTS LIST
NO
-410
$ 1 DENOTES PARTS
LIST NO
This is a general note to signify how spool numbers and

material list part numbers are shown on the isometric.
515

-411
SITE$CONNECTION
The following ATexts appear in the line summary area along the bottom of both the plotted and
printed Material Lists.
-317
PIPE NS
Is used in conjunction with AText -318 to which the total centreline length
per bore is automatically computed and listed. Also uses AText -330 or
AText -331 to indicate units.
-318
CL
LENGTH
Is used in conjunction with AText -317 . Also uses AText -329 or AText
-331 or AText -360 or AText -361 depending on units being used
-360
FT
Used to indicate unit type feet in pipe centre-line length region.
-361
FT-INS
Used to indicate unit type feet-inches in pipe centre-line length region.
-386
Blank is the default. used to control output of insulation length.
-387
Blank is the default. used to control output of heat trace length.
Printed Material List

The following ATexts are used on the printed material list, in addition to those ATexts listed for
the plotted material and cut pipe lists.
-332
PAGE
This has a page number automatically appended.
-333
PIPELINE REF
This has the pipeline reference automatically appended.
-336
SYSTEM REF
This is used as an alternative to AText -333 when producing

material list or system isometrics. The contents of a
SYSTEM-ISOMETRIC-REFERENCE record in the pipeline input
data file is automatically appended to the AText.
Weld Box Summary

Standard Weld Summary Box
Weld Box header details (line 1):
WEL
D
-412
SHO WELD WELDE

P
R
VISUA
L
ND
T
HAR
D
S.R FAB.Q
A
Continuation of Weld Box header details. (line 2):

-413
NO
/FLD PROC ID
ACCEP NO NO
T
ACCEP
T
The first column of this Weld Summary box is used for the software-generated weld
number and optional prefix. The second column is for Weld category and contains the Shop /
Field / Offshore indicators. This must be taken into account when making any changes to either
of these two ATexts.
516
-414
Weld category identification - Shop.
-415
Weld category identification - Field.
-416
Weld category identification - Offshore.

One of the above characters is plotted in the Weld Category column (column 2), depending
upon the type of weld.
User-Defined Weld Summary Box
-417
BW
Used for weld type identifier butt weld.
-418
SW
Used for weld type identifier socket weld.
-419
MW
Used for weld type identifier miter weld.
-420
LUG
Used for weld type identifier LUGG.
-421
SOF
Used for weld type identifier slip-on flange.
-422
SOB
Used for weld type identifier set-on branch.
-423
LET
Used for weld type identifier LET, such as olet, latrolet, half coupling..
-424
SLW
Used to indicate the weld type for seal welds in welding lists and reports.
-438
SEAM
Weld type identifier for a seam weld.
-504
(Normally
blank)
Can be user-defined and used to identify field fit welds only when the
weld category attribute is output.
-507
RPD
Used for weld type identifier for a basic reinforcing pad weld, when one
extra weld number is requested.
-508
LF
Used for weld type identifier for a reinforcing pad to main pipeline weld,
when two extra weld numbers are requested. (Used together with AText
-509).
-509
L4
Used for weld type identifier for a reinforcing pad to branch weld, when
two extra weld numbers are requested. (Used together with AText -508).
-510
(Normally
blank)
If set, it is used as the delimiter between the two material list Identifiers
in the Location column of the operations box.
-511
PAD
Used as a part identifier in the Location column of the operations box in

cases where a reinforcement pad has not been included on the material
list.
-513
TW
Weld type identifier for a tack weld.
-516
TRN
Weld type identifier for a trunnion weld (The weld that connects the
trunnion to the main pipeline).
-517
Used for weld action identification for a manual weld on the operations
list.
-518
Used for weld action identification for an automatic weld on the

operations list.
-519
EB
Used for pulled bend identification on the operations list.
-520
RL
Used for random length identification on the operations list.
-521
FW.
Used for weld type identifier for a fillet weld. (The basic weld used for
connecting pipe supports to the pipeline).
-522
(Normally
blank)
If set, it is used as an alternative to AText -422 to identify the branch

connection weld(s) for a reinforced tee or cross.
517
-523
(Normally
blank)

connection weld(s) for an angled (not 90) reinforced tee or cross.
-524
(Normally
blank)

connection weld(s) for an angled (not 90) set-on tee or cross.
-525
(Normally
blank)
If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for any olet type component
with an SKEY of HCSC or HCSW.
-526
(Normally
blank)
If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a reinforcement pad to
main pipeline weld on an angled branch when two extra weld numbers
are requested. (Used together with AText -527).
-527
(Normally
blank)
If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a reinforcement pad to
branch weld on an angled branch - when two extra weld numbers are
requested. (Used together with AText -526).
-528
(Normally
blank)
If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a trunnion to elbow / bend
connection.
-529
(Normally
blank)
If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a 90 non-reinforced

trunnion to main pipeline weld.
-530
(Normally
blank)
If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for an angled non-reinforced
-531
(Normally
blank)
If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a 90 reinforced trunnion to
main pipeline weld.
-532
(Normally
blank)
If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for an angled reinforced
Flat Spools and Flange Rotation

The following six ATexts are used in DIRECTION records in the pipeline input data file when
indicating compound directions for certain components in skewed Pipelines. Also used when
ISOGEN is generating ORIENTATION and CONNECTION DIRECTION messages on flat
spools.
518
-481
Denotes East.
-482
Denotes North.
-483
Denotes West.
-484
Denotes South.
-485
Denotes Up.
-486
Denotes Down.
-487
*** REFERENCE FLAT ***
Used to identify which eccentric reducer flat

direction is used as a reference for a given flange
rotation.
-488
*** REFERENCE SPINDLE ***
Used to identify which spindle is used as a

reference for a given flange rotation.
-489
*** REFERENCE SUPPORT ***
Used to identify which support is used as a


-490
*** REFERENCE BRANCH ***
Used to identify which branch is used as a

-491
*** REFERENCE WINDOW ***
Used to identify which window is used as a

-492
FLAT DIRECTION
Used to point to 2D and 3D skew enclosure

triangles at eccentric reducers to indicate a flat
direction on flat spools.
-493
SPINDLE DIRECTION

triangles located at spindles on flat spools.
-494
SUPPORT DIRECTION

triangles located at supports on flat spools.
-495
BRANCH DIRECTION

triangles located at undeveloped set-on branches
or single olets on flat spools.
-496
WINDOW DIRECTION

triangles located at sight glasses on flat spools.
-497
FLANGE ROTATION ?
Used to identify flange rotations on flat spools.

(The calculated angle is edited in by the program at
the position of the ? character).
COMPIPE Material Control Links

-299
Single character delimiter used between the three data items

that are required to be in each ITEM-CODE record when using
the COMPIPE link facility.
-453
MM-
Used to separate nominal size and pipeline reference when

ISOGEN generates a drawing number for use in the
COMPIPE.MTO file.
SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display

The following -800 series ATexts are used in SPOOLGEN probing and the FFISYS.
-800 series ATexts are applicable only for SPOOLGEN 4 and earlier versions of the
software. They are not used for SmartPlant Spoolgen.
-800
BEND
Identification of BEND when probing.
-801
ELBOW
Identification of ELBOW when probing.
-802
OLET
Identification of OLET when probing.
-803
TEE
Identification of TEE when probing.
-804
CROSS
Identification of CROSS when probing.
-805
REDUCER
Identification of REDUCER when probing.
-806
TEE REDUCER
Identification of TEE REDUCER when probing.
-807
REDUCING FLANGE
Identification of REDUCING FLANGE when probing.
519
520
-808
TEE BEND/ELBOW
Identification of TEE BEND/ELBOW when probing.
-809
ANGLE VALVE
Identification of ANGLE VALVE when probing.
-810
3 WAY VALVE
Identification of 3 WAY VALVE when probing.
-811
4 WAY VALVE
Identification of 4 WAY VALVE when probing.
-812
INSTRUMENT
Identification of INSTRUMENT when probing.
-813
MISC COMPONENT
Identification of MISC COMPONENT when probing.
-814
PIPE (TUBE)
Identification of PIPE (TUBE) when probing.
-815
FIXED PIPE
Identification of FIXED PIPE when probing.
-816
PIPE BLOCK
Identification of PIPE BLOCK when probing.
-817
FLANGE
Identification of FLANGE when probing.
-818
LJSE FLANGE
Identification of LJSE FLANGE when probing.
-819
BLIND FLANGE
Identification of BLIND FLANGE when probing.
-820
CONNECTOR
Identification of CONNECTOR when probing.
-821
BACKING NUT
Identification of BACKING NUT when probing.
-822
CLAMP
Identification of CLAMP when probing.
-823
MISC HYGENIC COMPONENT Identification of MISC HYGENIC COMPONENT

when probing.
-824
CAP
Identification of CAP when probing.
-825
COUPLING
Identification of COUPLING when probing.
-826
UNION
Identification of UNION when probing.
-827
VALVE
Identification of VALVE when probing.
-828
TRAP
Identification of TRAP when probing.
-829
VENT
Identification of VENT when probing.
-830
FILTER
Identification of FILTER when probing.
-831
SUPPORT
Identification of SUPPORT when probing.
-832
INSTRUMENT TEE
Identification of INSTRUMENT TEE when probing.
-833
WELD
Identification of WELD when Probing.
-834
NONE
Indication that NO component was located

successfully when probing.
-835
(Not Used)
Unused AText
-836
(Not Used)
Unused AText.
-837
(Not Used)
Unused AText.
-838
(Not Used)
Unused AText.
-839
(Not Used)
Unused AText.
-840
Changed to Bend
`Probing Action' message - Elbow changed to bend.

-841
Flange set to Loose
`Probing Action' message - Flange set to loose.
-842
Detail Sketch ?
`Probing Action' message - Detail Sketch added.
-843
Support changed to
Fabrication
`Probing Action' message - Support changed to

Fabrication.
-844
Support changed to Erection
`Probing Action' message - Support changed to

Erection.
-845
Support changed to Offshore `Probing Action' message - Support changed to

Offshore.
-846
Tack Weld
`Probing Action' message - Tack Weld added.
-847
Support(s) added
`Probing Action' message - Support Welds added.
-848
Automatic Weld
`Probing Action' message - Automatic Weld added.
-849
Shop Test
`Probing Action' message - Shop Test Weld added.
-850
REDUCING-CONCENTRIC
Flange type REDUCING-CONCENTRIC selected

when probing.
-851
REDUCING ECCENTRIC
Flange type REDUCING-ECCENTRIC selected when

probing.
-852
STUB/BACKING PAIR
Flange type STUB/BACKING PAIR selected when

probing.
-853
SCREWED
Flange type SCREWED selected when probing.
-854
SLIP-ON J TYPE
Flange type SLIP-ON J TYPE selected when

probing.
-855
SLIP-ON
Flange type SLIP-ON selected when probing.
-856
SOCKET-WELD
Flange type SOCKET-WELD selected when probing.
-857
WELD-NECK
Flange type WELD-NECK selected when probing.
-858
SLIP-ON ORIFICE
Flange type SLIP-ON ORIFICE selected when

probing.
-859
WELD-NECK ORIFICE
Flange type WELD-NECK ORIFICE selected when

probing.
-860
LAP-JOINT RING
Flange type LAP-JOINT RING selected when

probing.
-861
LAP-JOINT STUB END
Flange type LAP-JOINT STUB END selected when

probing.
-862
UNKNOWN
Flange type UNKNOWN selected when probing.
-863
Material added
`Probing Action' message - Indication of additional

materials added to pipeline.
-864
General Information Note - ?
`Probing Action' message - General information note

added.
-865
Specific Information Note - ?
`Probing Action' message - Specific information note

added.
-866
Weld deleted
`Probing Action' message - Weld deleted.
521
522
-867
Support Weld(s) deleted
`Probing Action' message - Support welds deleted.
-868
Spool Name deleted
`Probing Action' message - Spool same deleted.
-869
Flow Arrow deleted
`Probing Action' message - Flow arrow deleted.
-870
Message deleted
`Probing Action' message - Message deleted.
-871
Detail Sketch deleted
`Probing Action' message - Detail Sketch deleted.
-872
Information Note deleted
`Probing Action' message - Information Note deleted.
-873
Additional Material deleted
`Probing Action' message - Additional material

deleted.
-874
Loose Flange un-set
`Probing Action' message - Loose flange un-set.
-875
Location point added
`Probing Action' message - Location point added.
-876
Location point deleted
`Probing Action' message - Location point deleted.
-877
FLOOR/WALL PENETRATION `Probing Action' message - Identification of

FLOOR/WALL PENETRATION when probing.
-878
FLOW ARROW
`Probing Action' message - Identification of FLOW

ARROW when probing.
-879
INSULATION SYMBOL
`Probing Action' message - Identification of

INSULATION SYMBOL when probing.
-880
MESSAGE
`Probing Action' message - Identification of

MESSAGE when probing.
-881
Drawing Identifier deleted
`Probing Action' message - Identification of Drawing

Identifier deleted.
-882
Default Start
`Probing Action' message - Identification of Default

Start positioned.
-883
Pipeline Start
In Probing - Indication of default pipeline start point.
-884
Default Bypass Closure
In Probing - Indication of default bypass closure

point.
-886
Bypass Closure
`Probing Action' message - Redefined bypass

closure point.
-887
Pipe Support added
`Probing Action' message - Pipe support added.
-888
Pipe Support deleted
`Probing Action' message - Pipe support deleted.
-889
Properties Changed
`Probing Action' message - Category change for

gaskets and bolts.
-890
Coupling Added
`Probing Action' message - Label showing where a

coupling has been added.
-891
Coupling Deleted
`Probing Action' message - Label showing where an

existing coupling has been removed.
-892
Pipe Support Changed
`Probing Action' message - Label showing where an

existing pipe support has been changed.
Reference Plane System

The following ATexts are used to output the relative directions associated with reference planes.
^ is substituted with the reference plane name.
? is substituted with the distance from the reference plane.
-398
VOL ?
Default is blank. Controls the output of sub-volume names at

co-ordinate positions on the isometric.
-443
^+?
Used for positive relative position in E/W plane.
-444
^-?
Used for negative relative position in E/W plane.
-445
^+?
Used for positive relative position in N/S plane.
-446
^-?
Used for negative relative position in N/S plane.
-447
^+?
Used for positive relative position in U/D plane.
-448
^-?
Used for negative relative position in U/D plane.
-449
^+?
Set to blank. Only outputs the relative position.
Specify Alternative Texts

78.
79.
80.
81.
Add a definition to the collection (see "Add an item to a collection" on page 171).
Double-click the ISOGENTextID property to display a list of all available ATexts.
In the list, select the AText you want to use.
Click the AlternateText box to place the cursor and type the new Alternate Text to replace
the text shown in the DefaultText box.
For a complete list of available ATexts and their default values. see Grouping of AText
Listings (on page 497).
See Also
AlternateText (on page 174)
DefaultText (on page 174)
ISOGENTextID (on page 174)
523
524
APPENDIX C
Appendix: Automated Selection of Detail

Sketches Based on Component Rotation
This appendix describes a method of automating the selection of a detail sketch based on
component rotation, such as an olet with respect to the header pipe, to show fabrication
information from a library of possible sketches. There are several aspects to this problem:
The convention used to calculate the angle, which must be consistently applied under all
piping configurations
The convention used to represent the angle on the detail sketch, which must be consistent
with the calculation method with respect to the axis from which rotation is measured and the
direction of rotation
The pipework orientations to which the automated sketch selection should apply, that is,
pipework can be vertical, horizontal, sloped and non-orthogonal or skewed.
Conventions used in the calculation of rotation angle

The convention used follows that of a right-hand coordinate system as depicted in the illustration
below.
The direction of the rotation about each axis is as follows:

Rotation about X (Rx) rotates the y-axis towards the z-axis. The rotation angle is measured
clockwise from the UP axis.
Rotation about Y (Ry) rotates the z-axis towards the x-axis. The rotation angle is measured
clockwise from the UP axis.
Rotation about Z (Rz) rotates the x-axis towards the y-axis. The rotation angle is measured
counter-clockwise from EAST (0-degrees).
525
Appendix: Automated Selection of Detail Sketches Based on Component Rotation

In each case, the view direction of a 2D section view through the pipe at the point where there is
a branch (support, valve operator, and so forth) is along the pipe in the direction of the axis (E,N
or U).
In the following example, the branch of tee is pointing EAST and has a 0-degree rotation.
Rotating the branch by 90-degrees about the UP/DOWN axis produces the following results:
526

In the next example, the pipe is running N-S, and the tee is inserted at 0-degrees (UP).
After rotating by 90-degrees about the N/S axis, the tee appears as shown in the illustration
below.
527
Conventions to be used in preparation of detail

sketches
View directions for sections look along a positive horizontal direction, that is, toward N or E. The
Y-axis for a horizontal section is always UP. The X-axis is orthogonal to UP, and the positive
pipe direction is E for a N/S header and S for an E/W header.
Because it is much more conventional to look DOWN on sections through vertical pipe, the view
direction for these sections is reversed, or along the negative direction. This has the advantage
that rotation will be clockwise and not counter-clockwise. The Y-axis for a vertical section is E,
and the X-axis is S.
The sketch below is a section through the header pipe showing the angle of rotation measured
clockwise from the reference axis--0 is at the top and 90-degrees of rotation is shown on the
right-hand side. A family of eight sketches is sufficient to show all possible orientations of a
branch or olet (at 0, 1-89, 90, 91-179, 180, 181-269,270, 271-359 degrees).
Applying the conventions

Orthogonal pipe (aligned with axis)
528
In a pipe running N-S, the view direction for a section sketch is NORTH, with UP being
0-degrees.
In a pipe running E-W, the view direction for a section sketch is EAST, with UP being
0-degrees.
In a pipe running U-D, the view direction is UP, with EAST being the 0-degree point.

Horizontal pipe (2D skew and falling / sloped lines)
Angle is measured clockwise from the UP axis looking along the pipe toward NORTH or EAST:
This convention is also applied for small falls / slopes in horizontal lines. There is still a clear
understanding of the U/D axis in a sloped line, even though in reality it is rotated by a small
amount from vertical.
General nonorthogonal pipe

It is mathematically possible to compute the angle of rotation of a component in a general case,
where the pipeline is running at some arbitrary angle. However, it is extremely difficult to
interpret what the "rotation" angle means and difficult to see how it would be helpful to a
fabricator.
These situations are probably best left to manual annotation and selection of sketch with
appropriate fabrication details.
529
530
Index
<
<Style Name>.xml 34
2
-201 498
-202 498
-203 498
-204 498
-205 498
-206 498
-207 498
-208 498
-209 498
-210 498
-211 498
-212 498
-213 498
-214 498
-215 498
-216 498
-217 498
-218 498
-219 498
-220 498
-221 498
-222 498
-223 498
-224 498
-225 498
-226 498
-227 498
-228 498
-229 498
-230 498
-231 498
-232 498
-233 498
-236 498
-237 498
-238 498
-239 498
-240 498
-241 498
-242 498
-243 498
-244 498
-245 498
-246 498
-247 498
-248 498
-249 498
-250 513
-251 513
-252 513
-253 513
-254 513
-255 513
-256 513
-257 513
-258 513
-259 513
-260 513
-261 513
-262 513
-263 513
-264 513
-265 513
-266 513
-267 513
-268 513
-269 513
-270 513
-271 513
-272 513
-274 507
-275 498
-276 498
-277 498
-278 498
-279 498
-280 498
-281 498
-282 498
-283 498
-284 498
-285 498
-286 498
-287 498
-288 498
-289 513
-290 513
-291 513
-292 513
-293 513
-294 513
-295 513
531
Index
-296 513
-297 513
-298 498
-299 519
3
-300 507
-301 507
-302 507
-303 507
-304 507
-305 507
-306 507
-307 507
-308 507
-309 507
-310 507
-311 507
-312 507
-313 507
-314 507
-315 507
-316 507
-317 515
-318 515
-319 507
-320 507
-321 507
-322 507
-323 507
-324 507
-325 507
-326 507
-327 507
-328 507
-329 507
-330 507
-331 507
-332 516
-333 516
-334 507
-335 507
-336 516
-337 498
-338 498
-339 507
-340 507
-341 507
-342 507
-343 507
-344 507
-345 507
-346 498
532
-347 507
-348 507
-349 498
-350 498
-351 507
-352 507
-353 507
-354 507
-355 507
-356 498, 507
-357 498, 507
-358 498, 507
-359 507
-360 515
-361 515
-362 498, 507
-363 507
-364 507
-365 507
-366 507
-367 507
-368 507
-369 507
-370 507
-371 507
-372 507
-373 507
-374 507
-375 507
-376 507
-377 507
-378 507
-379 507
-380 507
-381 507
-382 507
-383 507
-384 498, 507
4
-400 515
-401 515
-402 515
-403 515
-404 515
-405 515
-406 515
-407 515
-408 515
-409 515
-410 515
-411 515
-412 516
Index
-413 516
-414 516
-415 516
-416 516
-417 516
-418 516
-419 516
-420 516
-421 516
-422 516
-423 516
-450 498
-451 498
-452 498
-453 519
-454 498
-455 498
-456 498
-457 498
-460 498
-461 498
-462 498
-463 498
-464 498
-465 498
-466 498
-467 498
-468 498
-471 498
-472 507
-473 507
-474 507
-475 498
-476 498
-481 518
-482 518
-483 518
-484 518
-485 518
-486 518
-487 518
-488 518
-489 518
-490 518
-491 518
-492 518
-493 518
-494 518
-495 518
-496 518
-497 518
-498 498
-499 498
5
-500 507
-501 498
-502 498
-503 507
-504 516
-507 516
-508 516
-510 516
-511 516
-512 498
-513 516
-514 507
-515 507
-516 516
-517 516
-518 516
-519 516
-520 516
-521 516
-522 516
-523 516
-524 516
-525 516
-526 516
-527 516
-528 516
-529 516
-530 516
-531 516
-532 516
-533 498
-534 498
-535 498
-536 498
-537 507
-538 507
-539 498
-540 507
-541 498
-542 498
-543 498
-544 498
-545 498
A
AccessRights 132
AccumulatedPipeDesc 365
AccumulatedPipePosition 365
AccumulatedPipeQuantity 365
Accumulation 292
ActiveList 347, 390, 403
533
Index
ActiveSection 362
Add a new attribute 96
Add a Report Page (Reports Wizard) 84
Add a report to a style 83
Add a row 172
Add an item to a collection 171
Add the barcode font to an AutoCAD
backing sheet 158
Add/Remove Attributes Dialog Box 69
AdditionalAllowanceFormat 205
AdditionalEnclosureStyle 246
AdditionalWeldEnclosure 248
AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces 248
AddRoundOff 205
AllowOverflowDrawings 407
AlternateText 174
Alternative Text 495
Alternative Text Object 174
AlternativeTexts ATexts Collection 174
AngleAccuracy 244
AngleStyle 244
AngleType 245
AppCount 130
Append 385, 400, 412, 419, 462, 482
Appendix
Automated Selection of Detail Sketches
Based on Component Rotation 525
Isometric Drawing Style Objects 167
AppendStandardExts 186
Application 102
AppliesTo 201
AppList 129
Applying the conventions 528
ASCII-SYMBOLS 423
AssemblyIDSequencing 248
Attribute Dialog Box 108
AttributeName 324, 332, 339, 368, 383,
388, 393, 398, 401, 411, 414, 454, 467,
478, 481, 483, 485, 491
Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Tool) 68
Attributes Tab (Project Defaults Dialog Box)
102
AutoDrawingSplit 186
B
Backup Isometric Projects 122
Backup Isometric Style Settings 144
Backup Project Dialog Box 123
Backup Style Dialog Box 144
BarCode 336, 339, 485
Basic Setup Page (Drawing Setup Tool)
52
BendRadius 249
534
BendRepresentation 249
Bends 159
BINARY-SYMBOLS 424
Bolt Attributes 107
BoltAccumulation 347
BoltDiameterUnits 347
BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE 424
BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT 431
BoltLengthUnits 348
Bolts 464
BottomMargin 327
BranchBoreLimit 206
BranchCptLimit 206
Build Expression Dialog Box 109
ByPass 473
C
CanExport 151
CanWrite 151
Category 202, 324
CategoryHeadingX 364
CategoryUnderline 364
CentrelineLengths 348
Change settings for a single weld type 70
Change settings for all weld types 71
ChangeStyleList 132
CharHeight 335, 339, 485
CharWidth 336, 340, 486
ClampWelds 392
Collections 170
Color 340, 446
Colour 202, 297, 337, 340, 446, 486
ColumnOffset 377
ColumnsNumber 337, 340, 486
Comment 173, 368, 384, 388, 394, 398,
402, 411, 415, 454, 479, 483, 492
COMPIPE Material Control Links 519
Component Attributes 106
ComponentInfo 473
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE 424
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE
Section 433
COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTIO
N Section 436
ComponentLegLength 249
ComponentsWithNoItemCodesInPCF 348
ComputeNozzleAxis 250
Configuration Files 30
Configure a Detail Sketch 92
Connect to a network isometric project
120
Connect to an isometric directory 114
ConnectionIDCategory 250
Index
Content 368, 407, 474
Context 467
ContinuationGraphicsOnSpoolIsos 187
ContinuousDown 489
Conventions to be used in preparation of
detail sketches 528
Conventions used in the calculation of
rotation angle 525
Coordinates Page (Dimensioning Wizard)
81
CoordOutputBends 207
CoordOutputBranches 207
CoordOutputHTCpts 207
CoordStyle 472
CoordStyleAtLocationPts 471
CoordSupports 208
CoordType 208
Copy a row 172
Copy and paste an isometric directory 114
Copy and paste an isometric drawing style
139
Copy and paste an isometric project 121
Count 174, 201, 289, 290, 291, 324, 331,
338, 367, 383, 387, 388, 393, 397, 401,
410, 414, 422, 451, 453, 460, 463, 475,
478, 480, 482, 484, 487, 490
CptAttributesEnclStyle 246
CptTagEnclStyle 250
CptTagsStyle 251
Create a backup of an isometric drawing
style 144
Create a backup of an isometric project
122
Create a new isometric directory 113
Create a new isometric drawing style 136
Create a new isometric project 118
Create a user template 33
Create an attribute expression 98
CreateTutorial_<Application Name>.xml
31
CurvedPipeAngleStyle 289
CurvedPipeDimensioning 208
CurvedPipeRadiusStyle 289
CurveThreshold 251
CustomHeight 329
Customize report settings 44
CustomWidth 329
Cut List Page (Drawing Setup Tool) 65
CutList Object 403
CutList.FixedLayout Object 407
CutList.SummaryFile Object 412
CutList.SummaryFile TextColumns
Collection 414
CutList.UserDefined Object 407

CutList.UserDefined XYColumns Collection
410
CutPieceEnclosureStyle 251
CutPieceID 404
CutPieceNoLength 251
CutPieceSequence 404
D
DataFile 455
DataOffsetX 378
DataOffsetY 378
DateFormat 187
DateSource 187
DDFLines 417
DecimalInchOutput 404
Default 464
DefaultColour 289
DefaultDescriptionWidth 363, 380
DefaultText 174
Define a dynamic font for isometric drawing
generation 154
Define drawing frame attributes 48
Define drawing margins and report layout
42
Define project access rights 119
Delete a row 172
Delete an attribute 98
Delete an isometric directory 114
Delete an isometric drawing style 141
Delete an isometric project 121
Delimiter 385, 400, 413, 462, 478, 482,
492
Detail Panel 26
Detail Sketch Manager 86
DiagnosticLevel 188
Dimension Format Page (Dimensioning
Wizard) 74
Dimensioning Style Page (Dimensioning
Wizard) 77
Dimensioning Wizard 74
Direction 337, 340, 486
Disconnect from an isometric directory
115
DisconnectionMessage 188
Distance 297
DoubleUnits 208
Drawing Areas Page (Drawing Setup Tool)
54
Drawing Object 175
Drawing Preview Dialog Box 143
Drawing Setup Tool 37
Drawing.Content Object 175
535
Index
Drawing.Controls Object 185
Drawing.Definitions Definitions Collection
201
Drawing.Definitions Object 200
Drawing.Dimensions Object 204
Drawing.DynamicFonts Fonts Collection
290
Drawing.DynamicFonts Object 290
Drawing.EndConnections EndConnections
Collection 292
Drawing.EndConnections Object 291
Drawing.Format Object 242
Drawing.Layers Layers Collection 289
Drawing.Layers Object 289
Drawing.Revisions Object 297
Drawing.Welds Object 299
Drawing.Welds WeldEnclosures Collection
324
Drawing.Welds WeldEnclosures Object
323
DrawingColour 363, 395
DrawingFrame Object 327
DrawingFrame.Attributes DFAttributes
Collection 331
DrawingFrame.Attributes Object 331
DrawingFrame.SymbolTable Object 341
DrawingFrame.TableAttributes
DFTableAttributes Collection 338
DrawingFrame.TableAttributes Object 338
DrawingLayer 342, 363, 374, 377, 395,
408, 490
DrawingRotationAngle 188
DrawingSize 189
DrawingsPerFile 193
Drg1of1OnSingleIsos 348
DScale 203
DXFUnits 329
E
Edit an attribute 97
ElbowConversion 131
ElbowRadius 252
ElbowRepresentation 252
Elbows 159
Elevations/Vertical Dimensions Page
(Dimensioning Wizard) 80
Enable an isometric project 120
Enable Project Dialog Box 122
Enabled 297, 375, 385, 399, 412, 416,
419, 420, 453, 457, 458, 461, 466, 468,
470, 473, 477, 480, 481, 488, 492
EnclErec 292
EnclFab 293
536
EnclOffsh 294
Enclosure 294
EnclosureType 298, 324, 481
EndProgram 418
ErectAccumulation 349
ErectPrefix 306
ErectSupportPrefix 315
ErectSupportWeldEnclosure 315
ErectSupportWeldStartNo 315
ErectSuppWeldEnclSize 316
ErectWeldEnclosure 306
ErectWeldEnclSize 308
ErectWeldStartNo 306
Examples 497
Exploring the I-Configure Interface 17
Export an isometric drawing style fragment
147
Export isometric drawing style settings
147
ExportBehaviour 150
ExtraRPadWelds 390
F
FabAccumulation 349
FabPrefix 302
FabricationAssemblyIDEnclosure 252
FabSupportPrefix 312
FabSupportWeldEnclosure 312
FabSupportWeldStartNo 312
FabSuppWeldEnclSize 314
FabWeldEnclosure 303
FabWeldEnclSize 305
FabWeldsInPipe 209
FabWeldStartNo 302
FallCutOff 253
FallRepresentation 253
FDF Sections 431
File Types 423
FileFormat 385, 400, 413, 446, 462, 477,
482, 492
FilePath 423, 476
FileText 423, 477
FileType 422, 476
FillColour 298
Find Dialog Box 24
Finish Page (Dimensioning Wizard) 82
Finish Page (Reports Wizard) 85
Finish Page (Welding Wizard) 73
Fittings 464
FixedPipeAccumulation 349
FlangeRotationStyle 254
Flanges 464
Flat Spools and Flange Rotation 518
Index
FlatSpoolOrientation 190
FlatSpoolUpArrow 190
FlowArrowScale 254
Font 336, 339, 485
FontCorrectionFactor 291
FontMicrostationNumber 291
FontMultibyteWidth 291
FontName 291
FontNumber 291
Fonts in Isometric Drawings 153
FontStyleName 291
ForceAllWeldsAsSpecial 325
ForDryPipe 420
Format 210, 295
ForWetPipe 421
FourDigitYear 190
FtInTolerance 215
FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE 425
G
Gasket Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning
Wizard) 79
GasketAccumulation 349
GasketDimPrecision 217
Gaskets 215, 464
GeneralPrefix 301
GeneralWeldStartNo 301
Getting Started 29
GhostGapDimension 255
Group 295, 466
GroupBy 463
GroupErec 295
GroupFab 295
GroupHeadingX 364
Grouping of AText Listings 498
GroupOffsh 296
GroupUnderline 364
H
HeaderLines 380, 386, 393, 400, 413,
453, 462, 478, 482
HeaderOffsetX 376
HeaderOffsetY 376
HeatTracingOptions 191
HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE 426
Height 452
HorizontalDirection 408
HorizontalSpacing 342, 396, 408
I
I-Configure 15
I-Configure Setup Tools and Wizards 37

ID 452
IdentifierSuffix 489
IdfgenConnectionTolerance 218
IDF-REVISIONS Section 437
IgnoreUserSplitPoints 191
ImperialFormat 217
ImpliedWelds 301
Import a PipMan project 125
Import a Spoolgen 4 project 125
Import an I-Configure-based project 125
Import an isometric drawing style fragment
147
Import an isometric project from backup
126
Import and Export Style Settings 145
Import isometric drawing style settings from
backup 146
Import isometric drawing style settings from
file 146
Import Isometric Projects 124
Import PipeHeader attributes 98
Import Project Dialog Box 127
Import Project from Backup Dialog Box
127
Import Style Dialog Box 147
Import Style from Backup Dialog Box 148
Inches 218
IncludeAdditionalMaterial 403
IncludeBolts 386
IndividualEntries 386
InsertBlankLines 358, 381
InstIDEnclosureSize 255
InstIDEnclosureStyle 256
InstIdentification 256
Instruments 465
InsulationStyle 256
INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE 427
INSULTATION-WEIGHT-FILE Section
437
ISKEYText 461
IsoDirectoryName 133
IsoDirList.xml 31
ISOGENTextID 174
Isometric Directories 113
Isometric Directory Object Properties 115
Isometric Drawing Area 498
Isometric Drawing Style Common Tasks
136
Isometric Drawing Style Object Properties
149
Isometric Drawing Styles 135
Isometric Project Common Tasks 118
537
Index
Isometric Project Object Properties 128
Isometric Projects 117
IsometricOutputEnabled 456
IsometricText 218
IsometricType 191
IsoScale 191
ItemCodeLength 350
J
JacketDimensioning 219
Justification 336, 340, 384, 388, 393, 401,
414, 454, 479, 483, 486, 491
L
LabelLayer 446
LabelType 446
LabelX 447, 452
LabelY 447, 452
Layer 203, 298, 336, 340, 486
LayerColour 290
LayerNumber 290
Layout 343, 358, 381, 408
LeftMargin 328
LengthToBranchPoint 405
LengthToCL 404
Line Summary Area 515
LinearQuantityStyle 350
LinearWeightDenominator 192
LinesNumber 337, 340, 487
LineSpacing 359, 381
LineStyle 203
LineStyleTable 200
ListDown 369, 371, 395
LocationPtStyle 471
LockedBy 133
LowerBore 201
M
Material Attributes 108
Material List Page (Drawing Setup Tool)
58
MaterialFile 455
MaterialHeadings 386
MaterialList Object 346
MaterialList.FixedLayout Object 358
MaterialList.SummaryFile Object 384
MaterialList.SummaryFile TextColumns
Collection 387
MaterialList.Transfers MLTransfers
Collection 388
MaterialList.Transfers Object 388
538
MaterialList.UserDefined Object 361

MaterialList.UserDefined OneSection
Object 368
MaterialList.UserDefined RemarksBox
Object 373
MaterialList.UserDefined SpoolTable Object
375
MaterialList.UserDefined ThreeSection
Object 371
MaterialList.UserDefined TwoSection
Object 369
MaterialList.UserDefined XYColumns
Collection 367
MaterialList.VariableLayout Object 380
MaterialList.VariableLayout TextColumns
Collection 383
MaterialListOverflow 350
MaterialListSplitting 351
MaterialsBySpool 350
MatList 474
MaxCharacters 374
MaxChars 368, 384, 388, 394, 398, 402,
411, 414, 454, 466, 479, 483, 492
MaxCloudArc 299
MaxCols 395
MaxColumns 343, 409
MaxEntries 369, 374, 395, 490
MaxRows 343, 395, 409
MessageArrowHeads 302
MessageCircleEnclosure 257
MessageDiamondEnclosure 257
MessagePointedEnclosure 258
MessageRoundEnclosure 259
MessageSquareEnclosure 259
MessageTriangleEnclosure 260
MetresCoordinates 219
MetresDimensions 219
MinAngleOffset 192
MinCloudArc 299
MinOffset 220
MISC-DEFINITIONS Section 438
Miscellaneous 465
MLType 359, 363, 381
Move down a row 173
Move up a row 173
MultiPortConnections 261
N
Name 129, 150, 290
New Attribute Dialog Box 109
New Project Dialog Box 121
New Style Dialog Box 142
NewGroup 389
Index
NoColumns 377
NominalSize 220
NonLinearValves 221
NonSpecialPosition 326
NoOfDrawings 192
NorthArrowBox 261
NorthDirection 193
NoteFormat 450
NoteHeight 451
NotePosition 451
NoteWidth 451
NozzleIDEnclosure 456
NozzleIdentifier 456
O
Offset 368, 398, 411
OffshoreAccumulation 351
OffshoreAllowance 405
OffshoreAssemblyIDEnclosure 261
OffshorePrefix 309
OffshoreSupportPrefix 317
OffshoreSupportWeldEnclosure 317
OffshoreSupportWeldStartNo 317
OffshoreSuppWeldEnclSize 319
OffshoreWeldEnclosure 309
OffshoreWeldEnclSize 311
OffshoreWeldStartNo 309
OletBranchOrientationMessage 262
OnShoreAllowance 405
Options 36, 151
OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE 427
OrientationFrom 262
Origin 296
Output a bar code on the isometric drawing
157
OutputCutPieces 462
OutputFormat 193
OutputLinesTube 379
Overall 221
Overall Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning
Wizard) 77
OverallAcrossFabItemsOnly 222
OverflowDrawingID 351
Overview Panel 25
OverwritePlotFile 194
P
PartNoEnclosureStyle 263
PartNoEnclSize 264
PartNoLength 265
PartNos 455
PartNoSpaces 265
PartNoVisible 265
Path 129, 150, 385, 399, 412, 419, 446,
453, 458, 462, 468, 471, 473, 477, 480,
481, 488, 492
PerPipeLine 421
Pipe 465
PipeLength 343
Pipeline Attributes 104
PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE 428
PipeLineScale 194
PipeLineSplitting 194
PipeLineSplittingInTube 195
PipeNameInContMessages 195
PipeNameStyle 195
PipesThroughPenetrationPlates 223
PlotFileLength 196
PlotFilePath 196
Plotted Material and Cut Pipe List Heading
Texts 507
PlotUniquePtNoTable 489
PODGraphicsProgram 418
PODGraphicsTimeout 418
PositionFix 450
PostScriptSize 196
Preface 11
Prefix 296
PrefixErec 296
PrefixFab 296
PrefixOffsh 296
Preview the drawing 141
Printed Material List 516
PrintedOutputPageLen 197
Project Access Rights Dialog Box 122
Project Defaults and Attributes 95
Project Defaults Dialog Box 102
Project Defaults Tab (Project Defaults
Dialog Box) 102
Project View Panel 20
Project_Data.xml 31
ProjectConfig_<Application Name>.xml 31
ProjectList.xml 34
PROJECT-MATERIAL-DATA 428
ProjectMaterialDataXML 133
PROJECT-MATERIAL-MANAGER 429
ProjectMaterialManagerXML 133
ProjectName 150
PROJECT-PIPELINE 429
ProjectPipeline.xml 34
ProjectXML 132
Properties Panel 21
R
RecordID 389
539
Index
RecordLength 463
Reference Plane System 523
ReferenceIDLocation 480
ReferenceNameStyle 288
REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION 429
REMARKS 431
Remove a report from a style 84
Remove an item from a collection 172
Remove weld types 71
Report Definition Page (Reports Wizard)
84
ReportContents 420
Reports Wizard 83
ReservedAreaDrawing 329
ReservedAreaDrawingTop 330
ReservedAreaMatList 330
RightMargin 328
RightSide 359, 382
RotationAngle 337, 340, 486
Row Manipulation 172
S
Sample Files 35
Save an isometric drawing style 141
Search by file section 23
Search by option switch 22
Search by property 22
Section1Content 369, 372
Section1Down 370
Section1MaxEntries 370, 372
Section2Content 370, 372
Section2Down 370
Section2MaxEntries 370, 372
Section2YOffset 371, 372
Section3Content 373
Section3MaxEntries 373
Section3YOffset 373
Select a font for isometric drawing output
154
Select an isometric drawing style 137
Select Weld Types Page (Welding Wizard)
72
SeparatePulledBend 223
SeparateSpoolUnion 266
Set up an isometric project on a network
server 119
SetPipeLineDisconnected 197
SheetNumberFormat 352
ShopWeldAllowance 405
Show Welds and Weld Numbering Page
(Welding Wizard) 72
ShowAccumulatedPipeData 365
ShowBIP 176
540
ShowCategoryHeadings 365
ShowClosedEnd 176
ShowContAtSplitPoint 177
ShowCoordAtRefItem 176
ShowCoordAtSplitPts 177
ShowCptFlowArrows 178
ShowDividingLines 359, 382
ShowDrainPosition 178
ShowEnclosure 409
ShowEquipConn 178
ShowErectSupportWeldNos 314
ShowErectSupportWeldPrefix 315
ShowErectWeldNos 305
ShowErectWeldPrefix 305
ShowFabSupportWeldNos 311
ShowFabSupportWeldPrefix 311
ShowFabWeldNos 301
ShowFabWeldPrefix 302
ShowFlangeRotation 178
ShowFlowArrows 179
ShowGaskets 179
ShowGroupHeadings 364
ShowHeaders 386, 400, 413
ShowInsulationWeight 421
ShowIsogenVer 197
ShowIsometricSpindles 180
ShowItemDescriptions 360
ShowMiscPosition 181
ShowNozzleCoords 457
ShowNozzleNominalSize 456
ShowNozzles 181
ShowNSUnitsInReports 182
ShowNSUnitsOnDrg 181
ShowOffshoreSupportWeldNos 317
ShowOffshoreSupportWeldPrefix 317
ShowOffshoreWeldNos 309
ShowOffshoreWeldPrefix 309
ShowOpenEnd 182
ShowOperationsBox 392
ShowPipeLineCont 183
ShowReferenceDims 183
ShowRemarks 363
ShowRPads 183
ShowSiteAssemblyTable 183
ShowSupports 184
ShowTapBrnchCoords 185
ShowTitles 387, 401, 413, 478, 482, 493
ShowVentPosition 185
ShowWeldNumbers 300
ShowWelds 300
ShowWetWeight 421
SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure 266
SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize 268
Index
SiteAssemblyIDs 268
SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing 268
SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT 439
SiteWeldsNotAssignedToSpools 269
SketchHeight 448
SketchPosition 449
SketchWidth 449
SkewAngleStyle 276
SkewDimStandout 269
SkewDimStyle 269
SkewHatchCptGap 270
SkewHatchCutOff 270
SkewHatchDimText 271
SkewHatching 271
SkewHatchPipeGap 272
SkewHatchSpacing 272
SkewInVerticalBranch 273
SkewMinCpts 274
SkewMixed 274
SkewOverall 275
SkewRepresentation 275
SkewTriangleRightAngleIndication 276
SKEY 296, 389
SlipOnFlangeWelds 391
SmallxLargeNS 352
Source 129
SpecBrkEnclosure 276
SpecBrkRepresentation 277
SpecialPosition 326
SpecialSiteWeldCategory 320
SpecialStatusWeldIdentifiers 323
Specification Change Indication 513
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY 431
SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE Section 438
Specify Alternative Texts 523
Specify the backing sheet 42
SplitPoints 474
Spool Attributes 107
SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE 441
SpoolDrawingID 281
SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display
519
SpoolID 474
SpoolIDAllocation 277
SpoolIDContinuation 277
SpoolIDEnclosure 278
SpoolIDEnclosureStyle 280
SpoolIDLength 281
SpoolIDSize 280
SpoolIDType 282
SpoolMatchesPipe 320
SpoolPrefix 282
SpoolsMatchFull 352
StandOutComposite 223
StandOutOverall 225
StandOutVertical 225
Start 384, 388, 394, 402, 414, 454, 466,
479, 483, 491
StartDrawingNumber 197
StartPoint 475
StartProgram 417
StartTimeout 418
StartX 343, 363, 374, 395, 409, 489
StartY 343, 364, 374, 396, 409, 489
Status Bar 27
StopOnError 418
StyleState 150
StyleType 150
SuppDimAsDim 225
SuppDimToCentre 226
SuppFormat 227
Supplementary Object 415
Supplementary.AdditionalData Object 416
Supplementary.AuxiliaryPrograms Object
417
Supplementary.BendingReport Object 419
Supplementary.CentreOfGravity Object
420
Supplementary.DataFiles ISOGENFiles
Collection 422
Supplementary.DataFiles Object 422
Supplementary.DetailSketches
LocalSketches LocalSketch Collection
452
Supplementary.DetailSketches
LocalSketches Object 451
Supplementary.DetailSketches Object 445
Supplementary.DwgInfoFile Object 453
Supplementary.DwgInfoFile TextColumns
Collection 454
Supplementary.EquipmentTrim Object 455
Supplementary.Fonts Object 457
Supplementary.HeatTreatment Object 458
Supplementary.InstrumentSKEYS
InstrumentSKEYs Collection 461
Supplementary.InstrumentSKEYS Object
460
Supplementary.NeutralFile
NeutralFileColumns Collection 466
Supplementary.NeutralFile Object 461
Supplementary.NeutralFile Output Object
463
Supplementary.PipeLineAtts Object 467
Supplementary.PrintedMaterialList Object
492
541
Index
Supplementary.ReferencePlanes Object
470
Supplementary.RepeatFile Object 473
Supplementary.ReportFiles ISOGENFiles
Collection 475
Supplementary.ReportFiles Object 475
Supplementary.SiteWeldFile Object 477
Supplementary.SiteWeldFile TextColumns
Collection 478
Supplementary.SpoolAttributes Object 480
Supplementary.SpoolAttributes
SpoolAttEnclosure Collection 481
Supplementary.SpoolInformation Object
481
Supplementary.SpoolInformation
TextColumns Collection 483
Supplementary.TableAttributes
DFTableAttributes Collection 484
Supplementary.TableAttributes Object 484
Supplementary.TitleTexts Object 487
Supplementary.TitleTexts TitleTexts
Collection 487
Supplementary.Traceability Object 488
Supplementary.Traceability TextColumns
Collection 491
SuppOptions 229
SupportAdditionsWeight 198
SupportIdentification 283
Supports 465
SupportsWithMatchingNamesAccumulation
352
SupportTagEnclStyle 283
SupportWeldNumbers 320
SupportWeldSeq 320
SupportWeldTypeNos 321
SuppStandOut 229
SymbolList 344
SymbolScale 343
SymbolSelect 344
SystemMaterialDataXML 133
SystemMaterialManagerXML 133
SystemXML 132
T
TableLayout 397
TableOverflow 377, 490
TackWeldNumbers 392
TapBranchDimension 231
TapBranchInlineScale 284
TapBranchPipeScale 284
TapBranchSuppression 284
TapOnCpt 230
TapOnPipe 230
542
TapOnPipeFittings 233
Techniques 153
TeeCrossNS 285
TeedBendBranchDimension 233
TemplateFile 330
TemplateFormat 330
TestIso 285
Text 458, 469
TextFont 286, 344, 353, 366, 396, 409,
450
TextHeight 344, 366, 374, 377, 396, 409,
450, 453, 490
TextHeightMultiple 379
TextOffsetX 344
TextOffsetY 344
TextSize 286, 360, 382
TextWeight 287, 337, 340, 344, 360, 366,
375, 377, 383, 396, 409, 450, 486
TextWidth 287, 361, 383
TextWidthFactor 345, 366, 396, 410
ThicknessActual 203
ThicknessLogical 203
Title Block/Drawing Frame 513
TitleblockPos 361
TitleBlockVisible 361
TitleText 387, 401, 413, 478, 482, 493
Toolbar 19
TopMargin 328
TracingStyle 287
TrueScale 198
TruncationLength 337, 340, 486
TText 488
Tutorial Project 30
TypeSequenceNumbers 321
U
UniqueDelimiter 366, 383, 387
UniqueNosBolts 491
UniqueNosGaskets 491
UniquePartNumber 489
Units 198
Units Formatting Page (Dimensioning
Wizard) 82
UNITS-DEFINITION Section 441
Update the style 49
UpperBore 202
USAStyle 233
UseI01TypeExts 199
UserDefined 387, 412
UserTextSize 286, 360, 382
UseTangentData 406
UseWeldGapData 406
Using Alternative Text 495
Index
V
ValveBW 234
ValveCP 235
ValveFL 236
ValveHY 236
ValveLimit 237
ValvePL 238
Valves 465
ValveSC 239
ValveSW 239
VerticalDirection 410
VerticalSpacing 345, 366, 375, 397, 410,
490
VertOption 240
View ISOGEN controls 137
View the results 50
Visible 175, 331, 342, 353, 391, 406
W
WastageArea1 353
WastageArea2 353
WastageArea3 354
WastageArea4 354
WastageArea5 355
WastageArea6 355
WastageArea7 356
WastageArea8 356
WastageArea9 357
WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE Section
442
WeightOutput 199
WeightsStyle 357
Weld Attributes 106
Weld Box Summary 516
Weld Constructions 162
Weld List Page (Drawing Setup Tool) 62
Weld Lists 159
Weld Logic 160
Weld Type Settings Page (Welding Wizard)
72
WeldAccumulation 357
WeldDiameterCalculationMethod 323
WeldDimensionAccuracy 241
WeldDimensioning 241
WeldGaps 130
Welding Wizard 70
WeldList Object 390
WeldList.FixedLayout Object 392
WeldList.SummaryFile Object 399
WeldList.SummaryFile TextColumns
Collection 401
WeldList.UserDefined Object 394
WeldList.UserDefined XYColumns
Collection 397
WeldList.VariableLayout Object 393
WeldList.VariableLayout TextColumns
Collection 393
WeldNos 475
WeldNumberLength 322
WeldNumbers 301
WeldNumberSequence 321
WeldNumberSize 321
WeldNumberType 322
Welds 465
WeldTypeIdentifiers 323
WeldTypes 322
What's New In I-Configure 13
Width 327, 452
X
Xpos 336, 339, 485
XSpacing 337, 340, 487
Y
Ypos 336, 339, 485
YSpacing 337, 341, 487
YTypeWelds 391
543

SPI ConfigureUsersGuide

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

SPI ConfigureUsersGuide

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

I-Configure

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Warranties and Liabilities

I-Configure User's Guide

I-Configure User's Guide

I-Configure User's Guide

I-Configure User's Guide

I-Configure User's Guide

I-Configure User's Guide

I-Configure User's Guide

I-Configure User's Guide

I-Configure User's Guide

What's New In I-Configure

I-Configure User's Guide

What's New In I-Configure

I-Configure User's Guide

and reports using ISOGEN .

I-Configure User's Guide

I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the I-Configure Interface

I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the I-Configure Interface

4 - Style Objects Window

I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the I-Configure Interface

I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the I-Configure Interface

Project View Panel

I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the I-Configure Interface

Find Dialog Box (on page 24)

Search by property (on page 21)

I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the I-Configure Interface

Search by option switch

I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the I-Configure Interface

Search by file section

I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the I-Configure Interface

Find Dialog Box

I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the I-Configure Interface

I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the I-Configure Interface

As in Windows Explorer, you can click

I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the I-Configure Interface

I-Configure User's Guide

Exploring the I-Configure Interface

I-Configure User's Guide

Convenient Style Wizards

I-Configure User's Guide

I-Configure User's Guide

I-Configure User's Guide

Using a User-Defined ProjectConfig_App.xml File

I-Configure User's Guide

Create a user template

I-Configure User's Guide

I-Configure User's Guide

Style Template File

Designed for checking the routing of the

Designed for production release. Contains

Designed for production release. Contains